ASG-TrackBird™ Reference Guide Version 3.3.1 Publication Number: TBZ0400-331 Publication Date: November 2005
The information contained herein is the confidential and proprietary information of Allen Systems Group, Inc. Unauthorized use of this information and disclosure to third parties is expressly prohibited. This technical publication may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by any means, without the express written consent of Allen Systems Group, Inc. Copyright © 2005 Allen Systems Group, Inc. All rights reserved. All names and products contained herein are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. ASG Worldwide Headquarters Naples Florida USA | asg.com |
[email protected] 1333 Third Avenue South, Naples, Florida 34102 USA Tel: 239.435.2200 Fax: 239.263.3692 Toll Free: 800.932.5536 (USA only)
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix About this Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x Publication Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi ASG Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Intelligent Support Portal (ISP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii Telephone Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii ASG Documentation/Product Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Chapter 1:
TrackBird Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Starting TrackBird Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Alias Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Access to TrackBird Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Contextual Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 10 10 11 11
Displaying Inventory Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventory Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 12 24 29 42 43
TrackBird Administration Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Collection Point Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Field Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Software Glossaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Hardware Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Glossary Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Machine Name Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Customizing the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Favorites Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Single or Multiple TrackBird Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the User Interface Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137 138 139 140 i
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Displaying the Tree Query Editor or Running a Tree Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Empty Features in Tree Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the List Query Editing Screen or Specifying a List Query. . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Form Associated with a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Log File for Manually Imported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caching Data Locally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Unknown Software Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Collection Points with Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking a TrackBird Database Element with Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redisplaying Confirmation Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2:
141 142 142 143 145 146 147 148 148 150 150 152 153 154
TrackBird IP Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Running the TrackBird IP Administration Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Starting a TrackBird IP Administration Remote Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Remote Console File Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 3:
TrackBird IP Administration Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Bar and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exiting TrackBird IP Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird IP Administration Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the TrackBird IP Administration Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157 158 158 158 160 161 162 162
Configuring TrackBird Clients via IP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servers 164 Groups 169 Collection Points 172 Configuring Collection Options 194 Component and Package Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Knowledge Base on the TrackBird Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162 162
228 229
TrackBird Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Starting TrackBird Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 TrackBird Explorer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars 234
ii
231 232 232 232 233
Contents
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Filtering TrackBird Explorer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating TrackBird Explorer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying TrackBird Explorer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing TrackBird Explorer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying TrackBird Explorer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting TrackBird Explorer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237 237 237 238 238 239
Sorting TrackBird Explorer Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Sorting TrackBird Explorer Information in Ascending Order 239 Sorting TrackBird Explorer Information in Descending Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Configuring TrackBird Explorer Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Server Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the TrackBird Client and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the TrackBird Clients in IP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the TrackBird Clients in Shared Directory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the TrackBird NT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating and Deactivating the TrackBird NT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the TrackBird NT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninstalling the TrackBird NT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the TrackBird Client Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the TrackBird Client Inventorist Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating/Deactivating the TrackBird Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninstalling the TrackBird Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the NETBIRD.CFG Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reloading all Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting all Collection Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the TrackBird Data from One or More Workstations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Network Data From One or More Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing Data Collection on One or More Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing One or more Workstations from the List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying or Hiding the Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Log as a Text File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing the Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieving TrackBird Client Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Help on How to Use TrackBird Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Version Information on the TrackBird Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4:
240 243 243 244 245 246 246 247 247 248 249 249 250 250 251 252 252 253 253 254 254 255 255 255 255 256 256
TrackBird Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Menu Bar and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Basic Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Folder, Query, Form or Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261 262 263 263 iii
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Exiting TrackBird Repository Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Displaying Help on Using TrackBird Repository Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Report for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying or Defining a Report Using ReportBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ReportBuilder Design Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Report Layout Using the Report Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264 264 265 266 266 266 270 287 289
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Displaying an Existing Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Modifying or Creating a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Displaying Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Modifying or Defining Queries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Chapter 5:
TrackBird Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rule Consequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345 345 345 346 346 346
Policy Manager User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contextual Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347 347 349 351 352
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inheritance Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
352 352 352 358 372
Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 User Interface 386 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Preferences Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Environment Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Predefined Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
388 388 388 388
Contents
Chapter 6:
TrackBird Software Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Main Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Installation Setup Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
392 392 393 395
Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Server Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Software Distribution Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Packages and Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7:
400 400 400 410
TrackBird Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Defining Software Audit Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Selecting Monitoring Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Selecting Collection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Updating the Collection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Displaying Software Audit Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Using a Query to Return TrackBird Monitoring Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Chapter 8:
TrackBird Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Entry Fields in the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Collection Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
454 454 454 454
Designing a Custom Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Type of Interface 455 Designer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the Designer Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Objects into the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Project and Testing the Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring the Interface to the Client Workstations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
455 456 460 464 472 474
Designer Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Data Access Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designer Interface Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
474 475 477 493
v
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Chapter 9:
TrackBird SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 SNMP at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 How TrackBird SNMP is Organized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Configuring the Collector Client before Inventory Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP Ranges Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
517 517 518 520 521
Saving the Collection Client Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Opening an Existing Collection Client Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Configuring the SNMP Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Selecting Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Importing a Manufacturer MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Switch Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Chapter 10: TrackBird Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Gateway Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sources/Destinations Structure Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contextual Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
535 535 535 535 536 536 536 536
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Menu 536 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Action Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
536 537 537 538 538
Global Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Temporary Tables after Database Scripts Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the TrackBird Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering which TrackBird Database Records are Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running External Processes Before\After Database Scripts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Log Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
538 539 539 540 541 541
Displaying Logged Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Database Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Adding a Database Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 vi
Contents
Selecting a Database Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Editing a Database Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Deleting a Database Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Query - Basic Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Dictionary - Basic Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a TrackBird Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an SQL Query. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Data Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
544 545 546 547 547 549 551 552
Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Destination, Row, or Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
553 554 556 558 560 562 565 567
VBScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Using VBScript in TrackBird Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Code Editor Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Gateway Script Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 1 - Mapping One Table with Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 2 - Merging Tables and Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 3 - Concatenating the Contents of Three Fields to Update a Table . . . . . . . . Example 4 - Using a Data Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 5 - Using a Temporary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
570 570 572 574 575 578
Row and Transformation Processing – the Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Moving a Row or Transformation in a Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Chapter 11: TrackBird Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583 Connecting to the TrackBird Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Customizing the Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Explorer Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 Server Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Tree Query. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 vii
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
List Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 Summary View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Disconnecting from the TrackBird Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Chapter 12: Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 UMA Service Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 TrackBird Common Information Model (CIM) Mapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Starting TrackBird CIM Mapper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 TrackBird CIM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Appendix A: Filename Extensions and File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 Filename Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Repository Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Designer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
607 607 608 608 608
File Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrackBird Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
609 609 610 611
Appendix B: NBS Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 scriptip.nbs (TrackBird IP Installation Script) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 script.nbs (TrackBird Shared Directory Configuration Script). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Appendix C: TrackBird Software Distribution Module Error Messages . . . . . . . 629 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
viii
Preface
This ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide provides information to use and administrate ASG-TrackBird (herein called TrackBird). TrackBird helps you to control and manage your IT assets.
About this Publication This publication consists of these chapters: •
Chapter 1, “TrackBird Inventory,” includes information for starting the TrackBird Server, accessing functions, displaying inventory results, using administration tools, and customizing the interface.
•
Chapter 2, “TrackBird IP Administration,” describes the tasks performed using the TrackBird IP Administration interface.
•
Chapter 3, “TrackBird Explorer,” contains instructions for starting and using TrackBird Explorer.
•
Chapter 4, “TrackBird Reporting,” comprises information regarding the optional TrackBird Reporting module that you can use with TrackBird Server.
•
Chapter 5, “TrackBird Policy,” supplies information about TrackBird Policy. TrackBird Policy is an optional module enabling an organization’s IT executives to automatically set up and define rules that comply with overall corporate policy.
•
Chapter 6, “TrackBird Software Distribution,” provides information on using and installing the TrackBird Software Distribution throughout your enterprise.
•
Chapter 7, “TrackBird Monitoring,” provides instructions for using the TrackBird Monitor. The TrackBird Monitor provides statistics on how software installed on TrackBird clients is used.
ix
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
Chapter 8, “TrackBird Designer,” describes using TrackBird Designer to secure the data collected by TrackBird. Also, it provides instructions for creating a custom interface and designer objects.
•
Chapter 9, “TrackBird SNMP,” discusses Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and how to install and use the TrackBird SNMP Collector.
•
Chapter 10, “TrackBird Gateway,” details the TrackBird Gateway. This tool provides an interface between databases in different formats such as TrackBird, Paradox, Oracle, SQL and Access.
•
Chapter 11, “TrackBird Web,” supplies information for using the TrackBird Web module.
•
Chapter 12, “Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA,” provides instructions for using ASG-UMA with TrackBird.
Related Publications The documentation library for ASG-TrackBird consists of these publications (where nn represents the product version number): •
ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide (TBD0300-nn) provides an overview of the suite and installation instructions.
Note:
To obtain a specific version of a publication, contact ASG Customer Support.
xxii
Preface
Publication Conventions ASG uses these conventions in technical publications: Convention
Represents
ALL CAPITALS
Directory, path, file, dataset, member, database, program, command, and parameter names.
Initial Capitals on Each Word
Window, field, field group, check box, button, panel (or screen), option names, and names of keys. A plus sign (+) is inserted for key combinations (e.g., Alt+Tab).
lowercase italic monospace
Information that you provide according to your particular situation. For example, you would replace filename with the actual name of the file.
Monospace
Characters you must type exactly as they are shown. Code, JCL, file listings, or command/statement syntax. Also used for denoting brief examples in a paragraph.
Vertical Separator Bar ( | ) with underline
Options available with the default value underlined (e.g., Y|N).
Underline
Denotes a cursor-selectable field or line.
ASG Customer Support ASG provides support throughout the world to resolve questions or problems regarding installation, operation, or use of our products. ASG provides all levels of support during normal business hours and emergency support during non-business hours. ASG Third-party Support. ASG provides software products that run in a number of third-party vendor environments. Support for all non-ASG products is the responsibility of the respective vendor. In the event a vendor discontinues support for a hardware and/or software product, ASG cannot be held responsible for problems arising from the use of that unsupported version.
xi
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Intelligent Support Portal (ISP) Online product support is available at: http://www.asg.com/support/support.asp via the ASG Intelligent Support Portal (ISP) at: http://isp.asg.com. This is the logon information for ISP online support: Customer ID = NNNNNNNNN Password = XXXXXXXXXX where: NNNNNNNNN is your customer ID supplied by ASG Product Distribution. XXXXXXXXXX is your unique password supplied by ASG Product Distribution. The ASG-Intelligent Support Portal User's Guide provides instructions on how to use the ISP and is located on the ASG Customer Support web page.
Telephone Support To expedite response time, have this information ready: •
Product name, version number, and release number
•
List of any fixes currently applied
•
Any alphanumeric error codes or messages written precisely as displayed
•
A description of the specific steps that immediately preceded the problem
•
Verify whether you received an ASG Service Pack or cumulative service tape for this product. It may include information to help you resolve questions regarding installation of this ASG product. The Service Pack instructions are in a text file on the distribution media included with the Service Pack. You can access the latest software corrections and Service Packs via the ISP.
•
The severity code (ASG Customer Support uses an escalated severity system to prioritize service to our clients. The severity codes and their meanings are listed in the following table.)
Severity Codes and Expected Support Response Times
xii
Severity
Meaning
Expected Support Response Time
1
Production down, critical situation
Within 30 minutes
2
Major component of product disabled
Within 2 hours
3
Problem with the product, but customer has work-around solution
Within 4 hours
4
"How-to" questions and enhancement requests Within 4 hours
Preface
The Americas Phone
Fax
E-mail
United States and Canada
800.354.3578
1.239.213.3721
[email protected]
Mexico
001.800.514.9156
1.239.213.3721
[email protected]
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA) During normal business hours, ASG recommends calling the Central Support number first (except in South Africa). Phone
Fax
E-mail
Central Support
00.800.3544.3578
44.1727.812018
[email protected]
English
44.1727.736305
44.1727.812018
[email protected]
French
33.141.028590
33.141.028589
[email protected]
German
49.89.45716.200
49.89.45716.400
[email protected]
Italian
39.0290450025
[email protected]
Dutch
31.30.600.4026
[email protected]
Spanish
34.917.628.509
South Africa
800.201.423
34.917.628.530
[email protected] [email protected]
Asia Pacific (APAC) Phone
Fax
E-mail
Central Support
61.3.9645.8500
61.3.9645.8077
[email protected]
Australia
800.637.947
61.3.9645.8077
[email protected]
Hong Kong
800.96.2800
Japan
81.3.5326.3684
81.3.5326.3001
[email protected]
Singapore
65.6332.2922
65.224.8516
[email protected]
[email protected]
All Other Countries (Also for any non-working numbers)
All other countries
Phone
Fax
E-mail
1.239.435.2201
1.239.213.3721
[email protected]
xiii
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If you receive a voice mail message, follow the instructions to report a production-down or critical problem. Leave a detailed message including your name and phone number. An ASG Customer Support representative will be paged and will return your call as soon as possible. Have available the information described previously when the ASG Customer Support representative contacts you.
ASG Documentation/Product Enhancements Submit all product and documentation suggestions to ASG’s product management team at http://www.asg.com/asp/emailproductsuggestions.asp. If you do not have access to the web, FAX your suggestions to product management at (239) 263-3692. Include your name, company, work phone, e-mail ID, and the name of the ASG product you are using. For documentation suggestions, include the publication number located on the publication’s front cover.
xiv
TrackBird Inventory
Chapter 1:
1 Starting TrackBird Server In the Windows Start menu, find the program group containing the TrackBird Suite and select TrackBird Server. A dialog displays, requesting your user name (login) and password for connection to the TrackBird database.
In the User field, select your TrackBird Server user login and then type your password in the Password field if required. Press Enter or click OK to confirm the connection. The TrackBird Server interface displays. Note:
The TrackBird database should be used by default, and can be selected in the Alias drop-down list in the dialog. The default user name is Admin and the default password is admin.
Alias Management To manage your database aliases, display the Login dialog, then click Alias drop-down list. The Database aliases screen displays.
beside the
1
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
You can use this screen to add, delete, or edit aliases for your existing InterBase (password: masterkey), Oracle, or SQL Server databases.
To add an InterBase alias 1
Click Add Alias on the Database Aliases screen. The Select database type screen displays.
2
2
Ensure the InterBase radio button is selected.
3
Type the new database alias
4
Click Next.
1 TrackBird Inventory
5
If the new database alias points to a local Interbase database, ensure the Local radio button is selected. If the new database alias points to a remote Interbase database. Or
If the New Database Alias Points to a Remote Interbase Database, click the Remote radio button and then type the workstation name in the Remote box. 6
Either type the path to the database in the Database Path box. Or
Click beside the Database Path box and then select the database in the file selection dialog.
7
Click Next to display the database alias username and password configuration screen detailed in “To define the database alias username and password” on page 8.
To add an alias to an Oracle database without the Oracle client 1
Click Add alias from the Database aliases dialog.
3
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Select database type dialog displays.
2
Type the new database alias name (e.g., TrackBird Oracle).
3
Click the Oracle radio button and uncheck the Use Client check box.
4
Click Next. The Oracle parameters screen displays.
4
1 TrackBird Inventory
5
In the SQL*Net Alias field, type the IP Address:1521:Oracle instance.
6
Click Next to display the database alias username and password configuration dialog detailed in “To define the database alias username and password” on page 8.
To add an alias to an Oracle database using the Oracle client 1
Click Add Alias from the Database aliases dialog.
The Select database type screen displays.
5
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
In the Database alias field, type the new database alias name.
3
Click the Oracle radio button and select the Use client check box.
4
Click Next. The Oracle parameters screen displays.
6
5
In the SQL*Net Alias box, type the Oracle database alias created using the TrackBird Suite’s SQL Server/Oracle database creation wizard.
6
Click Next to display the database alias username and password configuration dialog detailed in “To define the database alias username and password” on page 8.
1 TrackBird Inventory
To add an SQL server alias 1
Click Add Alias from the Database aliases dialog.
The Select database type screen displays.
2
Type the new database alias in the Database alias field, leaving InterBase selected in the Database Type box.
3
Click Next to display the database alias username and password configuration screen detailed in “To define the database alias username and password” on page 8.
7
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To define the database alias username and password 1
Type the username and password used to connect to the InterBase, Oracle or SQL Server database (the InterBase database default username and password are sysdba and masterkey, respectively).
2
Click Test connection to confirm that it is possible to connect to the database using the new alias.
3
Click Finish to complete creating the new InterBase, Oracle, or SQL Server database alias and return to the Add, Delete, and Edit Aliases screen.
To update the alias information when you have finished adding, deleting or editing database aliases, click Done; to cancel all alias additions, deletions or modifications made while the Database aliases screen was open, click Cancel.
To edit a database alias 1
Display the Login screen, then click The Database aliases screen displays.
8
beside the Alias drop-down list.
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
In the Available Database Connections list, select the database alias to edit.
3
Click Edit alias.
4
To delete the database alias, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel deletion of the database alias, click Cancel.
5
To update the alias information when you have finished adding, deleting, or editing database aliases, click Done; to cancel all alias additions, deletions, or modifications made while the Database aliases screen was open, click Cancel.
To delete a database alias 1
Display the Login dialog, then click
beside the Alias drop-down list.
The Database aliases screen displays.
9
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
In the Available Database Connections list, select the database alias to delete.
3
Click Delete alias.
4
To delete the database alias, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel deletion of the database alias, click Cancel.
5
To update the alias information when you have finished adding, deleting, or editing database aliases, click Done; to cancel all alias additions, deletions, or modifications made while the Database aliases screen was open, click Cancel.
Access to TrackBird Functions A function is an instruction telling TrackBird to carry out an action. You can run a function by: •
Clicking a button in the toolbar with the mouse
•
Selecting a command in a menu in the menu bar
•
Selecting a command in a contextual menu
•
Pressing short-cut keys
Using Toolbars The main toolbar is located under the menu bar at the top of the screen and contains a number of buttons. Commands may be rapidly found and executed by clicking their buttons in the toolbar. Help text explaining the function of the button may be obtained by pointing to the button without clicking it. TrackBird offers a number of other toolbars to help the user to easily find and use the most common commands.
Using the Menu Bar All interface commands are grouped in the various TrackBird menus. Certain commands directly execute an action whereas others open a dialog or another screen. •
10
Click the name of the menu in the menu bar, then the desired command in the menu. To close the menu without running a command, simply click outside the menu.
1 TrackBird Inventory
•
Press Alt or F10 to activate the menu bar, then press the key corresponding to the underlined letter in the menu name. To execute a command, press the key corresponding to the underlined letter in the command name. To close the menu without running a command, press Esc.
Using Contextual Menus In TrackBird, it is possible to display a contextual menu in certain situations. Contextual menus contain commands directly related to the situation in question. •
After positioning the mouse pointer over the place where you want to use a contextual menu command, press the right mouse button and then select the desired command. To close the menu without using a command, simply click outside the menu.
Using Shortcut Keys You can select certain functions by pressing the shortcut key(s) displayed to the right of command names in menus. Note:
TrackBird uses the same shortcut keys as Windows. Shortcut keys are only available through the keyboard.
Displaying Inventory Results You can use the TrackBird suite to build and display forms and queries, and build and print reports on collected inventory data. You can display and print this inventory analysis data in different layouts and with different levels of detail. Forms are used to display record-type information on specific assets, whereas reports are used to print information on all or selected types of IT assets. Information is retrieved and displayed using queries. TrackBird can be used to perform two types of queries on inventory data: •
Tree queries displaying all inventory data in a hierarchical tree structure and that can be used to add, modify and delete data;
•
List queries displaying inventory data as lines of information.
Use of TrackBird’s queries, forms and reports is described separately in this section.
11
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Forms Forms are used to display details of the asset specified in the selection (left) pane. These details are retrieved through a tree query. Two standard forms are provided with TrackBird to enable you to display useful information on specific IT assets immediately, but you can also create your own forms that will be listed along with the standard forms for future use.
Using a Form to Access a Workstation’s Data Use either of these methods to select the form to use to display the required asset data. •
Click Forms in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the form you want. Or
•
From the Views menu, select All Forms ` Default Forms or another group of forms to display and select the form you want.
In the structure tree in the left side of the screen, click the asset whose details you wish to display.
The details pane in the right side of the screen provides a summary of the item selected in the left pane’s structure tree.
12
1 TrackBird Inventory
Adding Data to a Workstation It is possible to add item and feature fields to a workstation. When an item is added, all corresponding features are added as well. When a feature is added, a value for the feature can then be entered. When a category is selected, the items making up the category are listed. Similarly, when an item is selected, the features making up the item are listed. Caution! Be careful when adding data for a network workstation on the server itself. The next time an inventory is run and the data is imported to the server, the data added via the server will be lost if the Protect item during import option is not activated (for details see “To modify workstation-related data manually” on page 16) to protect the data from being overwritten. It is preferable to add data via the data-input interface on the workstation itself.
To add data to a workstation 1
From the Administration menu, select Fields to display the Fields administration screen listing all available categories.
2
If necessary, to display the categories, items, and features within a displayed category or item (such as within the CPU category in the screen above, for example) in order to add a category, item or feature within that category or item, click to the left of the category or item within which you want to add the new category, item or feature.
3
Select the category or item within which you want to add the new category, item or feature.
4
Click you selected:
. Options in the drop menu vary depending on which type of element
13
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
If you selected a category, a drop menu containing the commands Category and Item is displayed.
•
If you selected a sub-category, a drop menu containing the commands Feature and Item is displayed.
•
If you selected an item, a drop menu containing only the command Feature is displayed.
5
Select the type of element you want to add. A new, empty, element line is added as shown (a new feature, in the example screen below).
6
Type the name of the new category, sub-category, item or feature in place of the default text (New feature in the example above), then press Enter. You can use either of the following methods to define the properties of the new category, sub-category, item or feature in its Properties screen. •
Right-click the new category, sub-category, item or feature and select Properties from the contextual menu.
•
Select the new category, sub-category, item or feature, then click
.
The element’s Feature properties screen displays. Note:
The properties shown in the Properties screen vary depending on whether a category, sub-category, item or feature is selected.
14
1 TrackBird Inventory
7
Define the properties of the selected element (for example, to specify whether or not the element is displayed), clicking the tabs at the top of the Properties dialog to display further properties as necessary, as detailed in “Category Properties” on page 65, “Item Properties” on page 68, and “Feature Properties” on page 77.
8
When you have modified the properties as necessary, click OK to update the properties and close the Properties dialog, or click Cancel to cancel all property changes made since the Properties box was opened.
9
To add the new category, sub-category, item or feature, click at the right side of the TrackBird toolbar (not that at the top right corner of the TrackBird screen, which closes the TrackBird application). A confirmation dialog is then displayed.
10
To apply the modifications to the TrackBird tree, update the database and close the Field Administration screen, click Yes; to cancel the current change and close the Field Administration screen, click No; to continue with your modifications and return to the Field Administration screen, click Cancel.
Modifying the Data Relating to a Workstation When the details of a workstation change (following a change of user, for example), you can modify the values stored in its features.
15
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The values relating to a workstation’s features can be modified in either of the following ways: •
Modifying the value manually in the Item editor;
•
Selecting the value from a glossary.
To modify workstation-related data manually 1
Select the form you wish to use to modify the asset data using either of the following methods. •
Click Forms in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the form you want.
•
In the Views menu, select All Forms, then select Default Forms or another group of forms to display and select the form you want.
2
If necessary, to display the categories, items and features within a displayed category or item (such as within the CPU category in the screen above, for example) in order to edit the value of a feature within that category or item, click to the left of the category or item within which you want to edit the value of a feature.
3
Display the Item Editor screen used to edit the value of an item’s features using either of the following methods: •
Select the item containing the feature, then press F12.
•
Right-click the item containing the feature and select Edit from the contextual menu.
The Item Editor screen displays the values of all of the selected item’s features.
16
1 TrackBird Inventory
4
Click to highlight the value you wish to modify, then enter the new value manually.
5
If you wish to protect the value you entered manually from being modified automatically as a result of future collects from the workstation, check the Protect Item During Import option.
6
To update the feature’s value, click OK.
To select workstation-related data from a glossary 1
2
Select the form you wish to use to modify the asset data using either of these methods. •
Click Forms in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the form you want.
•
In the Views menu, select All Forms, then select Default Forms or another group of forms to display and select the form you want.
If necessary, to display the categories, items and features within a displayed category or item (such as within the CPU category in the screen above, for example) in order to edit the value of a feature within that category or item, click to the left of the category or item within which you want to edit the value of a feature.
17
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
Display the Item Editor screen used to edit the value of an item’s features using either of the following methods: •
Select the item containing the feature, then press F12.
•
Right-click the item containing the feature and select Edit from the contextual menu.
The Item Editor screen displays the values of all of the selected item’s features.
18
4
Click the feature you want to modify.
5
Click Select From Glossary to display the glossary providing alternative values for the feature.
6
Select the replacement value for the feature, then click OK.
7
If you wish to protect the value you entered manually from being modified automatically as a result of future collects from the workstation, check the Protect Item During Import option.
8
To update the feature’s value, click OK.
1 TrackBird Inventory
To refresh the data `
You can refresh the data displayed in TrackBird (after a manual modification, for example) using either of these methods. •
Click
•
Press F5.
.
To delete data relating to a workstation 1
Select the form you wish to use to delete workstation-related data using either of the following methods. •
Click Forms in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the form you want.
•
In the Views menu, select All Forms, then select Default Forms or another group of forms to display and select the form you want.
2
If necessary, to display the categories, items and features within a displayed category or item (such as within the CPU category in the screen above, for example) in order to delete a category, sub-category, item or feature within that category or item, click to the left of the category or item within which you want to delete that data.
3
Delete the selected workstation-related data using either of the following methods.
4
•
Select the category, sub-category, item or feature, then press Delete.
•
Right-click the category, sub-category, item or feature and select Delete from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected category, sub-category, item or feature, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
To delete all data relating to a workstation 1
2
Select the form you wish to use to delete the workstation using either of the following methods. •
Click Forms in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the form you want.
•
In the Views menu, select All Forms, then select Default Forms or another group of forms to display and select the form you want.
If necessary, click to the left of the category within which the workstation is displayed in order to display the workstation. You can delete a workstation using either of the following methods. •
Select the workstation that you want to delete, then press Delete.
19
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
3
Right-click the workstation that you want to delete and select Delete from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected workstation, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
Associating an Action to a Workstation You can associate an action to a workstation. For example, you can allow the user to open a window on the selected workstation using the VNC tool.
To add an action 1
Select a workstation and click Customize in the toolbar or right-click and choose Customize in the contextual menu The Machine user-defined actions window is displayed.
2
20
Click Add to open a new window.
1 TrackBird Inventory
3
Complete these fields: Field
Description
Name
Application name.
Executable
Path to the executable.
Category path
(Optional) Name of the category that you can create to specify several applications under the same category.
Show in toolbar
By clicking this option, the name will appear directly in the toolbar or under the category in the toolbar if it exists. If you deactivate this option, nothing will appear in the toolbar and the option Show caption is also automatically deactivated.
Show caption
By clicking this option, the name will appear directly in the contextual menu, if not it will not display.
Executable parameters
List of parameters to enter into the command line. You can add static text or add features from the TrackBird tree.
21
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Field
Description
Target platforms
You can specify which platform will accept an action.
In this example, VNC is chosen. TrackBird includes this as a standard action. You can open a window on any workstation running an active VNC client. 4
Click OK to confirm the creation of the action or Cancel to terminate it.
5
Click Close to close the window.
To delete an action 1
Select a workstation and click Customize in the toolbar or right-click and choose Customize in the contextual menu. The Machine user-defined actions window is displayed with all the actions which you defined previously.
2
Select the action to be deleted and click Delete.
To edit an action 1
Select a workstation and click Customize in the toolbar or right-click and choose Customize in the contextual menu. The Machine user-defined actions window is displayed with all the actions which you defined previously.
22
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
Select the action to be edited and click Edit. A window displays the action’s properties.
3
Modify the parameters.
4
Click OK to confirm the modification or Cancel to terminate it.
5
Click Close to close the window, once you have modified all the actions required.
To launch an action on a workstation `
Select a workstation and click the name of the action on the toolbar or click the name of the category in the toolbar and choose the action to be carried out.
Or
Right-click and choose the name of the action in the contextual menu or select the name of the category then select the action to carry out.
23
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Tree Queries Tree queries are used to display all inventory data in a tree structure (as shown in the following example displaying inventory information based on the processor name) and can be used to add, modify and even delete data. This is an example tree query:
To open the tree query editor `
Do any of the following. •
From the Views menu, select Tree Query.
•
If the drop-down list of queries is displayed in the TrackBird toolbar, select the tree query you want to use (the name of each tree query is preceded by the symbol).
•
Click
in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the tree query you
want to use (the name of each tree query is preceded by the
symbol).
Tree Query Toolbar The table below lists the various toolbar buttons available to create, modify and use tree queries. Button
Use Selects and displays an existing query for running or modifying
24
1 TrackBird Inventory
Button
Use Creates a query
Deletes the selected query
Saves the query under the name you define
Renames the selected query and its results with the name you define Edits the criteria applied to the selected feature
Clears all criteria applied to the selected feature
Deletes the selected feature from the query
Displays the selected query in Design Mode, allowing you to change which information is displayed and modify the criteria Runs the displayed query
Refreshes the query results
To run the displayed tree query `
Click , to run the displayed tree query and display its results in a window within TrackBird
Editing Tree Queries Tree Queries at a Glance TrackBird makes it easy to prepare queries using a double-click method. Query language use is unnecessary.
To create a tree query 1
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the Tree query editor, see “To open the tree query editor” on page 24). 25
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
If necessary, click to the left of an item in the Result pane to display its hierarchically subordinate information, or click to the left of an item to hide its hierarchically subordinate information).
3
Double-click each feature whose information you want to display; its name is then displayed in the TrackBird screen’s data (right) pane.
To delete a line in a tree query 1
2
Do one of the following. •
Select the line you want to delete, then click
.
•
Right-click the line you want to delete and select Delete from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected line, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
To move a line in a tree query 1
Select the line you want to move.
2
Drag the line to its new position.
Tree Query Criteria You can define criteria for as many displayed features as you wish in TrackBird. You can edit and delete tree query criteria by doing the following. •
Editing tree query criteria
•
Deleting tree query criteria
To edit tree query criteria 1
Double-click the feature for which you wish to define criteria. The Criteria dialog displays.
26
1 TrackBird Inventory
You can use this dialog to define the criteria applied to the selected feature. The box offers a very simple way to prepare the SQL code that will be used to define the query criteria and filters. The following table lists all expressions available in the Criteria box, together with their meanings in the resulting SQL code. Expression
Meaning
By value: Exact value
=
By value: Not equal
Null value
IS NULL
Not null
IS NOT NULL
By value: Expression
LIKE
By interval
BETWEEN x AND y
The Filter type section can only be used when By value is selected in the Criteria type section.
27
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
To add a criterion, click
3
When you have defined all criteria for the selected feature, click OK.
. To delete a criterion, select it and then click
.
To delete tree query criteria 1
2
Do one of the following. •
Select the feature whose criteria you want to delete, then click
.
•
Right-click the feature whose criteria you want to delete and select Clear criteria from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected criteria, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
Example Tree Query In this example, it is assumed that the user needs to display all workstations with a Pentium IV processor.
To display all workstations with a Pentium IV processor 1
Do one of the following. •
Click
.
•
If a tree query is currently displayed, click
.
2
Double-click the CPU category to display its sub-categories.
3
Double-click Processor.
4
Place the Processor name feature under the Root icon in the right pane of the TrackBird screen by double-clicking it.
5
To set up the search criterion to find all workstations with a Pentium IV processor, double-click Processor name in the right pane of the TrackBird screen.
6
In the Criteria dialog, select the By value, Pentium IV and Exact value options.
7
Click OK.
8
Click
.
The system displays all workstations with a Pentium IV processor. 28
1 TrackBird Inventory
This is an example tree query:
List Queries List queries are used to display all inventory data in list form (as shown in the following example based on the processor name). This is an example list query:
To open the list query editor `
Do one of the following. •
From the Views menu, select List Query.
29
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
•
If the drop-down list of queries is displayed in TrackBird Server’s List Query toolbar, select the list query you want to use (the name of each list query is preceded by the
symbol).
Click
in the TrackBird toolbar, then select the list query you
want to use (the name of each list query is preceded by the
symbol).
List Query Contextual Menu The contextual menu contains the majority of the toolbar’s functions.
Menu Command Description Field Criteria
Displays the criteria window.
Delete column
Deletes a selected column.
Rename column
Renames a selected column.
Edit alias table
Adds an alias to a table (that is the element).
Add calculated field
Add a calculated field.
Edit script
Edit the script of a calculated field.
List Query Toolbar The table below lists the various toolbar buttons available to create, modify and use list queries. Icon
Use Creates a query
30
1 TrackBird Inventory
Icon
Use Saves the query under the name you define
Deletes the selected feature from the query
Selects and displays an existing query for running or modifying Executes the displayed list query and exports the results in a range of file formats Executes the displayed query and displays the results in a TrackBird window Displays the Code Editor screen containing the SQL code generated to run the query defined in the TrackBird screen’s right pane Adds a calculated field to the query defined in the TrackBird screen’s right pane Displays the Script Editor screen containing the VBScript used to calculate the value stored in the selected calculated field Displays the TrackBird system nodes. This button is useful when running historic queries.
To run the displayed list query `
Do one of the following. •
To run the displayed list query and display its results in a window within TrackBird, click
•
.
To run the query and export its results for use in another program, click
.
List Query Lines Field
Description
Categ
Category to which the feature belongs.
31
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Field
Description
Item
Item to which the characteristic belongs.
Feat
Feature name.
Order
Choose between these three values: • Asc: the results of the request will be sorted by ascending order • Desc: the results of the request will be sorted by descending order • No Select: the request created does not take into account this characteristic in its SELECT.
Op
You can carry out seven different operations: • Group—allows you to group the results • Count—allows you to count the result lines • Sum—allows you to add the result lines • Average—gives you the average of the result lines • Min—displays the line with the smallest result • Max—displays the line with the largest result • Distinct—displays the distinct values
Show
If the box is checked, the column is displayed in the results window, if not it does not appear.
Criteria
See “List Query Criteria” on page 33.
Or
Add lines to provide additional criteria.
Editing List Queries List Queries at a Glance TrackBird makes it easy to prepare queries using the double-click method. Unless you require the greater flexibility provided by manually-written SQL code, it is not necessary to use a query language.
32
1 TrackBird Inventory
To create a list query 1
If the List query editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List query editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29).
2
If necessary, click to the left of an item in the Result pane to display its hierarchically subordinate information, or click to the left of an item to hide its hierarchically subordinate information).
3
Double-click each feature whose information you want to display; its name is then displayed in the TrackBird screen’s data (right) pane.
To delete a column in a list query 1
2
Do one of the following. •
Select the column you want to delete, then click
.
•
Right-click the column you want to delete and select Delete from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected column, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
To move a column in a list query 1
Click the gray title bar of the column you want to move.
2
Drag the column to its new position.
List Query Criteria You can define criteria for as many features as you wish in TrackBird. The procedures for editing and deleting list query criteria are detailed below.
Editing List Query Criteria To editing list query criteria using the wizard 1
In the right pane of the TrackBird screen, do one of the following to display the Criteria dialog. •
Double-click the column containing the feature for which you wish to define criteria.
•
Right-click the column containing the feature for which you wish to define criteria and select Field criteria from the contextual menu. 33
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
Define the criteria applied to the selected feature. The box offers a very simple way to prepare the SQL code that will be used to define the query criteria and filters. The following table lists all expressions available in the Criteria box, together with their meanings in the resulting SQL code. Expression
Meaning
By value: Exact value
=
By value: Not equal
Null value
IS NULL
Not null
IS NOT NULL
By value: Expression
LIKE
By interval
BETWEEN x AND y
The Filter type section can only be used when By value is selected in the Criteria type section.
34
1 TrackBird Inventory
3
To add a criterion, click
4
When you have defined all criteria for the selected feature, click OK.
. To delete a criterion, select it and then click
.
Editing List Query Criteria Manually Criteria can also be entered manually, without using the assistant. To enter a criterion manually, you must first type the operator (=, , =, , LIKE, NOT LIKE, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL, BETWEEN value1 AND value2) followed by the feature’s value. Criteria are case-sensitive, meaning that if you wish to define criteria that are not case-sensitive, you must create them using the assistant. To enter an expression into an expression, you must use the percent sign (%). To display all of a feature’s values beginning with the letter T you would type LIKE T%; to display all values containing the letters XP you would type LIKE %XP%.
Add a Criteria with an Input Prompt Criteria can also be created that display an input prompt asking the user to enter the criterion. For example, you can create a query to display the manufacturer and model details of a workstation whose ID is entered when the query is run. To do so, type in the selected feature’s Criteria line the input prompt that is to be displayed. The prompt must be typed in curled brackets { } as in the following example.
The criterion above displays a dialog requesting the workstation name that will be used to specify the required output file.
Add a Criteria with a Condition Criteria can also be used to calculate the result of a calculation based on another column and so define which records are displayed. For example, such a criterion might be used to display all workstations on which less than 10% of their total memory is available. This would be achieved by entering the criterion < [TOTALMEMORY] *0.1 where 35
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TOTALMEMORY is the name of the column containing the data upon which the calculation is based, typed in square brackets. Any number of variables can therefore be used to perform calculations.
To delete list query criteria `
In the right pane of the TrackBird screen, do one of the following. •
Double-click the column containing the feature whose criteria you want to delete, to display the Criteria dialog. Click to delete each criterion displayed in the box, then click OK.
•
36
Select the text in the Criteria box containing the criteria you wish to delete (as shown in the example screen below), then press Delete to clear the box. Repeat the process for each criterion you wish to delete.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Calculated Fields Calculated fields are used to manipulate field values that cannot be handled using a criterion. For example, you may want to chain two text values (such as the first name and last name) together or extract part of an IP address. The VBScript language is used in calculated fields. For more information on the VBScript language, see http://www.microsoft.com/scripting
To edit a calculated field 1
Open the Code Editor screen. You must edit the VBScript code used by a selected calculated field, do one of the following. •
Double-click the calculated field.
•
Click the
button.
The following Variables, Objects and methods can be used in scripts. VBScript Element
Description
result
Display the results of processing the current VBScript line
Query
Query object used to process the query, line by line
FieldByName(fieldname)
Function used to select a query field by its name and then work with it. The result type must then be defined as String, Date or Integer, as in the following example. result = Query.FieldByName(OUTPUTFILE).AsString
Fields(FieldNumber)
Function used to select a query field by its number and then work with it. Field numbers begin at 0, as in the following example. result = Query.Fields(0).AsString
AsString
Specifies that the chosen field contains a text string
AsDate
Specifies that the chosen field contains a date
AsInteger
Specifies that the chosen field contains an integer
CancelCurrentRecord
The result contained in the result variable is not displayed if this variable is set to true, as in the following example. Query.CancelCurrentRecord = true The default value is false, meaning that the result is displayed unless otherwise specified.
37
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Calculated Field Code Example In this example, we wish to display all workstations whose third IP segment is 32.
The VBScript used for the TrackBird query calculated field in this example is as follows. ' Get TCP_IPADDRESS field from source query result=Query.FieldByName("TCP_IPADDRESS").AsString ' if field value is empty, then put None instead if result="" then result="None" else 'Field not null, extract the third TCPIP number (like 32 in 192.168.32.1) if (PosPoint 0) then Result=Left(result,PosPoint-1) ' First step extract the string without last number PosPoint=InStrRev(result,".") Result=Right(result,Len(Result)-PosPoint) else 'if TCP/IP is incorrect, put None value result = "None" end if end if ' If the result is None or different from 32, ' cancel the current query row... if (result="None") or (result"32") then Query.CancelCurrentRecord=true end if
38
1 TrackBird Inventory
The results of the query are as follows.
List Query Editor Results Window Export a Query From this window you can export by clicking Export a query into various formats.
Query Results Limitation You can also display partial results by adding parameters to the Limitation of Query Result option in the TrackBird Preferences window (see “List Queries” on page 29). This option allows you, for example, to display and calculate only the first 20 results. This option enables you to handle a large amount of data in a short time. To see another 20 additional results, click Show More. To see all the results, click Show All.
Example List Query In this example, the user wants to list all Microsoft software installed on workstation CPU21-NT. 1
If the List query editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List query editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29).
2
If necessary, click to the left of the CPU category to display its hierarchically subordinate information.
3
Open the Collection information item.
4
Double-click Output file to move it to the first column in the right pane of the TrackBird screen. 39
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
5
In the Criteria line, enter the criterion. It must be written =CPU21.
6
Now open the TrackBird structure to the Software item and double-click the Software editor, Software and Version features to move them to the right pane of the TrackBird screen, to create three new columns.
7
In the Criteria line of the Software editor column, enter like Microsoft% as the search criterion. The like function looks for part of a string. In the criterion above, the percent sign (%) represents any number of unspecified characters, indicating that the string begins with Microsoft. The percent sign (%) may be placed at the beginning, middle, or end of the string, depending on what data must be found.
8
If thought useful, select an ascending sort order for the first column by clicking in its Order box and selecting Asc.
9
Finally, do one of the following. •
Run the query and display its results in a TrackBird window by clicking
•
Run the query and export the results for use in another program by clicking .
The finished query displays below.
40
.
1 TrackBird Inventory
These are the query results:
Query Management You can save the displayed query in a specific folder or set it up as a default query that is listed with all other default queries.
To save a previously-unnamed query 1
Click . If the query has not yet been named (i.e., List query or Tree query is displayed on the tab at the bottom of the TrackBird screen), the Save Query dialog displays.
41
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
Specify where you want to save the query as follows. •
To save the query in an existing folder in the Name list (Default queries, for example), double-click the folder.
•
To create a subfolder in the folder displayed in the Name list, click then type the name of the new folder, then click OK.
•
To display the parent folder of the displayed subfolder containing reports, forms and queries, click
and
. (You cannot display the parent folder of the All
folders folder.) 3
In the Name box, type the name you wish to give to the query and then click OK.
To save an already-named query `
Click
.
To rename the displayed query 1
Click
2
Type or edit the query’s name in the dialog.
3
Click OK.
. The Rename Query dialog is displayed.
To delete the displayed query 1
Click
2
To delete the selected query, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
.
Reports TrackBird Reporting is a tool that is used to generate reports from queries based upon a TrackBird database.
To create effective reports from TrackBird query data
42
1
Select the TrackBird database that contains the data.
2
In TrackBird, define the query that will retrieve your selected data, using a query editor screen that generates an SQL query from its simple-to-use, drag-and-drop interface.
1 TrackBird Inventory
3
Select or design the report that will present the data selected by your query, using a report designer screen that enables you to lay out your report simply and flexibly by dragging and dropping fields, labels and calculations onto the page.
To display an existing report `
Do one of the following. •
From the Reports menu, select All Reports, then select the report you wish to display and print in the displayed folder hierarchy.
•
Click list.
on the toolbar, then select the report in the drop-down
To create a report For details of how to use TrackBird Reporting to create a report, see the help provided with the optional TrackBird Repository Explorer module.
Inventory Analysis The inventory analysis tool enables you to track the current inventory status. In the example below we have asked to analyze inventories with an interval of four days. We can see that the majority of workstations were inventoried between four and eight days ago. The inventory analysis tool has two tabs. In the following example, the Graph tab displays the result in graphic format. This is a TrackBird Inventory Analysis graph example:
By double-clicking the blue slice of the pie chart (representing workstations that were inventoried between 4 and 8 days ago) the Machines tab is displayed, displaying a list of all workstations included in the blue slice of the chart as shown in the following example. 43
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This is a TrackBird Inventory Analysis segment member list example:
.
TrackBird Administration Tools The TrackBird Server software includes a number of tools used for TrackBird client administration. (At the end of the TrackBird IP Server installation process, the InstallShield Wizard copies all the files onto the workstation and installs all the icons needed to run the TrackBird IP Administration module interface.)
Collection Point Administration TrackBird’s collection-point administration functions are used in the case of shared directory installations or when inventory information is imported manually. Collection point administration consists in performing the following tasks: •
Setting up collection options for each workstation connected to a collection point (frequency, time, etc.)
•
Transferring to each workstation the knowledge bases needed to inventory it in accordance with the choices made by the administrator
•
Ensuring that the inventory data is transferred correctly from the workstations to the shared directory on the TrackBird Server, i.e. to the database
Each of these tasks and its effects on workstation operation is detailed below.
44
1 TrackBird Inventory
Connecting a Collection Point What Happens When a Connection Point is Connected? When a collection point is connected to the administration console, its exact location in the network is defined and all the necessary elements are transferred. At least one collection point must be defined in order for TrackBird to function correctly in a network environment. As many connection points as necessary can be connected so that each workstation inventoried via the network is indeed linked to the TrackBird Server via a collection point. Each workstation is connected with its collection point when the collectors are set up on the workstations. A workstation can be easily transferred to another collection point, however, for a number of reasons (because the workstation’s domain has changed, the workstation has been relocated to another site, etc.).
To connect a collection point 1
In the Administration menu, click Collection points.
2
To indicate the path of the new collection point, do one of the following. •
Right-click the screen and select Add from the contextual menu.
•
Click
to add a collection point.
The dialog that opens is used to define the location of the collection point to be connected. 3
Select the directory used as a collection point on your network.
4
Click Open to add the collection point to the list of available collection points. Note:
ASG strongly recommends using a collection point’s UNC name, as this naming convention does not vary depending on which drive letter is allocated to the network path to the collection point and so will function correctly regardless of which client workstation is connected. To obtain a UNC path, use the Network Neighborhood to designate the collection point. The result should be a path similar to that displayed on the following screen.
45
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Configuring Collection Point Properties A collection point’s properties are automatically adopted by all workstations connected to the collection point. This means that different properties can be configured for different collection points matching specific corporate requirements. A company may, for example, have departments whose organization and computer network differ greatly. In such cases, it can be very useful to set up a collection point for each department to cater for their inventory needs and your data needs concerning those departments, as in the following fictitious example. •
Administrative department. The workstations in this department are used exclusively for accounting and administrative tasks, with very few changes in the software and hardware configurations. In this context, collecting inventory information every six months and preferably over the weekend, using very simple data collection settings, is quite sufficient. The collection procedure should be completely transparent for TrackBird client workstation users.
•
Computer department. A large number of software applications and hardware configurations are tested, validated and used in this department. This department can also access the Internet and so can download many types of applications from the Web. In such situations, more frequent (weekly, for example) collections are required to collect complete information on unknown software, preferably at the beginning of the week. The administrator should also collect the antivirus logs and monitor use of installed applications (if TrackBird Monitoring is installed). In such departments, the collection procedure should be visible on the workstations and users should be able to deactivate the procedure if they are running applications that require considerable machine resources or may distort collection results.
Configuring a Collection Point The points below rapidly present the properties for the Computer department set using the various tab sheets in the Collection options dialog.
46
1 TrackBird Inventory
Do one of the following. •
Select the collection point, then click
.
•
Right-click the collection point and select Properties from the contextual menu.
To configure the collection point’s collection options using the TrackBird Server interface, select the appropriate settings in the four parameter pages in the Collection properties dialog, which are selected by clicking the appropriate tab displayed below the collection point name.
Options Tab Use this tab to specify how frequently information is collected, define which information is displayed during audits, specify whether software use must be audited and the dates of software monitoring, define whether the collection results must be displayed on the screen following collection, and specify ranges of days and times when you do not want information to be collected. Audit restrictions periods are also set on this page. The fields displayed on the Collection properties Options page are detailed in “Options Tab” on page 48.
Exclusion Ranges Tab Use this page to define days and times when inventory information collection is not performed. The fields displayed on the Exclusion ranges page are detailed in “Exclusion Ranges Tab” on page 51.
Folders Tab Use this tab to specify which folders are used to contain the collection point software on the various client workstation platforms. The fields displayed on the Folders page are detailed in “Folders Tab” on page 52.
Collected Files Tab Use this tab to specify that TrackBird collects files that are not inventoried automatically by TrackBird. These files, which include files such as TXT and INI files, can then be edited by a text editor. The fields displayed on the Collected files page are detailed in “Collected Files Tab” on page 53.
47
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Options Tab To configure the collection point’s Options page of collection options using the TrackBird Server interface, click the Options tab displayed below the collection point name in the Collection properties dialog.
The following fields are displayed on the Options page.
Hardware/Software Collection Frequency Select one of the following, depending on how frequently you want the TrackBird agent to run. •
On startup, i.e. at the start of each new session;
•
At regular intervals, defining how frequently in the Hardware and Software boxes. These values can be modified from the by specifying a number between 1 and 9999 (inclusive) followed by one of the following letters; for example the default value 1D specifies that the agent will be run daily.
•
48
•
D for day
•
W for week
•
M for month
•
Q for quarter
•
Y for year
Never, i.e. the agent will never run automatically to collect inventory information.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Recover Unknown Software Select this option in order to gather information on all applications on the TrackBird client workstations; this can then be added to, and so enhance, the TrackBird knowledge base.
Operation Display Progress If you wish to display collection progress on the client workstation while collection is taking place, select this option.
Edit Results To display an inventory collection results screen at the end of inventory information collection, select this option. If the Edit results option is selected, the collection results are edited every time inventory data is collected, in the following screen showing the collection results. The screen can be customized using TrackBird Designer, TrackBird’s interface editing module.
Notify User If you wish to display a screen on the TrackBird client workstation before the data collection agent is run, asking whether the user to confirm whether or not he or she wishes the agent to run, select this option.
Software Use Audit The software use audit feature records details of the rate of software use. This audit is used to find out how often software is used and for how long.
49
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
By default, the Software use audit check box is not checked and the other components in the Software use audit box are deactivated. To generate the software use audit report, select this option. The Begin and End fields are then also activated.
Begin, and End To define a period during which software use audits must be run, select the period start date in the Begin field, and its end date in the End field. To change the date in the Begin and End fields, click the field’s drop-down list button to display a calendar and then select the appropriate date in the calendar.
Restrictions The Restrictions field is used to exclude certain times or days from software use audit information collection. To display the Restrictions field, click Restrictions. The field contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
50
1 TrackBird Inventory
To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for exclusion are colored red. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row. In the following example, the Restrictions field specifies that software use will not be audited on Saturdays, Sundays, or Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Exclusion Ranges Tab To configure the collection point’s Exclusion ranges page of collection options using the TrackBird Server interface, click the Exclusion ranges tab displayed below the collection point name in the Collection properties dialog. The Exclusion ranges field is used to specify that data is not collected at a given time and/or on a given day. It contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for exclusion are colored red. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row. 51
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
In the following example, the Exclusion ranges field specifies that data will not be collected on Saturdays, Sundays, or Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Folders Tab To configure the collection point’s Folders page of collection options using the TrackBird Server interface, click the Folders tab displayed below the collection point name in the Collection properties dialog.
The fields displayed on the Folders page ensure compatibility with TrackBird Server Versions 2.0 and earlier. Administrators of TrackBird systems including such servers should check that the paths are correct for all client operating systems used. Note:
Administrators of inventory systems including TrackBird Server Version 2.0 and earlier should check that the path syntax can be read by the operating system. Otherwise, data will not be transferred to the collection point correctly.
52
1 TrackBird Inventory
Collected Files Tab TrackBird IP Server can be used to collect files that are not inventoried during TrackBird inventory information collection automatically. The files specified for collection on the Collected Files page are text files that can be edited using a text editor (e.g., TXT, INI files, etc.) To configure the collection point’s Collected files page of collection options using the TrackBird Server interface, click the Collected files tab displayed below the collection point name in the Collection properties dialog box.
The file collection list box above the
and
buttons lists all files to be collected.
The following fields are displayed on the Collected files page.
Options File Name The File name field contains the name of the file currently selected in the file collection list.
File Location Buttons The file location radio buttons (Windows folder, System folder, Search in the PATH, and Other) are used to specify the location of the file selected in the file collection list. This location tells TrackBird Server where to find the file. The radio buttons are deactivated when no file is selected.
53
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a file to the collection list 1
Click
.
A sample file name, NAME.EXT, displays both in the collection list and in the File name box (the sample file name is already highlighted). 2
Type the appropriate file name, without typing the path to the file.
3
Select the location of the selected file using the file location radio buttons (Windows folder, System folder, Search in the PATH, and Other). Note:
If you do not know where the file you want is located or if it may be in a number of locations depending on the workstation, you can specify several alternative potential locations for the same file by specifying the same file several times in the collection list, each time with a different location.
To remove a file from the collection list In the collection list, select the file you wish to remove from the list. `
Click
.
To update the collection point settings `
Click OK.
The TrackBird software creates or updates three files in the collection point folder defined on the Collection properties screen’s Folders page. These option parameter files are called PTCOLL.OPT, GENERAL.OPT, and SNMP.OPT. If you do not find these files after the parameters have been updated, you should check your access rights to the directory.
Updating the TrackBird Knowledge Base After new software, hardware or glossary information is entered or changes are made in the relevant glossary, you should refresh the knowledge base so that all these changes are taken into account when inventory information is collected in the future. The TrackBird knowledge base is essential to operation of the collector agents on the workstations because it contains the TrackBird structure and the list of hardware and software used as the inventory reference information.
54
1 TrackBird Inventory
To update the TrackBird knowledge base when you change a software glossary `
Click in the TrackBird IP Administration interface. This saves the configuration and records the changes in the software glossary.
To update the TrackBird knowledge base when you change hardware glossary 1
2
Do one of the following. •
To select a single collection point in order to update its knowledge base, click its line in the Collection points administration list.
•
To select individual collection points in order to update their knowledge bases, click the line containing the first collection point you wish to update; then hold down Control (Ctrl) while clicking each additional collection point whose knowledge base you wish to update in the Collection points administration list.
•
To select all collection points in order to update their knowledge bases, press Ctrl+A .
Click . The data tables concerned are converted into compressed binary files and sent to the collection point. Unlike the collection properties, the TrackBird knowledge base is always the same for all collection points in the list. The knowledge base data is highly compressed. For example, a software glossary containing 5000 lines with 8 columns in each only occupies approximately 120 kB after it is compressed into binary format.
3
In order to save the configuration and record the changes in the software glossary for when inventory information is collected in the future, you must click TrackBird IP Administration interface.
in the
Transferring a Workstation from One Collection Point to Another To successfully transfer workstations from one collection point to another, you must ensure the following: •
The target collection point actually exists
•
The transferred workstations have sufficient access rights to the new collection point, i.e. the same as those for the former collection point
•
The source collection point will not be deactivated within minutes of the transfer, to give the workstations time to take the transfer into account, otherwise the link with the workstations may be lost anyway 55
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Once you have confirmed all the above points, you should allow a transitional period in which both collection points will exist. This period is necessary for the connected workstations to react to the transfer instruction. This instruction is contained in a separate file for each workstation and is placed in the collection point folder; it is named after the workstation’s corresponding collection file, with the .MVT extension (such as CPU0099.MVT, for example). After it detects the file, the collection agent reads its contents and modifies its own configuration, replacing the path to the old collection point with the path to the new one. Note:
The collector’s configuration information can only be updated if the resident collection agent is running, i.e., if the workstation is on. This factor must be taken into account when you are calculating the length of the transitional period when both collection points exist (if the change takes place during a vacation period, for example).
To transfer workstation from one collection point to another 1
From the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Administration menu, select Collection points.
2
In the Collection points administration screen, select the destination collection point (its line is displayed in blue).
3
Open the source collection point, double-clicking each subsequent level or clicking to the left of its name until its workstations are displayed.
4
Do one of the following.
5
56
•
To select a single workstation in order to move it to the destination collection point, click its line in the Collection points administration list.
•
To select individual workstations in order to move them to the destination collection point, click the line containing the first workstation you wish to move; then hold down the Control (Ctrl) key while clicking each additional workstation you wish to move in the Collection points administration list.
Drag the selected workstation(s) to the destination collection point.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Deleting a Collection Point Note:
Before deleting a collection point, you must transfer any workstations linked with that collection point to another collection point.
To delete a collection point 1
Select the collection point.
2
Click
3
To delete the selected collection point, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
.
Importing Collection Points Manually The TrackBird server administrator must perform a certain number of tasks manually when he or she is importing collection points manually. These tasks can be performed automatically by importing the collection points automatically instead. The TrackBird Server interface is used to import workstations manually.
To manually import collection points 1
Do one of the following to display the Collection points import screen. •
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Import stations.
•
Click the TrackBird Server interface’s
button.
57
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
Select the collection point whose data is to be imported, then click
.
The yellow symbol displayed to the left of the collection file indicates either that the file is new or that its collection date is later than that of the file’s previous update. If other collection points must be selected, repeat the previous step for each one. 3
Do one of the following. •
To import all data on the selected collection point(s), click
.
•
To import only files containing changed workstation inventory data or files for workstations whose data has never been imported (i.e. new files), click .
While the collection point’s data is being imported, a progress bar displays to indicate how the import is progressing.
Field Administration The administration system used to maintain TrackBird fields enables administrators to specify precisely what inventory information they require. The main purpose of this function is to add entry fields in order to collect additional data that can then be used through queries from the TrackBird Server interface. This function is accessed from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, by selecting Fields. The following sections detail the many possibilities offered by this function.
58
1 TrackBird Inventory
The TrackBird Structure Tree Terminology The following table provides the names and details of each element in the TrackBird inventory structure tree, organized into hierarchical levels. Name
Definition
Parent
Child
Category
Highest level of element in the hierarchy.
None
Item / Subcategory
Subcategory
Subordinate level that can be used, if necessary, Category to add a level to the structure. Any number of further subcategory branch levels can be created.
Subcategory / Item
Item
Group whose name indicates the type of information stored there (e.g., Location). This group contains the corresponding features.
Category / Subcategory
Feature
Feature
Lowest level of element used in automatically inventorying asset data and/or data entry by users. By default, this data is in text form.
Item
None
Shortcut Item
Provides a link to an item.
Category / Subcategory
None
External Item
Item which refers to an external table in the TrackBird database.
Category / Subcategory
External Feature
External Feature
Feature which refers to a field in an external table in the TrackBird database.
External Item None
59
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
How the TrackBird Structure is Portrayed The following figure shows a structure (structure tree) containing all the elements presented in the table on the previous page. It is one example of the many personalized structures that can be created.
To display more elements in the structure tree `
To expand the structure tree and to display an element’s directly subordinate (child) elements, do one of the following. •
If the element’s child elements are not displayed, double-click the element.
•
Click the
symbol to the left of the element’s name.
All of the selected element’s child elements display. If necessary, repeat the previous step to display the child element’s own child elements, or to display the child elements of another element.
To display less elements in the structure tree `
To condense the structure tree and so no longer display an element’s directly subordinate (child) elements, do one of the following. •
If the element’s child elements are displayed, double-click the element.
•
Click the
symbol to the left of the element’s name.
The selected element’s child elements are no longer displayed. If necessary, repeat the previous step to no longer display the child element’s own child elements, or to no longer display the child elements of another element.
60
1 TrackBird Inventory
Creating a Customized Structure Tree Prerequisites The TrackBird Server interface is used to perform field administration tasks. From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Fields. The TrackBird structure tree is displayed. Before you begin to create fields, you should take time to think about the best way to organize the fields in the structure. The TrackBird IT asset inventory solution provides a flexible structure architecture in which all data is centered on the workstation. For example, if you want to include user and location information, you must bear in mind that these relate to the workstation user and the workstation location. The features of the two items must therefore be separated within the structure, so that the location features are not positioned in the same item as the user features. The following illustrations clearly illustrate why the two items should be separated. Imagine that the user no longer uses the given workstation (new job, retirement, etc.). If the wrong method is used, all the data in the User item is affected even if the workstation stays in the exact same location. Wrong
Right
The following steps explain how to create the right structure shown above, i.e. the most logical structure.
61
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a category or subcategory 1
To add the structure to an existing category or subcategory, do one of the following. •
Click that category or subcategory in the TrackBird structure. Click to display a submenu. In the submenu, select Category.
•
2
Right-click that category or subcategory in the TrackBird structure and select Add ` Category from the contextual menu.
To add a new category, do one of the following. •
Click below the last element in the TrackBird structure so that no existing levels are selected. Click to display a submenu. In the submenu, select Category.
•
Right-click below the last element in the TrackBird structure so that no existing levels are selected, and select Add ` Category from the contextual menu.
A category, labeled New category, is added to the structure tree. 3
Replace this name with the category’s correct name (User, Address details, or Location, in the example), press Enter to change the name.
If necessary, select the new category and then repeat the above steps to create a subcategory.
To add an item to a category or subcategory 1
As the new category or subcategory is still selected, add an item to the new category or subcategory by doing one of the following. •
Click
to display a submenu. In the submenu, select Item.
•
Right-click the new category or subcategory and select Add ` Item from the contextual menu.
An item, labeled New item, is added to the structure tree. 2
Replace this name with the item’s correct name (Address details or Location, in the example), press Enter to change the name.
To add a feature to an item 1
As the new item is still selected, add a feature to the new item by doing one of the following. •
62
Click
to display a submenu. In the submenu, select Feature.
1 TrackBird Inventory
•
Right-click the new item and select Add ` Feature from the contextual menu.
2
A feature, labeled New feature, is added to the structure tree.
3
Replace this name with the feature’s correct name (such as First name, Registration number, etc. under Address details, or Site, Building, etc. under Location, in the example), press Enter to change the name.
Create as many features as necessary by repeating the procedure described in “To add a feature to an item” on page 62. The above is of course only an example and you can set up your own structure to meet your company’s specific needs.
To add a shortcut to an item 1
2
To add a shortcut to an existing category or subcategory, do one of the following. •
Click that category or subcategory in the TrackBird structure. Click to display a submenu. In the submenu, select Shortcut Item.
•
Right-click the category or subcategory in the TrackBird structure and select Add ` Shortcut Item from the contextual menu.
To add a new shortcut item, do one of the following: •
Click below the last element in the TrackBird structure so that no existing levels are selected. Click select Shortcut Item.
•
to display a submenu. In the submenu,
Right-click below the last element in the TrackBird structure so that no existing levels are selected, and select Add ` Shortcut Item from the contextual menu.
A shortcut item, labeled New Shortcut, is added to the structure tree. 3
Replace this name with the shortcut item’s correct name, press Enter to change the name.
To add an external item to a category or a sub category 1
Click the new category or subcategory, add an external item to the category or subcategory by doing one of the following. •
Click
to display a submenu. In the submenu, select External Item.
•
Right-click the category or subcategory and select Add ` External Item from the contextual menu.
An external item, labeled New external item, is added to the structure tree. 63
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
Replace this name with the external item’s correct name, press Enter to change the name.
To add an external feature to an external item 1
As the external item is still selected, add an external feature to the external item by doing one of the following. •
Click Feature.
to display a submenu. In the submenu, select External
•
Right-click the new item and select Add ` External Feature from the contextual menu.
2
An external feature, labeled New external feature, is added to the structure tree.
3
Replace this name with the feature’s correct name, press Enter to change the name.
Create as many external features as necessary by repeating this procedure
Modifying the Structure Tree Although the default TrackBird structure is designed to be extremely easy to reconfigure and extend dynamically, it is not possible to delete system fields. System fields are fields that are linked to the automatic system for collecting inventory information. If you attempt to delete the Configuration item in the CPU category, for example, a message displays telling you this is not possible because the field is an integral part of the TrackBird database. You can of course modify or delete parts of the structure that you created yourself, however, if they are no longer needed. Note:
If you delete some or all of an administrator-created TrackBird structure that already contains data, that data will be irretrievably lost.
To delete a category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature 1
Do one of the following. •
Right-click the feature properties you want to delete and select Delete from the contextual menu.
•
Select the category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature you want to delete. Click
64
.
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
To delete the selected category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
To rename a category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature 1
2
Do one of the following. •
If the category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature is not already selected, select it. Click its existing name to highlight it for editing.
•
Right-click the category, subcategory, item or feature to display a contextual menu. In the menu, select Properties to display a dialog containing the feature properties for a category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external, including its name.
Edit the name as appropriate, then press Enter.
Properties Properties are used to define the behavior and appearance of, among other elements of the TrackBird inventory solution: •
Category Properties
•
Item Properties
•
Feature Properties
These are modified as described below.
Category Properties To access the properties of a category, do one of the following. •
Select the category. Click
.
•
Right-click the category and select Properties from the contextual menu.
The Category Properties screen, containing two pages of information (General and Platform), is displayed. To configure the category’s properties, select the appropriate settings in the two parameter pages of the Category Properties screen, which are selected by clicking the appropriate tab below the words Category properties.
65
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
General Tab
The Category Properties screen’s General tab is used to modify the category’s icon displayed in the structure tree and change the category’s name (see “To rename a category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature” on page 65.
To change the selected category’s icon 1
66
In the Category Properties screen, click the button displaying the category’s current icon to display the Change icon dialog.
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
Select the icon you want to apply to the category, then click OK.
Note:
You can equally change an icon directly from the Field Administration window, by clicking dialog.
to display the Change Icon dialog and then selecting a different icon in the
To rename the selected category `
In the Category Properties screen, click the Name field and edit the name as appropriate.
Platform Tab
Certain categories relate only to specific platforms. The Category Properties screen’s Platform tab is therefore used to define whether or not the selected category is visible (and so available) on specific platforms, such as all PCs, PCs operating under DOS, or Macintosh computers operating under Mac OS X, for example. By default, each category is available on all platforms. To specify that the selected category is not visible for a specific platform, on the Category Properties screen’s Platform tab, click the Visible check box beside the appropriate platform’s name.
To update the selected category’s properties `
When all of the category’s properties are defined appropriately, click OK.
67
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Item Properties To access the properties of an item, do one of the following. •
Select the item. Click
.
•
Right-click the item and select Properties from the contextual menu.
The Item Properties screen, containing four pages of information (General, Display, Platform and Revisions), is displayed. To configure the item’s properties, select the appropriate settings in the four parameter pages of the Item Properties screen, which are selected by clicking the appropriate tab below the words Item properties.
General Tab
The Item Properties screen’s General tab is used to modify the item’s icon displayed in the structure, specify whether or not the item is displayed in the structure tree and change the item’s name (see “To rename a category, subcategory, item, feature, shortcut item, external item or external feature” on page 65).
68
1 TrackBird Inventory
To change the selected item’s icon 1
In the Item Properties screen, click the button displaying the item’s current icon, to display the Change icon dialog.
2
Select the icon you want to apply to the item, then click OK.
Note:
You can equally change an icon directly from the Field Administration window, by clicking dialog.
to display the Change Icon dialog and then selecting a different icon in the
To rename the selected item In the Item Properties screen, click the Name field and edit the name as appropriate.
To display or hide the selected item in the structure tree Note:
In some cases, it may not be necessary to display all items, as they contain information that is irrelevant or of no interest to the company concerned. These items can then be no longer displayed in the structure tree (for any users). `
In the Item Properties screen, click the Item Not Visible In Tree check box.
69
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Display Tab
The Display tab is used to define text and other information that is to be displayed in the structure, in place of the name specified on the General tab. In the following example, we will specify that the text Workstation in building followed by the appropriate building name will be displayed in the structure tree.
To display feature data in place of a fixed name
70
1
To display fixed text in the structure tree, type the fixed text in the main field. In our example, you would therefore type the words Workstation located in building (including the trailing space that will precede the building name).
2
If you wish, you can choose to display item information in a specific font, text size, text color, and bold, italic or underlined text.
1 TrackBird Inventory
3
To insert collected data contained in a feature, click Select a Node screen.
4
To display the child items and features of a category, subcategory or item, do one of the following.
5
6
•
Double-click the category, subcategory or item name.
•
Click the
to display the
symbol beside the category, subcategory or item.
To select the feature you wish to insert, do one of the following. •
Double-click the feature.
•
Select the appropriate feature, then click OK.
For example, to insert the data contained in the Building feature located under the Location item.
71
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
7
Go down through the structure displayed in the Select Node screen until you find and select Building, then click OK.
8
Instead of displaying a single feature’s data, it is equally possible to display text containing one or more of the item’s features in place of the item name. An example is shown below.
9
Consider the User item’s Last name, First name and Phone number features. In our example, the data DOE, John and 123 456 7890 has been collected from a certain workstation. This feature can be used to open the User item’s structure to read and display DOE, John and 123 456 7890 instead of User, making it unnecessary to open the entire structure to each feature to read its data.
To read and display several features as the Item text 1
Open the TrackBird structure tree to display the User item as described above.
2
Do one of the following. •
Click the item, then click
.
•
Right-click the item and select Properties from the contextual menu.
The Item Properties screen displays.
72
1 TrackBird Inventory
3
Click the Item Properties screen’s Display tab.
4
Draft the expression required to display the last name, first name and telephone number, typing a space between the Last name and First name features and a comma followed by a space between the First name and Phone number features, clicking the to display the Select a node dialog for each feature whose data you want to display.
5
6
To display the child items and features of a category, subcategory or item: •
Double-click the category, subcategory or item name.
•
Click the
symbol beside the category, subcategory or item.
To select the feature you want to insert: 73
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
a
Double-click the feature.
b
Select the appropriate feature, then click OK.
The result should be identical to that shown in the following figure.
Platform Tab
Certain items relate only to specific platforms. The Item properties dialog’s Platform tab is therefore used to define whether or not the selected item is visible (and so available) on specific platforms, such as all PCs, PCs operating under DOS, or Macintosh computers operating under Mac OS X, for example.
Displaying or Hiding the Selected Item for Specific Platforms Certain items relate only to specific platforms. The Item properties dialog’s Platform tab is therefore used to define whether or not the selected item is visible (and so available) on specific platforms, such as all PCs, PCs operating under DOS, or Macintosh computers operating under Mac OS X, for example. By default, each item is available on all platforms.
74
1 TrackBird Inventory
To specify that the selected item is not visible for a specific platform, on the Category properties dialog’s Platform tab, click the Visible check box beside the appropriate platform’s name.
History Tab
The Item properties dialog’s History tab is used to define whether or not a record of all of an item’s value changes should be kept, and if so for how long.
To keep a record of value changes for the item selected in the TrackBird structure tree 1
If the Item Properties screen is not displayed, display the Item Properties screen.
2
If the History tab is not displayed, click the History tab below the Item Properties screen’s title bar.
3
In the Item Properties screen, select the Keep Item History check box. When the check box is active, a historical record is kept of the different values stored in the item.
To limit the period for which a record of the different values stored in the item selected in the TrackBird structure tree should be kept 1
If the Item Properties screen is not displayed, display the Item Properties screen.
2
If the History tab is not displayed, click the History tab below the Item Properties screen’s title bar.
3
In the Item Properties screen, activate the Keep Item Changes Over check box.
4
Specify the maximum period for which item value changes must be kept by typing the number of units in the text box and selecting the units in the drop-down list.
75
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
When the check box is active, the item’s values are retained only for the specified period.
To update the selected item’s properties `
When all of the item’s properties are defined appropriately, click OK.
TB Item Linked Tab If the item is a shortcut to an item, the TB Item linked tab displays. Use this tab to link an item to an existing TrackBird tree item.
Feature Table Linked Tab If the item is an external item, the Feature Table linked tab displays. Use this tab to choose the features in the TrackBird tables and in the external tables which will serve as links (external key) to locate the information. For example, you can select the feature Networks\Login name\Login name. The Login name can link with an external table containing the Login name value. In this case, you must create the external item under the item Login name and configure as shown below.
76
1 TrackBird Inventory
The Feature Table linked tab includes these fields: Field
Description
TB's feature
TrackBird feature name used to make the link.
Name
External table name.
Key field
Name of the field that will serve as a link to the TrackBird feature.
This type of item allows you to have the same information from the external tables in the TrackBird tree. Then for each field of the external table you must add an external feature, see “External Field Link Tab” on page 82.
Feature Properties To access the properties of a feature, do one of the following. •
Select the feature. Click
.
•
Right-click the feature and select Properties from the contextual menu.
The Feature Properties screen, containing four pages of information (General, Type, Platform and Information), is displayed. To configure the feature’s properties, select the appropriate settings in the four parameter pages of the Feature Properties screen, which are selected by clicking the appropriate tab below the words Feature properties.
General Tab
77
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Feature Properties screen’s General page is used to modify the feature’s icon displayed in the structure, specify whether or not the feature is displayed in the structure tree and change the feature’s name.
To change the selected feature’s icon 1
In the Feature Properties screen’s General page, click the button displaying the feature’s current icon to display the Change icon dialog.
2
Select the icon you want to apply to the feature, then click OK.
Note:
You can equally change an icon directly from the Field Administration window, by clicking dialog.
to display the Change Icon dialog and then selecting a different icon in the
To rename the selected feature `
78
In the Feature Properties screen’s General page, click the Name field and edit the name as appropriate.
1 TrackBird Inventory
To define the selected feature’s units of measurement `
In the Feature Properties screen’s General page, click the Units field and type or edit the unit of measurement text (MHz or Gb, for example) as appropriate.
To display or hide the selected feature in the structure tree Note:
In some cases, it may not be necessary to display all features, as they contain information that is irrelevant or of no interest to the company concerned. These features can then be no longer displayed in the structure tree (for any users). `
In the Feature Properties screen’s General page, click the Feature Not Visible In Tree check box.
Type Tab
Defining the Feature Type In the Feature properties dialog’s Type page, select the feature type from the Type list containing the following options. Type
Possible values
String
Text (its maximum length is specified in the Size field). Default length: 128 characters
Integer
-32,767 to +32,768
Float
A floating point number
79
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Type
Possible values
Date
A date in the following formats: DD/MM/YYYY DD/MM/YY MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YY DD.MM.YYYY DD.MM.YY MM.DD.YYYY MM.DD.YY where DD is the date in 2 digits, MM is the month in 2 digits, YY is the year in two digits and YYYY is the year in 4 digits. The separating character (/ or .) is specified in the Delimiter field
Time
A time in the following format: HH:MM:SS
Memo
A binary object
Boolean
1 or 0
Note:
The integer or float data type should be used when you wish to perform mathematical calculations on the specified feature’s data.
Platform Tab
80
1 TrackBird Inventory
Certain features relate only to specific platforms. The Feature properties dialog’s Platform tab is therefore used to define whether or not the selected feature is visible (and so available) on specific platforms, such as all PCs, PCs operating under DOS, or Macintosh computers operating under Mac OS X, for example.
Displaying or Hiding the Selected Feature for Specific Platforms Certain features relate only to specific platforms. The Feature properties dialog’s Platform tab is therefore used to define whether or not the selected feature is visible (and so available) on specific platforms, such as all PCs, PCs operating under DOS, or Macintosh computers operating under Mac OS X, for example. By default, each feature is available on all platforms. To specify that the selected feature is not visible for a specific platform, on the Feature properties dialog’s Platform tab, click the Visible check box beside the appropriate platform’s name.
Explanation Tab
With certain features, it is useful to display explanatory information, in addition to the feature’s name, in the structure tree.
To display explanatory information on the selected feature `
On the Feature properties dialog’s Explanation page, type explanatory information on the feature.
To update the selected feature’s properties `
When all of the feature’s properties are defined appropriately, click OK.
81
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
External Field Link Tab If the feature is an external feature, the tab External field link is displayed. Use this tab to link the new feature directly to a field in the external table, previously configured in the external item.
Software Glossaries Like all custom information you enter into the TrackBird database using the methods detailed in “Modifying the Data Relating to a Workstation” on page 15, software knowledge base information is stored in a table called a software glossary. These tables, each of which is made up of columns of details, describes programs used on either a PC, Macintosh, or Unix platform, categorizing each program as Known software, Unknown software, Unknown version, or Excluded software. These platform-specific tables and their contents are described in “PC Software Glossary” on page 85, “Macintosh Software Glossary” on page 86, and “Unix Software Glossary (Linux\AIX\HP/UX\Solaris)” on page 87.
To display a software glossary `
82
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Software glossary and then select PC, Macintosh, Linux, AIX, HP/UX, or Solaris as necessary.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Software Glossary Toolbar The software glossary toolbar and the software glossary navigation toolbar (see “Software Glossary Navigation Toolbar” on page 84) display whenever a software glossary display, and contain these buttons. Button Use Displays a screen listing all unknown software on inventoried workstations, in a structure tree view. To display the same information as a standard Microsoft Excel type list in which each workstation on which unknown software has been installed is immediately visible, click the Flat mode check box Displays a screen used to list, add and delete categories and subcategories
Activates or deactivates a filter that allows or prevents the displaying of the selected software glossary’s records containing known software, whose complete definition (including its version) is recorded in the TrackBird knowledge base. A blue square is displayed around the button when the filter allows known software to be displayed Activates or deactivates a filter that allows or prevents the displaying of the selected software glossary’s records containing unknown software, meaning that none of the application’s details are recorded in the TrackBird knowledge base. A blue square is displayed around the button when the filter allows unknown software to be displayed Activates or deactivates a filter that allows or prevents the displaying of the selected software glossary’s records in which the executable file version detected during inventory collection is unknown, although a previous version of the same software is recorded in the TrackBird knowledge base. A blue square is displayed around the button when the filter allows software whose version is unknown to be displayed Activates or deactivates a filter that allows or prevents the displaying of the selected software glossary’s records containing software whose information is not required and should be ignored when inventory data is collected. Examples of such files could include the EXE and DLL Accessories files supplied with Windows, whose inclusion in file use statistics may not be relevant or useful. A blue square is displayed around the button when the filter allows software whose information should be excluded from inventory collection to be displayed
83
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Software Glossary Navigation Toolbar The software glossary toolbar displays at the bottom of the software glossary screen and contains the following buttons for software glossary navigation and basic record management tasks. Button Use Selects the first record in the displayed software glossary Selects the previous record in the displayed software glossary
Selects the next record in the displayed software glossary Selects the last record in the displayed software glossary Creates a record in the displayed software glossary Deletes the selected record from the displayed software glossary Displays the selected record in edit mode In edit mode, updates the selected software glossary with the selected record’s displayed data In edit mode, cancels the current modifications to the selected record’s data and displays its existing data in the software glossary Refreshes the data displayed in the software glossary screen
84
1 TrackBird Inventory
PC Software Glossary The PC software glossary contains software knowledge base information relating only to software running on PC hardware platforms, as shown in the following figure.
PC Glossary Columns The PC software glossary contains these columns of information on each software program. Column
Description
Parent category
User-definable category used to classify software
Sub category
User-definable category used to provide a more detailed level of software classification within the Parent category
Editor
Software manufacturer’s name
Name
Software name
Version
Software version
Type
Known software, Unknown software, Unknown version or Excluded software
Resources
If checked, the executable file contains detailed system properties that can be examined to provide more detailed information (language, version, etc. displayed by right-clicking the executable file and selecting Properties)
Unknown Version
If checked, specifies that the executable file does not contain internal version information; the software is then classified as Unknown software
85
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Column
Description
Executable
Executable file name
Extension
Executable file extension (.EXE, .COM, etc.)
Exe size
Executable file size, in bytes
Serial position
Defines the serial number’s start position in the executable file, in bytes
Serial size
Serial number size, in bytes
Macintosh Software Glossary The Macintosh software glossary contains software knowledge base information relating only to software running on Macintosh hardware platforms, as shown here:
Macintosh Glossary Columns The Macintosh software glossary contains these columns of information on each software program.
86
Column
Description
Category
User-definable category used to classify software
Sub category
User-definable category used to provide a more detailed level of software classification within the Parent category
Editor
Software manufacturer’s name
1 TrackBird Inventory
Column
Description
Name
Software name
Version
Executable file version number
Long version
More complete version information on the executable file
Type
Known software, Unknown software, Unknown version or Excluded software
Signature
Macintosh application’s signature information (4 letters)
Creator
Application’s signature information (integer number generated from Signature, above)
Unix Software Glossary (Linux\AIX\HP/UX\Solaris) The Unix software glossary contains software knowledge base information relating only to software running on a particular (Linux, AIX, HP/UX, or Solaris) hardware platforms.
Unix Glossary Columns The Unix software glossary contains the following columns of information on each software program. Grouping
Column
Description
Software
Name
Software name
Editor
Software manufacturer’s name
Version
Software version number
Type
Known software, Unknown software, Unknown version or Excluded software
Name
Executable file name
Size
Executable file size, in bytes
CRC
Executable file’s checksum value
Date
Executable file’s creation date
Executable
87
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Software Glossary Management Software glossary management is performed using the software glossary toolbar buttons at the top of the software glossary screen and the software glossary navigation toolbar buttons at the bottom of the software glossary screen. Each of the software glossary toolbar’s software category buttons (see “Software Glossary Toolbar” on page 83) acts as an independent pushbutton. When a button is not pressed (meaning it is not bordered with a blue line), the corresponding software or version classification is not displayed in the list.
To display one or more software/version classifications `
Click the corresponding buttons so that each of the required software or version classifications is bordered with a blue line. The list’s Type column displays each executable file’s type.
Note:
You can also group the executable files according to their type as described in “To group glossary information by a column’s information” on page 88.
Grouping Glossary Information by a Column’s Information Software glossaries are organized in the form of tables, or lists, whose column titles can be used to group, sort or filter the information contained in the glossary.
To group glossary information by a column’s information 1
88
Drag the column header (such as Editor, as in the following example) to the gray area below the toolbars.
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
To display all records grouped under an item in the grouped column, click left of the item’s name.
to the
3
To hide all records displayed under an item in the grouped column, click left of the item’s name.
to the
Sorting Glossary Information Software glossaries are organized in the form of tables, or lists, whose column titles can be used to group, sort or filter the information contained in the glossary.
To sort the software glossary information by the data contained in a column 1
Click the header of the column by which you want to sort the data (such as Editor, as in the following example), above the data.
89
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
An upward-pointing triangle displays in the column header to indicate that the data is sorted in ascending order. 2
To display the software glossary information sorted in descending order, click again the header of the column by which you want to sort the data, above the data. A downward-pointing triangle displays in the column header to indicate that the data is sorted in descending order.
Filtering Glossary Information Software glossaries are organized in the form of tables, or lists, whose column titles can be used to group, sort or filter the information contained in the glossary.
To filter the software glossary information by the data contained in a column 1 90
Click to the right of the column header (such as Editor, as in the following example) to display a drop-down list containing all items in the selected column.
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
In the drop-down list, select the item you want to display (such as Microsoft Corporation, in the following example). Note:
The 3
button to the right of the filtered column’s header displays in blue.
To display all records in the software glossary once more, do one of the following. •
Click
, displayed at the bottom left corner of the filtered glossary.
•
Click the button to the right of the column header (such as Editor, as in the following example) to display a drop-down list containing all items in the selected column. In the drop-down list, select (All).
Listing All Unknown Software Installed on Workstations From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Software glossary and then select the software glossary containing the type of unknown software you want to list (PC, Macintosh, Linux, AIX, HP/UX, or Solaris).
To list all unknown software installed on workstation 1
Click
.
A screen displaying all workstations of the chosen type on which unknown software has been installed displays. 2
To display the same information as a standard Microsoft Excel type list in which each workstation on which unknown software has been installed is immediately visible, click the Flat mode check box at the bottom of the Unknown files per workstation screen. 91
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Transferring Software to Another Category In most cases, this consists in transferring unknown software or unknown version type executable files to the known software or excluded software categories. Here are two examples of when this may be necessary: •
Your inventory might list Microsoft Office XP applications (Word XP, Excel XP, Powerpoint XP and Publisher XP) as unknown version software. Upon checking the known software list, you see that the latest recorded version of these applications is Office 2000. These applications must therefore be transferred to the known category.
•
As your inventory lists all applications on each workstation, many executable files supplied with the operating system (PAINT.EXE, NOTEPAD.EXE, etc.) are listed although their details are of no use to you. In this case, you would transfer these applications to the excluded software list so they are no longer listed as unknown software when inventory data is collected in future.
To transfer executable files to a different category `
Do one of the following: •
In the TrackBird Server interface’s software glossary screen, if the filter button displaying the application file’s current category is not selected (meaning the button is not bordered in blue), click the filter button concerned.
•
Leave the other filter buttons unselected so that only the application file’s current category is selected.
To select the file(s) for transfer 1
2
Select a file using one of these methods: •
To select a single executable file for transfer, click its line in the software glossary screen.
•
To select a series of executable files for transfer, click the first file in the series of files then press Shift+click the last file you wish to select in the software glossary screen.
•
To select or deselect several executable files for transfer, press Ctrl+click each file you wish to select or deselect in the software glossary screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of executable files for transfer, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional files, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer files.
Select the transfer category using one of these methods: •
92
In one of the selected lines, click the software glossary screen’s Type column to display a list of categories. In the list, click the category to which you want to transfer the software.
1 TrackBird Inventory
•
Right-click one of the selected lines in the software glossary screen’s Type column to display a contextual menu. In the menu, click the category to which you want to transfer the software.
Modifying a Software Glossary A software glossary may be modified in the following ways: •
By adding a new software category and subcategory combination.
•
By deleting a software category and subcategory combination.
•
By adding software to the PC, Macintosh, Linux, AIX, HP/UX, or Solaris glossary.
•
By modifying software details in a PC, Macintosh, Linux, AIX, HP/UX, or Solaris glossary.
•
By deleting software from a PC, Macintosh, Linux, AIX, HP/UX, or Solaris glossary.
Adding a Software Category and Subcategory Combination User-defined categories and subcategories can be used to classify the software details listed in a glossary.
To add a software category and subcategory combination 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s software glossary screen, click
.
The Software Categories screen displays.
2
To create a category, do one of the following. •
Click
.
93
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
Right-click the Software Categories screen and select Add Category from the contextual menu.
3
The new category, labeled New category, is listed below the existing categories. Rename the new category by typing the appropriate name, then press Enter to validate the name.
4
If you wish to add a comment to the new software category, click within the Comment column of the line in which the new category is displayed, then click a second time in the same place. Type the appropriate comment, then press Enter to validate the comment.
5
While the new category is selected, do one of the following to create a subcategory. •
Click
.
•
Right-click the new category and select Add Subcategory from the contextual menu.
6
The new subcategory, labeled New sub-category, is linked to the new category. Rename the new subcategory by typing the appropriate name, then press Enter to validate the name.
7
If you wish to add a comment to the new software subcategory, click within the Comment column of the line in which the new subcategory is displayed, then click a second time in the same place. Type the appropriate comment, then press Enter to validate the comment.
Note:
The Software categories screen and software glossary screen must be closed in order to update and refresh the software category and subcategory information.
Deleting a Software Category and Subcategory Combination A software category and subcategory must be deleted by firstly deleting the subcategory concerned and then deleting the category.
To delete a software category and subcategory combination 1
94
From the TrackBird Server interface, click displayed.
. The Software Categories screen is
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
To delete the software subcategory, do one of the following. •
Select the software subcategory to be deleted, then click
.
•
Right-click the software subcategory to be deleted and select Delete subcategory from the contextual menu.
3
To delete the selected software category, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No. If you confirmed the deletion, the software subcategory is removed from the list.
4
To delete the deleted subcategory’s software category, do one of the following.
5
•
Select the software category, then click
.
•
Right-click the software category to be deleted and select Delete category from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected software category, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No. If you confirmed the deletion, the software category is removed from the list.
To add software to a glossary 1
In the software glossary screen’s navigation toolbar, click the top of the list.
2
In the new line, enter the software details in the appropriate fields (Editor, Name, Version, etc.) according to the field definitions in “PC Glossary Columns” on page 85, “Macintosh Glossary Columns” on page 86, and “Unix Glossary Columns” on page 87.
to create a new line at
95
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
Click the Type column, then select Known software in the list.
4
To record the software details in the software glossary, click of the new software details record, click
5
Click
; to cancel creation
.
to refresh the information contained in the software glossary screen.
Note:
Whenever you modify the software knowledge base, you must update the collection point so that the software knowledge base information is also updated on the client workstations.
To modify software details in a glossary 1
Click the column containing the information you want to modify and then type the new value.
2
To update the software glossary with the updated software details, click cancel the modifications to the software details, click
3
Click
. To
.
to refresh the information in the software glossary screen.
Note:
Whenever you modify the software knowledge base, you must update the collection point so that the software knowledge base information is also updated on the client workstations.
To delete software from a glossary 1
2 96
Select the file(s) for deletion, do one of the following. •
To select a single executable file for deletion, click its line in the software glossary screen.
•
To select a series of executable files for deletion, click the first file in the series of files then press Shift+click the last file you wish to select in the software glossary screen.
•
To select or deselect several executable files for deletion, press Ctrl+click each file you wish to select or deselect in the software glossary screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of executable files for deletion, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional files, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer files.
Delete the file(s), do one of the following.
1 TrackBird Inventory
•
Click
to delete the lines.
•
Press Ctrl+Del.
You are then asked to confirm you want to delete the files. 3
To confirm you want to delete the files, click Yes. Or
To cancel deleting the files, click No. 4
Click
to refresh the information in the software glossary screen.
Note:
Whenever you modify the software knowledge base, you must update the collection point so that the software knowledge base information is also updated on the client workstations.
Hardware Administration As with the PC, Macintosh, and Unix software glossaries detailing all widely used software applications, the information used to recognize all PC computers is equally stored in a glossary. Two generations of BIOS are used to store this information on PCs: Standard, containing the information as a hexadecimal string that must be linked with a commercial computer model, such as 00DCE corresponding to Compaq 4/66. Manageable (SMBIOS), which was introduced at the beginning of 1996 and has represented a considerable advance in storing model and component related information (memory, bus, etc.) in the PC computer’s BIOS. The model name (such as Compaq Deskpro 4000) is itself stored in this type of BIOS, meaning that a link with a model name is no longer necessary. A hardware glossary can then be useful for displaying other information than that recorded in the model’s SMBIOS information while still maintaining the link between the SMBIOS information and other models of the same type.
Model Management Screen The hardware glossary management interface does not provide the same level of visibility as that of the software glossaries since the table itself cannot be displayed.
97
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Instead, the hardware glossary management screen displays as shown below, in the form of two lists in which all brands and all models recognized by TrackBird display.
To display the hardware glossary screen `
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Model.
Hardware Glossary Toolbar The table below lists the various toolbar buttons used in hardware glossary management. Button Use Validates or unvalidates the selected hardware model (if the model has been validated, the button is bordered in blue) Displays a dialog for editing the selected hardware model’s displayed manufacturer and model details Specifies whether all manufacturers and models are listed in the hardware glossary screen, or only detected hardware’s manufacturers and models (if all manufacturers and models in the hardware glossary are displayed, the button is bordered in blue) Updates the hardware glossary
98
1 TrackBird Inventory
Hardware Glossary Management When a workstation is detected but is not listed in the standard hardware glossary, the value Unknown is recorded in the TrackBird Manufacturer and Model columns. The workstation model must therefore be added to the hardware glossary.
To add a model to the hardware glossary 1
Find the workstation concerned and write down its manufacturer and exact model details together with its TrackBird identifier (CPU0099 for example).
2
In the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Models. The Models screen displays listing all models recorded in the glossary.
3
To only list models detected during inventory data collection, click option is selected, the button is bordered in blue.)
4
If the model Unknown produced by manufacturer Unknown is not displayed, click to the left of manufacturer Unknown to display the Unknown model and then click to the left of the Unknown model.
5
Use the TrackBird identifier you noted in step 1 to find and select the Unknown workstation.
. (When the
Note:
You may find other workstations whose manufacturer and model are also marked Unknown in the same part of the hardware glossary structure. This means that other workstations are of the same type and you can choose to update their records with the correct manufacturer and model information at the same time. 6
Do one of the following. •
Click
.
•
Right-click the line containing the workstation identifier concerned and select Edit model from the contextual menu.
The Edit model dialog is displayed. 7
In the Manufacturer and Model boxes, do the following. •
Select the appropriate manufacturer and model in the dialog drop-down lists.
•
If the manufacturer and/or model are not already contained in the drop-down lists, type the manufacturer and/or model name in the appropriate boxes.
99
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
8
To update the list with the new manufacturer and model details, click .
9
To cancel updating the list, click
10
If you chose to update the list with the new manufacturer and model details, you must now validate the information contained in the database. This replaces the Unknown label recorded for the selected workstation and all workstations of the same type by the new information.
11
To validate the model, do one of the following.
.
•
Select the model concerned, then click when the model has been validated.
. The button is bordered in blue
•
Right-click the model and select Validate model from the contextual menu.
12
When asked whether you wish to update all computers of the same model with the new manufacturer and model details, to update all computers of the same model with the new manufacturer and model details, click Yes; to update the selected computer only, click No.
13
To update the workstation details with the new manufacturer and model information, click
14
.
When asked to confirm whether you wish to update the hardware glossary, click Yes to complete the update or No to cancel the update.
Note:
Whenever you modify the knowledge base, you must update the collection point so that the hardware knowledge base information is also updated on the client workstations.
To edit a model in the hardware glossary
100
1
In the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Models. The Models screen is displayed listing all models recorded in the glossary.
2
To only list models detected during inventory data collection, click option is selected, the button is bordered in blue.)
3
If the model is not displayed, click display the model.
. (When the
to the left of its manufacturer’s name to
1 TrackBird Inventory
4
Do one of the following. •
Select the model, then click
.
•
Right-click the line containing the model concerned and select Edit model from the contextual menu. The Edit model dialog is displayed.
5
6
In the Manufacturer and Model boxes, do the following. •
Select the appropriate manufacturer and model in the dialog drop-down lists.
•
If the manufacturer and/or model are not already contained in the drop-down lists, type the manufacturer and/or model name in the appropriate boxes.
To update the list with the new manufacturer and model details, click .
7
To cancel updating the list, click
.
If you chose to update the list with the new manufacturer and model details, you must now validate the information contained in the database. This replaces the existing information recorded for the model’s workstations by the new information. 8
To validate the model, do one of the following. •
Select the model concerned, then click when the model has been validated.
. The button is bordered in blue
•
Right-click the model and select Validate model from the contextual menu.
9
When asked whether you wish to update all computers of the same model with the new manufacturer and model details, to update all computers of the same model with the new manufacturer and model details, click Yes.
10
To update the workstation information with the new manufacturer and model details, click
11
.
When asked to confirm whether you wish to update the hardware glossary, click Yes to complete the update or No to cancel the update.
Note:
Whenever you modify the knowledge base, you must update the collection point so that the hardware knowledge base information is also updated on the client workstations.
101
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Glossary Administration TrackBird glossaries are tables of reference data that are linked to features in the structure tree and do the following. •
Make it easier to enter data by providing a selection list from which you choose the appropriate entry;
•
Ensure that the terms used are consistent, particularly if a number of people work with the inventory data;
•
Ensure that query results and statistics are meaningful and useful.
As well as the hardware and software glossaries, you can create other glossaries containing selection lists for the above reasons.
To display the glossaries screen `
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Glossaries.
Glossaries Screen The Glossaries screen is used to create, modify and delete glossaries and add, modify and delete records in glossaries. Glossary records can be created either by entering them manually or by importing them in one of numerous database or spreadsheet file formats.
The Glossaries screen’s Information page is divided into three areas:
102
•
Glossaries Toolbar (see “Glossaries Toolbar” on page 103)
•
Glossaries Screen Glossary List Pane in the left side of the screen (see “Glossaries Screen Glossary List Pane” on page 103)
1 TrackBird Inventory
•
Glossaries Screen Parameter and Data Pane in the right side of the screen (see “Glossaries Screen Parameter and Data Pane” on page 103)
Each of these areas is detailed separately below.
Glossaries Toolbar V331
The table below presents the toolbar buttons used to create and delete glossaries. Button
Use Creates a new glossary Deletes the selected glossary
Glossaries Screen Glossary List Pane The glossary list pane displayed in the left side of the Glossaries screen contains a list of all existing glossaries and is used to select a glossary to display and modify its parameters and data in the Glossaries Screen Parameter and Data Pane in the right side of the screen.
Glossaries Screen Parameter and Data Pane The table below presents the various parameter and data pane pages displayed in the right side of the Glossaries screen by clicking the appropriate tab at the top of the pane. Page Tab
Description
Information
This page lists the columns in the glossary selected in the left side of the screen. It also displays a brief description (if one has been entered) of the glossary contents.
Data
This page displays the contents of the selected glossary and is used to search for data as well as to add or import new data in the table and modify the table’s data.
Links
This page is used to create links between the glossary columns and the features in the TrackBird tree structure. These links are needed to update feature data using the glossary.
Update
This page is used to update the glossary using inventory data. In the case of a user who is not in the glossary (new employee, intern, etc.) because he or she was manually entered on a workstation, the glossary can be updated with his or her information, for example.
103
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Glossaries Screen Information Tab
The Glossaries screen’s Information page is displayed by clicking the Information tab at the top of the Glossaries screen’s parameters and data pane and is used to modify the glossary structure by adding, modifying or deleting field names, types and sizes and adding or modifying a brief description of the glossary. The Glossaries screen’s Information page contains a list of all glossary fields with their definitions, in table form.
Glossaries Screen Information Tab Toolbar The Information toolbar is displayed at the top of the Glossaries screen’s Information page and contains the following buttons for glossary field manipulation tasks. Button
Use Adds a new field to the glossary field list Deletes a field from the glossary field list Cancels all changes made to the selected glossary since the glossary was last updated Updates the glossary’s field information
Glossary Management To add or modify a glossary description ` 104
Click the Description field and then edit the description text as necessary.
1 TrackBird Inventory
To add a field to the selected glossary Note:
All glossaries contain a field, IDGLOSSAIRE, used by TrackBird to index the different glossary fields. This field cannot be modified or deleted. 1
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Information tab to display its Information page.
2
Do one of the following. •
On the Glossaries screen’s Information page, click field to the end of the field list.
to add a new
•
Right-click the Glossaries screen’s Information page field list and select Add from the contextual menu.
3
Type the field name with no spaces.
4
Click the line’s Type field to display the Type drop-down list.
5
Select the appropriate type from the list.
6
If the field’s Type is String, click the line’s Size field and then type the maximum permitted number of characters in the string.
7
To update the glossary’s field information, click ; to cancel all changes made to the selected glossary since the glossary was last updated, click .
To modify a field in the selected glossary Note:
All glossaries contain a field, IDGLOSSAIRE, used by TrackBird to index the different glossary fields. This field cannot be modified. 1
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Information tab to display its Information page.
2
To modify the field name, edit the text in the Name column. Do not include spaces in the field name.
3
To modify the field type, click the line’s Type field to display the Type drop-down list and then select the appropriate type from the list.
105
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
If the field’s Type is String, click the line’s Size field and then type the maximum permitted number of characters in the string.
5
To update the glossary’s field information, click ; to cancel all changes made to the selected glossary since the glossary was last updated, click .
To delete a field in the selected glossary Note:
All glossaries contain a field, IDGLOSSAIRE, used by TrackBird to index the different glossary fields. This field cannot be deleted. 1
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Information tab to display its Information page.
2
Do one of the following. •
On the Glossaries screen’s Information page field list, click the field you wish to delete and then click to delete the selected field.
•
Right-click the field you wish to delete in the Glossaries screen’s Information page field list and select Delete from the contextual menu.
3
To confirm that you wish to delete the glossary field, click Yes; to cancel the deletion, click No.
4
If you confirmed the glossary field’s deletion, click to update the glossary’s field information; to cancel all changes made to the selected glossary since the glossary was last updated, click
106
.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Glossaries Screen Data Tab
The Glossaries screen’s Data page is displayed by clicking the Data tab at the top of the Glossaries screen’s parameters and data pane and is used to display, edit, add, import, export and search for glossary data.
Glossaries Screen Data Tab Toolbar The Data toolbar is displayed at the top of the Glossaries screen’s Data page and contains the following buttons for glossary navigation and basic record management tasks. Button
Use Searches for specific data in the selected glossary Imports data from an external file into the selected glossary Exports data from the selected glossary into an external file Selects the first record in the selected glossary Selects the previous record in the selected glossary
Selects the next record in the selected glossary Selects the last record in the selected glossary Creates a record in the selected glossary
107
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button
Use Deletes the selected record from the selected glossary Displays the selected record in edit mode In edit mode, updates the selected glossary with the selected record’s displayed data In edit mode, cancels the current modifications to the selected record’s data and displays its existing data in the glossary Refreshes the data displayed in the Glossaries screen
Glossary Management To add or edit glossary data 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Data tab to display its Data page.
3
Click
to add a glossary record to the end of the glossary records.
Note:
All glossaries contain a field, IDGLOSSAIRE, used by TrackBird to index the different glossary fields. This field cannot be modified.
108
4
Type or select the appropriate value in each of the new record’s fields (to select an existing value in the field concerned, click the drop-down list button to the right of the field and the select the appropriate value from the list).
5
For each additional field whose value must be entered, press Tab to move to the next record field and then repeat the previous step.
6
To update the glossary and list the new values in drop-down selection lists when all field values have been entered, click .
7
In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to update the glossary or No to cancel the modifications.
1 TrackBird Inventory
To import data into a glossary 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Data tab to display its Data page.
3
Click
4
The TrackBird Server solution includes filters to import data from files in the formats listed in the Import Wizard screen. Select the file format in which the glossary data is stored, then click Next to display the next Import Wizard screen.
to display the Import Wizard.
The Excel file (*.XLS) option was selected in the following example.
5
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
109
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
6
To select the file containing the data, do one of the following. •
In the Import from File box, enter the file’s name and extension (the Import Wizard looks in the My Documents folder unless you specify another folder or directory).
•
Click to display a file selection dialog. Select the file containing the data you want to import and then click Open.
7
If the file contains data in ASCII format created in a non-Windows program, select ASCII (MS-DOS) in the File Origin list.
8
Click Next to display the Import Wizard screen.
9
If necessary, rename glossary data columns by clicking the data below the column name and then typing the correct name with no spaces.
10
Select all appropriate options in the following screens, clicking Next displays the next Import Wizard screen in each case, until Finish displays in the Import Wizard screen.
11
Click Finish to import the data into the selected glossary.
To modify a glossary record 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Data tab to display its Data page. Note:
All glossaries contain a field, IDGLOSSAIRE, used by TrackBird to index the different glossary fields. This field cannot be modified.
110
3
Click the record field you want to edit.
4
Click
5
Type or select the appropriate value (to select an existing value in the field concerned, click the drop-down list button to the right of the field and the select the appropriate value from the list).
6
To edit further field values, repeat steps 1 and 2.
7
To cancel the changes made to the record, click
to edit the record contents.
.
1 TrackBird Inventory
8
To update the glossary and list the new values in drop-down selection lists when all field values have been entered, click .
9
In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to update the glossary or No to cancel the modifications.
To find data in a glossary 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Data tab to display its Data page.
3
Click
4
In the Field Value box, type the value you want to find.
to display the search dialog.
Note:
To find part of a field value, type the text in the Field Value box and then select Partial Match At Beginning or Partial Match Anywhere in the Search Type box. 5
In the Fields list, select the field containing the value, then click Next. Only glossary records containing the specified text in the specified field display.
111
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To delete glossary data 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Data tab to display its Data page.
3
Do one of the following.
4
•
To select a single glossary record for deletion, click its line in the glossary screen.
•
To select several glossary records for deletion, press and hold down the Control (Ctrl) key and then click each record you wish to select in the glossary screen.
Click
to delete the records.
You are then asked to confirm you want to delete the records. 5
To confirm you want to delete the records, click Yes.
6
To cancel deleting the records, click No.
7
Click
to refresh the information in the glossary screen.
To export glossary data 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Data tab to display its Data page.
3
Do one of the following. •
To export all glossary records, click Wizard.
•
To export specific records, do one of the following. —
To select a single glossary record for export, click its line in the glossary screen and then click
112
to display the Export
to display the Export Wizard.
1 TrackBird Inventory
—
To select several glossary records for export, press and hold Control and then click each record you wish to select in the glossary screen. Click to display the Export Wizard.
The TrackBird Server solution includes filters to export data to files in the formats listed in the Export Wizard screen. 4
Select the file format in which the glossary data is to be stored, then click Next to display the next Export Wizard screen.
5
Specify the appropriate options in the successive Export Wizard screens, clicking Next displays the next screen each time. Note:
To display fixed text at the top or bottom of data exported to a worksheet, type the text in the Header or Footer box in Step 6 of the Export Wizard. 6
In the final Export Wizard screen, enter the file’s name and extension (the Export Wizard saves the file in the TrackBird Server folder unless you specify another folder or directory).
7
In the Action After Exporting box, select None (the file is saved), Open For File View (the file is immediately opened in the appropriate application) or Email As File Attachment (the file is attached to a mail message created in the computer’s default mail software), then click Execute.
113
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Glossaries Screen Links Tab
The Glossaries screen’s Links page displays by clicking the Links tab at the top of the Glossaries screen’s parameters and data pane and is used to display, create, edit, and remove links between features and glossary fields. The Links page contains two lists to the right of the glossaries list: •
TrackBird structure tree containing all TrackBird categories, subcategories, items and features
•
Glossary structure tree listing all TrackBird glossaries with their fields
Note:
A symbol displays beside all TrackBird structure tree categories, subcategories and features linked with a glossary field. All TrackBird structure tree elements linked with glossary fields are displayed with a symbol and the glossary field name beside their name. All Glossary structure tree fields linked with TrackBird structure tree elements are displayed with a symbol beside their name and the symbol and glossary field name below their name.
Glossaries Screen Links Tab Toolbar The Links toolbar is displayed at the top of the Glossaries screen’s Links pane and contains these buttons.
114
1 TrackBird Inventory
Button
Use Unlinks the element or feature from the currently linked glossary field Refreshes the information displayed in the Glossaries screen
Glossary Management To link a glossary field with a trackbird feature 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Links tab to display its Links page.
3
If the item or feature is not already visible, click to the left of the item’s or feature’s category name to display its subcategories or items.
4
If the item or feature is still not visible, click item’s name to display its items or features.
5
If the glossary’s fields are not already displayed, click name to display its fields.
6
Drag-drop the icon beside the item’s or feature’s name from the TrackBird Tree list onto the glossary field in the Glossary Tree list.
to the left of the subcategory’s or
to the left of the glossary’s
A symbol and the glossary field name are displayed beside the elements or feature’s name in the TrackBird structure tree. A symbol and the name of the glossary field linked with the TrackBird structure tree element are displayed below the glossary fields name in the Glossary Tree list.
To unlink a glossary field from a trackbird feature 1
In the glossaries list, select the glossary.
2
If necessary, click the Glossaries screen’s Links tab to display its Links page.
3
If the feature is not already visible, click to the left of the feature’s category or item name to display its subcategories or items.
4
If the feature is still not visible, click name to display its features.
to the left of the subcategory’s or item’s 115
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
5
If the glossary’s fields are not already displayed, click name to display its fields.
6
Select the Glossary Tree field or TrackBird Tree list item or feature.
7
Click
to the left of the glossary’s
to unlink the glossary field from the TrackBird feature.
Glossaries Screen Update Tab
The Glossaries screen’s Update page is displayed by clicking the Update tab at the top of the Glossaries screen’s parameters and data pane and is used to specify whether field data in the selected glossary must be updated automatically or manually when inventory data not contained in the glossary is collected, and update the selected glossary with specific collected data manually. The manual solution is preferable in order to maintain complete control over the update procedure. The automatic solution is suitable for processing inventory data in which there is very little direct user input, where the glossary is not used. The Update page contains Update Mode option buttons to specify whether or not the glossary selected in the glossary list must be updated automatically when data not contained in the glossary is collected, together with two lists to the right of the glossaries list:
116
•
Glossary missing data, listing data not contained in the glossary selected in the Available Items Without Correspondence field but collected during inventorying and recorded in an item or feature linked with a glossary field
•
Glossary data, listing all records in the specified TrackBird glossary
1 TrackBird Inventory
To update a glossary with inventory data automatically 1
In the Glossaries screen’s Update page glossary list, select the glossary you wish to update with new inventory data automatically.
2
In the Glossary Update Mode box, select Automatic.
To update a glossary with inventory data manually 1
In the Glossaries screen’s Update page glossary list, select the glossary you wish to update manually.
2
In the Glossary Update Mode box, select None.
To add inventory data to a glossary manually 1
In the Glossaries screen’s Update page glossary list, select the glossary you wish to update manually. All data not contained in the glossary is listed in Glossary Missing Data.
2
To export specific records, do one of the following.
3
•
To select a single record for adding to the selected glossary, click its line in the Glossary Missing Data list.
•
To select several records for adding to the selected glossary, press and hold Control and then click each record you wish to select in the Glossary Missing Data list.
Click
to add the selected data to the glossary.
To refresh the data displayed in the glossaries screen `
Click
to refresh the data displayed in the Glossaries screen.
Creating a Glossary A TrackBird glossary can be created in the following ways: •
Manually, as a custom glossary
•
From a database
•
From a file
Each of these methods is detailed below.
117
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To create a custom glossary 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Glossaries screen, click
.
The Glossary information screen will display.
118
2
In the Glossary Name box, type the name you want to give to the glossary (the name can include spaces).
3
To display a description of the glossary, type the description in the Description box.
4
Click Next to display the Glossary creation type screen.
1 TrackBird Inventory
5
Click Custom to display the Custom creation screen.
6
For each field you wish to include in the glossary, do the following. a
Click
b
In the line’s Name field, type the field name (do not include any spaces).
c
Click the line’s Type box to display a list of field types, then select the appropriate field type from the list.
to add a new line to the glossary fields list.
Glossary fields can be of these types: Field type Data type
7
String
Text characters (default length 128 characters; to define a specific maximum length, type the length in the Size field)
Integer
Integer numbers
Float
Numbers including decimals
Boolean
Values Yes or No, On or Off, etc.
Date
Date, in MM/DD/YYYY format where MM is the month, DD is the date and YYYY is the year.
When you have finished adding fields to the glossary, click Finish.
119
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To create a glossary from a database
120
1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Glossaries screen, click The Glossary information screen is displayed.
2
In the Glossary Name box, type the name you want to give to the glossary (the name can include spaces).
3
To display a description of the glossary, type the description in the Description box.
4
Click Next to display the Glossary creation type screen.
5
Click From Database to display the Creation from a database table screen.
.
1 TrackBird Inventory
6
In the Database list, select the InterBase database alias containing the database table in which the data is stored.
7
In the User Name and Password boxes, type the username and password combination (sysdba and masterkey) used to link to the selected InterBase database alias, then click Connect to connect to the database.
8
Click the drop-down list button above the left list to display the list of tables contained in the selected database, then select the table containing the field(s) whose data you want to include in the glossary.
9
Do one of the following to add field data to the glossary. •
To add a single field’s data to the glossary, select the field in the left list and then click
, repeating the process for each field required.
121
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
10
To add data in all fields to the glossary, click
.
Click Finish to create the glossary.
Note:
If you wish, you can modify the glossary and its data after it is created from the database table (to remove duplicate data for example), using the techniques detailed in “Glossaries Screen” on page 102.
To create a glossary from a file 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Glossaries screen, click
.
The Glossary information screen will display.
122
2
In the Glossary Name box, type the name you want to give to the glossary (the name can include spaces).
3
To display a description of the glossary, type the description in the Description box.
1 TrackBird Inventory
4
Click Next to display the Glossary creation type screen.
5
Click From File to display a file selection dialog.
6
Select the file containing the character-delimited or Excel format data for importing into the glossary, then click Open (a text file was selected in the following example).
7
If a character other than Tab is used to separate the fields contained in each record, click the appropriate option in the Delimiter field.
8
If the first line of data contains the field names, click the First Line as Column Name check box.
9
If each data string is delimited by quotes characters, select the appropriate delimiter character in the String Delimiter field.
123
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
10
Click Next to display the Creation from a text/excel file screen.
11
To rename a glossary field, click its column and then edit its name in the Name field.
12
Click Finish to create the glossary.
Note:
If you wish, you can modify the glossary and its data after it is created from the database table (to remove duplicate data for example).
User Management User Profiles at a Glance The TrackBird software solution includes user profile management functions used to control user access to specific TrackBird forms or queries. Note:
It is not possible to use profiles to restrict access to data contained in the database in the current version of TrackBird. By setting up different user profiles for TrackBird Server users, the administrator can ensure that no one interferes in system administration but that other users can nonetheless access inventory information and use the Structure or List views to access data via queries. User profiles can also be used to set up a different username and password for each person and so control access to the database itself. Each user must be a member of a group. 124
1 TrackBird Inventory
To create a new user 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Users parameters page is not displayed, click the Users tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Click
4
In the dialog’s Username box, type the user’s login (such as Operator).
5
In the dialog’s Real Name box, type the user’s actual name (such as John Doe) or a description of the user (such as Regional Center Operator).
6
If an end date is required for the user account (for interns for example), click the Expiry Date drop-down list button in the Account box and then select the appropriate date.
7
If an end date is required for the password (to ensure the password is changed at regular intervals for example), click Expiry Date drop-down list above Change Password... and then select the appropriate date.
to create a new user.
125
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
8
Click Change Password... to display the Password dialog.
9
Type the password (containing at least five characters) identically in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes, then click OK.
10
To record the user account details, click click
; to cancel creation of the user account,
.
11
To create further users, repeat step 2 on page 125 through step 10.
12
To close the User Manager screen, click OK.
To deactivate a user account This option is used when an account is being prepared in advance but not currently required (for future interns for example). 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Users parameters page is not displayed, click the Users tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Select the user whose account you wish to deactivate.
4
Click the Account check box to deactivate the user account until required (no check mark is displayed in the box).
5
Click
to update the user account details.
Note:
For details of how to activate the user account when required, see “To activate a user account” on page 127. 126
1 TrackBird Inventory
To activate a user account This option is used when an account has been prepared in advance and its use is now required (for an intern for example). 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Users parameters page is not displayed, click the Users tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Select the user whose account you wish to activate.
4
Click the Account check box to activate the user account (a check mark is displayed in the box).
5
Click
to update the user account details.
Note:
For details of how to deactivate the user account when required, see See “To deactivate a user account” on page 126.
To delete a user 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Users parameters page is not displayed, click the Users tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Select the user account you wish to delete.
4
Click
5
To delete the selected user, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
.
To change a user’s password 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Users parameters page is not displayed, click the Users tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Select the user account whose password you wish to change. 127
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
Click Change Password... to display the Password dialog.
5
Type the existing password in the Old password box, then type the new password (containing at least five characters) identically in the New Password and Confirm New Password boxes, then click OK.
6
To record the updated password, click click
; to cancel the password modification,
.
To create a new group
128
1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Groups parameters page is not displayed, click the Groups tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
1 TrackBird Inventory
3
Click
4
In the dialog’s Name box, type the group’s name (such as Operators).
5
Click the Expiry Date drop-down list button and then select the group’s expiry date in the calendar.
6
In the Description box, type a description of the group (such as Regional Center operators).
7
To record the group details, click
to create a new group.
; to cancel creation of the group account, click
. 8
To create further groups, repeat step 2 onwards.
9
To close the User Manager screen, click OK.
To delete a group 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Groups parameters page is not displayed, click the Groups tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Select the group account you wish to delete.
4
Click
5
To delete the selected group, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
.
To link a user with a group Note:
Each user must be linked with a group in order to control the user’s form and query access. 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Memberships parameters page is not displayed, click the Memberships tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
129
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
To add a user to a group, drag the user’s name from the Users list onto the group’s name in the Groups list. Repeat this step for all users you want to add.
4
To close the User Manager screen, click OK.
To remove a user from a group
130
1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Memberships parameters page is not displayed, click the Memberships tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
In the Groups list, select the name of the user you wish to remove from its group.
4
Press Delete.
5
To remove the selected user from the group, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel its removal from the group, click No.
6
To remove other users from groups, repeat step 3 onwards.
7
To close the User Manager screen, click OK.
1 TrackBird Inventory
To define a user’s access to specific TrackBird Server screens User accounts can be used to control access to specific screens (forms) used to display and potentially modify data in the TrackBird database, so that operators cannot access the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu commands or the Rules Manager screen, for example, but can nonetheless access inventory information and use the Structure or List views to access data via queries. 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
2
If the Forms parameters page is not displayed, click the Forms tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
131
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
Double-click the name of the screen whose access you wish to restrict. For example, to restrict access to the TrackBird Server interface’s main commands and menus, you would double-click Main window to display the Operator screen.
4
In the Groups & Users list, select the name of the user whose access to the selected screen you wish to restrict.
5
Do the following for each screen element whose access you wish to restrict. a
In the Action Name list, right-click the name of the element to display a contextual menu. In the menu, select one of the following options, repeating this step if necessary to set several options in the contextual menu.
Contextual Menu Use Command
132
Enabled
When checked, the selected element is displayed and can be clicked (active); when not checked, the selected element is displayed but cannot be clicked (inactive)
Read only
When checked, the selected information element is displayed but its contents cannot be modified; when not checked, the selected information element is displayed and its contents can be modified
Visible
When checked, the selected element is displayed; when not checked, the selected element is not displayed
1 TrackBird Inventory
For example, to hide the Fields menu and the Administration menu’s Users, Glossaries and Collection Points commands, you would uncheck Visible for FieldsMenuHeader, mUsersAdmin, mGlossariesAdmin and mCollectionPointAdmin. Note:
To ensure that the selected user is unable to change their own rights, you must uncheck either Enabled or Visible in the mUsersAdmin (User Administration) menu command’s contextual menu. b
When you have set all appropriate settings, click the Rights screen’s OK button to close the screen.
c
If you wish to control access to the screen for other users, repeat steps 4 onwards for each user.
d
If you wish to control access to other screens, repeat steps 3 onwards for each screen.
6
When you have finished defining access rights for users, click OK.
7
To close the User Manager screen, click OK.
To define a query restricting a user’s access to the TrackBird data User accounts can be used to restrict access by specified operators to specific information so that they can only access limited information. 1
If the User Manager screen is not currently displayed, from the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Users to display the User Manager screen.
133
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
134
2
If the Query parameters page is not displayed, click the Query tab at the top of the User Manager screen.
3
Select the name of the user whose access to data you wish to restrict (Operator in this example).
4
To restrict or derestrict data access for the selected user, click the User Access Restricted check box. When the selected user’s data access is restricted, the check box is checked.
5
To specify how the selected operator’s data access is restricted when the User Access Restricted check box is checked, click Edit Restriction Query to display the List Query screen.
1 TrackBird Inventory
6
Define list query criteria restricting which data the selected user can access. For example, Operator’s access is restricted to data concerning the Seoul location in the List query editor screen.
7
Click the List Query Editor screen’s OK button to save the restriction query and close the List Query Editor screen.
8
If you wish to control data access for other users, repeat steps 3 onwards for each user. Note:
To ensure that the selected user is unable to change their own data access rights, you must uncheck either Enabled or Visible in the UsersAdmin (User Administration) menu command’s contextual menu. When you have finished defining access rights for users, click OK on the User Manager screen.
135
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Machine Name Administration TrackBird allows you to define details for the machine name that displays in the Tree or Summary view. The default name corresponds to this file: CPU\Collection information\Output file.
Administrating the machine names allows you to easily identify a machine type. For example, this can be helpful when viewing machine names for Switches, Mobile/Handheld devices, and so forth.
To add a definition to the machine name
136
1
Click the operating system name to highlight it.
2
Click Add Feature.
3
Choose the feature to display. Also, you can add text to complete the name.
1 TrackBird Inventory
4
Click OK.
Note:
These modifications will take effect upon the next import of this machine name.
Customizing the User Interface You can customize the TrackBird Server user interface by: •
Customizing the Favorites toolbar
•
Specifying whether single or multiple TrackBird windows must be displayed
•
Defining the user interface language
•
Specifying whether the TrackBird tree query editing screen must be displayed, or a specified tree query must be run
•
Defining whether the TrackBird list query editing screen must be displayed, or a specified list query must be run
•
Specifying whether empty categories and features must be displayed or not in tree queries
•
Defining whether forms must be linked with a query or not when they are opened 137
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
Specifying whether a log file must be created or not when data is imported manually
•
Specifying whether data must be cached locally or not when it is imported manually
•
Defining how information on unknown software must be imported, and specifying whether collection points are updated with version information or not for unknown software
•
Specifying which TrackBird database element is linked with switches
•
Specifying whether category details must be generated or not in the Policy screen
•
Specifying whether confirmation messages must be redisplayed or not
Customizing the Favorites Toolbar The Favorites toolbar contains three buttons (Views, Queries, Reports) used to list and display frequently used views, queries and reports. You can add your own views, queries and reports to those listed as standard.
To customize the Favorites toolbar 1
138
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Manage Favorites Toolbar to display the Customize Toolbar screen.
1 TrackBird Inventory
2
To add a report, form or query to the Favorites toolbar, do the following.
3
Click the Forms, Queries or Reports tab at the top of the Customize Toolbar screen to select the appropriate toolbar button under which to add the report, form or query.
4
Drag the item from the Available Items box to the upper box to add it to the list. For example, to add the Customized Summary customized screen to the list displayed when Forms is clicked, click the Forms tab and then drag Customized Summary to the upper box.
5
To add further reports, forms or queries to the Favorites toolbar, repeat step 2 and onwards.
6
To remove a form, report or query from the Favorites toolbar, drag it outside the window from the upper box.
7
When you have finished customizing your toolbar, click OK to record the changes.
Any changes made are immediately visible.
Displaying Single or Multiple TrackBird Windows Although TrackBird Server can display multiple windows (containing different forms, queries and reports for example) with their name tabs listed at the bottom of the TrackBird Server screen as shown in the example below, users may find it preferable to display only one TrackBird Server window at a time, closing the currently open window automatically.
139
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To specify whether single or multiple windows are to display within the TrackBird Server application 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select General.
3
To display multiple windows within the TrackBird Server application (the default setting), click the Multiple Windows radio button.
4
To display a single window at a time within the TrackBird Server application, click the Single Window radio button.
5
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
Defining the User Interface Language The TrackBird Server application’s menus, commands and help can be displayed in either English or French.
To specify in which language the TrackBird Server application will display
140
1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select General.
3
Select the appropriate language from the Language drop-down list.
1 TrackBird Inventory
4
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
Displaying the Tree Query Editor or Running a Tree Query The TrackBird Server tree query editor screen is displayed by default when the Views menu’s Tree Query command is selected. In some cases, it may be more useful to execute a specific tree query instead when the Tree Query command is selected.
To specify whether the TrackBird tree query editor screen will display or a specified tree query will execute when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Tree Query command is selected 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Tree Query.
3
To specify that a specific tree query will be executed when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Tree Query command is selected, click the Execution radio button and then click to display the Select Query dialog.
4
In the dialog, select the tree query that will be executed when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Tree Query command is selected and then click OK on the Select Query dialog.
5
To specify that the tree query editor screen will display when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Tree Query command is selected, click the Edit radio button.
6
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK. 141
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Displaying Empty Features in Tree Queries Empty features (those containing no data) are included by default in tree queries. In some cases, it may be useful to exclude such features from tree queries.
To specify whether or not empty features are included in tree queries 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Tree Query.
3
To specify that features containing no data will be excluded from tree queries, unselect the Display Empty Features check box.
4
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
Displaying the List Query Editing Screen or Specifying a List Query The TrackBird Server list query editor screen is displayed by default when the Views menu’s List Query command is selected. In some cases, it may be more useful to execute a specific list query instead when the List Query command is selected.
142
1 TrackBird Inventory
To specify whether the TrackBird list query editor screen displays or a specified list query executes 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select List Query.
3
To specify that a specific list query will be executed when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s List Query command is selected, click the Execution radio button and then click
to display the Select Query dialog.
4
In the dialog, select the list query that will be executed when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s List Query command is selected and then click the Select Query dialog’s OK button.
5
To specify that the list query editor screen will be displayed when the TrackBird Server Views menu’s List Query command is selected, click the Edit radio button.
6
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
Defining a Form Associated with a Query TrackBird Server forms display all records by default when they are selected. In some cases, it may be more useful to execute a specific query instead when the form is selected, to display specific information or request criteria.
143
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To specify whether a TrackBird form will display all data or a specific query will execute when opening the form 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Forms & Queries.
3
To specify that a given query will be executed when the selected form is opened using the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Forms command, click the Query column beside the Form’s name in the first column and then click to display the Select Query dialog.
144
4
In the dialog, select the query that is to be executed when the form is opened using the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Forms command is selected and then click the Select Query dialog’s OK button.
5
To deactivate the query associated with a form so that it will not be executed when the form is opened using the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Forms command, click the Enabled check box to deactivate the associated query. No check mark is then displayed in the Enabled check box.
6
To activate the query associated with a form so that it will be executed when the form is opened using the TrackBird Server Views menu’s Forms command, click the Enabled check box to activate the associated query. A check mark displays in the Enabled check box.
7
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Creating a Log File for Manually Imported Data When data is imported manually from a remote collection point, you may wish to record information on its success and details of which information was imported. This is an import log file example:
To specify whether a log file is created when data is imported manually from a collection point and if so its location 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Import.
3
To specify that a log file will be created when data is imported from a remote collection point, click the Log File check box. A check mark is displayed when the option has been activated.
4
Click to display the Log File dialog and then specify the file’s name and location. 145
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
5
To specify that a log file will not be created when data is imported from a remote collection point, click the Log File check box. No check mark is displayed when the option has been deactivated.
6
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
Caching Data Locally When data is imported manually from a remote collection point, you may wish to cache the data locally while it is imported.
To specify whether data is cached or not when it is imported manually from a remote collection point
146
1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Import.
3
To specify that data will be cached locally when it is imported manually from a remote collection point, click the Local Cache During Import check box. A check mark displays when the option has been activated.
4
To specify that data will not be cached locally when it is imported manually from a remote collection point, click the Local Cache During Import check box. No check mark displays when the option has been deactivated.
5
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
1 TrackBird Inventory
Importing Unknown Software Information You may wish to define whether data on unknown software installed on workstations is imported from remote collection points and added to the inventory information displayed in TrackBird Server’s software glossary (described in “Listing All Unknown Software Installed on Workstations” on page 91), and whether the unknown files list is imported from remote collection points and added to the inventory information displayed in TrackBird Server’s software glossary (described in “Software Glossaries” on page 82).
To specify which information on unknown software is imported from remote collection points 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Unknown.
3
To import data concerning unknown software installed on individual workstations, click the Import Per Station check box. A check mark displays when the option has been activated.
4
To deactivate the importing of data concerning unknown software installed on individual workstations, click the Import Per Station check box. No check mark displays when the option has been deactivated.
5
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
147
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Updating Collection Points with Version Information You may wish to define whether data for software whose version is unknown is downloaded to remote collection points and added to their software glossaries for use when inventorying workstations.
To specify whether collection points are updated with version information or not for unknown software 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Unknown.
3
To update collection points with data concerning software whose version is unknown, click the Software With Unknown Version Included check box. A check mark is displayed when the option has been activated.
4
To deactivate the updating of collection points with data concerning software whose version is unknown, click the Software With Unknown Version Included check box. No check mark is displayed when the option has been deactivated.
5
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
Linking a TrackBird Database Element with Switches Although the location of switches is determined through the Location item by default in the TrackBird structure tree, you can select a different feature to define the switch location.
148
1 TrackBird Inventory
To specify which TrackBird database element is used to define the location of switches 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Switches.
3
To specify that a different item will provide the location information for switches, click Change Item to display an item selection dialog. Click the item that will provide the location information for switches, then click OK.
4
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
149
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Policy The Policy window allows you to set the window that first displays when TrackBird Server starts. This window will display a warning if new alerts were generated since the last time you opened TrackBird.
Also, you can define severity level from the window that displays when TrackBird starts or by clicking New Alert in the status bar of the principle window. This window contains new alarms generated since the last time TrackBird Server was opened. If you have cleared the Display A Popup On Startup check box, new alerts generated since the last time you opened TrackBird are indicated by in the status bar of the main window. Double-click this button to open the alert window.
Redisplaying Confirmation Messages A confirmation message displays at certain points in TrackBird Server use (when deleting elements of the structure tree or quitting TrackBird Server, for example). Frequent users of TrackBird Server’s administration functions may prefer to no longer display these confirmation messages and can deactivate the displaying of these individual messages by activating the confirmation message dialog’s Don’t ask again check box.
150
1 TrackBird Inventory
To reactivate the displaying of individual confirmation messages (shown above) 1
From the TrackBird Server interface’s File menu, select Preferences to display the Preferences screen.
2
In the Preferences screen’s left pane, select Prompts to list all confirmation messages whose displaying has been deactivated by clicking the Don’t ask again check box.
3
To reactivate the displaying of a confirmation message (such as the Close Application dialog in the above example), click the check box beside its name.
4
To close the Preferences screen and update the preferences, click OK.
151
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Software Distribution You must set all Software Distribution preferences in TrackBird Server before defining new packages.
Primary Distribution Server The Primary Distribution Server, i.e., your primary TrackBird IP Server, stores and distributes packages that have been prepared for installation on client workstations. To select a different server, click
to browse.
Next, type your username and password if necessary. These are not required if the current user has administrative rights on TrackBird IP Server. You may test another login by clicking Login Test. ASG advises testing the connection if you are working on a remote server. According to whether a login is successful or failed, the appropriate message box will display. Note:
Only TrackBird IP Server can authorize package distribution even if packages are installed from a distribution server.
152
1 TrackBird Inventory
Software Distribution Database The Software Distribution Database field defines the production database you will later employ to select target clients - the client workstations where software installation should take place. If you are using TrackBird Software Distribution for the first time the database alias defined by default is the one currently in use. You may want to perform a trial on a small number of clients before real package distribution. For this purpose you can create test databases. All database aliases can be selected from the drop-down menu. However, if you proceed to defining packages and profiles while using a database other than the production database, a warning dialog will display. This message warns that you are not using the production database. Click OK to recognize the warning. To select a different database, return to the Software Distribution Preferences window.
Temporary Directory Before being built and sent to the primary distribution server, packages are saved in TrackBird .CNB file format and stored in a local temporary directory. To determine the current path of the Temporary Directory, click
to browse.
When you have finished defining your Software Distribution preferences in TrackBird Server, click OK to confirm. Click Cancel to discard all changes.
SMTP Server The Server SMTP window allows you to specify the connection parameters for the SMTP server so that Policy can send e-mails that you have defined as consequence of your rules.
153
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
You may specify beforehand the value of the From field. This value will automatically populate this field of next consequences Send An Email.
Global Variables This option enables you to define global variables that TrackBird Policy can use. For example, the variable %ADMINISTRATOR% may contain the e-mail address of the network administrator and the e-mail address may be used afterwards as a consequence to a rule.
154
TrackBird IP Administration
Chapter 2:
2 You will use the TrackBird IP Administration interface to administrate TrackBird clients that use the IP protocol. The tasks you are able to perform using this tool are described in this chapter.
Running the TrackBird IP Administration Interface To run the TrackBird IP Administration interface `
Click the Windows Start menu, then select Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird IP Administration.
This is the default path to the program. The TrackBird Suite program group is that specified during the TrackBird IP Server installation process, see the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide.
Starting a TrackBird IP Administration Remote Console The Remote Console allows you to open TrackBird IP Administration on a workstation other than the primary TrackBird server.
To start TrackBird IP Administration from a remote workstation Note:
You must have installed TrackBird Server on the remote workstation. 1
Copy the application IPADMIN.EXE which is found in the folder C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG\TRACKBIRD IP SERVER in to the folder C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG on the remote workstation.
2
Start the TrackBird IP Administration interface on the workstation and specify the primary TrackBird server workstation. 155
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If several consoles are already started you will see a window similar to this:
3
Click Yes. The TrackBird IP Administration interface opens.
4 156
Make any modifications that you wish to save.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Remote Console File Menu
The Remote Console’s File menu includes these options: Option
Description
Save, Set Production, Same functionality as the main TrackBird console. and Configuration Disconnect and exit
Exits the application and disconnects from the primary IP Server previously chosen.
Exit
Exits the application and keeps the connection parameters of the primary IP Server.
TrackBird IP Administration Interface There are three elements in the TrackBird IP Administration interface, as shown in the following example. Each of these elements is described in the following paragraphs.
157
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This screen shows the TrackBird IP Administration interface:
Structure Tree The structure tree, displayed in the left side of the TrackBird IP Administration interface, is used to select a specific TrackBird IP Server, collection point or group that you want to create or configure.
Parameters Pane The parameters pane, displays in the right side of the TrackBird IP Administration interface, is used to configure (or carry out actions on) the item selected in the structure tree.
Menu Bar and Toolbar The first element of the TrackBird IP Administration interface is the menu bar and toolbar. You can access the TrackBird IP Administration interface commands using the menus (File and Help) or toolbar buttons at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration interface. The TrackBird IP Administration contains buttons used to configure how to save the current parameters, set packages in production folder, and display information on TrackBird IP Server. 158
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Menus The menu bar’s File menu offers the same functions as the toolbar buttons. Menu Command
Result
Save
Saves the configuration information currently displayed in the TrackBird IP Administration interface. The information is saved to CONFIG.XML. You can locate the XML file at this location: :\DATA. Note: This save will not take effect for the client machines. If you wish to update all changes select the Set Production option.
Set Production
Recreates components modified in CONFIG.XML and saves the file to this location: :\DATA. If there are no problems after the component creation, the IP agent will make all the components in production available to the client machines and copy them to this location: :\DATA.
Configuration
Opens the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Configuration screen. See “To configure the TrackBird IP Administration interface” on page 160.
Exit
Closes the TrackBird IP Administration interface.
The menu bar’s Help menu is used to display the following information. Menu Command
Result
TrackBird IP Help
Displays help information on how to use the TrackBird IP Server software.
About TrackBird IP Administration
Displays information on the installed TrackBird IP Server software.
159
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Toolbar The IP Administration interface toolbar contains these buttons which perform the same functions as the menu bar’s File menu commands: Button
Result Saves the configuration information currently displayed in the TrackBird IP Administration interface. Note: This save will not take effect for the client machines. If you wish to update all changes click Set Production. Saves the configuration information currently displayed in the TrackBird IP Administration interface in CONFIG.XML located at: ..\install directory\TRACKBIRD IP SERVER\DATA and recreates the components which have been modified in the folder ..\install directory\TRACKBIRD IP SERVER\VIRTUALDIR\FILES\TEMPORARY. After successful component creation, the IP agent makes all the production components available to the client machines and copies them into the folder ..\install directory\TRACKBIRD IP SERVER\VIRTUALDIR\FILES\PRODUCTION. Opens the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Configuration screen. See “To configure the TrackBird IP Administration interface” on page 160. Closes the TrackBird IP Administration interface.
Use of the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s toolbar buttons is described in the following topics.
Configuring the Interface To configure the TrackBird IP Administration interface 1
Click
.
Or
In the File menu, select Configuration. The Configuration dialog appears. This dialog enables you to configure the virtual folder and the number of machines by collection point.
160
v
2 TrackBird IP Administration
The TrackBird folder field displays the full path to the Web folder. For more information on the Web folder, see the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide. Note:
Do not change this folder path unless there are serious IP administration problems. 2
Enter a value to limit the number of machines displayed for each page in the machine list for each collection point.
Exiting TrackBird IP Administration To exit TrackBird IP Administration 1
Click
.
Or
In the File menu, select Exit. 2
To cancel exiting TrackBird IP Administration and return to the previous screen, click Cancel. Or
To confirm you want to close the TrackBird IP Administration interface, click OK. 3
If you have made any changes to the configuration parameters, you are then asked whether you want to save those changes before you exit the TrackBird IP Administration interface. •
To cancel exiting TrackBird IP Administration and return to the previous screen, click Cancel.
•
To close the TrackBird IP Administration interface without saving the changes to the previously saved configuration parameters, click No.
•
To save the changes to the configuration parameters and then close the Track Bird IP Administration interface, click Yes. 161
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird IP Administration Help To display help on using TrackBird IP Administration `
Do one of the following. •
Press F1.
•
In the Help menu, select TrackBird IP Server Help.
Viewing the TrackBird IP Administration Version To display information on the installed TrackBird IP Administration version 1
In the Help menu, select About TrackBird IP Administration.
2
The TrackBird IP Administration interface displays a screen containing the product name and version together with user license information.
3
To close the window, click OK displayed in the bottom right corner of the window.
Configuring TrackBird Clients via IP The TrackBird IP Administration interface is used to configure TrackBird clients connected to the TrackBird IP Server.
Structure Tree The structure tree is used to navigate between the following elements that require configuration in TrackBird IP Server:
162
•
Servers
•
Groups
•
Collection points
•
Packages
2 TrackBird IP Administration
When the TrackBird IP Administration interface is run, the structure tree is as follows.
Servers A default server, Main Server, is created automatically. All existing servers are listed under the Servers heading. All collection points linked to a server are listed below that server. TrackBird servers are described in detail in “Servers” on page 164.
Groups A default group, Group 0, is created automatically. All existing groups are listed under the Groups heading. Each group is completely independent and contains a specific set of collection points and their parameters. TrackBird groups are described in detail in “Groups” on page 169.
Collection Points A collection point is a set of data used to specify the parameters relating to a specific workstation or type of workstations, based on its IP address or their IP addresses. A default collection point, Generic collection point, is created automatically and is linked to the default group, Group 0. Although all existing collection points are listed under the Servers heading, they are not necessarily all used. Collection points that are used are displayed in bold text. Collection points that are used are also listed under the Groups heading. TrackBird collection points are described in detail in “Collection Points” on page 172.
163
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Packages The packages distributed by TrackBird IP server to specific client workstation versions are displayed by clicking Client version in the appropriate group’s section of the structure tree. Even if the above default configuration is not modified, TrackBird IP Server will collect inventory information from all installed client workstations. TrackBird packages are described in detail in “Component and Package Management” on page 228.
Servers What Is a TrackBird Server? The server concept in the TrackBird IP Administration interface is not the same as that used to indicate a network server, which is a physical workstation. In the TrackBird IP Administration interface, the term server merely means a specific folder on a physical workstation. There are two types of servers: the primary server (also called the main server), and secondary servers. There is only one primary server. For further information, see the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide. The servers are listed under the structure tree’s Servers heading. When Servers is selected in the structure tree, the parameters pane in the right side of the TrackBird screen displays a brief explanation of the server types, together with an Add Server button to add the primary server if the default primary server, Main server, has been deleted.
Primary Server The default primary server, called Main Server, is created automatically. This server is installed on the workstation on which you installed TrackBird IP Server. To display the primary server’s parameters in the parameters pane, select the primary server’s name in the structure tree’s Servers section. For example, to configure the primary server created by default, select Main Server in the structure tree’s Servers section.
164
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Configuring a Server The TrackBird IP Administration interface displays the selected server’s current parameter details in the parameters pane to the right of the structure tree, as in the following example.
The type of server selected and the server name is displayed at the top left corner of the parameters pane. In this case, it is the main (or primary) server. The server’s ID is displayed at the top right corner of the parameters pane. In this case, the primary server’s ID is 00000001. The following configuration details are set on the parameters pane’s Options page, which is displayed for both the primary server and secondary servers.
Name The primary server’s name, Main Server, is displayed in the Name field. This name can be changed at any time.
Server IP Address Each computer is identified by a number separated by points into four groups of up to three digits (for example, 255.255.255.255). This number is called an Internet Protocol address or, more commonly, the IP address. It is used by computers to communicate via the Internet.
165
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Server IP Address field contains the IP address of the workstation on which the TrackBird IP Server software is installed. This is detected automatically when the TrackBird IP Server software is installed. You do not need to enter this number, and you must not change it.
TrackBird IP Alias The TrackBird IP Alias field contains the TrackBird alias chosen when the Apache, IIS or other Web server is installed as described in the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide. The default alias is TrackBird.
TrackBird IP Port The TrackBird IP Port field contains the port number used to communicate with the TrackBird IP Server, specified when the primary server is installed. (See the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide.) By default, TrackBird IP uses port 80.
SSL Port The SSL Port option allows you to create a secure link between the IP Server and the client machines. To enable this option, you must first configure IIS or Apache to support the secure link. To install the client in secure mode, you must enter this address: https://ServerName:Port/Alias/. After adding the SSL functionality you can install the client machines in non secure mode by entering this address: http://ServerName:Port/Alias/
Max Bandwidth See “TrackBird IP Server Bandwidth on a Remote Network” on page 396.
Result Files Server Prefix The Result Files Server Prefix field is used to define a distinctive prefix added to the names of result files sent from devices such as cash tills or PDAs and collected on the server.
URL Path The URL Path list field is used to define the URL path to one or more standby TrackBird IP primary servers used in place of the primary server if the primary server is not available. To add a standby primary server, click below the list, then click the default URL path displayed in the URL path field to replace the default text with the correct path. To delete a standby primary server, select the server or Web page address in the URL path list, then click below the list.
166
2 TrackBird IP Administration
To change the order in which standby primary servers are addressed by the collection clients of the unavailable primary server, select the standby primary server whose position in the order you wish to change, then click
to promote the server or click
to demote the server.
Configuring a Secondary Server To configure a secondary server, when the server has been configured in the Options screen, click the parameters pane’s Secondary Server Options tab to display the following screen of configuration details specific to secondary servers.
The following configuration details are set in the parameters pane’s Secondary Server Options page, displayed by clicking its tab in the top of the pane.
Using SSL Select the SSL option to use a secure link between the main and secondary IP server. Also, refer to “SSL Port” on page 166 for additional details.
IP Service Refresh Interval The configuration files box defines the interval (in minutes) at which the IP agent interrogates the configuration files stored on the parent server to check whether any changes have been made.
167
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If there have indeed been changes, the IP agent updates the necessary files on the secondary server. By default, the interval is 1 minute, meaning that the parent server is interrogated every minute. The result files box defines the interval (in minutes) at which the IP agent checks whether new results files are available and, if so, sends them to the parent server. By default, the interval is 1 minute. The Time section box defines all periods during the week, in which the IP agent performs these checks at the intervals defined in the configuration files and result files boxes. When the server is configured as required, click
to save the configuration details.
The use of the , and buttons is detailed in the sections “To add a secondary server” on page 168,, “To add a collection point” on page 173, and “To delete a server” on page 168.
To add a secondary server 1
Select the primary server, then click
.
Or
Right-click the primary server and select New Server from the contextual menu. A new, secondary, server is created and linked to the primary server. The secondary server is therefore also listed below the primary server in the structure tree pane. 2
Once a secondary server has been added, the TrackBird IP Server software must then be installed on the secondary server workstation as detailed in the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide.
To delete a server Note:
If you delete the primary server, all secondary servers and collection points linked to it will also be deleted; if you delete a secondary server, all collection points linked to it will also be deleted.
1
Select the server you wish to delete, then click Or
168
.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Right-click the server and select Delete Server from the contextual menu. 2
To delete the server, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
Groups The Group Concept Groups can be created using the TrackBird IP Administration interface. Each group has its own parameter settings and can group together several collection points. The group concept is useful whenever you want to collect information from several entities separately. A group might be set up for: •
a geographically distant location (group 0 for workstations in Boston and group 1 for workstations in Los Angeles, for example);
•
a geographically restricted location (group 0 for ground floor workstations and group 1 for first floor workstations, for example);
•
a specific department in a company (group 0 for Sales department workstations and group 1 for IT department workstations, for example).
This group concept means that asset management can be more detailed and better targeted. In the previous example, the IT department’s needs are not the same as those of the Sales department. Each must therefore use a different approach, with information collected at different intervals and information uploaded differently… A group can also contain several different collection points. This is another use of groups: managing several different collection points using the same collection point options. By combining the two previous examples (geographically distant locations and a specific company department), we could organize our group as in the following example: There are two collection points in group 0. One contains all IT workstations in Boston, while the other contains all IT workstations in Los Angeles. Our group 0 (which we now call IT Departments) therefore contains all workstations in the various IT departments at head office and in company subsidiaries. Our group 1 (Sales Departments) contains all workstations in the various Sales departments at head office and in subsidiaries.
169
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a group 1
Select the structure tree’s Groups section title. A brief explanation of groups and an Add Group button displays in the parameters pane, in the right side of the TrackBird IP Administration screen.
2
To add a new group, click
.
TrackBird IP Administration adds a new group called Group 1 (if a group Group N already exists, TrackBird IP Administration creates a group called Group N+1; otherwise it creates Group 1) in the structure tree’s Groups section and displays the new group’s parameters in the parameters pane.
Configuring a Group The TrackBird IP Administration interface displays the selected group’s current parameter details in the parameters pane to the right of the structure tree. See the following example.
170
2 TrackBird IP Administration
The Group parameters pane contains these fields: Field
Description
Name
The selected group’s name is displayed in the Name field. This name can be changed at any time.
External Result The External Result Files Group Prefix field can be used to specify a prefix Files Group Prefix that will be added to all result files generated by the group’s collection point workstations. Knowledge Base Folder
The Knowledge Base Folder field specifies which folder contains the knowledge base files on the TrackBird server workstation. When the group is configured as required, click
to save the
configuration details. Max Bandwidth
See “TrackBird IP Server Bandwidth on a Local Network” on page 397.
At the end of each data collection, it is important to update the TrackBird database with its results. This action is called importing the result files into TrackBird IP Server.
171
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Field
Description
Folder
At the end of each data collection process, the result files are decompressed in the folder specified in this field. In this case, the default folder is C:\TBPCIP. To specify a different folder, click browse (...) to the right of the field to display a Browse For Folder dialog. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder you want and then click OK.
Database Alias
The default name is TrackBird. Choose the database alias where you want to import collection files if you use another alias.
To delete a group Note:
If you delete a group, all collection points and parameters linked to it also will be deleted. 1
Click
.
Or
Right-click the group and select Delete Group from the contextual menu. 2
To delete the selected group, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
Collection Points The Collection Point Concept A collection point is a folder on the server, to which all data collected from client workstations is transferred. Collection points are given names in the TrackBird IP Administration interface (the names are user-defined), to make it easier to organize your data.
172
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Collection points are stored physically in a specific folder (named RESULTS) on TrackBird servers; this folder is created when TrackBird IP Server is installed and is accessed when data is transferred via the IP network.
Further folders, each of which represents a different collection point, are created within this folder. In the above example, the numbers 2 through 10 correspond to the collection point ID, seen in the top right corner of TrackBird IP Administration’s parameters pane.
To add a collection point `
Do one of the following. •
In the structure tree’s Servers section, select the server to which you wish to add a collection point, then click
•
.
In the structure tree’s Servers section, right-click the server and select Add Collection Point from the contextual menu.
A new collection point, CollPt0000nnnn, is created and linked to the selected server, and its parameters display in the parameters pane. The contents of the parameters pane are explained in “Client Workstation Installation Options” on page 173.
Client Workstation Installation Options When a client workstation is installed, it is linked to a collection point on a TrackBird server, to which it sends its data collection results files. To display client workstation installation options, select in the structure tree’s Servers section the collection point to which the client workstation(s) will be linked.
173
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The parameters for installing the TrackBird client software on the workstation(s) linked to this collection point are displayed in the parameters pane, in the right side of the TrackBird IP Administration screen. These client workstation installation parameters are configured on the following four pages of settings, each of which is selected by clicking its tab displayed at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration screen’s parameters pane.
Name The collection point’s Installation Folder page displayed when the Installation Folder tab is clicked displays the selected collection point’s name in the Name field. This name can be changed at any time. It also specifies which folders are to contain the TrackBird client files on each of these workstation platforms: Field
Default Client Installation Folder
Windows NT clients
c:\tbclient\
Windows 9x clients
c:\tbclient\
Mac OS 8.1 - 9X clients
%BOOT%:tbclient:
Mac OS 10.x clients
/Library/Application Support/tbclient/
Linux, AIX, HP/UX, and Solaris clients
/usr/local/tbclient/
If all options on the collection point pages (“Installation Folder Tab” on page 175, “Installation Options Tab” on page 175, “Update Options Tab” on page 182, and “Tasks Tab” on page 183) are configured as required, click to save the configuration
details, click more options.
to set production to client workstations, or click a tab to configure
Specific Option: Randomization Before Network Access The Randomization before network access option allows you to specify a random waiting time before having access to the network. This option will replace the option selected under Agent Options in the Collection options settings.
174
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Installation Folder Tab To display the Installation Folder page of collection point parameter settings, click the Installation Folder tab at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration interface Collection point parameters pane.
Installation Options Tab To display the Installation Options page of collection point parameter settings, click the Installation Options tab at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration interface Collection point parameters pane.
175
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Installation Options page of collection point parameter settings contains the following fields.
Use Glossary Note:
This option cannot be activated if the Track Workstation Name Changes option is selected on the group’s Collection Options pane. See “Track Workstation Name Changes” on page 197. In cases where different workstations use a given IP address, for example, a glossary can be used to look up and provide the workstation (and therefore result file) name based on the IP address used. To activate this option, check the Use Glossary box and then select the appropriate glossary from the drop-down list.
Prefix To insert a prefix at the beginning of the names of all result files generated by the collection point’s workstations, type the prefix in the Prefix box.
176
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Choose Name at First Startup Note:
This option cannot be activated if the Track Workstation Name Changes option is selected on the group’s Collection Options pane. See “Track Workstation Name Changes” on page 197. To require that the TrackBird client workstation name be set the first time the TrackBird IP agent runs, click the Choose Name At First Startup option button. When this option is selected, the Collection Options pane displays the following additional fields, detailed below. •
Text Label
•
Mask
•
Value Type
Text Label To specify that fixed text will be displayed as a prompt when the workstation name is set, such as Workstation name? for example, type the appropriate text.
Mask To define an input mask to control which characters are input when the workstation name is set, type the appropriate mask characters to specify the workstation name format that must be used. The following mask characters are used in defining the input mask. Character
Meaning
A
A letter must be typed at the A position in the mask
0
A digit must be typed at the 0 position in the mask
a
A letter or digit must be typed at the 0 position in the mask
Z
Only letters may be typed after the fixed text
9
Only digits may be typed after the fixed text
z
Either letters or digits may be typed after the fixed text
177
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Some examples of the mask characters in use are shown in the following table. Example mask
Examples of input accepted by mask
AA00000000
US24681357 FR00000129 UK45800000
000AAAZ
625USCAdmin 326FRPAccounts 012UKATills
aaa000AAA
002133USC 16B425UKA 4C1114FRD
Value Type To define that specific characters must be input as part of the workstation name, type the fixed text in the appropriate mask positions. Some examples of value types in use are provided in the following table. Workstation name requirement
Value type
The letters US must be input as the first 2 characters of the workstation name
US????????
The digits 002 must be input as the first 2 characters of the workstation name 002?????? The text UK5 must be input as the first 3 characters of the workstation name
UK5???
Use Workstation Name Note:
This option is activated automatically if the Track Workstation Name Changes option is selected on the group’s Collection Options pane. See “Track Workstation Name Changes” on page 197. If you want to identify the client workstation by its own name on the network, select this option.
178
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Use Random Name Note:
This option cannot be activated if the Track Workstation Name Changes option is selected on the group’s Collection Options pane. See “Track Workstation Name Changes” on page 197. If you want TrackBird IP Server to allocate the client workstation a randomly-chosen name, select this option.
IP Range Each computer is identified by a number separated by points into four groups of up to three digits (for example, 255.255.255.255). This number is called an Internet Protocol address or, more commonly, the IP address. It is used by computers to communicate via the Internet. The IP Range field lists all IP address ranges for client workstations that you want to appear in the selected collection point. Data is collected only from client workstations whose IP addresses are in the IP address ranges listed in the IP Range field. A 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 IP range is created by default. This IP range is created so that data can be collected from all installed client workstations even when no option has been changed in the TrackBird IP Administration interface. This is intended to make TrackBird IP Administration easier to use by people who do not want to have to make any parameter changes.
To add an IP range 1
Click Add to the right of the IP Range list; a dialog displays in which you can add an IP range to the list.
2
Type each three-digit block of the lowest IP address in the From box, and each three-digit block of the highest IP address in the To box.
179
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If the IP range already exists, the message IP range already defined! displays:
3
Click OK and then change the duplicate number. If you input an invalid three-digit number block, its box appears in red and the error message Invalid range displays:
4
Click OK and then correct the invalid number.
5
To cancel creating the IP range and return to the previous screen, click Cancel.
6
To validate the new IP range, click OK. If the IP address range is input correctly, the Input Address Range dialog closes and the new IP address range is added to the IP Range list in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Collection Point Installation Options parameters pane.
To modify an IP range 1
Select the IP range that you want to modify and then click Modify to the right of the IP Range list. The Input Address Range dialog displays containing the selected IP range’s details.
180
2 TrackBird IP Administration
If the IP range already exists, the message IP range already defined! displays:
2
Click OK and then change the duplicate number. If you input an invalid three-digit number block, its box appears in red and the error message Invalid range displays.
3
Click OK and then correct the invalid number.
4
To cancel modifying the IP range and return to the original IP address range(s), click Cancel.
5
To validate the new IP range, click OK. If the IP address range is input correctly, the Input Address Range dialog closes and the modified IP address range is displayed in the IP Range list in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Collection Point Installation Options parameters pane.
To delete an IP range 1
Select the IP range that you want to delete and then click Delete. You are then asked to confirm you want to delete the range.
2
To confirm you want to delete the range selected in the IP Address list, click Yes.
3
To cancel deleting the range selected in the IP Range list, click No.
4
If all options on the collection point pages are configured as required, click
to
save the configuration details, or click a tab to configure more options.
181
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Update Options Tab To display the Update Options page of collection point parameter settings, click the Update Options tab at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Collection Point Parameters pane.
The Update Options page of collection point parameter settings contains the following options relating only to updates of previous client versions and not new client installations. In order to activate any of these options, you must click the Update check box.
Retrieve Existing Workstation Name This option is selected by default. If you wish to retrieve the workstation name used in the existing version in order to use it in the new software version, both in the TrackBird IP Administration interface and on the TrackBird network, check this option.
Use Existing Installation Folder If you wish to install the new version of the client workstation software in the same folder as the existing version of the software, check this option.
182
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Keep Existing Data Files If you wish to retrieve all data that has not yet been collected and manually input data (e.g., the workstation user’s Last name’, First name’, etc.), check this option. You should select this option if you also want to retrieve monitoring information such as software use rates and the various logins on the workstation.
Delete Existing TrackBird Files If you wish all existing data (including the folder, if the Use Existing Installation Folder check box is not checked) to be deleted when the client workstation software is installed, select this option. Note:
This option can also be used to perform housekeeping, to remove files no longer needed after a new version has been installed for example.
If all options on the collection point pages are configured as required, click the configuration details, or click a tab to configure more options.
to save
Tasks Tab To display the Tasks page of collection point parameter settings, click the Tasks tab at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Collection Point Parameters pane.
183
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Tasks page of collection point parameter settings contains fields used to perform specific tasks on all of the collection point’s workstations. Each of these tasks are detailed in the “Log Files” on page 188.
If all options on the collection point pages are configured as required, click the configuration details, or click a tab to configure more options.
to save
Quota/Redirection Tab To display the Quota/Redirection page of collection point parameter settings, click the Quota/Redirection tab at the top of the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s Collection Point Parameters pane.
The page Quota/Redirection contains the fields used to redirect following the installation of the client workstations on another server as the client workstation quota has been met.
Max Workstation(s) Maximum number of machines for this collection point.
Next Collection Point Choose the collection point where the client machines will be redirected to once the machines quota has been met for this collection point. 184
2 TrackBird IP Administration
If all options on the collection point pages are configured as required, click
to save
the configuration details, click to set production to client workstations, or click another tab to configure more options.
Adding a Collection Point to a Group After you have created a collection point as detailed in “To add a collection point” on page 173, you can add the new collection point to a group.
To add a collection point to a group `
In the appropriate group’s section of the structure tree, select the Collection points heading. All collection points linked to the corresponding group are listed under this heading.
A deactivated button, Add To Group, and a list labeled Available Collection Points are displayed in the parameters pane, in the right side of the screen.
185
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Available Collection Points The Available Collection Points box lists all servers in the structure tree’s Servers section with collection points that are not linked to a group (displayed in normal text). In this case, only the server ASG0002 has a collection point (ASGFR0002) that is not linked to a group.
A displayed beside each server listed in the Available Collection Points field whose collection points are not currently displayed. To display that server’s collection points, click
beside its name.
Add to Group Button
The button also displays the name of the group selected in the structure tree, between square brackets. In this case, this is Group 0’. To activate this button (as below), click the collection point that you want to add to a group.
Next, click Add To Group. 186
2 TrackBird IP Administration
The collection point is automatically added to the group and is displayed under the group’s Collection points heading, with its other collection points. The name of the collection point you have added to the group is highlighted and its parameters are displayed in the parameters pane, in the right side of the screen (the collection point information shown in the parameters pane is explained in detail in “Client Workstation Installation Options” on page 173).
The collection point’s name is now displayed in bold text in the Servers section, showing that it is linked to a group.
To remove a collection point from a group 1
Under the appropriate group’s Groups section of the structure tree, select the collection point. Or
Under the structure tree’s Servers heading, select the collection point. A Remove From Group [Group’s name] button displays below the group’s parameters in the parameters pane.
187
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
Click Remove From Group. You are then asked to confirm you want to remove the collection point from the group.
3
To confirm you want to remove the collection point from the group, click Yes. The selected collection point is unlinked and disappears from the group’s collection point list, and the collection point above it is selected in the list instead. The name of the selected collection point also displays in normal text under the name of the server, rather than in bold text.
4
To cancel removing the selected collection point from the group and return to the previous screen, click No.
Log Files A record of all file movements in either direction between a server and its client workstations is stored in a log file (the file has the .LOG extension). Installation of any workstations, or packages on workstations, is also recorded in the log file.
188
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Upon completing a client workstation installation, its name appears in the Machine list.
In the Machine list, select the workstation whose parameters you want to display in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s parameters pane.
189
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The workstation’s name is displayed in the top left corner of the parameters pane (in this case, FRSOPWEMILIE). Any one of the following actions can be performed on the client workstations the next time the agent is refreshed (every hour, and each time the client workstation is restarted) by checking the appropriate option in the Actions box.
Run Collection Process Action To force data collection from the client workstation, ignoring the data collection parameters, the next time its agent is refreshed, select this option. Data can be collected at user-defined intervals, each time the computer is started, at regular intervals (a maximum of once-daily), or never. For more information on setting the data collection parameters, see “Collection Options Interface” on page 194.
Full Uninstall Action To completely uninstall the inventory client from the workstation, select this option. Information is no longer collected from the workstation.
Partial Uninstall (Leave Data Files) Action To partially uninstall the workstation’s TrackBird IP client software the next time the client workstation’s agent is refreshed, leaving manually input data (e.g. workstation user’s Last name First name, etc.) and monitoring information such as software use rates and the various logins on the workstation, select this option. Information is no longer collected from the workstation.
190
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Reload All Packages Action To copy all appropriate installation packages from the TrackBird IP Server to the TrackBird client workstation’s software installation folder, select this option.
Move to Collection Point To move the machine from the collection point selected to another collection point, select the new collection point and click Select Collection Point. To delete this move, click Cancel Move. This change will not take effect until the next refresh of the agent on the client machine.
Log File The Log File field shows the log file’s complete folder path in the following form: [TrackBird IP installation path]\ [Web folder] \ results \ [collection point ID] \ [collection point ID]_[client workstation name].log
[TrackBird IP installation path] In this case, C:\Program Files\ASG\TrackBird IP Server’. This is the path specified during the server installation process, in the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide.
[Web Folder] In this case, VirtualDir. This is the folder specified during the server installation process, in the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide.
Results This is the folder created when TrackBird IP Server is installed. This folder contains all collection points. For more information on the results folder, see “Collection Points” on page 172.
[Collection Point ID] In this case, 2. This is the ID of the collection point containing the workstation. For more information on the Collection point ID, see “Collection Points” on page 172.
The Grid This shows a representation of the .LOG file, in grid form. The first column shows the date and time when the actions were carried out. It also shows which file was involved in the action. The second column shows the IP address of the client workstation for which the action was carried out. The third column briefly describes what action was carried out.
191
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The following actions are reported in the log file.
Icon
192
Index Action no.
Description
1
Installation completed
Workstation’s TrackBird client software installed
2
Error during installation
An error occurred while the workstation’s TrackBird client software was being installed
3
Uninstall completed
The workstation’s TrackBird client software was completely uninstalled
4
Error during complete uninstall
An error occurred while the workstation’s TrackBird client software was being completely uninstalled
5
Partial uninstall completed The workstation’s TrackBird client software was partially uninstalled
6
Error during partial uninstall
An error occurred while the workstation’s TrackBird client software was being partially uninstalled
7
Package installation completed
The packages were decompressed and installed on the TrackBird client workstations
8
Error during package installation
An error occurred while the packages were being decompressed and installed on the TrackBird client workstations
9
Package downloaded
The packages were transferred from the TrackBird IP server to the TrackBird client workstations
10
Error during package transfer
An error occurred while the packages were being transferred from the TrackBird IP server to the TrackBird client workstations
11
File transfer completed
The results file was transferred from the TrackBird client workstation to the TrackBird IP server
12
Error during file transfer
An error occurred while the results file was being transferred from the TrackBird client workstation to the TrackBird IP server
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Icon
Index Action no.
Description
13
Installation folder
(Retrieved when the Retrieve Status task is performed) The client installation folder’s name
14
Installed file
(Retrieved when the Retrieve Status task is performed) The name and size of a file in the client installation folder
The Index No column shows the ID of the action found in the log file. Here is an example of the contents of a log file:
To refresh the information displayed in the grid, click To clear all information displayed in the grid, click
. .
To delete the selected workstation from the list of workstations displayed in the structure tree, click the Delete Workstation From List button. Note:
Information will nevertheless be collected from the client workstation in future inventory information collections; the workstation will then be displayed again in the structure tree.
193
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Configuring Collection Options Collection Options Interface To configure the TrackBird IP client information collection options using the TrackBird IP Administration interface, click the Collection options heading in the appropriate group’s section of the structure tree. The Collection options include eleven elements. Access these elements from the TrackBird IP Administration tree view (left side of the interface) or select an element from the Collections-options Home page.
Schedule Page Use this page to specify how frequently information is collected, define which information is displayed during audits, define whether the collection results must be displayed on the screen following collection and specify ranges of days and times when you do not want information to be collected. The fields displayed on the Schedule page are detailed in “Schedule Page” on page 196.
Monitoring Use this page to set up options for rates of software usage (statistics). Audit dates and restrictions periods are also set on this page. The fields displayed on the Monitoring pane are detailed in “Monitoring Page” on page 200.
Collected Files Use this page to use TrackBird to collect files that are not inventoried automatically by TrackBird. These files, which include files such as TXT and INI files, can then be edited by a text editor. The fields displayed on the Collected files page are detailed in “Collected Files Page” on page 202.
Registry Keys Use this page to collect values from specific Windows Registry keys and include this information in the inventory’s results. The fields displayed on the Registry keys page are detailed in “Registry Keys Page” on page 205.
Windows Options Use this page to configure options relating only to TrackBird client workstations running under Windows. The fields displayed on the Windows options page are detailed in “Windows Options Page” on page 208. 194
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Agent Options Use this page to configure options used to define TrackBird client agent running periods and starting lags. The fields displayed on the Agent options page are detailed in “Agent Options Page” on page 210.
Folder Options Use this page to specify any folders excluded from inventory information collection or inventory information collection options relating to specific folders on Windows client workstations. The fields displayed on the Folder options page are detailed in “Folder Options Page” on page 212.
Macintosh Options Use this page to configure options relating only to TrackBird client workstations running on Macintosh computers. The fields displayed on the Macintosh options page are detailed in “Macintosh Options Page” on page 215.
Linux Options Use this page to configure options relating only to TrackBird client workstations running under Linux. The fields displayed on the Linux options page are detailed in “Linux Options Page” on page 216.
System Monitoring Use this page to configure an alert. Based on a centralized alert definition, each workstation sends alerts when it meets this criteria: •
CPU usage
•
Network usage
•
Disk usage, Memory usage
•
Number of workstation reboots
•
Number of application crashes
From the Inventory client, the alerts are sent as SNMP traps, e-mails, network messages, or will start external programs. See “Creating a TrackBird Alert ” on page 217 for more details.
195
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
System Monitoring Page To Display the System Monitoring page, click Collect Options then click the sub option System Monitoring. Use this page to create a system alert for windows machines. See “Creating a TrackBird Alert ” on page 217 for details.
Methods Page Use this page to specify the collection methods that you want to apply on each platform.
Schedule Page To display the Schedule page of information collection settings, click Schedule in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
The following fields are displayed on the Options page.
196
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Hardware/Software Collection This table describes the available options: Option
Description
Frequency
Select one of the following, depending on how frequently you want the TrackBird agent to run. • On startup, i.e., at the start of each new session; • At regular intervals, defining how frequently in the Quick Scan and Full Scan boxes. This value can be set by specifying a number between 1 and 9999 (inclusive) followed by one of the following letters; for example the default value 1D specifies that the agent will be run daily. D for day W for week M for month Q for quarter Y for year • Never i.e., the agent will never run automatically to collect inventory information.
Recover Unknown Software
Select this option in order to gather information on all applications on the TrackBird client workstations; this can then be added to, and so enhance, the TrackBird knowledge base.
Operation Option
Description
Display Progress If you wish to display collection progress on the client workstation while collection is taking place, select this option. Notify user
If you wish to display a screen on the TrackBird client workstation before the data collection agent is run, asking whether the user to confirm whether or not he or she wishes the agent to run, select this option.
Track Workstation Name Changes
Collection file names usually include the workstation name, so if a workstation changes its name, so do the collection result files. This option is selected by default.
197
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Option
Description If you do not wish TrackBird IP Server to check whether the name of each workstation whose information is collected has changed and use the new name in the results files, deselect this option.
Allow RAS connections
Authorizes the client to install, then to do a collect on the machines with a modem connection.
Edit Results To display an inventory collection results screen at the end of inventory information collection, select this option. An additional field relating only to this option is activated when the Edit Results option is selected, specifying how regularly the collection results must be edited. By default, the field is set to 1D, meaning that the results are edited daily. Note:
Hardware information collection must be performed at least once during the period defined in this field in order to edit the inventory collection results. The hardware information collection period is defined in “Frequency” on page 197 To change the frequency with which the results are edited, specify a number between 1 and 9999 (inclusive), followed by one of the following letters: •
D for day
•
W for week
•
M for month
•
Q for quarter
•
Y for year
If the Edit Results option is selected, the following screen displays showing the collection results each time inventory information is collected on the client workstations (at the specified intervals). The screen can be customized using TrackBird Designer, TrackBird’s interface editing module.
198
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Force Inventory Result To display the inventory results screen after inventory collection is forced (regardless of what regularity has been specified), select this option.
By URL The By URL field is used to specify the path to a Web page used to provide the inventorist interface for PC, Mac OS 7.6.1 to 9.2.2 and, notably, for Mac OS X workstations (as Mac OS X workstations have no alternative inventorist interface).
Exclusion Ranges This field is used to specify that data is not collected at a given time and/or on a given day. The Exclusion Ranges field contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for exclusion are colored red. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row.
199
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
In the following example, the Exclusion Ranges field specifies that data will not be collected on Saturdays, Sundays, or Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Monitoring Page To display the Monitoring page of information collection settings, click Monitoring in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view. If you have the Monitoring module, the monitoring is working all the time. Use this page to reduce the interval (software use audit) or add restrictions.
The following fields are displayed on the Monitoring page.
200
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Software Use Audit Option
Description
Execute Audit
The software use audit records details of the rate of software use. This audit is used to find out how often software is used and for how long. By default, the Execute Audit check box is not checked and the other components in the Software Use Audit box are deactivated. To generate the software use audit report, select this option. The Begin Audit and End Audit fields are then also activated.
Begin Audit, and End Audit
To define a period during which software use audits must be run, select the period start date in the Begin Audit field, and its end date in the End Audit field. To change the date in the Begin Audit and End Audit fields, click the field’s drop-down list button to display a calendar and then select the appropriate date in the calendar.
Restrictions The Restrictions field is used to exclude certain times or days from software use audit information collection.
201
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The field contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for exclusion are colored red. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row. In the following example, the Restrictions field specifies that software use will not be audited on Saturdays, Sundays, or Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Collected Files Page To display the Collected Files page of information collection settings, click Collected files in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view. Note:
This page is only available for Windows clients.
202
2 TrackBird IP Administration
The file collection list box above the Add and Delete buttons lists all files to be collected. The following information is returned for each file specified on this page: •
File name
•
File content
•
Creation date
•
Last modification date
•
Last access date
The following fields are displayed on the Collected Files page.
File Name The File Name field contains the name of the file currently selected in the file collection list.
File Location The File Location radio buttons are used to specify the location of the file selected in the file collection list. This location tells TrackBird IP Server where to find the file. The radio buttons are deactivated when no file is selected.
203
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a file to the collection list 1
Click Add.
2
A sample filename, FILE.EXT, is displayed both in the collection list and in the File Name box (the sample filename is already highlighted).
3
Type the appropriate filename, without typing the path to the file.
4
In the File location box, select the location of the selected file.
To remove a file from the collection list
204
1
In the collection list, select the file you wish to remove from the list.
2
Click Delete.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Registry Keys Page To display the Registry Keys page of information collection settings, click Registry Keys in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
This option is used to retrieve the values stored in the specified Registry keys (that might have been created by the Administrator, for example) and enter them into TrackBird structure tree fields. The following fields are displayed on the Registry Keys page.
Link The Link field shows the path of the feature linked to the Registry key selected in the list.
TrackBird Tree The TrackBird Tree field lists all features whose details can be collected by TrackBird IP Server as it is shown in TrackBird Server’s tree structure. The tree structure also contains the features created using TrackBird Server’s Administration/Fields command, detailed in “Field Administration” on page 58. 205
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Registry Keys The Registry Keys field lists all Registry key values to be collected by TrackBird IP Server.
To collect information from the registry Note:
In order to collect information from the Windows Registry, you must complete these steps for each item of information. 1
If necessary, use TrackBird Server to create the field needed to collect the required information and to update collection points so as to regenerate the knowledge base. For details of how to create a field using TrackBird Server, see “Creating a Customized Structure Tree” on page 61.
2
Add a Registry key to the list.
3
Link the field to the new Registry key.
4
Modify the Registry key text to indicate the correct key in the Windows Registry.
Steps 2, 3, and 4 of this process are detailed below.
Add a Registry Key to the List When the field used to collect the required information has been created in TrackBird Server, click in the Registry keys field to add a default Registry key. This Registry key is not linked to any feature in the TrackBird database tree structure; No link is displayed in the Link field at the top of the Collection options parameters pane.
206
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Link the Field in the TrackBird Database Tree Structure to the Registry Key Do one of the following. •
Select the feature that you want to link, and then press and hold down the mouse button. Drag and drop the feature to the Registry key.
•
Double-click the feature that you want to link.
An icon is displayed beside the Registry key and the feature to show that each is linked, and the Link field at the top of the screen displays the corresponding feature’s path.
Modify the Registry Key The default Registry key created is: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Product Id In the Registry key list, click the key in order to edit the text (or press F2) and then type the complete path of the Registry key you want.
Delete a Registry Key Select the key you want to delete. Click
.
Reduce the Size of the TrackBird Structure Tree To reduce the TrackBird structure tree to its original form (displaying only the categories), click
.
207
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Windows Options Page To display the Windows options page of information collection settings, click the Windows options in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
The following fields are displayed on the Windows Options page.
Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) The collector uses SMBIOS to gather data but for some manufacturers, (such as IBM), WMI must be used to gather data. WMI is included with Windows 2000 and Windows XP but you must install it separately for Windows NT and 9x.
Mobile Devices Automatic installation of the collector for mobile devices. See the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide for details.
Designer Interface File You can use TrackBird IP Server to input additional information into TrackBird through one or more completely customizable, editable interfaces. You create interfaces using TrackBird Designer. (For information on how to create interface files, see the TrackBird Designer help information provided with the TrackBird suite.) All interface files (these are called ODF files as all Designer interface files have the .ODF file extension) that are distributed when the TrackBird client software is installed are listed on this tab. The INTERWIN.ODF file contains the default interface distributed when the clients are installed. This is the interface used at the end of data collection when the Edit Results check box is checked on the Options tab. You can add or delete fields to the interface using the TrackBird Designer interface customization module.
208
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Displaying a Customized Interface You can also create your own interface using the TrackBird Designer module and delete the default interface. To display the new or modified interface at the end of data collection when the Edit Results check box is active on the Options tab, you must name it INTERWIN.ODF.
Adding an ODF File To distribute and use several interfaces, click file location dialog is then displayed.
to add each corresponding ODF file. A
Select the file you want to add and then click the Open button. The selected file is added to the list of ODF files, below INTERWIN.ODF. Note:
Only one interface is displayed at the end of data collection when the Edit results check box is checked on the Options tab. This is always the interface defined in the INTERWIN.ODF file, regardless of this file’s position in the list. The other interfaces are distributed to TrackBird client workstations and are used directly on those workstations. To display an interface, go to the client workstation concerned and then double-click the corresponding ODF file.
Removing an ODF File Select the file you want to delete, then click
.
209
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Agent Options Page To display the Agent Options page of information collection settings, click Agent options in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
The following fields are displayed on the Agent Options page.
Delay Before Collector Start To delay the start of any processing after the TrackBird agent starts, specify a time in the Delay Before Collector Start box. This may cure incompatibility problems occasionally encountered when the TrackBird agent and anti-virus software both begin running at virtually the same moment.
Randomization Before Network Access This option allows the user to specify a random waiting time before accessing the network. Therefore this option is defined at the level of the collection point, it replaces the defined value in this section.
Refresh Interval By default, the TrackBird agent refreshes the collected data results on the TrackBird IP Server at 60-minute intervals.
210
2 TrackBird IP Administration
To change this interval, replace the default value in the text box by a different value (in minutes). To stop refreshing the collected data results, click the Refresh Interval check box to deselect the option. To define specific periods during which the data results are sent to the TrackBird IP Server, select the Time Section (so deactivating this option).
Time Section The Time Section field is used to select periods during which data is transmitted via IP across the network, rather than continuously as when the Refresh Interval option is selected. To define specific periods during which the data results are sent to the TrackBird Server, click the Time Section check box to activate this option (so deactivating the Refresh Interval option). The field contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23, when the 1 hour button below the field is selected. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
To select TrackBird data transmission periods in hourly units, click the 1 hour button. To select TrackBird data transmission periods in half-hour units, click the 30 minutes button. To select TrackBird data transmission periods in quarter-hour units, click the 15 minutes button. To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for inclusion are colored blue. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row.
211
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
In the following example, the Time Section field specifies that TrackBird data will be sent via IP on all days and at all times except Saturdays, Sundays, and Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Folder Options Page To display the Folder Options page of information collection settings, click Folder options in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
This tab can only be used on PC workstations, and is used to define whether specific folders are to be examined closely during collection of software information, or whether they should be excluded from collection. 212
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Adding a Folder to the List Click
.
A new folder, labeled %TEMP% in the list’s Folder column, is added to the list. Replace this temporary name with the appropriate folder name, then click in any column other than the Folder column to validate the updated folder name.
Returning the Size of Data Contained In a Folder Do one of the following. •
Double-click within the S column, in the row that contains the folder’s name.
•
Right-click the folder’s line and select Calculate folder size from the contextual menu.
A
symbol is displayed in the folder row’s S (size) column if the option is selected.
Including or Excluding a Folder During Software Information Collection By default, folders specified in the list are excluded from software information collection. To deactivate or activate this option, do one of the following. •
Double-click within the E (exclude folder) column, in the row that contains the folder’s name.
•
Right-click the folder’s line and select Exclude folder from the contextual menu.
A
symbol is displayed in the folder row’s E column if the option is selected.
Including or Excluding a Folder’s Subfolders During Software Information Collection By default, subfolders are included in software information collection when their parent folder is contained in the list. To deactivate or activate this option, do one of the following. •
Double-click within the R (recurse subfolders) column, in the row that contains the folder’s name.
•
Right-click the folder’s line and select Include sub folder from the contextual menu.
A
symbol is displayed in the folder row’s R column if the option is selected.
213
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Defining or Modifying a Filter Restricting which Files are Included in Software Information Collection from a Folder By default, no filter is defined for folders contained in the list. To define or modify a filter, right-click the folder’s line and select Change Filter from the contextual menu. Type the filter definition, using HTML syntax. For example, to include all files whose suffix is .EXE, you would type: *.exe
Therefore the executable files in this folder will be sent into the elements Software\File\File information of the TrackBird tree. Click in any column other than the Filter column to validate the updated filter.
Removing a Filter Limiting which Files are Included in Software Information Collection From a Folder By default, no filter is defined for folders contained in the list. To delete a filter, right-click the folder’s line and select Change Filter from the contextual menu. Delete all text contained in the text box, then click in any column other than the Filter column to validate the updated filter.
Removing a Folder from the List Click the folder, then click
214
.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Macintosh Options Page To display the Macintosh Options page of information collection settings, click Macintosh Options in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
v3follo wing fields are displayed on the Macintosh Options page.
Software Scan Method Scan Disk, or Scan Folder Specify whether you wish to search for software by analyzing all disks or by analyzing all folders.
Control Panels Specify whether you wish to retrieve information on active and/or inactive Control Panel items and/or search for these on the disks.
Extensions Specify whether you wish to retrieve information on active and/or inactive extensions and/or search for these on the disks.
Plugins Select this option to retrieve information on active plugins.
215
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Startup Items Specify whether you wish to retrieve information on active and/or inactive items that are launched when a new session is opened.
Shutdown Items Specify whether you wish to retrieve information on active and/or inactive items that are used before a session is closed.
Fonts Specify whether you wish to retrieve information on active and/or inactive character fonts.
Linux Options Page To display the Linux Options page of information collection settings, click Linux options in the TrackBird IP Administration interface’s tree view.
The following fields are displayed on the Linux Options page.
Software Collection Retrieve RPM Packages Installed Select this option to retrieve information on all RPM (Red Hat Package Manager) packages installed on TrackBird client workstations. 216
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Unknown Software Collection Use Files Installed by RPM Select this option to retrieve information on unknown software installed by RPM.
Retrieve All Unknown Files Select this option to collect information on unknown non-executable files.
Scan Only root Partition Select this option to only collect information on unknown software on the partition (root partition) forward slash (/); deselect this option to also collect information on unknown software on mounted disks.
Software Identification Fast : by Attributes Select this option to identify unknown software rapidly, by displaying only the file characteristics.
Precise : by Data Identification Select this option to identify unknown software in detail, by identifying the file contents.
Creating a TrackBird Alert TrackBird can monitor counters on TrackBird clients and use this data for trend activities. These are the default counters available: V330
•
CPU Usage
•
Available memory
•
Available disk space
•
Network bandwidth usage (send/receive)
•
Application crash count
•
Station reboots
Additionally, you can add any standard Windows performance counter to this list to monitor performance of IIS, SQL Server, VMWare, and so forth. This process is executed directly from the client agent.
217
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This screen shows all available counters and the alert defined for them:
You can perform various actions using these buttons: Button
Description
Add a Windows Counter
Adds a Windows Counter. See “Adding a Windows Counter” on page 219 for details.
Add an Alert Counter
Adds an Alert Counter to one of the existing counters. See “Adding an Alert Counter” on page 220 for details.
Delete an Alert Counter
Deletes a selected Alert. See “Deleting Alerts” on page 226 for details.
Edit an Alert Counter
Edits a selected Alert. See “Editing Alerts” on page 226 for details.
Configure an Alert Counter
Edits the SNMP parameters that allow the mails to be sent. See “Configure the SMTP Server” on page 226 for details.
Once an alert has been created it is valid for all the groups it belongs to, regardless of the physical location of a workstation (the same applies to any other collection option).
218
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Adding a Windows Counter To Add a Windows Counter, click Add Windows Counter. The Counter properties window appears.
The Counter properties window includes a Definition section and a Period section. The Definition section contains these fields: Field
Description
Name
Counter name.
Perf. Counter
Windows Counter. Click to select a counter from the Performance Counters window in the drop-down list.
Instance
If a Windows counter has instances, this field chooses the instance.
Value type
Specifies the counter’s value type (vtInt32 for an 32 bit Integer, vtInt64 for a 64 bits Integer, vtExtended for a float).
Resolution
Specifies the Interval in which to monitor the counter value (e.g., in seconds)
Purge delay
Displays the Duration of the counters records (e.g., data is not kept for more than a day)
Enabled
Specifies if the counter is active or not. 219
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Period section allows you to define the time range when the counter will be active. Once the counter has been defined click OK to Confirm or Cancel as appropriate.
Adding an Alert Counter You can add an alert definition to any counter. To Add an Alert Counter, select the counter you wish to add an alert to and click Add Alert. The New Alert window appears.
The Alert Window includes a Definition tab and an Action tab. The Definition tab includes these fields: Field
Description
Name
Alert name.
Counter type
The Counter type name that you have defined.
The Activation section allows you to specify the alert functionality. It contains these fields:
220
Always active
Select this check box to always make the alert active. To define an interval for the alert, do not activate this check box.
Define
This button is active if the Away active check box is selected. Click this button to open a window that allows you to define a daily or monthly interval.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Field
Description
Immediate
The alert is launched immediately.
Range
The Alert launches once the delay value is reached in the interval defined. The Sum, Average, and Average deviation operations can be performed.
Launch alert if value
Launch an alert if the value of the counter is reached. Launching is started according to the options Immediate and Range
Reactivation delay
Delay time before the alarm is reactivated.
This windows shows an example of defining an alert:
The example above defines the alert to be raised if the CPU is more than 90 percent on average during an interval of three minutes. This alert is always active, but you can assign a schedule as well. After the alert is raised, there is a reactivation delay during which no further alert is sent. If after the reactivation delay, the alert condition is still verified, the alert is raised again.
221
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
A raised alert has these effects: •
It is recorded and sent to the TrackBird database, allowing access to alert reports and queries from the TrackBird console.
•
An action can be executed on the workstation specified.
After defining an Alert you can choose the action type that will execute when the alert launches. These are the three action types: •
Send an e-mail
•
Send an SNMP trap
•
Execute a program
This window displays the Send a Mail action:
You can send an e-mail each time an alert is launched. You must complete these fields:
222
Field
Description
SMTP Server
Check Configuration of SMTP server.
From
The sender’s e-mail address.
Recipient
The e-mail address where the e-mail will be sent.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Field
Description
Subject
Title detailing the e-mail contents.
Message
The e-mail contents.
Click OK to confirm the configuration or click terminate the changes. You must configure the SMTP Server parameters in order to send e-mails.
To configure the SMTP Server, click
to display the Parameters window.
Complete these fields: Field
Description
Server
IP address or name.
Port
SMTP Server port, 25 by default.
Need Authentication
Activate this check box to enter your login name and password.
Account name
Login of your mail account.
Password
Password of your mail account.
The Test Button allows you to verify the correct parameters were entered. 223
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The configuration name appears in the left window pane. To modify this name, double-click it or press F12 to edit the text. To add a new configuration, click
. To delete a new configuration , click
.
Click OK to validate the configuration or click Cancel to terminate the changes. To send an SNMP Trap when an alert launches, select that option from the Action tab drop-down list.
Complete these fields:
224
Field
Description
Destination IP
SNMP server IP address (e.g., ASG-Sentry server).
Enterprise
Company Name.
Community
SNMP community (this is public by default).
Port
SNMP Port to send the trap to the SNMP Server (162 by default).
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Field
Description
Generic
Type of Trap. Choose a value between 0 and 6: • 0—Cold start • 1—Warm start • 2—Link down • 3—Link up • 4—Authentication failure • 5—EGP neighbor loss • 6—Specific, In this case one must complete the field
Specific
The value of this field is used if you have chosen the value 6 in the generic field.
MIB
Indicates the node of the tree from the MIB used.
MIB name
Indicates the name of the MIB used.
Click OK to Confirm the configuration or click Cancel to terminate the changes. To execute a program when an alert launches, choose that option from the Action tab.
225
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Complete these fields: Field
Description
File name
Path to the executable to be launched.
Command line
Additional parameters that may be required to launch the application.
Click OK to Confirm the configuration or click Cancel to terminate the changes.
Deleting Alerts To delete an alert, click Delete Alert.
Editing Alerts To Edit the alert properties, right-click the alert and select Edit or double-click the alert name.
Editing Counters To Edit the counter properties, right-click counter and select Edit or double-click the counter name. The properties are the same as for the windows counter (“Adding a Windows Counter” on page 219).
Configure the SMTP Server To configure the inbox, click Configure. 226
2 TrackBird IP Administration
Counter Contextual Menu
The Counter contextual menu allows you to add an alert to a counter, edit alert parameters, or delete an alert.
Alert Contextual Menu
Right-click any alert to display a contextual menu. This menu allows you to add an alert, edit alert parameters, or delete an alert.
Methods To display the Methods page, click Methods in the tree structure of the Collection Options.
You can check or uncheck the methods required. 227
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Component and Package Management When the client software is installed on client workstations, TrackBird IP Server distributes several files to each client. These files are grouped together in units called packages. To access the packages management parameters, click the Client version heading in the appropriate group’s section of the structure tree.
The Client Version pane contains these columns: Column
228
Description
Package Name
Name of the package.
Folder
Default Folder where the package is stored. The Packages folder is located here: C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG\TRACKBIRD IP SERVER\VIRTUALDIR\FILES\COMPONENTS.
File Name
Name of the file representing the package.
2 TrackBird IP Administration
The Client Version pane contains these buttons: Button
Description
Refresh Source Folder
Reloads the packages in the configuration.
Modify Source Folder
Selects all the packages or a specific package selection via the path to the CNB files.
Updating the Knowledge Base on the TrackBird Clients After new software or hardware is entered or changes are made in a glossary, you should refresh the knowledge base so that all these changes will be taken into account when inventory information is collected in future. For details of how to update the TrackBird knowledge base installed on TrackBird clients, see “Updating the TrackBird Knowledge Base” on page 54.
229
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
230
Chapter 3:
TrackBird Explorer
3 You can only use the TrackBird Explorer tool on Windows NT domains. It can be used if you possess Administrator rights on client workstations.
Starting TrackBird Explorer TrackBird Explorer, which is an independent tool, can be used to remotely deploy the TrackBird client software on workstations. To access it, select the Windows Start menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Explorer.
TrackBird Explorer Interface The TrackBird Explorer interface is composed of standard Windows elements used to execute commands and control the program:
•
Menus —
File
—
Options
—
Action
—
Tools 231
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
Toolbars —
Refresh & Exit
—
Filter
—
Log
Each of these is detailed separately in the following sections.
File Menu
The File menu enables you to: •
Save the active configuration
•
Exit the application (a toolbar button can also be used to exit the application)
Options Menu
The Options menu enables you to: •
Refresh the domain’s network data
•
Configure TrackBird Explorer using the Configuration window (see “To configure TrackBird Explorer” on page 240.
Action Menu
232
3 TrackBird Explorer
The Action menu enables you to operate on network workstations. You also can display this menu by right clicking the selected workstation(s). The Action menu contains commands enabling you to: •
Refresh the TrackBird workstation data for the selected workstation(s)
•
To install and activate the TrackBird client and the service TrackBird NT, if the service and the client were not installed on the selected workstations.
•
Run the collection process on selected workstation(s)
•
Perform client tasks, opening a submenu enabling you to:
•
—
Install TrackBird client when the service has already been installed, uninstall it, enable it or disable it
—
Update the TrackBird configuration file
—
Update executables, i.e. either the collector or the interface
—
Reload all installed packages
—
Remove all TrackBird collection options
Perform service tasks, opening a submenu enabling you to: —
Install or uninstall the NT service as well as enabling or disabling it
—
Update the NT service
Tools Menu
This menu enables you to retrieve the TrackBird client installation folder (in .CNB compressed TrackBird file format) from the selected workstation. You can also retrieve the TrackBird bin, data and components client sub-folders.
233
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Toolbars Refresh & Exit Toolbar You can use this toolbar to retrieve updated data on the network status as follows. Button
Use Exits the TrackBird Explorer application
Refreshes the network domain(s)
Refreshes the selected network workstation(s)
Refreshes the data from the selected TrackBird workstation(s) Note: Alternatively, you can press F5.
Filter Toolbar You can use this toolbar to filter the workstation information as follows. Button
Use Click the downward-pointing arrow to list all existing filters for selection and use Displays the selected filter’s name To rename the displayed filter, edit the name displayed in the box and then either press Enter or click the following button (check mark button) Validates the name of the displayed filter Creates a new filter
Deletes the selected filter
234
3 TrackBird Explorer
Log Toolbar You can use this toolbar to perform log management tasks as follows. Button Use Activates or deactivates displaying of the log
Saves the log as a file
Empties the log
Columns
The following columns of information are displayed in the TrackBird Explorer screen. Column Title
Description
O The image is displayed in this column when the workstation is off. This means that the workstation has already been detected (when it was previously on and detected when TrackBird Explorer was run previously) S
A green ball is displayed in this column when the NT service is installed and activated. A red ball is displayed in this column when the NT service is installed but disabled. If neither ball is displayed in this column, the NT service is not installed An orange ball is displayed in this column when the NT service is not up-to-date.
T
A green ball displayed in this column indicates that TrackBird is installed and enabled. A red ball displayed in this column indicates that the TrackBird client is installed and disabled. If neither ball is displayed in this column, the TrackBird client is not installed 235
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Column Title
Description
C
If collection results of a data collection process have arrived, a blue flag is displayed in this column
Workstation name
The workstation name
M
The installation mode: for an IP installation (Internet browser, TrackBird Explorer). for a login script installation. for a local installation. for shared directory installation
Version
Collector and interface version
Hardware date
Date of the latest hardware data collection
Software date
Date of the latest software data collection
Interface date
Date of the latest data collection by the inventorist interface
Output name
Name of the workstation’s collection file
OS version
Operating System version installed on the workstation
IP address
Workstation IP address
Installation path
TrackBird Client Installation directory on the workstation
Server path
URL server
IP group
IP group to which the workstation is linked
IP collection point
IP collection point to which the workstation is linked
Comment
Free-text comment on the workstation (to display a text editor screen, press F12)
Note:
You can change and save the columns order for convenience. Choose Save in File menu to save the changes.
236
3 TrackBird Explorer
Filtering TrackBird Explorer Information You can create and use filters to modify the data displayed.
Creating TrackBird Explorer Filters To create a TrackBird Explorer filter 1
Click
2
The new filter is automatically named Filtern, where n is an incremented number.
3
Do one of the following to display the filter dialog.
on the Filter Toolbar.
•
Right-click the title of a column you wish to use to filter the TrackBird Explorer information.
•
Right-click within a column you wish to use to filter the TrackBird Explorer information, to display a contextual menu. In the menu, select Modify Filter [column name].
4
In the dialog, type the information by which you wish to filter the data. For example, to display only workstations whose name contains the text US on the column entitled Workstation Name, type the letters US in the dialog; to display workstations containing the text US or UK, type US+UK.
5
To filter the information in other columns, repeat step 3 onwards.
6
Rename the filter by editing the text displayed in the filter name box in the Filter Toolbar.
7
To save the filter with the selected name, click
.
Applying TrackBird Explorer Filters To apply a filter 1
In the TrackBird Explorer Filter Toolbar, click all existing trackBird Explorer filters.
2
Select the appropriate filter in the drop list.
to display a drop list containing
237
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Note:
The title of each column to which a filter is applied displays in blue.
Clearing TrackBird Explorer Filters To clear a filter Note:
The title of each column to which a filter is applied displays in blue. 1
Right-click the title of the column whose filter you wish to clear, to display the column’s filter dialog.
2
In the filter dialog’s title bar, click
3
Click Apply Filter.
to clear the filter criteria.
Modifying TrackBird Explorer Filters To modify a filter Note:
The title of each column to which a filter is applied is displayed in blue. 1
Right-click the title of the column whose filter you wish to modify, to display the column’s filter dialog.
2
Edit the filter criteria displayed in the dialog.
3
Click the Apply Filter button.
To rename a TrackBird Explorer filter 1
Edit the text displayed in the filter name box displayed in the Filter Toolbar.
2
To save the filter with the selected name and criteria, click the
Note:
You cannot rename the Default filter displaying all workstations.
238
button.
3 TrackBird Explorer
Deleting TrackBird Explorer Filters To delete a TrackBird Explorer filter 1
If the filter is not already displayed, click in the TrackBird Explorer Filter Toolbar to display a drop list containing all existing TrackBird Explorer filters and then select the appropriate filter in the drop list.
2
Click
3
To delete the selected filter, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel its deletion, click Cancel in the confirmation dialog.
.
Sorting TrackBird Explorer Information Sorting TrackBird Explorer Information in Ascending Order Click the title of the column by which you wish to sort the information. An upward-pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the column title to indicate the sort order.
Sorting TrackBird Explorer Information in Descending Order Double-click the title of the column by which you wish to sort the information. A downward-pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the column title to indicate the sort order.
239
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Configuring TrackBird Explorer Management To configure TrackBird Explorer 1
From the TrackBird Explorer Options menu, select Configuration. The Configuration dialog displays the following configuration options, each selected by clicking the appropriate tab at the top of the dialog.
2
If the Configuration dialog’s Display tab is not already displayed, click the Display tab at the top of the dialog. The Display page, the first page displayed in the Configuration dialog, enables you to configure the window display. It displays check boxes to configure the following options.
240
a
To select workstation in the selected domain only, check the Only Select Per Domain check box.
b
To select workstations in all domains, uncheck the Only Select Per Domain check box.
c
To display a specific column in the TrackBird Explorer screen, check its check box in the Select Column To Display box. For details of what information is displayed in each TrackBird Explorer screen column, see on “Columns” on page 235..
3 TrackBird Explorer
3
If the Configuration dialog’s Servers page is not already displayed, click the Servers tab at the top of the dialog.
The Servers page enables you to specify the TrackBird Explorer, TrackBird Server and TrackBird IP server names, by doing one of the following for each Server Name box. •
Type the appropriate server name in the box.
•
Click the button to the right of the box, then select the appropriate server name in the dialog.
In the above example, TrackBird Explorer, TrackBird Server and TrackBird IP have all been installed on the same server, CPU100. 4
If the Configuration dialog’s Installation page is not already displayed, click the Installation tab at the top of the dialog.
241
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Installation page enables you to configure how TrackBird clients are to be installed.
5
•
If you choose to deploy clients via IP, it is easier to activate the Automatic IP Installation check box, ensuring you enter the IP server address, port number and alias correctly.
•
If you choose to install clients via a shared directory, deactivate the Automatic IP Installation check box.
If the Configuration dialog’s Options page is not already displayed, click the Options tab at the top of the dialog.
The Options page enables you to specify the location of the TrackBird configuration file directory (NETBIRD.CFG) as well as that of the client installation directory (in case the TrackBird service cannot be found on the client workstation). a
b
242
To specify the TrackBird configuration file directory, do one of the following. —
Type the appropriate directory name in the box.
—
Click the button to the right of the box, then select the appropriate directory name in the dialog.
To specify the folder containing the TrackBird client software on the workstations, in case the TrackBird service is not found, do one of the following. —
Type the appropriate folder name in the box.
—
Click the drop list button to the right of the box, then select the appropriate folder name in the drop list.
3 TrackBird Explorer
6
If all details in the four Configuration dialog tabs have been set as required, click the OK button to close the Configuration dialog.
Updating the Server Names From the TrackBird Explorer interface, do one of the following. •
On the Refresh & Exit Toolbar, click
.
•
From the Options menu, select Refresh Network Domain.
Installing the TrackBird Client and Service In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to install the TrackBird clients and service by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Install and Activate TrackBird in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Install and Activate TrackBird from the contextual menu.
If the Automatic IP Installation option was activated in the Configuration dialog’s Installation Tab, the installation process begins immediately.
243
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If the Automatic IP Installation option was not activated in the Configuration dialog’s Installation Tab, the Select collection point dialog is displayed for each workstation you have selected.
Click the IP or Shared Folder radio button as appropriate and ensure that the information selected in the dialog is correct. To begin the TrackBird client installation process, click the OK button; to cancel installation, click the Cancel button. If you wish to activate the Automatic IP installation ensure the option was selected, see step 4 on page 241.
Installing the TrackBird Clients in IP Mode Note:
The optional TrackBird IP Administration module must already be installed in order to install TrackBird clients in IP mode. In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to install the clients by doing one of the following.
244
•
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
3 TrackBird Explorer
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Install TrackBird in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Install TrackBird in from the contextual menu.
If the Automatic IP Installation option was activated in the Configuration dialog’s Installation Tab, the installation process begins immediately. If the Automatic IP Installation option was not activated in the Configuration dialog’s Installation Tab, the Select collection point dialog is displayed for each workstation you have selected.
Click the IP radio button and ensure that the correct Port Number, Alias and Collection Point are selected in the left side of the dialog. To begin the TrackBird client installation process, click the OK button; to cancel installation, click the Cancel button.
Installing the TrackBird Clients in Shared Directory Mode Note:
In order to install TrackBird clients in shared directory mode, the Automatic IP Installation option must not be activated in the Configuration dialog’s Installation Tab. In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to install the clients by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
245
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Install TrackBird in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Install TrackBird in from the contextual menu.
Installing the TrackBird NT Service In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to install the TrackBird NT service by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Service Tasks and then select Install NT TrackBird Service in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Service Tasks ` Install NT TrackBird Service from the contextual menu.
Activating and Deactivating the TrackBird NT Service In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to activate or deactivate the TrackBird NT service by doing one of the following.
246
•
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
3 TrackBird Explorer
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Service Tasks and then select Enable NT TrackBird Service or Disable NT TrackBird Service in the sublist, as appropriate.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Service Tasks ` Enable NT TrackBird Service or Disable NT TrackBird Service from the contextual menu, as appropriate display.
Updating the TrackBird NT Service In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to update the TrackBird NT service by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Service Tasks and then select Update NT TrackBird Service in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Service Tasks ` Update NT TrackBird Service from the contextual menu.
Uninstalling the TrackBird NT Service In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to uninstall the TrackBird NT service by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
247
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Service Tasks and then select Uninstall NT TrackBird Service in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Service Tasks ` Uninstall NT TrackBird Service from the contextual menu.
Updating the TrackBird Client Collector In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to update the TrackBird client collector by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Update Executable in the sublist. In the secondary sublist, select Update TrackBird Collector.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Update Executable ` Update TrackBird Collector from the contextual menu.
To update the TrackBird client collector on the selected workstations, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the update, click the Cancel button in the confirmation dialog.
248
3 TrackBird Explorer
Updating the TrackBird Client Inventorist Interface In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to update the TrackBird client interface by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Update Executable in the sublist. In the secondary sublist, select Update TrackBird Interface.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Update Executable ` Update TrackBird Interface from the contextual menu.
To update the TrackBird client interface on the selected workstations, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the update, click the Cancel button in the confirmation dialog.
Activating/Deactivating the TrackBird Client In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to activate or deactivate the TrackBird client by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
249
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Enable TrackBird or Disable TrackBird in the sublist, as appropriate.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Enable TrackBird or Disable TrackBird from the contextual menu, as appropriate.
Uninstalling the TrackBird Client In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to uninstall the TrackBird client by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Uninstall TrackBird in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Uninstall TrackBird from the contextual menu.
Updating the NETBIRD.CFG Configuration File In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to update the workstation’s copy of the NETBIRD.CFG TrackBird client configuration file by doing one of the following.
250
•
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
3 TrackBird Explorer
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Update TrackBird Configuration File in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Update TrackBird Configuration File from the contextual menu.
Note:
This functionality allows you to modify a field in NETBIRD.CFG. For example, if you want to change the SERVERPATH field, you create a file with only the field to change: [SYSTEM] SERVERPATH=http://10.102.113.13:8080/trackbird/
Reloading all Packages In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to reload all packages of components for the different TrackBird client versions by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Reload All Packages in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Tasks ` Reload All Packages from the contextual menu.
251
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Deleting all Collection Options In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) on which you wish to delete the file containing the workstation’s TrackBird collection point options by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Client Tasks and then select Remove TrackBird Network Options in the sublist.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Client Task ` Remove TrackBird Network Options from the contextual menu.
To delete the file containing the TrackBird collection point options configured on the selected workstations, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click the Cancel button in the confirmation dialog.
Refreshing the TrackBird Data from One or More Workstations In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) for which you wish to refresh the TrackBird data by doing one of the following.
252
•
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
3 TrackBird Explorer
Do one of the following. •
On the TrackBird Explorer’s Refresh & Exit Toolbar, click
•
Press F5.
.
Refreshing the Network Data From One or More Workstations In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) for which you wish to refresh the information relating to the workstations network connections by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
On the TrackBird Explorer’s Refresh & Exit Toolbar, click
.
Executing Data Collection on One or More Workstations In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) from which you wish to collect data by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
253
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Run Collection.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Run Collection from the contextual menu.
Removing One or more Workstations from the List In the TrackBird Explorer screen, select the workstation(s) you wish to remove from the list by doing one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
Do one of the following. •
From the Actions menu, select Remove Workstation From List.
•
Right-click any selected workstation and select Remove Workstation From List from the contextual menu.
To remove the selected workstations from the list, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel their removal, click the Cancel button in the confirmation dialog.
Removing a Domain Note:
In order to remove a domain from the list, you must first remove from the list all workstations in the domain as described in “Removing One or more Workstations from the List” on page 254. To remove from the list a domain containing no listed workstations, do the following. Right-click the domain and select Remove Domain From List from the contextual menu. To remove the selected domain from the list, click OK in the confirmation dialog; to cancel its removal, click Cancel in the confirmation dialog. 254
3 TrackBird Explorer
Displaying or Hiding the Log On the Log Toolbar, click
.
When the log displays, a box displays around the button as in the following example.
Saving the Log as a Text File On the Log Toolbar, click
to display a file destination dialog.
In the dialog, edit the default log file name, NTADMIN.LOG, if required and change the file location from the default location, My Documents, if required. The log information is stored as a text file that can be viewed, edited, and printed by a standard text editor or word processor.
Clearing the Log To clear all information currently contained in the log, click
on the Log Toolbar.
Retrieving TrackBird Client Information To retrieve the contents of the TrackBird client installation folder (or TrackBird bin, data and components client sub-folders) in compressed TrackBird .CNB file form from selected workstation(s), for sending to ASG Customer Support, do one of the following. •
To select a single workstation, click its line in the screen.
255
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
To select a series of workstations, click the first workstation in the series of workstations then press Shift+click the last workstation you wish to select in the screen.
•
To select or deselect workstations, press Ctrl+click each workstation you wish to select or deselect in the screen.
•
To use the keyboard to select a series of workstations, select the first file and then press Shift+up arrow key to select additional workstations, or Shift+down arrow key to select fewer workstations.
From the Tools menu, select Retrieve TrackBird Client Folder, Retrieve TrackBird Bin Client Folder, Retrieve TrackBird Data Client Folder or Retrieve TrackBird Components Client Folder, as appropriate. In the file location dialog, select the directory in which you want to save the compressed file and then click OK.
Displaying Help on How to Use TrackBird Explorer Do one of the following. •
Press F1.
•
From the Help menu, select Help.
Displaying Version Information on the TrackBird Explorer To display information about the TrackBird Explorer version, from the Help menu, select About.
256
TrackBird Reporting
Chapter 4:
4 The optional TrackBird Reporting module used to provide the TrackBird Suite’s reporting, form and query management functions contains the following tools used in conjunction with TrackBird Server: •
TrackBird Repository Explorer, to perform TrackBird folder, query, report and form management tasks
•
ReportBuilder, to edit and create reports in an easy-to-use, drag-and-drop interface that makes it simple to design and build SQL queries based on TrackBird databases
•
TrackBird Designer, used to create or modify forms displaying TrackBird database information, based on SQL queries
•
TrackBird Query Editor, used to create list queries, and TrackBird Tree Query Editor, used to create tree queries
TrackBird Repository Explorer is used to manage TrackBird’s default reports, forms and queries based on TrackBird databases and can be used to modify existing reports, forms and queries or create additional reports, forms and queries using ReportBuilder, TrackBird Designer and TrackBird Server’s integrated query editors. Key features and benefits •
Highly user-friendly interface
•
Predefined reports
•
Reports available in Word (RTF), HTML, PDF, and Excel formats
•
Complementary module to TrackBird Inventory, TrackBird Monitoring, TrackBird Policy, and TrackBird SNMP.
257
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Interface There are four elements in the core TrackBird Repository Explorer interface, as shown in the following example.
Each of these elements is described in the following paragraphs.
Menu Bar and Toolbars TrackBird Repository Explorer interface commands can be displayed in two different ways. They can be displayed in the form of drop-down menus (File and Help) and/or a toolbar, at the top of the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface screen (above the structure trees and the task pane). Both types of commands can be seen in the above example. The TrackBird Repository Explorer toolbar contains buttons used to configure how the menus and toolbars are displayed, create custom reports, forms and queries, save the current parameters, and display the reports, forms and queries used in the TrackBird Suite.
Structure Trees The structure trees, displayed in the left and right sides of the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface, is used to select a specific TrackBird folder, report, form or query that you want to modify, move or configure.
258
4 TrackBird Reporting
Task pane The task pane, displayed vertically between the TrackBird Repository Explorer’s structure trees, is used to perform common tasks relating to the item highlighted in the right structure tree.
Menu Bar and Toolbar The first element of the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface is the menu bar and toolbars. Two types of commands are displayed, one in the form of a bar of drop-down menus and the other in button toolbar form.
Menus
The menu bar’s File menu provides the following commands. Menu Command
Result
New
Displays a submenu to create a new TrackBird folder, query, form, report or tree query
Delete
Deletes the element currently selected in the TrackBird Repository Explorer
Exit
Closes the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface
The menu bar’s Help menu is used to display the following information. Menu Command
Result
TrackBird Repository Explorer Help
Displays help information on how to use the TrackBird Repository Explorer software
About
Displays information on the installed TrackBird Repository Explorer software
259
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Contextual Menu A contextual menu providing immediate access to frequently-used commands can be displayed in TrackBird Repository Explorer by right-clicking the folder, report, form or query to which you wish to apply the command.
To copy the original report in the source folder in order to paste the copy into the destination folder 1
Right-click the Original report in the Source folder, to display the contextual menu.
2
In the menu, select Copy.
3
Right-click the Destination folder, to display the contextual menu.
4
In the menu, select Paste, to paste a copy of the Original report in the Destination folder.
Toolbars The TrackBird Repository Explorer toolbar contains these buttons: Button
Result Displays a drop list to create a new TrackBird folder, query, form, report or tree query Displays the currently selected TrackBird folder’s parent folder (up to All Folders) Copies the selected folders, queries, forms, reports or tree queries, for pasting elsewhere within the Repository Explorer screen Pastes the copied folders, queries, forms, reports or tree queries within the Repository Explorer screen Deletes the selected folders, queries, forms, reports or tree queries within the Repository Explorer screen
260
4 TrackBird Reporting
Use of the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s toolbar buttons is described in the following table. The standard Creation toolbar buttons perform these functions: Button
Result Creates a new TrackBird repository where specified in the tree structure in the left pane Opens a List Query Editor screen to create a new TrackBird list query
Opens a TrackBird Designer screen to create a new TrackBird form
Opens a TrackBird ReportBuilder screen to create a new TrackBird report
Opens a Tree Query Editor screen to create a new TrackBird tree query
Use of the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s Creation toolbar buttons is described in the following topics.
Basic Tasks To run TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
From within the TrackBird Server interface, from TrackBird Server’s Reports menu select Repository Explorer. Or
If the TrackBird Server interface is not running, select the Windows Start menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Repository Explorer.
261
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The TrackBird Repository Explorer dialog displays, requesting your user name (login) and password for connection to the TrackBird database.
Note:
The TrackBird database should be selected by default when the TrackBird Server interface is not already running and can be selected in the Alias drop-down list in the dialog. The default user name is Admin and the default password is admin. 2
In the User field, select your user login and then type your password in the Password field if required.
3
Press Enter or click OK to confirm the connection.
Importing a Folder Note:
This command is useful for importing TrackBird reports, forms and/or queries created on another TrackBird database. In the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s right structure tree, select the folder inside which you wish to import the folder. Note:
To display a folder’s subfolders, double-click the folder. To display and select a folder’s parent folder, either double-click the browse symbol (..) at the top of the right structure tree or select the folder and then click
).
In the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s task pane, select the Import Folder command to display a folder selection dialog. In the dialog, select the directory and then click OK to import it into the folder highlighted in the right structure tree, or click Cancel to cancel the import.
262
4 TrackBird Reporting
Exporting a Folder Note:
This command is useful for exporting TrackBird reports, forms and/or queries so that they can be imported into other TrackBird databases. In the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s right structure tree, select the folder that you wish to export. Note:
To display a folder’s subfolders, double-click the folder. To select a folder’s parent folder, either double-click the browse symbol (..) at the top of the right structure tree or select the folder and then click
).
In the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s task pane, select the Export Folder command to display a folder selection dialog. In the dialog, select the location to which you wish to export the folder and then click OK, or click Cancel to cancel the export.
Creating a Folder, Query, Form or Report Within the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s left structure tree, select the folder inside which you wish to create the folder, query, form or report. Do one of the following to create the folder, query, form or report. •
Click the , , , , or form, report or tree query, respectively.
button to create a folder, list query,
•
Click list.
•
From the File menu, select New to display a drop list. Select the appropriate option in the drop list.
to display a drop list. Select the appropriate option in the drop
Depending on whether you chose to create a folder, query, form or report, the result is as follows. •
If you chose to create a folder, a folder labeled New Folder is created. Type the appropriate name to replace the default label and press Enter.
•
If you chose to create a query, the List Query Editor screen is displayed. Create your list query. 263
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
•
If you chose to create a form, the TrackBird Designer interface is displayed. Create your TrackBird form.
•
If you chose to create a report, the ReportBuilder interface is displayed. Define and lay out your TrackBird report.
•
If you chose to create a tree query, the Tree Query Editor screen is displayed. Create your tree query.
Exiting TrackBird Repository Explorer From the TrackBird Repository Explorer interface’s File menu, select Exit.
Displaying Help on Using TrackBird Repository Explorer Do one of the following. •
Press F1.
•
In the Help menu, select TrackBird Repository Explorer Help.
Reports Report management tasks are performed using the Repository Explorer interface, while report editing is carried out using the ReportBuilder interface. The Repository Explorer can be used to select the following report-related tasks: •
Displaying a report
•
Exporting a report
•
Printing a report
•
Creating a report
•
Opening a report for editing
•
Modifying or defining a report
Each of these tasks is described separately below.
Displaying a Report If the Repository Explorer interface is not displayed, display the Repository Explorer interface as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
264
4 TrackBird Reporting
In the Repository Explorer interface’s right structure tree, select the report you wish to display. Note:
To display a folder’s subfolders, double-click the folder. To display and select a folder’s parent folder, either double-click the browse symbol (..) at the top of the right structure tree or select the folder and then click
.
In the Repository Explorer interface’s task pane, select the Print Preview command to display the report in a preview screen.
Exporting a Report If the Repository Explorer interface is not displayed, display the Repository Explorer interface as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261. In the Repository Explorer interface’s right structure tree, select the report you wish to display. Note:
To display a folder’s subfolders, double-click the folder. To display and select a folder’s parent folder, either double-click the browse symbol (..) at the top of the right structure tree or select the folder and then click
.
In the Repository Explorer interface’s task pane, select the Export Report command to display a dialog. In the dialog, specify the file location and name. In the Type field, select the export file type from the following drop list options. •
HTML (the JPG image files, labeled IMAGEnnnn.JPG, required in the HTML document are placed in the same folder as the document and should then be moved or copied, together with the HTML document, to a separate folder in order to group the HTML file and related image files together)
•
PDF, for reading and printing using Adobe Acrobat Reader
•
RTF, for editing and printing using Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, etc.
•
Excel, for editing and printing using Microsoft Excel and other spreadsheet programs
Click Save.
265
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Printing a Report If the Repository Explorer interface is not displayed, display the Repository Explorer interface as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261. In the Repository Explorer interface’s right structure tree, select the report you wish to print. Note:
To display a folder’s subfolders, double-click the folder. To display and select a folder’s parent folder, either double-click the browse symbol (..) at the top of the right structure tree or select the folder and then click
.
In the Repository Explorer interface’s task pane, select the Print Report command to display the Print dialog. In the dialog, specify the appropriate print options and then click OK.
Opening a Report for Editing If the Repository Explorer interface is not displayed, display the Repository Explorer interface as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261. Select the report in the Repository Explorer interface’s right structure tree. Note:
To display a folder’s subfolders, double-click the folder. To display and select a folder’s parent folder, either double-click the browse symbol (..) at the top of the right structure tree or select the folder and then click
.
In the Repository Explorer interface’s task pane, select the Edit Report command to open the selected report for modification in the ReportBuilder interface.
Modifying or Defining a Report Using ReportBuilder If the report is not already displayed for modification or defining in the ReportBuilder interface, create or open the report as detailed in “Creating a Folder, Query, Form or Report” on page 263.
266
4 TrackBird Reporting
A report is effectively composed of two integrated aspects: •
An integral query used to retrieve the necessary data from the TrackBird database via a database connection (data pipeline)
•
The layout used to lay out the data retrieved through the data pipeline
Both of these aspects are detailed in turn below.
Query As the query used to retrieve the appropriate data from the TrackBird database for inclusion in the report is an integral part of the report, the query must be created and modified within the report. The method of doing both is detailed below.
To create a report query 1
If the report is not already displayed in the ReportBuilder interface, create the report as detailed in “Creating a Folder, Query, Form or Report” on page 263.
2
At the top of the ReportBuilder screen, click the Data tab.
267
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
Right-click within the empty box displayed in the ReportBuilder screen’s Data page and select New from the contextual menu. The New Items window will display.
4
5
Do one of the following to display the List Query Editor screen. •
Double-click the TrackBird Query icon.
•
Click the TrackBird Query icon, then click OK.
Define the list query as detailed in “To modify or define a list query in TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 327.
To modify an existing report query 1
268
If the report is not already displayed in the ReportBuilder interface, create the report as detailed in “Creating a Folder, Query, Form or Report” on page 263.
4 TrackBird Reporting
2
At the top of the ReportBuilder screen, click the Data tab.
3
To display the query in the List Query Editor screen, click box; to show the query results, click
4
at the top of the query
at the top of the query box.
Modify the list query as detailed in “To modify or define a list query in TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 327.
Layout After you have created a query in the List Query Editor, you must lay out the report on the ReportBuilder Design page. To display the ReportBuilder screen’s Design page, click the Design tab at the top of the ReportBuilder screen.
269
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
ReportBuilder Design Interface The ReportBuilder interface is composed of the following elements: •
Menu Bar, displayed at the top of the ReportBuilder screen
•
Toolbars, displayed below the menu bar
Each is detailed separately below.
Menu Bar The first element of the ReportBuilder interface is the menu bar. Two types of commands are displayed, one in the form of a bar of drop-down menus and the other in button toolbar form below the menu bar. The ReportBuilder menu bar contains a series of menus, each containing a selection of related commands.
File Menu ReportBuilder’s File menu contains the following commands: Command
Description
New...
Creates a new report using the Report Wizard, a new empty report or labels based on the currently-selected query
Close
Closes the currently-selected report
Save
Saves the report details as they are currently displayed, keeping the same name
Save As...
Saves the report details as they are currently displayed, under a new name
Page Setup...
Defines report page settings (page size, orientation, margin sizes, etc.)
Print
Prints the currently-selected report
Print to File Setup...
Defines settings for printing reports as files (file name, field separator character, field selection, etc.) Note: Unless you specify at least one field, options relating to printing to file are not displayed in the Print command dialog.
270
4 TrackBird Reporting
Edit Menu ReportBuilder’s Edit menu contains the following commands: Command
Description
Undelete
Undeletes the last thing deleted, returning it to its former position
Redo
Repeats the last command used
Cut
Cuts the currently-selected object, for pasting at the same position in another report
Copy
Copies the currently-selected object, for pasting at the same position in another report or beside the currently-displayed object in the current report
Paste
Pastes the previously cut or copied object into the currently-selected report
Delete
Deletes the currently-selected object
Select All
Selects all objects in the currently-selected report
Bring To Front
Positions the currently-selected object(s) in front of other, unselected, objects where the unselected objects were superimposed on the other objects
Send To Back
Positions the currently-selected object(s) behind other, unselected, objects where the selected objects were superimposed on the other objects
View Menu ReportBuilder’s View menu contains the following commands: Command
Description
Toolbars
Displays the list of all available ReportBuilder toolbars, to select which are displayed
Rulers
Specifies whether the horizontal and vertical rulers are displayed
Grid Options...
Specifies whether objects will be positioned automatically on an invisible grid, and defines the grid size
Show Data
Displays data from the last record retrieved by the query, instead of data field names
271
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The View menu’s Toolbars submenu displays the following list of toolbars: • Standard Components Toolbar
• Format Toolbar
• Data Components Toolbar
• Edit Toolbar
• Advanced Components Toolbar
• Draw Toolbar
• Report Tree
• Align or Space Toolbar
• Data Tree Toolbar
• Size Toolbar
• Standard Toolbar
• Nudge Toolbar
Each of these toolbars is detailed later.
Report Menu ReportBuilder’s Report menu contains these commands:
272
Command
Description
Data...
Specifies which query retrieves the report’s data
Title
Specifies whether the title band is displayed. The title band contains the title of the report. It prints on the first page only
Summary
Specifies whether the summary band is displayed. The summary band prints once at the end of a report. The band is typically used to summarize data
Header
Specifies whether the header band prints at the top of each page
Footer
Specifies whether the footer band prints at the bottom of each page
Page Style
Specifies whether the page style band prints graphics and other formatting (lines, boxes and other objects unlinked with data) on the report
Groups...
Specifies whether (and how) records are grouped. A group is a section of a report that contains a group header band (whose components print at the beginning of each group; therefore, if there are several groups per page, the contents of this band will print several times), detail band (containing the contents of each individual record), and group footer band (whose components print at the end of each group; therefore, if there are several groups per page, the contents of this band will print several times). Groups are assigned to a database field. If you want the groups to print on separate pages, select the Keep group together option in the Groups dialog
Portrait or Landscape
Specifies whether report pages are printed in portrait or landscape format
4 TrackBird Reporting
Command
Description
Cache Pages
Specifies whether all pages of the currently-selected report are loaded into computer memory before the report begins printing
Pass Setting
Specifies whether the currently-displayed report is processed and printed in a single pass, or is processed in a single pass and then printed in a second pass (necessary when the report includes fields that state the total number of pages or compare values with a grand total at the end of the report)
Units
Specifies which units are displayed on the horizontal and vertical rulers
Data Menu
ReportBuilder’s Data menu contains the following commands: Command
Description
Filter
Specifies whether all records will be retrieved by the report’s query (default) or displays a dialog in which you specify how many records must be retrieved (Filter first/last records)
Show object inspector
Displays or hides the Object Inspector window in which the currently-selected object’s properties can be modified
Toolbars You can display these toolbars on ReportBuilder’s Design page, click the ReportBuilder’s Design tab:
• Standard Components Toolbar
• Format Toolbar
• Data Components Toolbar
• Edit Toolbar
• Advanced Components Toolbar
• Draw Toolbar
• Report Tree
• Align or Space Toolbar
• Data Tree Toolbar
• Size Toolbar
• Standard Toolbar
• Nudge Toolbar 273
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To display a ReportBuilder toolbar 1
When the ReportBuilder window displays, from the View menu, select the Toolbars command to display a list of all available toolbars.
2
From the list, select the toolbar that you want to display (the names of displayed toolbars are highlighted with a check mark).
Standard Components Toolbar The button on the Standard Components toolbar represent components that are frequently used to build reports. To create a component, click an icon and then click in a report band. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Standard Components in the submenu. ReportBuilder’s Standard Components toolbar contains the shortcut buttons to the following actions: Displays a selection pointer to select existing objects
Inserts a text label at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Inserts a memo (multiple-line text) field at the place you click in the currently-displayed report Inserts an RTF (Rich Text) field at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Inserts a system variable (date, date and time, page number, total number of pages, etc.) field at the place you click in the currently-displayed report Inserts a calculated field at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Inserts an image at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Inserts a shape at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Inserts a line at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
274
4 TrackBird Reporting
Inserts a chart at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Inserts a bar code at the place you click in the currently-displayed report
Data Components Toolbar This toolbar offers several components that are similar to components in the standard toolbar, except for one thing: they can be linked to data (are data-aware). Data-aware components can read the value of a database field. Associate a data-aware component with a given table and field in the database by selecting the data pipeline and the data field from the drop-down lists in ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Data Components in the submenu. ReportBuilder’s Data Components toolbar contains shortcut buttons to the following actions: Inserts a DBText (text from a database field) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report. It cannot handle images or Rich Text Inserts a DBMemo (multi-line plain text from a memo field) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report. It will automatically word-wrap the text. To print a DBMemo after another text-printing component (memo, RichText, DBRichText), right-click and then select ShiftRelativeTo Inserts a DBRichText (formatted text from a memo field) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report. It will automatically word-wrap the text. To print a DBRichText after another text-printing component (memo, DBMemo, RichText), right-click and select ShiftRelativeTo Inserts a DBCalc (calculation from one or more database fields) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report. DBCalc components perform simple database calculations (Sum, Min, Max, Average, Count) based on field data Inserts a DBImage (bitmap, GIF or JPEG image from a database field) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report. Right-click the component and select MaintainAspectRatio to scale an image so that it is the same height and width Inserts a DBBarCode (bar code from a database field) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report. DBBarCode components convert the data from a database field into a bar code symbol Inserts a DBChart (chart from one or more database fields) component at the place you click in the currently-displayed report 275
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Advanced Components Toolbar The Advanced Component toolbar contains components that can help you tackle complex reporting requirements. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Advanced Components in the submenu. ReportBuilder’s Advanced Components toolbar contains shortcut buttons to the following actions: Inserts a region in the currently-displayed report
Inserts a subreport in the currently-displayed report
Report Tree To display or hide the Report Tree, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Report Tree in the submenu.
276
4 TrackBird Reporting
The Report Tree can be used to view the components within each band. Components selected in the Report Tree become the selection in the report layout. You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl and clicking each name. You can rename components by right-clicking the name, selecting Rename, and then typing in a new name. Ensure you press Enter after renaming to ensure that the new name is assigned. This window can only be docked on the left and right sides of the ReportBuilder’s Design page (displayed by clicking ReportBuilder’s Design tab).
Data Tree Toolbar To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Data Tree in the submenu.
277
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Data Tree toolbar can be used to create data-aware components within a band. Simply select a set of fields and drag the selection into the band. A set of corresponding data-aware components will be created. This window can only be docked on the left and right sides of ReportBuilder’s Design page (displayed by clicking its Design tab).
ReportBuilder’s Data Tree toolbar contains the following areas in its Data workspace (displayed by clicking its Data tab, at the bottom of the Data Tree): •
A box containing the data source (data pipeline). A data pipeline represents a database table or SQL query and provides a set of data structured as records and fields
•
A list of all fields whose data is supplied by the data pipeline.
All data-aware components need to be assigned to a data pipeline.
278
4 TrackBird Reporting
ReportBuilder’s Data Tree toolbar contains the following options in its Layout workspace (displayed by clicking its Layout tab, at the bottom of the Data Tree).
To specify that all field components will be placed in ReportBuilder’s Design page with the label above the field, select All and then, in the Style drop-down list, select Tabular. To specify that all field components will be placed in ReportBuilder’s Design page with the label to the left of the field, select All and then, in the Style drop-down list, select Vertical. To specify that all label components will be positioned on ReportBuilder’s Design page workspace grid (whose settings are defined in the View menu’s Grid Options... command), select Labels and then click its Grid check box to activate the option. To specify that all field components will be positioned on ReportBuilder’s Design page workspace grid (whose settings are defined in the View menu’s Grid Options... command), select Fields and then click its Grid check box to activate the option.
Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar allows you to perform basic functions such as opening, saving, and printing reports, as well as cutting and pasting selections. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Standard in the submenu.
279
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
ReportBuilder’s Standard toolbar contains shortcut buttons to the following actions. Creates a new report
Opens an existing report
Saves the currently-displayed report
Defines the currently-displayed report’s page setup (page size, margin sizes, etc.)
Prints the currently-displayed report
Displays the currently-displayed report as it will be printed
Cuts the currently-selected component(s) from the currently-displayed report for pasting into another report Copies the currently-selected component(s) from the currently-displayed report for pasting the copied component(s) into the same or another report Pastes the previously cut or copied component(s) into the currently-displayed report
Format Toolbar This toolbar sets the font and colors of text-based components. It also sets the layering of all components. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Format in the submenu. ReportBuilder’s Format toolbar contains shortcut buttons to the following actions. Specifies which font is used in text-based components. To change the text font, click the drop-down list button. If a text-based component is already selected, the selected font is applied to that component; if no text-based component is already selected, the selected font is used as a default for future text-based components
280
4 TrackBird Reporting
Specifies which text size is used in text-based components. To change the text size, click the drop-down list button. If a text-based component is already selected, the selected text size is applied to that component; if no text-based component is already selected, the selected size is used as a default for future text-based components Specifies whether text is bold in text-based components. To toggle between bold and normal text, click the button (the button appears to be pressed if the option is activated). If a text-based component is already selected, its text switches between bold or normal; if no text-based component is already selected, the selected choice is used as a default for future text-based components Specifies whether text is italic in text-based components. To toggle between italic and normal text, click the button (the button appears to be pressed if the option is activated). If a text-based component is already selected, its text switches between italic or normal; if no text-based component is already selected, the selected choice is used as a default for future text-based components Specifies whether text is underlined in text-based components. To toggle between underlined and normal text, click the button (the button appears to be pressed if the option is activated). If a text-based component is already selected, its text switches between underlined or normal; if no text-based component is already selected, the selected choice is used as a default for future text-based components Specifies how text in text-based components is aligned (left, centered, right-aligned or justified). Click the button representing the alignment you want Specifies the font color used in text-based components. If a text-based component is already selected, clicking the button itself changes the text's color to the color displayed on the button. To change the text color, click the small drop-down list arrow to the right of the button to display a choice of alternative colors and then click the color you want to apply to the text. (Choosing an alternative color also changes the button's default color; to apply the same color to other text-based components afterwards, simply click the Fill color button.)
281
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Specifies the highlight color used in text-based components. If a text-based component is already selected, clicking the button itself changes the highlight's color to the color displayed on the button. To change the highlight color, click the small drop-down list arrow to the right of the button to display a choice of alternative colors and then click the color you want to apply to the highlight. (Choosing an alternative color also changes the button's default color; to apply the same color to other text-based components afterwards, simply click the Fill color button.) Bring to Front allows you to move the selected object in front of other objects. Use this option to control the appearance of overlapping objects Send to Back allows you to move the selected object behind other objects. Use this option to control the appearance of overlapping objects
Edit Toolbar This toolbar changes according to which component is selected. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Edit in the submenu.
Edit Toolbar with a Data-aware Component
This configuration allows the data pipeline and data field for the component to be set. The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names.
Edit Toolbar with a Label Component
This configuration allows you to type the text that will be displayed in a label.
282
4 TrackBird Reporting
Edit Toolbar with a Shape Component
ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar allows you to choose from several shapes when a shape component is selected.
Edit Toolbar with a Line Component
This configuration allows you to move the line to the top, bottom, left, or right within the line component.
Draw Toolbar This toolbar is used to set the color and style for the shape, line, and region components. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Draw in the submenu. ReportBuilder’s Draw toolbar contains shortcut buttons to the following actions. Button
Description Specifies the fill color for shape components. If a shape is already selected, clicking the button itself fills the shape with the color displayed on the button. To change the fill color, click the small drop-down list arrow to the right of the button to display a choice of alternative colors and then click the color you want to apply to the shape. (Choosing an alternative color also changes the button’s default color; to apply the same color to other shapes afterwards, click the Fill color button.) Specifies the line color for line components. If a line is already selected, clicking the button itself colors the line with the color displayed on the button. To change the line color, click the small drop-down list arrow to the right of the button to display a choice of alternative colors and then click the color you want to apply to the line. (Choosing an alternative color also changes the button’s default color; to apply the same color to other lines afterwards, click the Line color button.)
283
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button
Description Specifies the line thickness for line components. To change the thickness of the selected line, click the button to display a drop-down list of line thicknesses. Click the line thickness you want to apply to the selected line. Specifies the line style for line components. To change the style of the selected line, click the button to display a drop-down list of line styles. Click the line style you want to apply to the selected line.
Align or Space Toolbar This toolbar is useful when components need to be positioned uniformly. For example, it can align several components so that the tops are all even, or it can space components so that they have an equal amount of space between them. The first component selected determines the position to which the others will align (to select multiple objects, select the first object by clicking and then select the other objects by pressing Shift while clicking). To display or hide the toolbar, from the View menu, select ReportBuilder’s Toolbars command and then select Align or Space in the submenu. The toolbar displays shortcut buttons to perform these actions:
Aligns the left sides of the selected objects
Aligns the centers of the selected objects vertically
Aligns the right sides of the selected objects
Aligns the tops of the selected objects
Aligns the centers of the selected objects horizontally
Aligns the bottoms of the selected objects
Spaces equally the selected objects horizontally
284
4 TrackBird Reporting
Spaces equally the selected objects vertically
Centers the selected objects horizontally within the band containing the objects
Centers the selected objects vertically within the band containing the objects
Size Toolbar You can use ReportBuilder’s Size toolbar to set all of the components in a selection to a uniform height or width. To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Size in the submenu. The toolbar contains shortcut buttons to the following actions: Adjusts the size of all currently-selected components to the smallest selected (to select several components, click the first component and then press Shift while clicking the other components) Adjusts the size of all currently-selected components to the widest selected (to select several components, click the first component and then press Shift while clicking the other components) Adjusts the size of all currently-selected components to the shortest selected (to select several components, click the first component and then press Shift while clicking the other components) Adjusts the size of all currently-selected components to the tallest selected (to select several components, click the first component and then press Shift while clicking the other components)
Nudge Toolbar This toolbar is useful when you want to move a component or selection of components with extreme precision. Each icon represents the direction the selection will move. Selections will move one pixel each time you press an arrow key.
285
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To display or hide the toolbar, from ReportBuilder’s View menu, select the Toolbars command and then select Nudge in the submenu.
Object Inspector
The Object Inspector displays the properties of the currently-selected component, and can be used to modify those properties. Where an explanation of the selected property (ShiftWithParent in the above example) is available, this is displayed in the box at the bottom of the Inspector. To display the Object Inspector, select the Show Object Inspector command in ReportBuilder’s Data menu.
286
4 TrackBird Reporting
Creating a Report Layout Using the Report Wizard The Report Wizard is a tool on the ReportBuilder’s Design page that allows you to create a report by answering some questions on data, layout, and style.
To create the report layout using the Report Wizard 1
From ReportBuilder’s File menu, select the New command and then click the Report Wizard icon in the New Items window. The Report Wizard’s first screen is displayed.
2
Double-click each field that you want to include in the report, adjusting the field order using the Order buttons if necessary, and then click Next to display the Report Wizard’s next screen.
287
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
288
3
In the Available Fields list, double-click each field by which you want to group the records retrieved by the query (the contents of each of these fields will be displayed once above all grouped records); each is moved into the Groups box.
4
Click Next to display the Report Wizard’s next screen.
5
In the Layout box, select the layout you want, using the sample preview as a guide.
6
In the Orientation box, select the print orientation you need.
7
If you want to ensure that all fields will automatically fit onto the page when the report is printed, click the Adjust Field Widths So All Fields Fit On Page check box. (You may want to deactivate this option in order to lay out large, complex reports manually.)
8
Click Next to display the Report Wizard’s next screen.
4 TrackBird Reporting
9
Select the presentation you want, using the sample preview as a guide, and then click Next display the Report Wizard’s final screen.
10
In the Report Wizard’s final screen, specify whether you want to preview the report immediately or want to further modify its design, and then click Finish.
Components A component is an element used to control how the report looks. Each component has a unique purpose. TrackBird Reporting enables you to include these component types in your reports.
• Label
• DBText
• Memo
• DBMemo
• RichText
• DBRichText
• System Variable
• DBCalc
• Image
• DBImage
• Shape
• DBBarCode
• Line
• DBChart
• BarCode
• Region • SubReport
Each of these components are detailed in “Standard Components Toolbar Components” on page 294. Each component’s appearance or behavior can be modified through its properties. •
Static components Static components always print the same size, regardless of the amount of text they contain. DBText components are static components. In contrast, all of the components that are capable of containing several lines of text are stretchable. For example, DBMemo, Memo, RichText, and DBRichText are all stretchable components.
•
Stretchable components
289
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Stretchable components print according to the amount of text they contain, so their height varies. All of the components that are capable of containing several lines of text are stretchable. For example, DBMemo, Memo, RichText, and DBRichText are all stretchable components. In contrast, DBText fields cannot change size depending on the information they contain. Such fields are called static components.
Data Components Toolbar Components Data-aware components have the ability to read the value of a field from a database table, then display that value in the report. This is different from the standard components, which have content that is assigned when you lay out a report. You associate a data-aware component with a given table by selecting the data pipeline and the data field from the drop-down lists in ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar. The following components are inserted using the Data Components toolbar.
DBText DBText components are inserted by clicking the button on the Data Components toolbar, and display data from most types of database fields. They cannot handle images or Rich Text. You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
DBMemo DBMemo components are inserted by clicking on the Data Components toolbar, and are stretchable components that print plain text from a memo field of a database table. They automatically word-wrap the text. Select the DBMemo, then select a
290
4 TrackBird Reporting
text-based field from ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar to fill a DBMemo with text. To print a DBMemo after another text-printing component (memo, RichText, DBRichText), right-click the component and select the ShiftRelativeTo property. You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
DBRichText DBRichText components are inserted by clicking on the Data Components toolbar, and print formatted text from a memo field. They will automatically word-wrap the text. To print a DBRichText after another text-printing component (memo, DBMemo, RichText), right-click the component and select the ShiftRelativeTo property. You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
291
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
DBCalc DBCalc components are inserted by clicking on the Data Components toolbar, and perform simple database calculations (Sum, Min, Max, Average, Count). You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
DBImage DBImage components are inserted by clicking on the Data Components toolbar, and print graphics (Bitmaps, GIFs, JPEGs) that are stored in a database field. Activate the MaintainAspectRatio property to scale an image so that its height and width are in the correct ratio. You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
292
4 TrackBird Reporting
DBBarCode DBBarCode components are inserted by clicking on the Data Components toolbar, and convert the data from a database field into a bar code symbol. When creating a bar code, use the BarCodeType property to specify the symbology which should be used to encode the data. You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
DBChart DBChart components are inserted by clicking on the Data Components toolbar, and insert a chart into a report, based on data retrieved in a query. You can change the source of all data-aware components data using ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar.
The drop-down list on the left shows the data pipelines. The drop-down list on the right shows the field names. Alternatively, you can change the component’s DataPipeline and DataField properties using the Object Inspector.
293
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Standard Components Toolbar Components The following components are inserted using the Standard Components toolbar.
Label Label components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and function as headers for other kinds of components, such as DBText components. Use ReportBuilder’s Edit toolbar to type text into the label.
Memo Memo components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and allow you to load multiple lines of plain text into them. Right-click the memo component and select Lines, then click the Load option to bring text into a memo. To print a memo after another text-printing component (DBMemo, RichText, DBRichText), right-click and select ShiftRelativeTo.
RichText RichText components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and print formatted text. Right-click the component and select MailMerge to bring a file into the component. To print a RichText after another text-printing component (memo, DBMemo, DBRichText), right-click the component and then select ShiftRelativeTo.
Variable Variable components are inserted by clicking and perform calculations.
on the Standard Components toolbar,
System Variable System Variable components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and insert information such as the current date, current date and time, page number or total number of pages into the report.
Image Image components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and display graphics (such as bitmaps, GIFs, and JPEGs). Right-click over the component and select MaintainAspectRatio to scale an image so that it is the same height and width.
294
4 TrackBird Reporting
Shape Shape components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and display various shapes, such as squares, rectangles, circles, and ellipses. Use the Edit toolbar to change the shape type.
Line Line components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and display a line. Use the Edit toolbar to set the line orientation.
BarCode BarCode components are inserted by clicking on the Standard Components toolbar, and render bar codes. Use the Edit toolbar to set the data to be encoded. Right-click the component to display its contextual menu and select the Configure... command to pick bar code types.
Advanced Components Toolbar Components Region Region components are inserted by clicking on the Advanced Components toolbar, and can contain other components. To print a region after a text-printing component (memo, DBMemo, RichText, DBRichText), right-click the region and then select ShiftRelativeTo.
SubReport SubReport components are inserted by clicking on the Advanced Components toolbar, and allow you to create a report within a report in order to show more levels of detail or to print several reports as one.
Properties Properties are settings used to modify the appearance or behavior of report components. The following properties are commonly used to modify report component appearance or behavior.
AutoSize AutoSize is a contextual menu property available for text components. When the AutoSize property is set to true, the component adjusts its width so that all of the text is displayed.
295
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Bring to Front The Bring to Front property allows you to move an object in front of other objects. Use this option to control the appearance of overlapping objects.
DataField Specifies the field in the DataPipeline which contains a data-aware component’s data.
DataPipeline The DataPipeline property determines where a data-aware component obtains its data. Each DataPipeline contains a set of fields. The field which will be used by the component is specified via the DataField property.
DisplayFormat DisplayFormat is a speed menu option available for textual components. This option allows you to display a value in a certain format (decimals with a dollar sign, for example). Right-click over a textual component to access the Display Format.
MaintainAspectRatio MaintainAspectRatio is a contextual menu option available for images. It scales an image so that the height and width are adjusted based on the original image size.
OverFlow Whenever a stretchable component is printing on additional pages, it is said to be overflowing. When a condition of OverFlow exists, other components in the band may print again in order to clarify the content of the stretchable.
ParentHeight ParentHeight is a contextual menu option that allows you to set the shape of an object so that it matches the height of a band. Right-click a component to select ParentHeight.
ParentWidth ParentWidth is a contextual menu option that allows you to set the shape of an object so that it matches the width of a band. Right-click a component to select ParentWidth.
Position Position is a contextual menu dialog that allows you to change size of an object. Right-click a component to access this dialog.
ReprintOnOverFlow ReprintOnOverFlow is a contextual menu command that applies to static components or components that always print at the same height. These types of components are frequently used with stretchable components because they serve the purpose of a heading. If a memo prints onto several pages, the heading component should print with it. Set the heading component to ReprintOnOverFlow so it will print on each page.
296
4 TrackBird Reporting
For example, a memo describing the features of a car might be preceded by the name of the model. If this memo happened to overflow onto additional pages, it might be helpful to print the name of the model again so that the reader is reminded of the model to which the description pertains. In order to do this, you would set ReprintOnOverFlow to True for the model name.
Send to Back Send to Back is frequently used with shapes. This contextual menu command allows components to be moved to the background. If you want to use a shape as a background, use the Send to Back function.
ShiftRelativeTo ShiftRelativeTo is a contextual menu command available for the following components: •
Memo
•
DBMemo
•
RichText
•
DBRichText
•
Region
This command allows us to associate these components with one another so that one can print directly after another. To make this association, right-click a component, select ShiftRelativeTo and then choose the component you want to print first from the drop-down list.
ShiftWithParent The ShiftWithParent property allows a static component to print after a stretchable component. Right-click a component to select ShiftWithParent. The ShiftWithParent property is used by static components that need to print after a stretchable has completed printing. For example, let's say you need a description of a car, followed by the price. The price should appear below the description. In order to do this, you would place a DBText component below the memo component (the car’s description), setting the ShiftWithParent property to True. When the report prints, the memo would print to completion and then the price would print beneath it.
Stretch Applies to stretchable components only, and indicates whether or not the stretchable will adjust its height based on content. A stretchable component with Stretch set to False behaves just like a static component, printing at the height defined in the report layout and cropping any content which extends beyond that height. When set to True, Stretch causes the component to adjust its height based on the content.
297
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
StretchWithParent The StretchWithParent property allows the selected stretchable component to change size according to the change in height of the band in which it resides. Right-click a component to access this property. The StretchWithParent property applies only to shapes and lines and can be used to create a border or background for a stretchable component. The Parent in StretchWithParent refers to the band, since the band contains the components.
SuppressRepeatedValues This contextual menu option prevents repeated values from printing for DBText and DBCalc components. For example, to obtain a report of all computers that have connected to a network at some time during a period, select SuppressRepeatedValues so that the report lists each computer once only, rather than listing each connection individually.
Visible This contextual menu command determines the visibility of an object. To set the visibility of a component to False, right-click it and, in the contextual menu, deselect Visible.
Report Editing Functions To add a component to a report 1
If the ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If the toolbar containing the button for creating the type of component you want is not already displayed, display the toolbar concerned as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
3
On the toolbar, click the button that creates the type of component you want.
4
Click the band you wish to contain the component, at its correct location (ReportBuilder positions the component’s top left corner at the point you click).
5
If necessary, adjust the component’s size, position and properties.
To add a database calculation to a report
298
1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If the Data Components toolbar is not already displayed, display the toolbar as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
4 TrackBird Reporting
3
On the Data Components toolbar, click
4
Click the band you wish to contain the component, at its correct location (ReportBuilder positions the DBCalc component's top left corner at the point you click). ReportBuilder displays the new component as follows:
5
Right-click the component and select the Calculations from the contextual menu.
.
ReportBuilder displays the Calculations dialog.
6
In the Calc Type drop-down list, select the type of calculation you want (the Count, Sum, Maximum, Minimum, or Average of a field’s values for each group).
7
In the Reset Group drop-down list, select the field whose grouped values you want to calculate.
8
Click OK.
If necessary, adjust the component’s size, position, and properties.
To add the date or time to a report 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If ReportBuilder’s Standard Components toolbar and Edit toolbar are not already displayed, display the toolbars as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
3
On the Standard Components toolbar, click
4
Click the band you wish to contain the current date or time, at its correct location (ReportBuilder positions the component’s top left corner at the point you click).
.
299
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
5
In the Edit toolbar’s drop-down list, select one of the options in the first column of the following table. Field
Description
Date
Component displays and prints only the current date in the report’s page
DateTime
Component displays and prints the current date and time in the report’s page
PrintDateTime
Component displays and prints the date and time that the report began printing in the report’s page (otherwise, each page will display and print the date and time that it began printing)
Time
Component displays and prints the current time in the report’s page
6
If necessary, adjust the component's size and position as detailed in Change a component's size and Move a component.
7
To change the date or time format, right-click the component and then, in the contextual menu, select the DateFormat... command. In the Format dialog, select the date or time format you want and then click the OK button.
To add the file name to a report
300
1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If ReportBuilder’s Standard Components toolbar and Edit toolbar are not already displayed, display the toolbars as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
3
On the Standard Components toolbar, click
4
Click the band you wish to contain the file name, at its correct location (ReportBuilder positions the component’s top left corner at the point you click).
5
In the Edit toolbar’s drop-down list, select DocumentName.
6
If necessary, adjust the component’s size and position as detailed in Change a component's size and Move a component.
.
4 TrackBird Reporting
To add the page number or total number of pages to a report 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If ReportBuilder’s Standard Components toolbar and Edit toolbar are not already displayed, display the toolbars as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
3
On the Standard Components toolbar, click
4
Click the band you wish to contain the page number or total number of pages, at its correct location (ReportBuilder positions the component’s top left corner at the point you click).
5
In the Edit toolbar’s drop-down list, select one of the options in the first column of the following table.
6
.
Field
Description
PageCount
Component displays and prints only the total number of pages in the report
PageSet
Component displays and prints the page number and total number of pages in the report, in the form n of n
PageSetDesc
Component displays and prints the page number and total number of pages in the report, in the form Page n of n
PageNo
Component displays and prints only the page number in the report
PageNoDesc
Component displays and prints only the page number in the report, in the form Page n
If necessary, adjust the component’s size and position as detailed in Change a component's size and Move a component.
To add a chart to a report There are two Chart icons in the component toolbars.
Chart
DBChart
301
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The two components, Chart and DBChart, are the basic building blocks of all charts. To build a graph unlinked to database data, you would use the Chart component. To build your graphs from your report’s query, you use the DBChart component. Once an initial data series is defined, you can then add another data series as a data source. 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If ReportBuilder’s Data Components toolbar is not already displayed, display the toolbar as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
3
On ReportBuilder’s Data Components toolbar, click chart.
4
Click the band you wish to contain the chart (normally Detail), at its correct location. ReportBuilder positions the chart’s top left corner at the point you click.
5
Resize and reposition the chart as necessary by clicking the chart, positioning the mouse cursor over a black handle surrounding the chart and then dragging the handle to the position you want as detailed in Change a component's size and Move a component.
6
Edit the chart so that it contains the data retrieved by the report’s query and is presented in the format you want as detailed in Edit a chart below.
to create a data-based
To edit a chart
302
1
Right-click the chart to display its contextual menu.
2
In the menu, select the Edit Chart command to display the Chart Editor dialog.
4 TrackBird Reporting
The Chart editor’s Chart page (its first page) contains definition information for the chart. There are various sections for defining general and other more specific, chart parameters. (Some parameters won’t apply until you have some data series defined in the chart.)
To add a data series to a chart 1
If the Chart editor dialog is not already displayed, display it as detailed in “To edit a chart” on page 302.
2
Press the Add... button in the Series tab of the Chart page. The TeeChart Gallery dialog shows you a choice of series types.
3
Select a series type to add to your chart; you can change its type later if you decide that you would prefer to visualize your data in a different way.
4
Select a series type by clicking with the mouse or pressing the keyboard’s arrow keys and then click OK. (Double-clicking the series type will achieve the same result.) The series type is automatically added to your chart. In the Chart editor you will see a new configuration tab added for the new series.
303
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If you selected a line series, the editor will appear as follows.
The series has now been added, containing random values so that you can visualize the series appearance when you are designing the chart, enabling you to easily follow any changes you are making. When creating a new chart, the next step is to add data to the series.
To edit a data series an a DBChart component Note:
Before you can use any database facilities, DB Express (or equivalent) must be installed.
304
1
If the Chart editor dialog is not already displayed, display it as detailed in “To edit a chart” on page 302.
2
If the Chart editor dialog’s Series page is not already displayed, click the Series tab.
4 TrackBird Reporting
3
Double-click the series name to display the following dialog.
4
Select your series from the series drop list.
5
Click the Data Source tab to display the following page.
6
From the drop-down list, select your data source type (in TrackBird Reporting, this will normally be Data Pipeline). There are four types of data sources available: Data Source Description Manual
Data points must be added programmatically, through source code
Random
Draws the current chart using random values
305
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Data Source Description Function
One or more series (such as LineSeries1, BarSeries2, etc.) that could come from this chart or from another chart in your project. A function may work with a combination of one or more other series and an algorithmic function (min, max, average, etc.)
Data Pipeline
A Table, Query or Dataset
When creating a new chart, the next step is to add a dataset to the chart.
To add a dataset to a chart 1
If the Chart editor dialog is not already displayed, display it as detailed in “To edit a chart” on page 302.
2
If the Chart editor’s Control editor dialog is not already displayed, display it as detailed in “To edit a data series an a DBChart component” on page 304.
3
In the drop-down list, select Data Pipeline to map the series to the report’s query. As you make the selection you will see new page options appear to define the dataset for the pie series.
4
In the Dataset drop list, select TrackBird_Query.
5
Define the values that will be plotted in the chart. If you defined a Pie series, pie-specific configuration options are displayed. Each series has parameters that vary (slightly) in definition. If you defined a Pie series, the Pie field is mandatory and must contain a valid numeric field or a string field with values that can be converted to numbers. For example, you might choose the Speed field. (The CPU table is a collection of CPUs that includes their speed information.) You can optionally select a Labels field to draw the corresponding string for each point on the pie. For example, you might choose the Name field. This label will be used to draw the Pie Legend. Note:
Some chart series types have more than one figure to represent a point. Values that are plotted by date or time are an example of X-value series. Not all date-time values should be equally spaced. The X value is the specific horizontal position for each Y value. You should experiment with deleting the pie series and adding a series of a different type, i.e. Line series, to display the option to apply X and Y values. 306
4 TrackBird Reporting
A Pie series cannot contain X Values. Click the OK button. In the above example, the DBChart component would show a Pie Chart and a Legend.
Aligning or Spacing Report Components The Align or Space toolbar is used to position components uniformly. For example, it can align several components so that the tops are all even, or it can space components so that they have an equal amount of space between them.
To align or space report components 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
If ReportBuilder’s Align Or Space toolbar is not already displayed, display it as detailed in “To display a ReportBuilder toolbar” on page 274.
3
Select the components you wish to align or space, by clicking the first object and then selecting the other objects by pressing Shift while clicking them. The first component selected determines the position to which the others will align.
4
On the Align Or Space toolbar, click one of these buttons.
To align the left sides of the selected objects
To align the centers of the selected objects vertically
To align the right sides of the selected objects
To align the tops of the selected objects
To align the centers of the selected objects horizontally
To align the bottoms of the selected objects
307
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To leave equal horizontal space between the selected objects
To leave equal vertical space between the selected objects
To center the selected objects horizontally within the band containing the objects
To center the selected objects vertically within the band containing the objects
To change a band’s height 1
Position the mouse pointer over the gray bar representing the band whose height you want to change (the gray bar contains the band’s name and an arrow pointing to the band). The mouse pointer takes the form of a vertical, two-headed arrow. For example, the following example shows the mouse pointer in position for changing the size of (in this case, revealing) the SOFTWAREEDITOR group header band:
2
You can change the band’s height using either of the following methods. •
Changing a band's height manually Press and hold down the mouse button to drag the gray bar upwards or downwards to change the band’s height.
•
Specifying a band’s height Right-click the gray band. TrackBird Report displays a contextual menu. In the contextual menu, select the Position... command to display the Position dialog box.
308
4 TrackBird Reporting
a
In the Height box, specify the band’s height in the units specified in ReportBuilder Report menu’s Units submenu.
b
Click OK.
Changing a Component’s Properties You can change a component’s properties using the following methods. •
Using the component’s contextual menu Right-click the component to display its contextual menu. The contextual menu lists all properties, commands and options available for the component (names of all commands are followed by ...). Click the property that you want to change for the component (all activated properties are indicated by a check mark beside their name).
•
Using the Object Inspector In ReportBuilder’s Design page (displayed by clicking ReportBuilder’s Design tab), from the Data menu, select the Show Object Inspector command.
309
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
ReportBuilder displays the Object Inspector window.
The Object Inspector displays the properties of the currently-selected component; click the check-box, drop-down list or text box of the property you want to change, editing the property as necessary. Where an explanation of the selected property (ShiftWithParent in the above example) is available, this is displayed in the box at the bottom of the Inspector. To close the Object Inspector window, click
in its top-right corner.
To change a component’s size 1
310
Click the component to select it. ReportBuilder displays handles around it as in the following example.
4 TrackBird Reporting
2
Position the mouse pointer over the black square (handle) to drag it to another position. As soon as you position the mouse pointer over a black square, ReportBuilder shows how the component’s size can be changed; for example, if it is positioned over the top right corner, the cursor takes the following shape:
3
Press and hold down the mouse button to drag the handle to its new position; when you release the mouse button, the component’s size changes accordingly.
To move a component 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
Position the mouse pointer over the component and press and hold down the mouse button; ReportBuilder outlines the component in gray.
3
Drag the component to its new position, using the gray outline as a guide.
4
Release the mouse button to place the component at its new position.
To delete a component 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
Click the component to select it. ReportBuilder displays handles around it as in the following example.
3
Press Delete, or from the Edit menu, select Delete. Note:
To retrieve a component that you have deleted, from the Edit menu, select Undelete.
311
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To define a group 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
From ReportBuilder’s Report menu, select the Groups... command. ReportBuilder displays the Groups dialog.
3
Click Add. The list displays the name of the first field in the Groups drop list.
4
In the Groups drop list, select the name of the field where duplicate values will be grouped together (for example, to group together all records containing the same Processor’s name, you would select the Processor field). Note:
If you cannot see the full field name, you can widen the dialog by dragging its right side outwards.
312
a
To start each of the reports’s groups with a new printed page, in the On Group Change box, activate the option by clicking the Start New Page check box.
b
To restart page numbering at 1 for each of the report’s groups, in the On Group Change box, activate the option by clicking the Reset Page Number check box.
4 TrackBird Reporting
c
To ensure that small numbers of grouped records (one or two, for example) are not printed at the bottom of a page, in the On Group Change box, specify in the New Page When Less Than text box the minimum number of grouped records that you want to print at the bottom of a page.
d
To prevent grouped records from being split onto two pages, activate the option by clicking the Keep Group Together check box.
e
To print group headers at the top of each of the group’s pages, activate the option by clicking the Reprint Group Headers On Subsequent Pages check box.
5
Repeat steps 3 onwards for each additional field by which you want to group records.
6
When you have selected all fields by which you want to group records, click the OK button.
Displaying or Hiding a Report Band Report bands are used to define the position of the components placed on your report. Most report information is placed in the Detail band, but you will frequently wish to place information at the top of each record (you would then place that component in the Title band), at the top of each page in the report (you would then place that component in the Header band), etc. A report band must of course be displayed so that components can be placed upon it; if no components are placed on a report band, you may instead wish to hide the band concerned.
To display or hide a report band 1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
From ReportBuilder’s Report menu, select one of the following bands depending on which band you want to include or hide in your report. Note:
Which band-related commands are available in the Report menu depends upon which fields are included in your report. Field
Description
Title
Prints components above the details of each record appearing in the report
Header
Prints components at the top of each page in the report 313
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Field
Description
Group Header[n]
Prints components above the details of each record group appearing in the report (each group header is numbered (n), from 0 upwards)
Detail
Prints components in the details of each record appearing in the report
Group Footer[n]
Prints components below the details of each record group appearing in the report (each group header is numbered (n), from 0 upwards)
Footer
Prints components at the bottom of each page in the report
Page Style
Prints components (such as boxes, lines etc.) in the background of each page in the report
Summary
Prints components at the end of the report
ReportBuilder displays a check mark beside the name of every band included in the current report.
To position a band on the page
314
1
If ReportBuilder’s Design page is not already displayed, click ReportBuilder’s Design tab.
2
Position the mouse pointer over the gray bar representing the band whose position you want to change (the gray bar contains the band’s name and an arrow pointing to the band). The mouse pointer takes the form of a two-headed vertical arrow. The following example shows the mouse pointer in position for changing the SOFTWAREEDITOR group header band’s position.
3
Right-click the gray band. TrackBird Report displays a contextual menu.
4 TrackBird Reporting
4
In the contextual menu, select the Position... command to display the Position dialog.
5
In the Print Position text box, specify the band’s position measured from the top of the page, in the units specified in ReportBuilder’s Report menu’s Units submenu.
6
Click OK.
Displaying a Report Do one of the following. •
When the Repository Explorer is displayed, click the report in Repository Explorer’s right structure pane and then click Preview Report in Repository Explorer’s central task pane.
•
When the report is displayed in ReportBuilder, click ReportBuilder’s Preview tab.
Forms Forms are used to display information on a given element of the TrackBird structure tree (such as a workstation), selected by clicking the element in the TrackBird structure tree. You can use Repository Explorer to perform these form display and editing tasks described in the following sections.
Displaying an Existing Form In the Default Forms folder, select the form you want to display and then click Execute Form in the central task pane. Note:
Although the form is displayed, it is not linked with the All Workstations query; to display the form when it is linked with the query, you must open the form from TrackBird Server, using the
toolbar button. 315
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Modifying or Creating a Form You can use the TrackBird Designer application to modify forms such as Summary and Summary 2 or create additional forms, using these elements: •
Toolbars (see below)
•
Object Inspector
•
Form Components
Each of these elements is detailed in this section. To modify a form, in the Default Forms folder, select the form you want to modify and click Edit Form in the central task pane. To create a new form, select the folder where you want the form added. Click the Repository Explorer Create form button enable you to format your form.
. The TrackBird Designer tool launches to
Toolbars
The above toolbar is used to perform the following tasks in TrackBird Designer: •
Save the form
•
Run the form using the test query (All Workstations) in order to display the form when linked with a query
•
Stop execution of the test query (the button is displayed as executed)
•
Edit the test query
when the form is
The above toolbar is used to perform the following tasks in TrackBird Designer:
316
•
Adjusting the selected component’s size
•
Displaying (the button is then boxed in gray) or hiding the Component Alignment dialog
•
Displaying (the button is then boxed in gray) or hiding the Object Inspector
4 TrackBird Reporting
The above toolbar is used to perform the following tasks in TrackBird Designer: •
Canceling the last action
•
Redoing the last canceled action
•
Cutting the selected component(s)
•
Copying the selected component(s)
•
Pasting the selected component(s)
•
Sending the selected component(s) behind overlapping components
•
Bringing the selected component(s) in front of overlapping components
•
Locking all components so that no actions can be performed on them
Object Inspector The Object Inspector is used to configure a component’s properties such as its size, position on the form, name and behavior. The information contained in the Object Inspector changes depending on which component is selected; we will specify the various properties displayed in the Object Inspector for each component described.
317
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Form Components The tab bar displayed at the top of the TrackBird Designer screen contains four tabs, each of which in turn contains form components.
Standard Tab
The Standard tab (above) contains standard components such as labels, buttons, etc.
Additional Tab
The Additional tab (above) contains components such as those to insert an image, tab bar, etc.
Win32 Tab
The Win32 tab (above) contains system components such as an image list, progress bar and structure tree.
TrackBird Tab
The TrackBird tab (above) contains components using TrackBird-specific elements such as the TrackBird structure tree or the list query editor. Each element displayed on this tab is explained more fully below.
318
4 TrackBird Reporting
Selection Button—The object selection cursor is used to select an object already present in the form. NBQuery Button—NBQuery components are displayed as follows on forms; they are not visible when they are executed.
Double-click the component to create a list query that you can then link with other components. NBSQLQuery Button—NBSQLQuery components are displayed as follows on forms; they are not visible when forms are executed.
Double-click the component to create an SQL query that you can then link with other components. NBTreeView Button—NBTreeView components display the standard TrackBird structure tree on the form.
319
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
You can use the Object Inspector to set the following properties for a structure tree component. Property
Description
[+] Appearance Color
Background color
[+] Font Color
Font color
Name
Font name
Size
Font size
[+] Style FsBold
Bold text
FsItalic
Italic text
FsStrikeOut
Struck-out text
FsUnderlined
Underlined text
[+]Misc Name
Component name
[+] Other Images
320
List of pictures to be displayed beside the nodes. To display those used in the TrackBird structure tree, enter the following value: NBImages.NBImageList
4 TrackBird Reporting
NBEdit Button—NBEdit components are displayed as follows on forms:
Display field. This component is used to allow information to be selected for copying/pasting. Double-click this component to display the TrackBird structure tree and select the feature to be displayed in the component. You can use the Object Inspector to set the following properties for an NBEdit component. Property
Description
[+] Appearance Color
Background color
[+]Misc Name
Component name
[+] Other ReadOnly
If checked, the component cannot be modified but the text it contains can be selected
NBText Button—NBText components are displayed as follows on forms:
Display field. Double-click this component to display the TrackBird structure tree and select the feature to be displayed in the component. You can use the Object Inspector to set the following properties for an NBText component.
321
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window AlClient: aligns with the entire window AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window AlNone: no alignment with the window AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window AlTop: aligns with the top of the window
Caption
Default name displayed
Color
Background color
[+] Font Color
Text color
Name
Font name
Size
Font size
[+] Style FsBold
Bold text
FsItalic
Italic text
FsStrikeOut
Struck-out text
FsUnderlined
Underlined text
[+]Misc Name
Component name
[+] Other Images
322
List of pictures to be displayed beside the nodes. To display those used in the TrackBird structure tree, enter the following value: NBImages.NBImageList
4 TrackBird Reporting
Property
Description
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the window, X position
Top
Upper, left corner of the window, Y position
Height
Height of the window
Width
Width of the window
Position
Position on the screen: PoDefault: use the coordinates input by the user PoDefaultPosOnly: maintain the X and Y positions, whatever the window size PoDefaultSizeOnly: maintain the size of the window, whatever its position PoDesign: position as defined in Designer PoCenterScreen: centered on the screen, not taking into account X and Y, but maintaining the size.
NBGrid Button—NBGrid components are displayed as follows on forms:
They display the occurrences of an item in a list (e.g. the list of drives on a workstation). To select the item to be displayed in the grid, double-click the grid to display the Select Node dialog and then select the item in the dialog. The selected item’s features will then be displayed in the grid. NBDetail Button—NBDetail components are displayed as follows on forms.
323
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
NBDetail components are displayed in association with NBTreeView components; when a node is selected in the structure tree, all its subcategories, items or features are displayed in the NBDetail component. You can use the Object Inspector to set the following properties for an NBDetail component. Property
Description
[+] Other ShowItemWithNoChildren
Checked: If the node selected in the structure tree is a feature, its value is displayed. Unchecked: If the node selected in the structure tree is a feature, its value is not displayed.
NBLabel Button—NBLabel components are displayed as follows on forms:
This component is very similar to the NBText component, with the exception that only one feature value is displayed in an NBText component. To display all of a feature’s values (such as both C: and D: for the High Capacity Memory\Drive for example), an NBLabel component must be used. You can use the Object Inspector to set the following properties for an NBDetail component. Property
Description
[+] Other FeatureSeparator
Separator between two features. This can either be a punctuation symbol ( , ;:/\- ) or a line-feed character (the
HTML tag)
Formula
Formula used to insert the TrackBird feature. If there are several values, the formula is followed by FeatureSeparator. The formula is entered as follows:
To obtain the feature number to use in the Formula property, place an NBText component onto the form and select the feature you want to specify for the NBLabel component. Use the Object Inspector to check the value of the NBText component’s FeatID property in the Other folder. You must now enter this number in the NBDetail component’s Formula property, in place of FeatureNumber.
324
4 TrackBird Reporting
Queries TrackBird Repository Explorer can be used to perform the following query management tasks in TrackBird Reporting. •
Displaying Queries
•
Modifying or Defining Queries
This section provides details of how to use Repository Explorer to perform these tasks.
Displaying Queries The results of both list queries and tree queries can be displayed using the Repository Explorer.
To display or export the results of a list query in TrackBird reporting 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
In the Repository Explorer’s right structure tree, select the list query whose results you wish to display or export. a
To display the list query results, select Execute Query in the Repository Explorer’s central task pane.
b
To export the list query results, select Edit Query in the Repository Explorer’s central task pane and click Export at the bottom of the List Query Results window to display the Export Wizard dialog.
325
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird Reporting includes filters to export data to files in the formats listed in the Export Wizard screen. 3
Select the file format in which the query results are to be saved, then click Next to display the next Export Wizard screen.
4
Specify the appropriate options in the successive Export Wizard screens, click Next to display the next screen each time.
5
In the Action After Exporting box, select one of these: •
None (the file is saved)
•
Open For File View (the file is immediately opened in the appropriate application)
•
Email As File Attachment (the file is attached to a mail message created in the computer’s default mail software).
Note:
To display fixed text at the top or bottom of data exported to a worksheet, type the text in the Header or Footer box in Step 6 of the Export Wizard. 6
In the final Export Wizard screen, enter the file’s name and extension (the Export Wizard saves the file in the TrackBird Server folder unless you specify another folder or directory), then click Execute.
To display the results of a tree query in TrackBird reporting 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
In the Repository Explorer’s right structure tree, select the tree query whose results you wish to display.
3
In the Repository Explorer’s central task pane, select Execute Tree Query.
Modifying or Defining Queries Queries are defined or modified using the List Query Editor screen or the Tree Query Editor screen depending on their type. The methods used to edit list queries and tree queries in TrackBird Repository Explorer are detailed separately below.
326
4 TrackBird Reporting
To modify or define a list query in TrackBird Repository Explorer Most list query management tasks are performed using the list query toolbar, displayed at the top of the List Query Editor screen. 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
To edit a query, select the query you wish to edit in the right structure tree and then select Edit Query in the Repository Explorer’s central task pane to open the list query in the List Query Editor. Or
To create a query, do one of the following to display the List Query Editor screen.
3
Click
4
Click
.
to display a drop list. Select Query in the drop list.
From the File menu, select New to display a drop list. Select Query in the drop list. 5
Edit the list query as detailed in “Editing List Queries in TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 328.
TrackBird Repository Explorer List Query Editor Toolbar The table below lists the various toolbar buttons used to create, modify and use list queries within ReportBuilder. Button
Use Creates a query
Saves the query as New Query. You can then rename the query by clicking this name in the Repository Explorer screen Deletes the selected feature from the query
Executes the displayed list query and exports the results in a range of file formats
327
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button
Use Executes the displayed query and displays the results in a TrackBird window
Displays the Code Editor (read-only) screen containing the SQL code generated to run the query defined in the right pane Adds a calculated field to the query defined in the right pane Displays the Script Editor screen containing the VBScript used to calculate the value stored in the selected calculated field Displays the TrackBird system nodes. This button is useful when running historical queries.
Editing List Queries in TrackBird Repository Explorer TrackBird Repository Explorer List Queries at a Glance TrackBird Reporting can be used to prepare queries easily using the double-click method, via the List Query Editor. Unless you require the greater flexibility provided by manually-written SQL code, it is not necessary to use a query language.
To add columns to a list query in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29.).
3
If necessary, click the button to the left of an item in the Result pane to display its hierarchically subordinate information, or click to the left of an item to hide its hierarchically subordinate information.
4
Double-click each feature whose information you want to display; its name is then displayed in the right pane.
To delete a column in a list query in TrackBird Repository Explorer
328
1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29.).
4 TrackBird Reporting
3
Do one of the following. Select the column you want to delete in the List Query Editor’s right pane, then click
.
Or
Right-click the column you want to delete in the List Query Editor’s right pane and select Delete from the contextual menu. 4
To delete the selected column, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
To move a list query column in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29.).
3
In the List Query Editor’s right pane, click the gray title bar of the column you want to move.
4
Drag the column to its new position.
List Query Criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer You can define criteria for as many features as you wish in TrackBird Repository Explorer. The procedures for editing and deleting ReportBuilder list query criteria are detailed below.
Editing List Query Criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer List criteria can be edited in the following ways in TrackBird Repository Explorer. •
Editing List Query Criteria Using the Wizard
•
Editing List Query Criteria Manually
Both methods are detailed separately below.
To edit a list query criteria using the wizard 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
329
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29).
3
In the right pane of the List Query Editor screen, do one of the following to display the Criteria dialog.
4
•
Double-click the column containing the feature for which you wish to define criteria.
•
Right-click the column containing the feature for which you wish to define criteria and select Field criteria from the contextual menu.
Define the criteria applied to the selected feature. The box offers a very simple way to prepare the SQL code that will be used to define the query criteria and filters. The following table lists all expressions available in the Criteria box, together with their meanings in the resulting SQL code.
330
Expression
Meaning
By value: Exact value
=
By value: Not equal
Null value
IS NULL
Not null
IS NOT NULL
4 TrackBird Reporting
Expression
Meaning
By value: Expression
LIKE
By interval
BETWEEN x AND y
The Filter type section can only be used when By value is selected in the Criteria type section. To add a criterion, click 5
. To delete a criterion, select it and then click
.
When you have defined all criteria for the selected feature, click OK.
Criteria can also be entered manually, without using the wizard.
To edit list query criteria manually 1
Type the operator (=, , =, , LIKE, NOT LIKE, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL, BETWEEN value1 AND value2) followed by the feature’s value. Criteria are case-sensitive, meaning that if you wish to define criteria that are not case-sensitive, you must create them using the assistant.
2
Enter an expression. You must use the percent sign (%). To display all of a feature’s values beginning with the letter T you would type LIKE T%; to display all values containing the letters XP you would type LIKE %XP%.
Criteria can also be created that display an input prompt asking the user to enter the criterion value. For example, you can create a query to display the manufacturer and model details of workstations whose location is entered when the query is run. To do so, type in the selected feature’s Criteria line the input prompt that is to be displayed.
331
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The prompt must be typed in curled brackets { } as in the following example.
The criterion above displays a dialog requesting the workstation name that will be used to specify which workstation details are to be included in the report. Criteria can also be used to calculate the result of a calculation based on another column and so define which records are displayed. For example, such a criterion might be used to list all workstations on which less than 10% of their total memory is available. This would be achieved by entering the criterion < [TOTALMEMORY_MB] *0.1 where TOTALMEMORY_MB is the name of the column containing the data upon which the calculation is based, typed in square brackets. Any number of variables can therefore be used to perform calculations.
332
4 TrackBird Reporting
To delete list query criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To run the displayed list query” on page 31).
3
In the right pane of the List Query Editor screen, do one of the following. •
Double-click the column containing the feature whose criteria you want to delete, to display the Criteria dialog. Click to delete each criterion displayed in the box, then click OK.
•
Select the text in the Criteria box containing the criteria you wish to delete (as shown in the example screen below), then press Delete to clear the box. Repeat the process for each criterion you wish to delete.
Calculated Fields Calculated fields are used to manipulate field values that cannot be handled using a criterion. For example, you may want to chain two text values (such as the first name and last name) together or extract part of an IP address. The VBScript language is used in calculated fields. For more information on the VBScript language, see http://www.microsoft.com/scripting.
To edit a calculated field 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261. 333
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29).
3
To open the Code Editor screen used to edit the VBScript code used by a selected calculated field, do one of the following. •
Double-click the calculated field.
•
Click
.
The following Variables, Objects and methods can be used in scripts. VBScript element
Description
result
Display the result of processing the current VBScript line
Query
Query object used to process the query, line by line
FieldByName(''0fieldname'') Function used to select a query field by its name and then work with it. The result type must then be defined as String, Date or Integer, as in the following example. result = Query.FieldByName(''OUTPUTFILE'').AsString Fields(FieldNumber)
Function used to select a query field by its number and then work with it. Field numbers begin at 0, as in the following example. result = Query.Fields(0).AsString
AsString
Specifies that the chosen field contains a text string
AsDate
Specifies that the chosen field contains a date
AsInteger
Specifies that the chosen field contains an integer
CancelCurrentRecord
The result contained in the result variable is not displayed if this variable is set to true, as in the following example. Query.CancelCurrentRecord = true The default value is false, meaning that the result is displayed unless otherwise specified.
334
4 TrackBird Reporting
Calculated Field Code Example In this example, we wish to display all workstations whose third IP segment is 32.
The VBScript used for the ReportBuilder query calculated field in this example is as follows. ' Ge TCP_IPADDRESS field from source query result=Query.FieldByName("TCP_IPADDRESS").AsString ' if field value is empty, then put None instead if result="" then result="None" else 'Field not null, extract the third TCPIP number (like 32 in 192.168.32.1) if (PosPoint 0) then Result=Left(result,PosPoint-1) ' First step extract the string without last number PosPoint=InStrRev(result,".") Result=Right(result,Len(Result)-PosPoint) else 'if TCP/IP is incorrect, put None value result = "None" end if end if ' If the result is None or different from 32, ' cancel the current query row... if (result="None") or (result"32") then Query.CancelCurrentRecord=true end if
335
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The results of the query are as follows.
Example List Query In this example, the user wants to list all Microsoft software installed on workstation CPU21.
336
1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the List Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List Query Editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29).
3
If necessary, click to the left of the CPU category to display its hierarchically subordinate information.
4
Open the Collection information item.
5
Double-click Output file to move it to the first column in the right pane of the List Query Editor screen.
6
In the Criteria line, enter the criterion. It must be written =CPU21.
7
Now open the TrackBird structure to the Software item and double-click the Software editor, Software and Version features to move them to the right pane of the List Query Editor, to create three new columns.
8
In the Criteria line of the Software editor column, enter like Microsoft% as the search criterion. The like function looks for part of a string. In the criterion above, the percent sign (%) represents any number of unspecified characters, indicating that the string begins with Microsoft. The percent sign (%) character may be placed at the beginning, middle, or end of the string, depending on what data must be found.
9
If thought useful, select an ascending sort order for the first column by clicking in its Order box and selecting Asc.
4 TrackBird Reporting
10
Finally, do one of the following to test that the query returns the required results. •
Run the query and display its results in a Query Results window by clicking .
•
Run the query and export the results for use in another program by clicking .
The finished query is displayed below.
The query results are displayed below.
337
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To modify or create a tree query in TrackBird Repository Explorer Most tree query management tasks are performed in TrackBird Repository Explorer using the tree query toolbar, displayed at the top of the Tree Query Editor screen. 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the Tree Query Editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the Tree Query Editor, see “To open the tree query editor” on page 24).
3
Do one of the following. •
To edit a tree query, select the query you wish to edit in the right structure tree and then select Edit Tree Query in the Repository Explorer’s central task pane to open the list query in the Tree Query Editor.
•
To create a tree query, do one of the following to display the Tree Query Editor screen.
4
Click
5
Click
.
to display a drop list. Select Tree Query in the drop list.
Or
From the File menu, select New to display a drop list. Select Tree Query in the drop list. 6
Edit the tree query as detailed in “Editing Tree Queries in TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 339.
TrackBird Repository Explorer Tree Query Toolbar The table below lists the various toolbar buttons available to create, modify and use tree queries. Button
Use Selects and displays an existing query for running or modifying Creates a query
338
4 TrackBird Reporting
Button
Use Deletes the selected query
Saves the query under the name you define
Renames the selected query and its results with the name you define Edits the criteria applied to the selected feature
Clears all criteria applied to the selected feature
Deletes the selected feature from the query
Displays the selected query in Design Mode, allowing you to change which information is displayed and modify the criteria Runs the displayed query
Refreshes the query results
Editing Tree Queries in TrackBird Repository Explorer Tree Queries at a Glance TrackBird Repository Explorer makes it easy to prepare queries using a double-click method. Query language use is unnecessary.
To create a tree query in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the Tree query editor, see “To open the tree query editor” on page 24).
3
If necessary, click to the left of an item in the left pane to display its hierarchically subordinate information, or click to the left of an item to hide its hierarchically subordinate information). 339
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
Double-click each feature whose information you want to display; its name is then displayed in the right pane.
To delete a tree query line in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the Tree query editor, see “To open the tree query editor” on page 24).
3
Do one of the following.
4
•
Select the line you want to delete, then click
.
•
Right-click the line you want to delete and select Delete from the contextual menu.
To delete the selected line, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
To move a tree query line in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
2
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it.
3
Select the line you want to move.
4
Drag the line to its new position.
Tree Query Criteria You can define criteria for as many displayed features as you wish in TrackBird Repository Explorer. You can edit and delete tree query criteria by doing the following. •
Editing tree query criteria (see “To edit tree query criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 340).
•
Deleting tree query criteria (see “To delete tree query criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 342)
To edit tree query criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
340
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer as detailed in “To run TrackBird Repository Explorer” on page 261.
4 TrackBird Reporting
2
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it.
3
Double-click the feature for which you wish to define criteria. The Criteria dialog displays.
You can use this dialog to define the criteria applied to the selected feature. The box offers a very simple way to prepare the SQL code that will be used to define the query criteria and filters. The following table lists all expressions available in the Criteria box, together with their meanings in the resulting SQL code. Expression
Meaning
By value: Exact value
=
By value: Not equal
Null value
IS NULL
Not null
IS NOT NULL
By value: Expression
LIKE
By interval
BETWEEN x AND y
The Filter type section can only be used when By value is selected in the Criteria type section. 341
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
To add a criterion, click
5
When you have defined all criteria for the selected feature, click OK.
. To delete a criterion, select it and then click
.
To delete tree query criteria in TrackBird Repository Explorer 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer.
2
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it.
3
Do one of the following. Select the feature whose criteria you want to delete, then click
.
Right-click the feature whose criteria you want to delete and select Clear criteria from the contextual menu. 4
To delete the selected criteria, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel the deletion, click No.
Example Tree Query In this example, it is assumed that the user needs to display all workstations with a Pentium IV processor. 1
If the Repository Explorer is not currently displayed, display the Repository Explorer.
2
If the Tree query editor is not already displayed, display it.
3
Do one of the following. Click
.
If a tree query is currently displayed, click
342
.
4
Double-click the CPU category to display its sub-categories.
5
Double-click Processor.
6
Place the Processor name feature under the Root icon in the right pane of the TrackBird screen by double-clicking it.
7
To set up the search criterion to find all workstations with a Pentium IV processor, double-click Processor name in the right pane of the TrackBird screen.
4 TrackBird Reporting
8
In the Criteria dialog, select the By value, Pentium IV and Exact value options.
9
Click OK.
10
Click
.
The system displays all workstations with a Pentium IV processor.
343
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
344
TrackBird Policy
Chapter 5:
5 Concepts TrackBird Policy is an optional module enabling an organization’s IT executives to automatically set up and define rules that comply with overall corporate policy. The TrackBird Administrator can, for instance, maintain an authorized software library within the company and ensure that no unauthorized software is installed or run by users across the enterprise. Managed at server level, this feature is totally transparent to the end-user. The module is used to group together ranges of hardware or software products into categories that are then used to define rules that comply with corporate IT asset management standards. Each workstation’s newly-installed applications can then be compared with the original workstation installation and if the machine does not correspond to the one that was previously defined, an alert may be sent to the administrator. All TrackBird Policy module functions are accessed from TrackBird Server’s Policy menu.
Category A category enables you to define software, a set of software, or material characteristics that belong to your company’s computing equipment or define items that should not be part of your equipment. See “Categories” on page 358 for more details.
Rule Every rule includes at least one Category. It allows you to define the behavior that applies to the selected category. The behavior of the rule is managed by four types of rules: •
Needed
•
Incompatible
•
Prohibited
•
Warning
345
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
A rule type is determined by the criteria of restriction which make it possible to choose to carry out the rule on the totality of the machines or on a subset of them. There are two forms of rules: •
Global rules
•
Local rules
The local rules are attached to a category and are Warning type. The total rules can apply to one or more categories and can be any of the four types described above. See “Global Rule Types” on page 372 and “Local Rules” on page 373 for more details.
Alerts An alert is created for each rule that you define. The alerts permit you to know which machines correspond to them. See “Alerts” on page 386 for more details.
Rule Consequences You can define consequences for each rule that will occur for every machine corresponding to a rule. These five consequences are available: •
Send an email
•
Run an external program
•
Send an SMNP trap
•
Run a VB script
•
Block another rule.
See “To define rule effects using the Consequence tab” on page 378 for more details.
License Manager In association with the Monitoring module, TrackBird Policy enables you to manage your company’s software licenses. See “Generate in License Manager” on page 359 for more details.
346
5 TrackBird Policy
Policy Manager User Interface The TrackBird Policy Manager user interface consists of these screen elements: •
“Left Pane” on page 347
•
“Right Pane” on page 349
•
“Policy Toolbar” on page 351
•
“Contextual Menu” on page 352
Left Pane The left pane of the TrackBird Policy Manager displays a window for the category and local rule tree and a window for the global rule tree. This view may change depending on what node is selected.
347
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Category & Local Rule Tree The Category & local rule tree includes the existing policy folder, the categories, and the local rules. Each category contained in the Category & Local rule tree, with the option Generate In TrackBird Tree selected, is listed in the category TrackBird tree Category. Each local rule contained in this tree, with the option Active Rule selected, is listed in the category Rules of the TrackBird tree and displayed in the alerts window.
Global Rule Tree The Global rule tree is composed of four types of rules that you can organize by adding folders and rules. Each rule of this tree, with the option Active Rule selected, is listed in the Rules category of the TrackBird tree.
348
5 TrackBird Policy
Right Pane This part contains a banner at the top that allows you to specify the name and the description of the category or the rule. It also enables you to activate the category generation or its addition in License Manager or, if it concerns a rule, to activate it or not. Under the banner, there are various tabs enabling you to define a category or a rule. A third part appears when you define a category or a rule called the definition assistant.
349
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Category Display This screen is an example of a category displayed in the right pane:
350
5 TrackBird Policy
Rule Display This screen is an example of a rule definition displayed in the right pane:
Policy Toolbar These seven buttons of the toolbar perform these functions: Allows you to chose and add elements. Deletes the node selected node. Copies the selected category, rule, or folder.
Pastes the previous copied category, rule, or folder.
Launches execution of categories and/or rules of the Policy in order to update TrackBird tree and/or to generate alerts. Saves current element, categories and local rules, global rules or all changes made on categories and local and global rules.
351
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Discards all changes to current node or to all items in Policy.
Contextual Menu The contextual menu includes the same functions as the buttons on the toolbar. However, the contextual menu also offers the following option.
To change the operator type `
If there is already an operator in the category or rule definition that you wish to modify, select the operator and select Policy ` Changes operator type, and then chose a new operator.
For more details about using operators, see “Adding an Operator” on page 362.
Functions Select Policy ` Policy manager to define new categories for which new global and local rules will be created. This window includes two trees: Category & local rule and Global rule. •
Categories and local rules are grouped in Category & local rule structure tree and are filed in folders.
•
Global rules are grouped in Global rule structure tree and are filed in folders.
Inheritance Concept TrackBird Policy categories include the inheritance concept. For example, Word XP inherits the Word category. This means that Word XP has Word category features and its own separate definition.
Basic Actions The Policy Manager includes these basic functions:
352
•
“Adding or Removing a Folder” on page 353
•
“Adding, Copying and Pasting, or Removing a Category” on page 354
•
“Adding, Copying and Pasting, or Removing a Rule” on page 355
•
“Updating the TrackBird Structure Tree” on page 356
5 TrackBird Policy
•
“Optimize Category and Rule Generations” on page 357
•
“Saving Changes” on page 357
•
“Cancelling Changes” on page 358
•
“Changing the Operator Type” on page 358
Adding or Removing a Folder To add a folder 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Do one of the following to add a new folder name to the structure tree. •
Click the folder where you wish to insert a folder and click Add Folder in the toolbar. Or
•
Right-click the folder where you wish to insert a folder and select Add ` Folder from the contextual menu.
3
Replace the words New Folder with your folder name.
4
Press Enter to validate the name.
To remove a folder Note:
If you delete a folder containing subfolders, categories or rules, these will also be deleted. 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Select the folder you wish to delete, and then click Remove in the toolbar. Or
Right-click the folder you wish to delete and select Remove from the contextual menu. 3
To delete the selected folder and any subfolders, categories or rules it contains, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel deletion of the selected folder and any subfolders, categories or rules it contains, click No in the confirmation dialog.
353
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Adding, Copying and Pasting, or Removing a Category To add a category 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Do one of the following to add a category labeled New Category. •
Click the folder or category to which you wish to add the category and then click Add Category in the toolbar.
•
Right-click the folder or category to which you wish to add the category, and select Add ` Category from the contextual menu.
3
Rename the new category.
4
Press Enter to validate the category name.
5
Edit the category’s definition as detailed in “Categories” on page 358.
To copy/paste a category 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Select the category that you wish to copy and do one of the following:
3
•
Click Copy
in the toolbar.
•
Right-click the category you wish to copy and select Copy from the contextual menu.
To Paste the category in a folder, do one of the following: •
Click Paste
in the toolbar.
•
Right-click the selected folder and select Paste from the contextual menu.
To remove a category 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
In the Category & local rule tree, select the category you wish to delete, and click Remove in the toolbar. Or
In the Category & local rule tree, right-click the folder or category you wish to delete and select Remove from the contextual menu.
354
5 TrackBird Policy
3
To delete the selected category and subcategories or rules it contains, click Yes in the confirmation dialog; to cancel deletion of the selected category and subcategories or rules it contains, click No in the confirmation dialog.
Adding, Copying and Pasting, or Removing a Rule To add a rule 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Click the rules type folder to which you wish to add the rule and click Add Rule in the toolbar. Or
Right-click the rules type folder to which you wish to add the rule and select Add ` Rule from the contextual menu. 3
Rename the new rule.
4
Press Enter to validate the rule name.
5
Edit the rule’s definition as detailed in “Rules” on page 372.
To copy/paste a rule 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Select the rule that you wish to copy and do one of the following: •
Click Copy
in the toolbar.
Or •
3
Right-click the rule you wish to copy and select Copy from the contextual menu.
Paste the rule in a Global rule tree folder or in a subcategory of the Category & local rule tree and do one of the following: •
Click Paste
in the toolbar.
Or •
Right-click the selected folder and select Paste from the contextual menu.
355
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Note:
You cannot copy a rule of the Global rule tree into the Category & local rule tree and vice-versa.
To remove a rule 1
Select Policy ` Policy Manager from TrackBird Server’s menu.
2
Select the rule you wish to delete and click Remove in the toolbar. Or
Right-click the rule you wish to delete and select Remove from the contextual menu. The Confirm dialog displays. 3
Click Yes in the Confirm dialog to delete the rule. Or
Click No to cancel the deletion of the selected rule.
Updating the TrackBird Structure Tree To update the TrackBird structure tree for Policy categories All categories with the option Generate In TrackBird Tree activated are listed in the TrackBird structure tree, under each workstation’s Categories node. `
Click Run and select Categories or select Run in the contextual menu and select Categories.
To update the TrackBird structure tree for Policy rules All rules whose Active rule option is activated are listed in the TrackBird structure tree, under each workstation’s Rules node. `
Click Run and select Rules or Run in the contextual menu and select Rules. If new alarms are generated, the Alerts window opens and status bar of the main window.
356
displays in the
5 TrackBird Policy
To update the TrackBird structure tree for Policy categories and rules All categories with the Generate In TrackBird Tree option activated are listed in the TrackBird structure tree, under each workstation’s Rules icon. All rules whose Active rule option is activated are listed in the TrackBird structure tree, under each workstation’s Rules icon. `
Click Run and select All categories & rules or Run in the contextual menu and select All categories & rules. If new alarms are generated, the Alerts window opens and displays in the status bar of the main window.
Optimize Category and Rule Generations In order to optimize the generation of the categories and the rules, only a change in the category definition, rule, or the addition of one of them starts the manual generation of the categories and rules. Regeneration does not occur unless there is a modification. When a new machine is automatically imported in the database, category and rule generation are automatically generated for this machine.
Saving Changes To save changes made to the selected node only `
Click Save in Policy toolbar and select Current Item. Or
`
Right-click and select Save ` Current Item.
To save changes to categories & local rules `
Click Save in the Policy toolbar and select Categories & Local rules. Or
`
Right-click and select Save ` Categories & Local rules.
To save changes made to Global rule tree `
Click Save in the Policy toolbar and select Global rules. Or
`
Right-click and select Save ` Global rules.
357
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To save changes made to all categories and rules `
Click Save in the Policy toolbar and select All categories & rules. Or
`
Right-click and select Save ` All categories & rules.
Cancelling Changes To cancel changes made to the selected node only `
Click Undo in the Policy toolbar and select Discard Change. Or
`
Right-click and select Undo ` Discard Change.
To cancel all folders, categories, local and global rules changes that have not been saved `
Click Undo in the Policy toolbar and select Discard all changes. Or
`
Right-click and select Undo ` Discard all changes.
Changing the Operator Type To change the operator type `
If you have already chosen an operator in the category or rule definition and you wish to modify it, select the operator and choose Changes operator type in the contextual menu, then select the operator that you want.
Categories Category details display on these tabs, displayed in the right pane of the Policy Manager screen:
358
•
“Definition Tab” on page 362
•
“Display Tab” on page 368
•
“Block a Category Tab” on page 370
•
“Preview Tab” on page 385
5 TrackBird Policy
Each of the above Policy manager screen elements is detailed below. In the Name and Description fields, enter the name and description you wish to give to the category. You must click the name and the description fields to edit them.
Generate in TrackBird Tree Specify whether the category should be included in the TrackBird structure tree or not by clicking Category & Local rule tree.
if appropriate or by clicking the blue bullet
in the
Generate in License Manager Specify whether the category should be included in the License Manager or not by clicking the Category & Local rule tree.
if appropriate or by clicking the gray bullet
in
The License Manager V2 and Policy Product Purchased V2 forms allows you to manage licenses of software used in your company.
359
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The Policy Product Purchased V2 allows you to enter the number of licenses that you have purchased for each product for which the option Generate In License Manager is selected.
360
5 TrackBird Policy
Then, the License Manager V2 form enables you to visualize all the products that you selected. These products are also calculated to show you which products are: •
Over-installed according to the number of purchased licenses.
•
Over-used according to the number of purchased licenses.
•
Over-used compared to the number of machines where the product is installed.
361
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Definition Tab You can use the Definition tab to define conditions relating to which software, operating systems, etc. are members of a given category. This displays by clicking the Definition tab below the Name and Description details in the Policy Manager screen when a category is selected in the Category & local rule tree.
Adding an Operator To add an operator in order to put together several conditions `
Click Add and choose one of the 3 operators: AND, OR, and NOT.
To add an AND relationship (i.e., all of the defined TrackBird Definition conditions must be met before a given record is displayed) `
Select AND and Add at least 2 TrackBird Definition conditions to the relationship. (An AND relationship is created by default if you add at least 2 TrackBird Definitions without explicitly specifying an OR relationship.)
To add an OR relationship (i.e., any one or more of the defined TrackBird Definition conditions must be met before a given record is displayed) `
362
Select OR and add at least two TrackBird Definition conditions to the relationship.
5 TrackBird Policy
To add a NOT relationship `
Select NOT. Add only one definition. •
NOT of a feature enables you to visualize stations that do not have this feature.
•
NOT of a glossary enables you to visualize stations on which supplementary software is installed compared to the list of the glossary.
•
NOT of a category enables you to visualize stations that do not correspond to the category.
Adding a Category Condition To add a condition specifying which software, operating systems, etc. are members of the category `
Click Add in the toolbar and select a definition from the Definition drop-down list. Or
`
Right-click the Definition tab, to display a contextual menu, and select Add ` Definition to display the definition drop-down list.
There are three types of definitions: •
Feature
•
Category
•
Glossary
363
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a condition based on a feature 1
After having selected Feature in the list of the definitions, the window displays divided into two areas. A display assistant at the bottom allows you to create the condition.
2
Display the feature in the TrackBird tree by double-clicking the appropriate category and then clicking the subcategory and item as necessary, and then select the feature.
3
Click the Operator drop-down list button to select the required operator from the list. For example, to specify all inventory records in which the information contained in the Editor feature begins with Microsoft, you should select the LIKE operator.
4
Enter the appropriate value in the Value(s) field by doing one of the following. •
To select the value from a list of all different values contained in the field, click the Value(s) drop-down list button to display the list and then select the appropriate value. Or
•
To define a specific value, click the Value(s) field and then type the information. For example, to specify all inventory records in which the information contained in the Editor feature begins with Microsoft, you should enter the value Microsoft% in the field.
364
5 TrackBird Policy
By default, the added feature is not case-sensitive; you can add this constraint by selecting the Case-sensitive check box. The option Case-sensitive can only be applied to String type fields. 5
To add the condition, click outside of the assistant. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
6
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
Adding a condition based on a glossary 1
After having selected Glossary in the list, the window is divided into 2 areas and displays an assistant at the bottom that allows you to create the condition.
2
Type a name for the condition in the Name field.
3
Click the Use Glossary drop-down list button to display the list of TrackBird glossaries, and select the appropriate glossary from the list.
4
Click
to display the glossary entry selection dialog.
365
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
5
Do one of the following to select all glossary entries you wish to add to the condition list. •
To select a single glossary entry, click its line in the list. Or
•
To select individual glossary entries, click the list line containing the first entry you wish to select; then press and hold down Ctrl+click each additional entry you wish to select. Or
•
To select all glossary entries, press Ctrl+A. Or
•
To select continuous glossary entries, click the list line containing the first entry you wish to select; then press Shift while clicking the last entry you wish to select.
6
Click OK.
7
To add the condition, click outside of the assistant. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
366
5 TrackBird Policy
8
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
You use this condition mainly to get a list of the software authorized within a company. A category glossary condition created from the glossary SOFTWARE allows you to see the list of the machines which have at least one software copy (and possibly of others not listed).
Adding a condition based on a category 1
After having selected, Category in the list, the window is divided into two areas and an assistant displays at the bottom that allows you to create the condition.
2
Display the category in the TrackBird structure tree by double-clicking the appropriate category and then clicking the subcategory as necessary, and then select the category.
3
To add the condition, click outside of the assistant. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
4
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
This condition is useful for the master definition, that is software that must be installed on every workstation. Thus, the administrator may want to know on which machines all software of a list is installed. In this case, each software must be defined separately than a category created using the AND operator for all the categories that represent software of the master. 367
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Display Tab You can use the Display tab to select or enter detailed information to appear in the TrackBird structure tree when any category displays. Click the Display tab below the Name and Description fields in the Categories screen when a category is selected in the Category & local rule tree.
The following features are displayed by default for each category: •
Editor
•
Info
•
Version
•
Name
•
Folder
The features Name and Folder are not available because they cannot be modified. You can add further features if you require in Field Administration. The Display tab is used to edit a value contained in the Category’s item. This task is detailed in the section below.
368
5 TrackBird Policy
To edit a value contained in the Category’s item 1
In the Category & Local rule tree, select the category whose details you wish to define.
2
In the list displayed on the Display tab, click the Value column in the row containing the display element whose value you wish to define, displaying
3
.
Type the value into the Value box. Or
Click beside the Value box to display a node selection dialog. In the dialog, select the node whose value you wish to display in the selected category’s details for the selected element and then click OK.
To add a feature in the Category’s item `
If you require more, add them using field management in the Categories\Category\ element in which there are already characteristics Editor, Info, Version, Name and Folder.
369
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Block a Category Tab This tab has two parts: •
Blocked categories list A category name is defined by associated categories. ASG recommends blocking the associated categories. When you define a category name, you can decide if the category name is generated for a machine in the TrackBird tree. Blocking the associated categories avoids displaying duplicate information. For example, you may define a category name Office which includes the categories Word, Excel, and Outlook. If a workstation corresponds to the Office category, Word, Excel, and Outlook categories do not display in the TrackBird tree. This means that this workstation has all three of these software applications. If a workstation does not correspond to the Office category because Outlook is not installed. For example, only Word and Excel categories display in the TrackBird tree.
To add the category 1
Click Add in the Policy toolbar or right-click and select Add. The window is divided into two sections. In the lower section, a wizard allows you to select a category.
370
2
Display the category in the TrackBird tree structure by double-clicking the appropriate category, then on the subcategory as necessary; then select the category.
3
Click outside of the wizard.
5 TrackBird Policy
Information: What is blocking me? In this part, you can see if there are any categories that block the selected category. Double-click one of the blocking categories to display its definition. See “To find out why a rule is blocked” on page 384.
Preview Tab The Preview tab displays a summary of information that will display in the TrackBird structure tree for the selected category. Click the Preview tab below the Name and Description fields in the Categories screen when a category is selected in the Category & local rule tree. Even if the category is blocked, this tab displays all the machines corresponding to this category. It is not required that the machines appearing in the Preview tab have the category generated in their TrackBird tree. For example, if you are viewing the Excel category but it is blocked by the Office category, the Preview tab displays all the machines with Excel, but during the generation of Policy if these machines also have Word and Outlook, only the Office category is generated.
371
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Rules Rules are based on categories. These rules allow you to apply software and hardware asset based criteria and to indicate, by alerts, client workstations that do not comply with those corporate policy rules.
Global and Local Rules Global Rule Types Rules may be defined with any of these types:
372
Rule Type
Description
Needed
The selected categories are compulsory on each selected workstation. Thus, the result of such a rule shows stations that do not correspond to this definition.
Incompatible
The selected categories are seen as being incompatible on client workstations (e.g., the operating system and the amount of RAM on the workstation). Thus, the result of such a rule shows stations that have this incompatibility.
Prohibited
The selected categories should not be installed on client workstations (e.g., outdated software version). Thus, the result of such a rule shows stations that correspond to this restriction.
5 TrackBird Policy
Rule Type
Description
Warning
The selected categories are present on client stations. Thus, the result of such a rule shows stations that correspond to this rule.
All global rules are grouped under their rule type in the Global rule tree.
To add a global rule 1
In the Global rule tree, select the place where you want to add the rule according to its type.
2
Click Add than select Rule. Or
Right-click the selected place, then choose Add ` Rule.
Local Rules The local rules are of the type Warning and are placed under a category. They allow you to use the definition of the category without having necessarily to include it in their definition tree. You can quickly create a rule that checks for the presence of the category on the unit of the machines defined in the rule. The stations where the rule appears are in conformity with the definition of the category.
To add a local rule 1
Click the category to which you want to add the new rule.
2
Click Add than select Rule. Or
Right-click the category, then choose Add ` Rule.
Rules Interface Local rule and global rule details display on the following tabs, displayed in the right side of the Policy Manager screen: •
“Definition Tab” on page 362
•
“Consequences Tab” on page 377
•
“Preview Tab” on page 371
To choose a severity `
Define, for each rule created, a severity from 1 (lowest) to 5 (highest) in order to classify the importance of your rules. 373
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a rule in to the TrackBird tree `
Click the box or the green bullet If the rule is not active, it will not be processed.
. TrackBird generates the rule.
To define a rule using the Definition tab 1
If the Policy Manager screen is not already displayed, select Policy manager from TrackBird Server’s Policy menu.
2
Select a rule, the Definition tab displays by default.
The Definition tab has two parts:
3
•
Definition tree—contains categories.
•
Restricted stations list—these conditions reduce the set of the machines implied in the rule.
Once the rule is added, you must define this rule by choosing the categories that you have previously created. To do so, click the Definition Tree window and do one of these actions: •
From the toolbar, select Add ` Definition ` Category. Or
374
5 TrackBird Policy
•
Right-click to display the context menu and select Add ` Definition ` Category.
The assistant opens at the bottom of the window. 4
Choose a category in the assistant. You can add as many as necessary to define your rule. To add the category, click outside of the assistant. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
5
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
6
After having defined your rule, you can choose machines associated with this rule in the Restricted Stations List. There are several ways to apply restrictions to a number of machines.
7
To add a condition, click the Restricted Stations List and do one of these actions: •
Click Add and select Definition then select one of these: Feature, Station, or Query. Or
•
8
Right-click the Restricted Stations List then choose Add ` Definition, and select one of these: Feature, Station, or Query.
Depending on the definition you select in step 7, complete the appropriate step: a
To add a Feature—choose a TrackBird tree feature. For example, machines with the Windows operating system or machines having more than 512 MB of RAM, etc.
375
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Click outside of the assistant to add the feature condition. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications. Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard. b
To add a Station—select machines from the referenced machines list.
Click outside of the assistant to add the condition. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications. Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
376
5 TrackBird Policy
c
To add a Query—select a query from the list.
Consequences Tab The Consequence tab allows you to define one or several consequences that will be applied to each machine involved by the rule. Five consequences are available: •
Send an email
•
Run an external program
•
Send an SMNP trap
•
Run a VB script
•
Block global rule
These consequences are described in the following sections. There is also an additional consequence available called Information: What is blocking me? See “Information: What is blocking me?” on page 371.
377
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To define rule effects using the Consequence tab 1
If the Policy Manager screen is not already displayed, select Policy manager from TrackBird Server’s Policy menu.
2
Select a rule and click the Consequence tab.
To send an e-mail consequence 1
378
Select Send an email from the Consequences window.
5 TrackBird Policy
2
3
Add an email, by doing one of these actions: •
Select the consequence Send An email and click Send An email in the task bar.
•
Right-click the Send An email consequence and select Send An email.
•
Click anywhere in the Consequences window and click Add in the task bar then choose Send An email.
•
Click anywhere in the Consequences window, right-click and select Add ` Send An email.
•
Double-click Send An Email in the consequences tree.
Next, do one of the following: •
Choose among the existing models in the Pattern options drop-down.
•
Create an e-mail by completing all the fields: From, To, Subject and Body.
•
Create a new model while clicking the plus sign (+) next to the Pattern options drop-down list. Enter the new name of the model, supplement the fields From, To, Subject, Body then click
4
.
To validate your email, click the Consequences window. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
5
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
379
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To ensure the From field is always filled in, refer to “SMTP Server” on page 153. For information about using the global variables, refer to “Global Variables” on page 154. You can add as many e-mails as required. You must define the SMTP server so that the e-mails are sent correctly. See “SMTP Server” on page 153 for information.
To add a program execution 1
Do one of the following actions: •
Select the Execute A Program consequence and click Execute A Program in the task bar.
•
Right-click the Execute A Program consequence and select Execute A Program.
•
Click anywhere in the Consequences window and click the Add button of the task bar then choose Execute A Program.
•
Right-click anywhere in the Consequences window and choose Add ` Execute A Program.
•
Double-click Execute A Program in the consequences tree.
2
Choose the program to run by clicking Browse and selecting in the tree or by typing the pathname.
3
If needed, specify parameters necessary to launch the application.
4
To validate, click the Consequences window. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
5
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
To send an SNMP trap 1
380
Select Send an snmp trap from the Consequences window.
5 TrackBird Policy
2
3
Do one of the following actions: •
Select the Send A SNMP Trap consequence and click Send A SNMP Trap in the task bar.
•
Right-click the consequence Send A SNMP Trap and choose Send A SNMP Trap.
•
Click anywhere in the Consequences window and click Add in the task bar then choose Send A SNMP Trap.
•
Right-click anywhere in the Consequences window and choose Add ` Send A SNMP Trap.
•
Double-click Send A SNMP Trap in the consequences tree.
Complete these fields: Field
Description
Host
Enter the name of your SNMP server.
Port
Enter the port number of your SNMP server.
Community
Enter the name of the community.
Company
Enter the name of the node corresponding to your company. Select it by clicking
in the standard MIB.
381
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Field
Description
Name
Enter the name of the node corresponding to the characteristic that you want to fill in. Select it by clicking
4
in the standard MIB.
Value
Enter the value that you want to allocate to the node specified above. This can be a static value, an environment variable or a variable defined in the Preferences of TrackBird (see “Global Variables” on page 154), or a predefined variable of TrackBird (see “Predefined Variables” on page 388);
Type
Select the trap type that you want to manage. An integer value between 1 and 6 inclusive corresponding to the values used within TrackBird software.
Specific
Only specified if you choose Type 6.
To validate, click in the Consequences window. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
5
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
To execute a VB script 1
To add a VB script execution, do one of the following actions: •
Select the Execute A VB Script consequence and click Execute A VB Script in the task bar.
•
Right-click the Execute A VB Script consequence and choose Execute A VB Script.
•
Click anywhere in the Consequences window and click Add in the task bar then choose Execute A VB Script.
•
Right-click anywhere in the Consequences window and choose Add ` Execute A VB Script.
•
Double-click Execute A VB Script in the consequences tree.
2
Add the text of the script.
3
To validate, click in the Consequences window. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
4
382
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
5 TrackBird Policy
To block a rule Note:
This consequence allows you to block a global rule (i.e., a rule that belongs to the Global rule tree). 1
Select Block a rule from the Consequence window.
2
To add a rule blocking, do one of the following actions:
3
•
Select the Block A Rule consequence and click Block A Rule in the task bar.
•
Right-click the Block A Rule consequence and then choose Block A Rule.
•
Click anywhere in the Consequences window and click Add in the task bar then choose Block A Rule.
•
Right-click anywhere in the Consequences window and choose Add ` Block A Rule.
•
Double-click Block A Rule in the consequences tree.
Choose the rule that you wish to block. For example, you may create a rule called Disk space lower than 20%. This rule allows you to identify workstations with less than 20 % of disk space available. You can then create another rule to identify workstations with only 10 % of disk space available. You may not want to receive both alarms informing you that the disk space is lower than 20 % and lower than 10 % for the same machine. In this case, you specify, during the creation of the rule Disk space lower than 10 %, that you want to block the rule Disk space lower than 20 %. 383
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
To validate, click the Consequences window. A Confirm dialog prompts you to validate your modifications.
5
Click OK to validate or Cancel to discard.
To find out why a rule is blocked Note:
This part is not a consequence, but information. If the selected rule is blocked by another rule, the name of the blocking rule appears in this heading. 1
Select Information: what is blocking me? in the Consequences window.
Consider the example of the section Block A Rule. Two rules were created: Disk space lower than 20 % and Disk space lower than 10 %. The rule Disk space lower than 10 % blocks the rule Disk space lower than 20 %. So, in the rule Disk space lower than 20 %, the item Information: what is blocking me? with the rule Disk space lower than 10 % as content displays in this frame. 2
384
Double-click the blocking rule to display its definition.
5 TrackBird Policy
Preview Tab If the Policy Manager screen is not already displayed in the TrackBird Server, select Policy ` Policy manager.
Select the rule whose results you wish to display and then click the Preview tab. The results display all workstations corresponding to the defined conditions.
385
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Alerts If the Alerts screen is not already displayed in TrackBird Server’s, select Policy ` Alerts.
User Interface Toolbar The Alert toolbar contains these buttons: Refresh alerts.
Enables you to filter alerts displaying only the alerts of the local, needed, prohibited, incompatible, or warning type. Enables you to define the interval of the automatic refresh of the display window. The interval is defined in minutes. Displays only new alerts.
386
5 TrackBird Policy
Contextual Menu The contextual menu offers the same functionality as those of the toolbar. However, Station Information is an additional feature. Select a line to visualize information of the workstation associated with this line.
Columns This window has seven columns: Column
Description
Status The icon indicates new alerts. If not, the alert has already been viewed. An alert is considered new if it was generated the current day while the others were generated beforehand. Date
Date on which the alert was generated.
Severity
The alert severity is defined at the moment of the rule creation.
Type
Local, needed, incompatible, prohibited, warning.
Name
Rule name.
Folder
Name of the folder that contains the rule.
Station Name
Machine name concerned by the alert.
Message
Alert message corresponding to the Description field text at the moment of the rule creation.
Grouping It is possible to group columns using the drag and drop feature: Drag a column here to group by that column. It is possible to group several columns.
Filters From the toolbar or the context menu, you can access predefined filters in order to display local, needed, incompatible, prohibited, or warning type alerts. Also, you can apply a filter directly from within columns. Click the gray arrow to select the value by which you want to filter or choose Custom … and define your filter.
387
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Functionality The alert window shows the rules that are generated by Policy. Different from a simple query in list, it makes filtering dates even easier. It visually allows you to view new alerts generated on the current day compared to generated alarms the day before.
Preferences Window In Policy Manager, you can use three types of variables: •
Environment variables of the system
•
Customizable global variables
•
Predefined variables of TrackBird
System Environment Variables In the consequences Send An Email, Send An SNMP Trap and Execute A Program, you can use the environment variables.
Global Variables In the consequences Send An Email, Send An SNMP Trap, Execute A Program, you can use global variables.
Predefined Variables You can use the following variables with the Send An Email and Send A SNMP Trap option.
388
Variable
Description
%rule_name%
Name of the current rule
%rule_date%
Date on which the alert was created.
%rule_severity%
Severity of the rule
%rule_path%
Access path of the rule
%rule_description%
Rule description
5 TrackBird Policy
Variable
Description
%rule_type%
Rule type
%rule_id%
Identifier of the rule
%station_name%
Name of the machine on which the rule was
%station_id%
Identifier of the machine on which the rule was
389
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
390
Chapter 6:
TrackBird Software Distribution
6 TrackBird Software Distribution offers a simple and effective solution to software and content deployment in enterprises with large distributed communities of users. Tightly integrated with the other TrackBird modules, TrackBird Software Distribution enables you to manage your IT infrastructure more efficiently while remaining virtually invisible to the user. Following are a few examples of scenarios you can perform: •
Administer document distribution to your entire workforce, to a globally dispersed team or to a random set of users
•
Deliver smooth OS migration on time and within budget constraints
•
Ensure all users are up-to-date with virus protection
•
Distribute patches, hotfixes, upgrades, etc. as they become available
As deployment is planned remotely and installation is scheduled to take place automatically, on-site technical intervention is decreased. The architecture employed in TrackBird Software Distribution optimizes network bandwidth usage, enabling you to efficiently distribute software to both local and remote users. You can also plan your software resources more accurately by adapting application or file deployment based on criteria such as: •
Administrative information or hardware capabilities
•
Actual users’ needs – software licenses may be distributed more effectively within your organization depending on frequency of use
•
Any information included in the TrackBird database
In using TrackBird Software Distribution, you will achieve better organizational productivity and lower your software Total Cost of Ownership.
391
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Main Characteristics TrackBird Software Distribution is used to remotely install packages – folders containing compressed files - on client workstations. Software and file deployment can be carried out either in silent mode or by prompting a user for permission to install. With TrackBird Software Distribution you can configure installation settings. Following are the steps involved: •
Configuration, building and distribution of packages to install
•
Configuration of distribution profile(s) - the how, where and when - of each package
•
Choice of three distribution modes: —
Package distribution directly to TrackBird client workstations
—
Remote file installation via a shared directory on a network workstation
—
Package distribution via a shared directory on a distribution server
•
Selection of TrackBird target clients according to the software or files to be installed
•
Definition of time segments for package distribution
Once software and file deployment is carried out, you can monitor installation status for each client workstation.
Installation Setup Prerequisites For deployment in silent mode, packages must conform to Microsoft installation specifications. Setup programs such as InstallShield, Wise and Microsoft System Installer (MSI) conform to Microsoft standards.
Architecture Platforms With TrackBird Software Distribution, packages can be installed on platforms: Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0, Windows ME, Windows 98, and Windows 95.
392
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Distribution Modes There is a choice of three software distribution modes described below. Each distribution mode uses a connection pool that manages the server loading charge (see “Connection Pool” on page 395).
Package Distribution Directly to TrackBird Clients The first distribution mode involves a package being sent to TrackBird clients from a primary or secondary TrackBird IP Server. As in TrackBird architecture generally, TrackBird clients query TrackBird IP Server as to whether new installations are required. TrackBird IP Server informs each client of any new installations to be performed. If so, the running service on a client will collect the package from a primary or secondary TrackBird IP Server via HTTP, extract the package locally and launch the installation process. A log file is then sent to TrackBird IP Server displaying installation status. Figure 1 • Package distribution directly to TrackBird clients from TrackBird IP Server
Remote File Installation Via a Shared Directory on a Network Workstation In the second distribution mode, packages do not contain files. Files for installation are located in a shared directory on a network workstation that can be accessed by clients.
393
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird clients query TrackBird IP Server as to whether new installations are required. TrackBird IP Server informs each client of new installations to be performed and that they can be accessed from a shared directory on a network workstation. The running service on a client will remotely launch the installation from the shared directory on the network workstation. A log file is then sent to TrackBird IP Server displaying installation status. Figure 2 • Remote file installation via a shared directory on a network workstation
Package Distribution Via a Shared Directory on a Distribution Server The final distribution mode is a combination of the two previous modes: a package containing files is created, then transferred and extracted to a shared directory on a distribution server. TrackBird clients query TrackBird IP Server as to whether new installations are required. TrackBird IP Server informs each client of new installations to be performed and that they can be accessed from a shared directory on a distribution server. A distribution server does not have to be a primary or secondary IP server but it must be a TrackBird client workstation. The running service on a client will remotely launch the installation from the shared directory on the distribution server. A log file is then sent to TrackBird IP Server displaying installation status. 394
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Figure 3 • Package distribution via a shared directory on a distribution server
Note:
You must create the shared directory on the distribution server before packages can be defined.
Connection Pool To minimize traffic, the primary or secondary TrackBird IP Server manages a connection pool shared by all client workstations. The connection pool can be configured to limit the number of simultaneous package installations and to set a time-out period. This helps control the flow of package distribution, restricts the server loading charge and reduces concurrent network usage. It is employed with all three software distribution modes. Even when a distribution server is used, TrackBird IP Server continues to manage the connection pool as only TrackBird IP Server can authorize package distribution.
395
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Functionalities Server Parameters Additional TrackBird IP Server Configuration You can set additional TrackBird IP Server options which are specific to TrackBird Software Distribution. Note:
All TrackBird IP Server options must be defined prior to package definition in TrackBird Server otherwise the default settings will apply.
To access the TrackBird IP Server options `
Select Windows Start menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird IP Administration.
Server Bandwidth Optimization TrackBird IP Server Bandwidth on a Remote Network TrackBird IP Server bandwidth is set according to the amount of data to be transmitted through a network connection. Maximum bandwidth is set in KB per second. Generally, data transmission will take place via a remote network – for example, from the primary TrackBird IP Server to a secondary IP server. (In TrackBird Software Distribution a secondary server may be a distribution server but this is not mandatory).
396
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
To configure bandwidth between TrackBird IP Server and a secondary IP server, select Servers\Main Server in the left treeview to access the Options tab.
TrackBird IP Server Bandwidth on a Local Network Bandwidth can also be configured for data transmission on a local network – for example, from the primary TrackBird IP Server directly to TrackBird clients or between a secondary IP server and TrackBird clients.
397
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This bandwidth is configured in the Groups node. Select Group\Washington, for example, in the left treeview.
Note:
Maximum bandwidth must be defined for each Group created.
TrackBird IP Package Distribution Tab Maximum Number of Connections The connection pool can be configured to limit the number of simultaneous package installations. This helps control the flow of package distribution, restricts the server loading charge and reduces concurrent network usage.
398
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
The Distribution tab is used to set the maximum number of connections for the server selected in the left treeview.
By default, no limit is specified, meaning that the maximum number of connections is infinite. The maximum number of connections is defined in both TrackBird IP Administration and in TrackBird Server. The value set in TrackBird Server will apply to all Packages and Profiles defined, except where the number of connections in TrackBird Server exceeds the number set in TrackBird IP Administration. For example: The maximum number of connections in TrackBird IP Administration is set at 100. Later, in TrackBird Server, three packages are defined: one with a value of 10 maximum connections, another with a value of 70 and the third with a value of 30, giving a total of 110 maximum connections. TrackBird IP Server will block one of the packages from the connection pool as it cannot exceed its original set value of 100 maximum connections.
399
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Software Distribution Menu Introduction to Packages and Profiles In TrackBird Software Distribution, folders containing compressed files are remotely prepared for installation on client workstations. The compressed files may be software programs, software upgrades or even single files, such as a weekly spreadsheet. Once compressed, files are effectively packed into a single file. In TrackBird Software Distribution, these single files are termed as Packages. Package Definition involves setting parameters for the package installation process. Each package has at least one distribution profile linked to it. The profile determines the way in which a package will be distributed, on which workstations and when. From each profile you can access the log file which reports installation status. With TrackBird Software Distribution, the TrackBird Server menu bar remains identical to previous versions except for the addition of the Software Distribution menu. This menu will only be displayed if you have the license for TrackBird Software Distribution. Packages and their Profiles are defined via the Software Distribution menu.
Managing Packages Click the Software Distribution menu in TrackBird Server and select Packages. The Package Definition window is displayed. The treeview in the left pane lists package names which can be grouped into folders and/or subfolders. The right pane, discussed later in this section, is used to define the installation parameters of each package.
400
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
This table lists the toolbar buttons available to define packages: Button
Use
Shortcut key(s)
Creates a new package
Ins
Creates a new folder
Ctrl+Ins
Deletes the selected item. This icon is only active when either Ctrl+Del a folder or package is selected in the tree view. A Confirmation dialog will display. Click Yes to confirm or NO to Cancel Saves all packages and folders
Ctrl+S
Undoes last change(s) on selected package or folder and its children
Ctrl+Z
Builds the selected package. The build process means that packages containing compressed files are sent to the Primary Distribution Server
Ctrl+B
401
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This table lists the contextual menu commands available in the Package Definition window: Button
Command & Use
Shortcut key(s)
Add Folder - creates a new folder
Ctrl+Ins
Add Package - creates a new package
Ins
Rename Package - renames the selected package with the name you define
F2
Delete - deletes the selected item. This icon is only active when either a folder or package is selected in the treeview. A confirmation dialog is displayed here. Click Yes to confirm or NO to Cancel
Ctrl+Del
Add Profile. Opens the Profile Properties window. A new profile, automatically linked to the selected package, is created Show Profile. Opens the Profile Properties window enabling you to edit the linked profile. Several profiles linked to the same package may be accessed from this function Build Package x. The build process means that packages containing compressed files are sent to the Primary Distribution Server
Ctrl+B
Build all packages under x folder
Ctrl+B
Build all packages - builds all packages under the Package Definition root folder in the left treeview
402
Save - saves all packages and folders
Ctrl+S
Undo - undoes last change(s) on selected package or folder and its children
Ctrl+Z
Undo All - undoes all changes, including package and folder creation, since last save
Ctrl+Alt+Z
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Left Pane Treeview To create a new folder `
Do one of the following: •
Click
.
•
Select Add Folder in the contextual menu.
•
Press Ctrl+Insert.
A new folder is displayed in the left treeview. The default name given is New Folder.
To rename a folder `
Do one of the following: •
Click once on the folder name in the left treeview and type over with your newly allocated name.
•
Select Rename Folder in the contextual menu.
•
Press F2 when the folder is selected and type over with your newly allocated name.
•
Change the name in the right pane.
To create a new package `
Do one of the following: •
Click
.
•
Select Add Package in the contextual menu.
•
Press Ctrl+Insert.
A new package is displayed in the left treeview. The default name given is New Package.
403
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To rename a package `
Do one of the following: •
Click the package name in the left treeview and type over with your newly allocated name
•
Select Rename Package in the contextual menu
•
Press F2 when the package is selected and type over with your newly allocated name
•
Change the name in the right pane
Note:
Each time a package is edited, the package name in the left treeview changes to bold. This indicates that a package has been edited and not saved. Once saved, the package name returns to plain font.
404
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Customizing the Packages Treeview You can arrange packages into folders and/or subfolders. To do this, use the drag & drop mouse function.
Note:
Each time you create a new package, the right window pane displays the fields of the package installation parameters.
Package Installation Parameters The next step is to set the installation parameters for each package in the right pane. The package name displayed at the top of the right pane will be the same as that in the left treeview. You can rename it here by modifying the text in the name box. This will automatically update the package name in the left treeview.
405
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Priority Field You can select a priority level for package distribution: high, normal or low. If the connection pool is full, the priority function determines the interval during which a client workstation will be held on stand-by before its next possible connection. Therefore, the higher priority selected, the less delay there will be before a package is installed. By default, TrackBird Software Distribution will select ‘normal’ priority. To select between high, normal & low, use the drop-down menu.
Source Directory Field The source directory is where installation files for the selected package are located. To select the source directory, click to browse. To include subdirectories containing installation files for the selected package, activate the check box. Deactivate the check box if subdirectories are not required. Defining a source directory is not necessary when you employ the second distribution mode – Install from a shared directory. Indeed in this distribution mode the setup files are already located in the shared directory.
Executable file field Once the package has been distributed and extracted on a client, the executable file is launched and installation begins. To select an executable, click 406
to browse.
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Depending on the nature of a package, a program installation may not be necessary; if a package contains only Excel spreadsheets for example, no executable file is required.
Parameters Here you can list parameters that may be useful for your installation setup program. Depending on the setup program you use, you may specify, installation in silent mode, the log filename, etc.
Log Filename If you request that a log be generated in the Parameters field above, the log filename will be entered automatically here. If a log file is automatically generated by the setup program, you can retrieve the file’s details by specifying the name in this field. (See also “View External Log” on page 439). This log file is also available in the software distribution folder of TrackBird IP Server: C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG\TRACKBIRD IP SERVER\VIRTUALDIR\FILES\SWDISTRIB\
Description In this field you can define a package description that will be displayed on target clients when package installation is complete. A description is also displayed when the Prompt User function is activated in a Profile. If you do not define a description here but activate the Prompt User or Notify User functions in Profiles, only the package name display on target clients. (For further information, see: •
“Silent Interface vs. Prompt User. Here you select if installation should take place in silent interface mode or if you want to prompt the user for his/her approval before installation can go ahead. A silent installation does not interact with the user, which is useful when you need to install on multiple workstations with the same profile options.” on page 422
•
“Notify user after installation. You can choose if the client user should receive notification when package installation is complete. This option is mandatory in the Prompt user mode—the check box is automatically active and the text dimmed.” on page 423).
Target Operating System(s) This section lists the range of operating systems and their service packs supported by TrackBird Software Distribution. Activate the check box(es) of the operating systems and service packs that are valid for the selected package.
407
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If your target clients are currently running any unsupported operating systems, packages will not be installed. In this case, you must upgrade to a supported operating system before installing packages with TrackBird Software Distribution. Alternatively, you can exclude workstations that are running unsupported operating systems via the query editor in “Profile Tab - Target” on page 424.
Saving Packages Once you have completed package configuration, the next step is to save. Do one of the following: •
Click
.
•
Select Save in the contextual menu
•
Press Ctrl+S
Saving a package notifies the Primary Distribution Server of all changes made. In the left treeview you may notice that the package name is no longer highlighted in bold. This indicates that no changes have been made since the last save.
Package Building Once the parameters of a package are defined and saved, the final step is to build the package. The build process involves sending prepared packages to the Primary Distribution Server. (You will have previously defined the Primary Distribution Server in Software Distribution Preferences). As explained earlier, the Primary Distribution Server stores packages and distributes them to client workstations.
To build a package 1
Click
.
Via the contextual menu in the left treeview, you have a series of build options: •
Build the selected package only
•
Build all packages located in a selected folder
•
Build all packages located under the Package Definition root folder in the left treeview
The Confirm dialog box appears. Confirmation to build is required. 2
408
Click Yes to confirm or No to return to the Packages treeview.
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
If you select a package that has already been built, the Confirm dialog box will display.
Once confirmation is given, the Building Package window appears and the build process begins. Note:
Package building is superfluous in the second software distribution mode - files for installation are located in a shared directory on a network workstation and are remotely accessed by client workstations. Therefore package building is unnecessary when using this distribution mode. However, you must create and save the package and define an executable file.
Package Build Summary Once the build is complete, a summary at the bottom of the Building Package window displays: •
The number of packages built
•
The number of packages transferred to the primary distribution server
•
The number of errors. An error signifies that package installation is disabled in some way, for example if the TrackBird IP Server connection has failed.
•
The number of warnings. A warning signifies, for example, that a package does not contain files.
To view details of each package build you can scroll up using the mouse. For each package, the build information includes the file(s) that have been sent to the Primary Distribution Server, the compression rate of each file and the transfer rate of each package. Also included here are any error reports and warnings.
409
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Once you have viewed the package build information, click Close to return to the Package Definition window.
Successful Package Build In the packages treeview the folder icon of each package successfully built has changed: . This new shadowed icon shows that a package has been successfully built, is now prepared for distribution and is located in the Primary Distribution Server.
Unsuccessful Package Build If an error has occurred in a package build, the folder icon remains the same, that is, as if the package was not built:
.
Managing Profiles Once a package is prepared for distribution and built, the next step is to determine the distribution profile(s) for each package. A profile determines: •
How a package will be distributed and installed (installation options and distribution mode)
•
Where a package will be distributed and installed (selection of target clients)
•
When a package will be distributed and installed (distribution time and frequency)
Packages are independent from profiles in that they can be prepared and built in advance. However each profile must be linked to a package. The server will not install a package on a client workstation if a profile is not already linked to that package.
410
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Moreover, a package may have several profiles linked to it: a package with one set of characteristics may be distributed in different modes, to different client workstations and at different times, therefore requiring different profiles.
Opening Profiles To open the Profile section, click the Software Distribution menu in TrackBird Server and select Profiles.
The Package Definition and Profiles windows are concurrently open when the multiple screen icon at the bottom right of the screen is active. You can switch between the two by clicking the appropriate buttons at the bottom left of the window.
Profile Overview Having selected Profiles in the Software Distribution menu, this screen displays:
411
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This window, the first of three in the Profiles section, displays a general profiles overview. Here you can consult and sort essential profile information by column. The columns include: •
Profile name
•
The name of the package to which it is linked, (if already defined)
•
Indication if a profile is active or inactive. For the server to install the linked package, this option must be activated.
•
Total number of TrackBird target clients selected for package distribution. (Selection of clients is explained in “Profile Tab - Target” on page 424).
•
The number of TrackBird clients where the selected package is already installed.
•
Installation status: —
green bullet indicates that installation has been completed successfully for all client workstations;
—
red bullet indicates that errors have occurred during either package transfer or package installation on all client workstations;
—
orange bullet indicates that errors have occurred during package transfer or installation for at least one client workstation;
This space remains empty if no installation attempt has been performed.
Using the Profile Overview window The Profile Overview window is mainly used to: •
create, delete or copy profiles
•
save all profiles once defining and/or editing is complete
•
consult and sort essential profile information by column
Creating Profiles You can create a profile from either the Package Definition treeview or from the Profile Overview window: From the Package Definition treeview, select a package, then click Add Profile from the contextual menu. This opens the Profile Properties window for editing; the new profile will be automatically linked to the selected package. Note:
If you have already created profiles that are linked to a package, you can select the ‘Show Profile’ command from the contextual menu in the Package Definition window. This opens the linked profile.
412
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
From the Profile Overview window, select a profile and do one of the following: •
Click the
icon;
•
Select Add Profile from the contextual menu;
•
Press Ctrl+Insert.
This opens the new profile in the Profile Properties window, however this profile is not yet linked to a package.
Editing Profiles Select a profile and do one of the following: •
Click the
icon
•
Double-click the selected profile
•
Select Edit Profile from the contextual menu
•
Press Alt+Enter
This table lists the toolbar buttons available in the Profile Overview window:
Button Use Adds a new profile. When a new profile is added, the Profile Properties window is displayed for editing
Shortcut Key(s) Ctrl+Ins
Deletes a profile. A confirmation dialog is displayed here. Click Ctrl+Del OK to confirm or Cancel Opens the Profile Properties window to enable editing of the selected profile
Alt+Enter
Saves all changes. Note that this command is only available in the Profile Overview window
Ctrl+S
Clone Profile. Here the properties of an existing profile are copied and pasted to create a new ‘clone’ profile. The clone profile adopts exactly the same properties except for the name and is not activated. The clone is labeled ‘Copy of Profile Name’
Ctrl++
Undoes all changes for the selected profile
Ctrl+Z
Undoes all changes in all profiles (including profile creation) since last save
Ctrl+Alt+Z
413
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button Use View Profile Log - opens installation status log view
Shortcut Key(s) Ctrl+L
Refresh. This function refreshes the list of packages available in F5 the Profiles section. It also updates the columns containing information on installation status and the number of packages installed in the Profile Overview window.
This table lists the contextual menu commands available in the Profile Overview window:
Button Command & Use
Shortcut Key(s)
Adds a new profile. When a new profile is added, the Profile Properties window is displayed for editing
Ctrl+Ins
Deletes a profile. A Confirmation dialog box will display. Click OK to confirm or Cancel
Ctrl+Del
Clone Profile. Here the properties of an existing profile are copied and pasted to create a new clone profile. The clone profile adopts exactly the same properties except for the name and is not activated. The clone is labeled Copy of Profile Name
Ctrl++
Edit Profile. Opens the Profile Properties window to enable editing of the selected profile
Alt+Enter
Rename Profile
F2
View Log - opens installation status log view
Ctrl+L
Undo. Undoes all changes for the selected profile
Ctrl+Z
Undo All. Undoes all changes in all profiles (including profile creation) since last save
Ctrl+Alt+Z
Profile Properties As mentioned earlier, the Profile Overview is essentially used to consult and sort basic profile information. The majority of profile editing is done in the Profile Properties window.
414
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
The Profile Properties window displays when you create or edit a profile.
415
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
At the top left of the window, you can switch between previously created profiles using the drop-down menu.
There are three tabs involved in determining a profile’s properties:
416
•
“Profile Tab - General” on page 417
•
“Profile Tab - Target” on page 424
•
“Profile Tab - Scheduler” on page 430
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Profile Tab - General The first tab, labeled General is used to define a profile’s main characteristics.
Linking a Profile to a Package. Each profile must have a package linked to it; otherwise the profile cannot be made active and the server will not distribute the package to client workstations. To select a package to which you want to link the profile, use the drop-down menu. The Active Check Box. A profile should be activated if you plan to distribute the package to which it is linked in the near future. If this active check box is not selected, the profile is considered inactive and the server will not install the associated package.
417
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
If you have not previously specified the package to which a profile should be linked ‘n/a’ (not applicable) appears in the package column in the Profile Overview window. If you choose to activate this profile without linking it to a package, the message There is no package linked to this profile. It can’t be activated displays:
Selecting a Distribution Mode. Details on the functioning of the three distribution modes offered in TrackBird Software Distribution are explained in “Distribution Modes” on page 393.
To select a distribution mode for a specific profile
418
1
Display the Profile Properties window.
2
Package distribution directly to TrackBird clients. Specify the local folder on the target client workstation where the package will be extracted.
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
3
Specify a temporary folder by typing it directly or you can use an environment variable, for example, %TEMP%.
4
Select Remote file installation via a shared directory on a network workstation.
419
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
In the second distribution mode, the package does not contain files. All files to be installed are located on a shared directory which can be accessed by all clients. Target clients will remotely install the files from the shared directory.
5
Specify the setup file’s source path (in Unified Naming Convention), that is, the shared directory where the installation files are stored on the network workstation: \\servername\shareddirectory Note:
The shared directory must be created on the network workstation before the profile is defined. 6
420
Select Package distribution via a shared directory on a distribution server.
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
This third distribution mode is a combination of the two previous modes. A package containing files to install is built, then distributed and extracted to a local folder on a distribution server.
7
Indicate: a
The setup file’s source path - the shared directory where installation files are stored on the distribution server
b
The local folder on the distribution server where the package will be extracted: UNC: \\servername\shareddirectory\
Local folder: C:\software distribution\shareddirectory\ Note:
Both the local folder and the shared directory must be created on the distribution server before the profile is defined.
421
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Installation Options Silent Interface vs. Prompt User. Here you select if installation should take place in silent interface mode or if you want to prompt the user for his/her approval before installation can go ahead. A silent installation does not interact with the user, which is useful when you need to install on multiple workstations with the same profile options. Software Distribution using the Prompt User function. If you specify the Prompt User mode, the software distribution tray icon appears at the bottom right of the screen once a package is loaded onto a client. Double-click this tray icon to display a list of packages available for distribution on the current client workstation. If you previously entered a description when defining the package, (see “Description” on page 407), the same information will be displayed in the Software column below. If no description was previously defined, only the name is displayed here.
A package awaiting user approval for installation will display the status label Not Installed. To enable installation, select a package and click Install. Once installation is complete, the status label for the package changes to Installed. If the client workstation user does not want to install a package displayed in the window, first select the package then click Remove from list. This clears the package from the list. Opened Session Required. By default, TrackBird Software Distribution recognizes that an open session is necessary for installation to take place. Deactivate the check box if you do not require an open session.
422
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Delete setup files after installation. These setup files are those no longer required by the client when package installation is complete. This option is only valid when the first software distribution mode – ‘Send package to client’ - is employed. Indeed the two other distribution modes function with packages stored on a shared directory. Activate the check box if setup files should be deleted after installation. Deactivate it if setup files should remain on the client hard disk. Notify user after installation. You can choose if the client user should receive notification when package installation is complete. This option is mandatory in the Prompt user mode—the check box is automatically active and the text dimmed. If installation takes place in silent mode and the user is notified after installation, the Software Distribution tray icon
appears at the bottom right of the screen.
Double-click the tray icon to display a summary of packages installed on the current client workstation.
If you previously entered a description when defining the package, (see “Description” on page 407), the same information will be displayed in the Software column above. If no description was previously defined, only the name is displayed here.
User Account The user who will perform package installation is identified here. This can be either the current user (logged in at the time of software distribution), or a different user with Administrator rights, for whom an account login and password are required. 423
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Connection •
Maximum number of simultaneous connections The connection pool can be configured to limit the number of simultaneous package installations. This helps control the flow of package distribution, restricts the server loading charge and reduces concurrent network usage. The maximum number of connections is defined in both TrackBird IP Administration and in TrackBird Server. The value of maximum connections set in the Profiles section, (i.e., in TrackBird Server), will apply to all profiles, except where the number of connections in TrackBird Server exceeds the number set in TrackBird IP Administration. By default, the maximum number of simultaneous connections in TrackBird Server is 50. For details on configuring the maximum number of connections in TrackBird IP Administration, see “TrackBird IP Package Distribution Tab” on page 398.
•
Timeout To conserve the connection pool resources, you can set a timeout period. By default, the timeout period is set at 5 minutes. If, for example, package installation is not possible due to a connection failure, a TrackBird client workstation will continue to retry until connection is established. However, with the timeout function, if package installation is not acknowledged within the preset timeout period an error is assumed to have occurred. At timeout, any connection retries will be suspended and the workstation will be cleared from the connection pool, thus releasing space in the pool.
Profile Tab - Target The second tab in the Profiles section is where you define target client workstations – the machine(s) where package installation should take place - for a selected profile. Caution! If you plan to carry out real package distribution (i.e. not a test) the database employed here must be the TrackBird Production Database. The database should already be defined in the Database field in TrackBird Software Distribution Preferences - see “Software Distribution Database” on page 153.
424
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
You can select target clients in two ways: Selection of target clients from the Machine List. Select the Machines List filter. The complete list of client workstations registered in the TrackBird Production database is displayed. Now select the target client workstations you require.
To include target clients, select the check box(es) corresponding to the machine names in the list.
425
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
You can select a number of machines simultaneously by dragging the mouse across the machine names. The Windows selecting functions, Shift and Ctrl, also apply here. Then use the contextual menu to check or uncheck machines. You can also check or uncheck all machines in the list.
Once selected, your selection of target clients is set. From here, you proceed to the Scheduler tab.
426
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
Selection of target clients via a List Query. Alternatively, you can use a List Query to select target clients. List Queries are explained in detail in TrackBird Inventory documentation. To access the online help, press F1.
This table lists the toolbar buttons available for List Queries in the Profile Target tab. Button
Use Creates new query Deletes selected column in query Run query. Here results are listed by column
427
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button
Use SQL Code Viewer
Adds calculated field Edits calculated field
In TrackBird Software Distribution, you can use a previously created List Query to select target clients. To do so, click Copy From Existing Query. A dialog box displays enabling you to browse and select the existing list query.
Click OK to confirm selection or Cancel to return to the Profile Target tab. Use the toolbar icons listed above to edit and/or run the existing query. The Apply Result to Machines List button enables you to further filter an existing List Query.
428
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
First, select the existing query, then click Apply Result to Machines List. To view the list of machines from the existing list query, go to the Machines List window. Now, filter the list by selecting the machines you require.
To reset to the original list query, click Reset List. Once selected, your selection of target clients is set. From here, you proceed to the Scheduler tab.
429
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Profile Tab - Scheduler Now that you have specified your target clients, the next step is to determine when the packages can be installed. To do so, click the Scheduler tab. You can schedule installation to recur at regular intervals - daily, weekly, monthly. You can also schedule installation to take place only once.
The previous screen displays that from 28th July 2005 onwards, installation can take place every day between 3:45 and 4:45 P.M.
430
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
This is an example of a Weekly Installation.
The previous screen displays that installation can take place from 7 A.M. on Fridays, Saturdays or Sundays every two weeks between 28th July and 28th August 2005.
431
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The previous screen displays that installation can take place between 8 A.M. and 5 P.M. on the 28th day of every month between July 2005 and August 2006 inclusive.
432
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
The previous screen displays that installation can take place at 8 P.M. on the third Friday of January, February and March 2005.
433
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This is an example of a single occurrence installation.
The previous screen displays that installation can take place only once - between 6 A.M. and 4 P.M. on Tuesday 26th July 2005. Note:
If installation is scheduled to occur only once but has not taken place by the preset timeout period, the package will not be installed.
Validating Profile Properties Now that all profile properties are defined, they must be validated. Click OK to validate the edited profile properties. Clicking Cancel discards all changes made in all three tabs in the Profile Properties window.
434
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
On validation, the Profile Overview window is again displayed. It indicates the following information for each profile: •
The profile name
•
The package to which the profile is linked (if defined)
•
If a profile is active or inactive
•
The number of scheduled installations to take place
Edited Profiles Profiles that were previously created and since edited are accompanied by the icon at the left of the profile name in the profile overview window. This indicates that a profile has been modified since the last save. Newly created profiles are accompanied by the been created since the last save.
icon. This indicates that a profile has
435
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Saving Profiles Once you have defined or edited profile characteristics, you must save. To register changes, do one of the following from the Profile Overview window: •
Click the
icon.
•
Press Ctrl+S.
Notice that once profile properties are saved, the edit and new profile icons mentioned above disappear. If you try to close the Profile Overview window without saving, an Information dialog displays.
Now that the Profiles section is saved, TrackBird IP Server links the profile(s) to the package. When target clients query TrackBird IP Server as to whether there are files or software to install, software distribution can begin.
Profile Log TrackBird Software Distribution provides a Profile Log displaying installation status of each profile including start and end times. To view a log from the Profile Overview window, first select a profile, then do one of the following: •
Click
from the toolbar.
•
Double-click the color bullet in the Status column.
•
Select View Log from the contextual menu of a selected profile.
Color bullets enable you to visualize installation status of each machine at first glance. • •
436
green bullet indicates that installation has been completed successfully. red bullet indicates that errors have occurred during either package transfer or package installation.
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
The following screen displays the log for Profile Office XP distribution server:
The screen indicates that the installation has been performed successfully on client workstations CPU48-XP and CPU14-XP. Installation start and end times are also indicated. The check mark in the log column indicates that an external log file, generated by the setup program, is available for both machines. The external log filename must previously be defined when configuring the package to which the profile is linked (see “Log Filename” on page 407). To open the external log for a specific machine, see “View External Log” on page 439. For client workstations CPU45-XP and CPU47-NT, installation has failed. Errors and installation start times are indicated. A list of potential Profile Log error messages, resulting from failed package installation, is available in Appendix C, “TrackBird Software Distribution Module Error Messages,” on page 629. To browse between profile logs, either use the drop-down menu or click the right or left arrows. The ‘Clear Log button
deletes the selected profile log.
437
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
View Internal Log To view the internal log file of a specific client workstation, select the client and click on the toolbar. The internal log file is generated by the client agent.
Click OK to return to the Profile Log window.
438
6 TrackBird Software Distribution
View External Log To view the external log file of a specific client workstation, select the client and click on the toolbar. The external log file is generated by the setup program.
Click OK to return to the Profile Log window. To exit the Profile Log window, click OK.
439
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
440
TrackBird Monitoring
Chapter 7:
7 TrackBird Monitoring is used to draw up statistics on use of the software on TrackBird client workstations, including the following: •
Number of times the software is run
•
Length of time it is used
TrackBird Monitoring prepares statistics only for software operating under Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows NT, or Windows XP. You must perform the following steps in setting up TrackBird Monitoring to prepare an information system that fully meets your needs: 1
Fill out the knowledge base with a precise description of all applications for which usage information is required, as detailed in “Software Glossaries” on page 82.
2
Define software audit characteristics that precisely determine the beginning and end of the audit period during which information on application usage is collected, together with any exclusion periods during which information should not be collected.
3
Update the collection points so that they incorporate changes made to the software knowledge base and perform the audit in accordance with the audit characteristics.
For TrackBird Monitoring to audit TrackBird client workstations for a given application, that software must be in the list of known applications and be correctly identified (name, executable file, size, etc.). TrackBird Monitoring can perform the audit both on local applications and on those run from a shared network directory provided that they are known and correctly identified.
441
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Defining Software Audit Characteristics Before TrackBird clients can perform the audit, it must be validated using the appropriate method detailed below.
To collect audit data via IP 1
2
442
If the TrackBird IP Administration interface is not already displayed, do one of the following to display the TrackBird IP Administration interface. •
If the TrackBird Server interface is already displayed, from the Administration menu select IP Administration.
•
If the TrackBird Server interface is not displayed, select the Windows Start menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite in the sublist. In the TrackBird Suite sublist, select TrackBird IP Administration and then enter the appropriate user name and password in the Login dialog.
Click Monitoring in the Collection options folder.
7 TrackBird Monitoring
Selecting Monitoring Options Execute Audit The software use audit records details of the rate of software use. This audit is used to find out how often software is used and for how long. By default, the Execute Audit check box is not checked and the other components in the Software Use Audit box are deactivated. To generate the software use audit report, select this option. The Begin Audit and End Audit fields are then also activated.
Begin Audit, and End Audit To define a period during which software use audits must be run, select the period start date in the Begin Audit field, and its end date in the End Audit field. To change the date in the Begin Audit and End Audit fields, click the field’s drop-down list button to display a calendar and then select the appropriate date in the calendar.
Restrictions The Restrictions field is used to exclude certain times or days from software use audit information collection. The field contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
443
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for exclusion are colored red. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row. In the following example, the Restrictions field specifies that software use will not be audited on Saturdays, Sundays, or Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
To collect audit data via a shared directory 1
From TrackBird Server’s Administration menu, select Collection Points to display the Collection Points Administration screen.
2
In the Collection Points Administration screen, select the root of the collection point to be modified by doing one of the following. Select the collection point, then click
.
Or
Right-click the collection point and select Properties from the contextual menu.
444
7 TrackBird Monitoring
3
In the Collection Points Administration screen, select the Options tab.
The Software Use Audit zone on the right side of the dialog concerns TrackBird Monitoring. The zone contains the following elements. The software uses audit feature records details of the rate of software use. This audit is used to find out how often software is used and for how long. By default, the Software Use Audit check box is not checked and the other components in the Software Use Audit check box are deactivated. To generate the software use audit report, select this option. The Begin and End fields are then also activated.
Selecting Collection Properties Begin, and End To define a period during which software use audits must be run, select the period start date in the Begin field, and its end date in the End field. To change the date in the Begin and End fields, click the field’s drop-down list button to display a calendar and then select the appropriate date in the calendar.
445
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Restrictions The Restrictions field is used to exclude certain times or days from software use audit information collection. To display the Restrictions field, click Restrictions. The field contains a grid in which each row represents a different day of the week and each column represents a number from 0 to 23. These numbers represent the time, from midnight to 11 P.M.
To select or deselect a given time on a given day, click its box. Times selected for exclusion are colored red. To select or deselect a complete row or column, click its header, at the top of the column or the left of the row. In the following example, the Restrictions field specifies that software use will not be audited on Saturdays, Sundays, or Wednesdays between 8 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Click OK to close the dialog and automatically update the collection options on the collection points. It is not necessary to manually update the collection points (this is only needed following changes to the glossaries).
446
7 TrackBird Monitoring
Updating the Collection Points After new software glossary information is entered or changes are made in the relevant software glossary, you should refresh the knowledge base so that all these changes will be taken into account when audit information is collected in future. The TrackBird knowledge base is essential to operation of the collector agents on the workstations because it contains the TrackBird structure and the list of hardware and software used as inventory reference information. The TrackBird knowledge base is updated using the TrackBird Server interface. From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Collection Points. Do one of the following. •
To select a single collection point in order to update its knowledge base, click its line in the Collection Point Administration list.
•
To select individual collection points in order to update their knowledge bases, click the line containing the first collection point you wish to update; then press Control (Ctrl) while clicking each additional collection point whose knowledge base you wish to update in the Collection points administration list.
•
To select all collection points in order to update their knowledge bases, press Ctrl+A.
Click . The data tables concerned are converted into compressed binary files and sent to the collection point. Unlike the collection details, the TrackBird knowledge base is always the same for all collection points in the list. The knowledge base data is highly compressed. For example, a software glossary containing 5000 lines with 8 columns in each only occupies approximately 120 KB after it is compressed into binary format. Note:
If you use the TrackBird IP Administration interface (recommended), you must now click in the TrackBird IP Administration interface in order to save the configuration and record the changes in the software glossary for when inventory information is collected in future.
447
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Displaying Software Audit Results TrackBird Monitoring stores a number of characteristics concerning Software items for each audited workstation: •
Number of times the application is used
•
Dates the program was used for the first and last time
•
Total time used and average duration per session
Which characteristics are returned by the system depends upon the software editor concerned. The information displayed in the figure below is returned for a Microsoft application, for example.
To display application audit information for a given application on a given workstation
448
1
Click the TrackBird Server interface’s the list, select Summary.
2
In the TrackBird structure tree, click the workstation whose application details you want to display.
button to display a drop list. In
7 TrackBird Monitoring
3
If the selected workstation’s categories are not displayed in the TrackBird structure tree, click
4
to the left of its name and then select the Software category.
If the Software category’s subcategories are not displayed in the TrackBird structure tree, click to the left of its name to display its subcategories and then select the Applications subcategory.
5
In the Application subcategory, click the name of the application whose feature details you wish to display for the selected workstation.
6
Click the Detail tab at the bottom of the right pane. The selected workstation’s feature details are displayed in the right pane, as in the above example.
The following application audit information is returned by TrackBird Monitoring and displayed for each application in the Applications subcategory: Feature
Explanation
Execution count
Total number of times the application has been executed since TrackBird software use audits began on the TrackBird client workstation
Total time (min)
Application’s total execution time (in minutes) since TrackBird software use audits began on the TrackBird client workstation
1st use
Date the application was first executed after TrackBird software use audits began on the TrackBird client workstation
Last use
Date the application was last executed on the TrackBird client workstation
Average no. of executions
Average number of times the application has been executed per working day since TrackBird software use audits began on the TrackBird client workstation
Average execution time
Average length of time the application has been executed per working day since TrackBird software use audits began on the TrackBird client workstation
449
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Using a Query to Return TrackBird Monitoring Information Software use audit data can be returned in queries displaying the above information for specific workstations or all workstations. In the following example, software use audit data is displayed for all TrackBird client workstations, listing all applications that have never been executed since software use audits began.
To create the query 1
If the List query editor is not already displayed, display it (for details of how to display the List query editor, see “To open the list query editor” on page 29).
2
If necessary, click to the left of an item in the Result pane to display its hierarchically subordinate information, or click to the left of an item to hide its hierarchically subordinate information).
3
Double-click each of these features to add them to the list query: OUTPUTFILE EDITOR SOFTWARE TOTAL_TIME_MIN_ Each of the above names is then displayed in the TrackBird screen’s data (right) pane.
450
4
To sort the applications alphabetically by workstation, software editor and then application name, select the Asc option in the Order line of the query definition’s OUTPUTFILE, EDITOR, and SOFTWARE columns.
5
To specify that only applications that have never been executed are displayed by the query, type =0 in the Criteria row of the query definition’s TOTAL_TIME_MIN_ column.
6
To prevent the value 0 from appearing in the TOTAL_TIME_MIN_ column for each record displayed by the query, click the Show box to uncheck the option.
7 TrackBird Monitoring
The query definition appears as shown below.
7
To execute the query and display its results, click
.
451
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
452
TrackBird Designer
Chapter 8:
8 Presentation TrackBird automatically sets up and maintains a complete inventory of your computer resources. It carries out this task completely on its own and does not require any human input on the machines involved. The data is transmitted to collection points that group the results obtained from a set of workstations and provide those workstations, via TrackBird IP Server or TrackBird Server depending on the connection type, with the configuration data and the knowledge bases defined by the administrator. In addition to the above functions, it is generally necessary to fill out the technical inventory data with further information often required to physically locate the workstation and identify its current user. There are two ways to achieve this: •
Go through the list of workstations in TrackBird Server and fill in the information station by station, unfortunately this method represents a considerable amount of work.
•
Involve in the inventory process the user or a local PC technician who will enter the necessary information directly on the workstation.
The second method has a number of advantages: •
The entered data can be periodically updated by the user if any changes occur (e.g., move to another office, etc.), which makes the database (and consequently the resource management) much more reactive.
•
For certain items of information (notification of technical servicing, etc.), direct entry of the information on the workstation eliminates information loss and paperwork between the time data is entered and the time it is validated in resource management or the Service Desk database.
However, to safeguard and ensure the quality of the information entered by the user of the workstation, it is necessary to provide for the security of the collected information. TrackBird Designer was designed to meet this need by integrating graphic objects and by providing the IT resource administrator with the means to ensure that users respect the stipulated data structure and do not enter nonstandard information. Finally, TrackBird Designer provides the means to periodically update the interface as your needs change, completely autonomously.
453
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Prerequisites As the previous explanation shows, preparation of a TrackBird Designer interface requires a certain number of preliminary steps before it can become operational.
Creating Entry Fields in the Database The interface to be created will use the fields in the TrackBird database, therefore you must create the required fields first in the database. For information on creating fields in TrackBird, see “Field Administration” on page 58.
Linking Glossaries The primary purpose of this interface is to safeguard the information and ensure it fully meets the administrator’s needs. With this in mind, TrackBird Designer makes it easy to enter data using list boxes and drop lists. These lists refer to glossaries containing the features that must be entered in the interface. The glossaries are sets of predefined values that may be selected rather than having to type the information in the interface (e.g., list of users, etc.). For information on creating glossaries, see “Glossary Administration” on page 102.
Updating the Collection Points Once the structure has been defined or if you are not sure the current knowledge base for the collection points includes the latest modifications made to the database, you must update the collection points. See “Updating the TrackBird Knowledge Base” on page 54. Note:
This is particularly important because TrackBird Designer uses the knowledge bases when creating the interface. If the information does not correspond to that defined in the database, any differing information is not transmitted to the database.
454
8 TrackBird Designer
Designing a Custom Interface Selecting the Type of Interface TrackBird Designer is a very open and flexible product that can be used to create all types of interfaces suiting the complexity and the quantity of information that you need to enter. It is possible to set up simple interfaces limited to a dialog with just a few fields, or to define more user-friendly and complex interfaces containing comments, multiple pages, logos, validation buttons, and any of the other objects commonly found in this type of interface. Before selecting a type of interface to set up, answer a few basic questions, such as these: •
Among the existing fields in the TrackBird structure, which ones should be included in the interface?
•
Should all the information be displayed on a single page or on a set of pages, each corresponding to the type of information to be entered?
•
Who is the interface for, and what is their level of familiarity with computer systems?
•
What information is mandatory and which fields can be left empty if the person does not know the answer?
•
Would it be a good idea to split the requested information up into a number of smaller interfaces to be sent over a certain period of time and thus avoid taxing the patience of users?
Once you have answered these questions, you should have a better idea of your plan of action regarding the users and the corresponding interface that is to be designed. Note:
You can also simply take a piece of paper and start laying out a basic design for the future interface. You can draw in the various objects and indicate their properties.
455
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Designer Screen This sections provides an overview of the application to show the many possibilities offered by TrackBird Designer and illustrates how customized user interfaces are created. The following image shows the screen elements displayed when TrackBird Designer is run.
Layout of Screen Elements By default, these five elements are displayed when the program is run. To display or mask one of the elements, use the commands in the View menu. Command
Function
Advanced mode
Displays additional objects for use in the interface
TrackBird Structure Displays or masks the pane presenting the TrackBird structure
456
8 TrackBird Designer
Command
Function
Form
Opens the pane displaying the Form for the interface currently being designed, if it was closed inadvertently
Object properties
Displays or masks the pane presenting the object properties
Alignment tools
Displays or masks the toolbox containing the alignment tools
Display grid
Displays or masks the alignment grid in the pane displaying the custom interface being developed
Note:
The various windows and toolboxes in TrackBird Designer can be moved to any point on the screen. The new layout will be saved when the application is closed.
Available Objects This section presents the types of objects available in TrackBird Designer for insertion in the custom interface. There are two basic categories of objects: •
TrackBird objects which are directly linked to the TrackBird data that you wish to insert (entry fields, lists, grids, etc.) and constitute the basic building blocks of the interface.
•
Designer objects that can be inserted to organize the interface and make it more user-friendly (tab sheets, images, captions, etc.).
The objects in each category are grouped in the TrackBird Designer toolbar, under the TrackBird Data and TBDesigner tabs, respectively. The hierarchy that must be set up to insert an entry field in the interface is always the same for a given type of entry field. The table below shows the two possible types of hierarchy. Basic items
Items linked to a glossary
DataSource
DataSource
DataSetInstance NBEditor or NBGrid
DataSetGloss NBGloss
The table below provides detailed information on the function of each object in the TrackBird Data toolbar. 457
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Cursor for object selection. It may be used to directly select an object already present in the interface DataSource—Specifies the connection to a data source. By default, the data source is the inventory file. It is not mandatory to define a new data source
DataSetInstance—Defines a pointer to a TrackBird item for which one or more objects must be defined. For example, this pointer is required to display the type of processor and its frequency in the custom interface. In this case, it must point to the TrackBird Processor item DataSetGloss—Defines a pointer to a glossary that will be linked to the TrackBird feature via an NBGloss or NBGrid object. The pointer is used to select a value in the glossary and insert it in the corresponding field linked to the NBGloss or NBGrid object. If a DataSetGloss object is used, the DataSetInstance object is not required to define a pointer to the item NBEditor—Inserts a basic data entry or display field. Glossary data cannot be selected via in NBEditor objects; to allow selection of data contained in a glossary, use the NBGloss object presented below NBGloss—Inserts an entry field whose parent feature is linked to a glossary. Information on how to manage the links between a number of NBGloss objects pointing to the same glossary will be presented later NBDbButton—Specifies an action on the data source. This object is highly useful for navigation among items that may have been instantiated a number of times (e.g., browse through a hard disk’s logical partitions) NBGrid—Displays the occurrences of an element in a list (e.g. the list of software installed on a workstation). If a DataSetGloss object is defined, the NBGrid object contains a link to a field contained in the specified glossary; if a DataSetInstance object is defined, the NBGrid object contains a link to a TrackBird structure tree item
The table below provides detailed information on the function of each object in the TBDesigner toolbar. Object
Function Cursor for object selection. It may be used to directly select an object already present in the interface NBButton—Used to specify an action on the window and data. Two actions are available: Save and Quit, and Quit without Saving
458
8 TrackBird Designer
Object
Function NBImage—Used to link an image or logo to the form, to customize the data entry interface. An URL can also be linked with the image, pointing to the Company’s site for example NBLabel—Used to define text or a data entry label
NBPanel—Used to insert a box in which the proportions of the objects contained in the box are maintained if the user changes the box size NBGroupBox—Used to attach several NBPanel boxes within a box so that the positions of the boxes relative to each other are maintained if the window size is changed NBPageControl—Used to create tab pages if the amount of information displayed or entered requires. Each tab will then contain different independent objects. Each control can also be linked with an NBGroupBox or NBPanel NBUrl—Used to create a hyperlink in the interface, to an Internet URL for example
Object Properties Window As soon as an object has been selected and inserted in the Form defining the custom interface, the Object Properties window displays the properties of the selected object. The properties are grouped into nine categories presented in detail in the table below. Category
Description
Object drop list
The drop-down list can be used to select the desired object
Appearance
These properties define the appearance of the object (border, color, etc.)
Other
This category contains additional information that varies depending on the type of object
Behavior
These properties define the behavior of the object (enabled, required, input, etc.)
Coordinates
These properties define the position and the size of the object in the window
Data
These properties define the source of the data to be used with the object
Glossary
These properties define the glossary to be used with the object
459
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Category
Description
Image
These properties define the image to be incorporated in an NBImage object
Parameters
These properties primarily define the name of the selected object
Input
These properties may be used to set up and control the input data (input mask, input error message, etc.)
Help zone
The bottom part of the window contains explanatory text on the selected property
TrackBird Structure Window The TrackBird Structure window shows the TrackBird structure tree containing all standard fields offered by the software, plus any others you may have added (see “Prerequisites” on page 454).
Using this window, objects linked to inventory data can be easily inserted in the interface using a drag-and-drop technique. For further information on using this Automatic Method of creating a custom interface, see “Automatic Method” on page 472.
Setting up the Designer Environment The TrackBird Designer environment parameters are set via TrackBird Designer’s Tools menu. These settings include the program source and the information required to implement the interface, as well as the location of the collection points used to transmit the interface to the users.
460
8 TrackBird Designer
Automatic Alignment When this option is selected, the objects placed in the personalized interface are automatically aligned (in a snap-to-grid mode) on the grid. When the option is not selected, objects may be precisely positioned to the nearest pixel.
Environment Options When the Environment Options command is selected in TrackBird Designer’s Tools menu, a dialog box is displayed. The dialog box contains three tabs: the “General Tab” (below), “Interpreter Tab” on page 462, and “Collection Point(s) Tab” on page 463.
General Tab
On this page, the user can set the following parameters. •
Automatically Reopen Last Edited Project. If this option is activated, the last interface project saved is automatically opened when the program is run again.
•
Show Grid and Align To Grid. These grid options make it easy to align objects on the grid and with respect to each other, and therefore facilitate the interface design work. It is also possible to define the grid pitch.
461
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Interpreter Tab
On the Interpreter tab, it is possible to set the parameters for interface execution. To better understand the meaning of these parameters, it is necessary first to understand how the personalized interface operates on the workstations. When the interface project is saved, a PROJECT.NDP file is created (where PROJECT is simply the name given by the user to the project). This file contains all the environment configuration information set for TrackBird Designer, as well as the reference to the interface (the project), which is saved in another file called PROJECT.ODF. The ODF file contains a complete description of the interface (fields inserted, lists, panels, etc.), which is required for it to work. To interpret this script file, a program called INTERWIN.EXE is used. This program is sent with the ODF file to all the workstations, via IP or the collection points depending on the connection type, and enables users to view the interface exactly as it was designed by the administrator. Transfer of these files is explained in “Transferring the Interface to the Client Workstations” on page 474. Consequently, the first thing to do on the Interpreter page is to indicate the location of the INTERWIN.EXE executable file which is used to send the interface and to test it locally. By default, the system proposes INTERWIN.EXE automatically installed with TrackBird Server and found in the C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG\TRACKBIRD SERVER folder. If you have already installed a collector on the administration workstation, it is also possible to use INTERWIN.EXE that is in the collector’s installation folder (C:\TBCLIENT by default). For information on how to install a collector, see the ASG-TrackBird Installation Guide. The second element of information to be supplied is the name of the directory in which you wish to test the personalized interface. By default, the entry field is empty and the tests are carried out in the current directory.
462
8 TrackBird Designer
Note:
To ensure successful tests, ASG recommends testing the interface using a collector already installed locally on the workstation. The Command Line field may be used if you wish to add special parameters for INTERWIN.EXE execution. For the time being, this field is empty. Finally, it is also possible to indicate a name for the ODF script file if you wish to create several interfaces.
Collection Point(s) Tab
If IP mode is used to collect inventory client results, it is not necessary to enter information into this page. If, however, a shared directory is used to collect inventory client results, on the Collection point(s) tab you must specify to which collection points defined using the TrackBird Server interface the ODF file and INTERWIN.EXE are to be sent. Even though it is preferable to send the interface to all collection points, this function can be used to send it only to users connected to certain collection points. To select a collection point, activate the check box to the left of the path for the collection point. To select all collection points in the list, click All.
463
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Inserting Objects into the Interface There are two methods of positioning objects in the interface and establishing the link with the TrackBird features. •
Create a DataSource/DataSetInstance/NBGloss or NBEditor hierarchy. In this case, all of each object’s properties must be defined manually to ensure that the various objects interact correctly.
•
Drag the desired features from the TrackBird Structure window and drop them on the Form used to lay out the interface. This is an extremely simple technique, because the property values for the objects are automatically set, i.e. you do not need an in-depth knowledge of all of each object’s properties.
To illustrate the process of creating TrackBird objects manually, a simple example is shown below. This method can be used if an object must be defined completely manually. Subsequently, however, we will use only the automatic method to create the demonstration interface as this is sufficient in most cases.
Creating a Dialog Manually In this example, we wish to create a simple dialog in which the user should fill in his or her last name, first name and telephone number. In TrackBird, we will set up these features as part of an item called User, itself linked to a glossary containing the list of required information.
To create a dialog manually 1
If TrackBird Designer is not already displayed, run the TrackBird Designer module.
2
Do one of the following to display a new project and a new Form. •
From the File menu, select New. Or
•
3
Click
.
From the Tools menu, select Environment Options to set up the Designer environment. Note:
Even though the default DataSource has already been defined in the window, this procedure pretends that it does not exist and so presents the complete manual procedure.
464
8 TrackBird Designer
4
To define a DataSource, double-click
5
In the Object Properties window, set the properties as shown below.
. A DataSource displays on the Form.
The connection must be made to the inventory file (ConnectionType property). The system glossaries (software, models, etc.) should be available. The DataSource will be called MySource_1.
To use the TrackBird data, you must first create the link to each item or glossary that the user wishes to implement. In this case, we want to use the User item, which is linked to a glossary. You must therefore use a DataSetGloss object. As explained previously, a DataSetGloss object’s properties include those contained in a DataSetInstance object and so you do not need both.
To create a DataSetGloss object
1
Double-click
.
465
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
For our example, set the DataSetGloss object’s properties as shown below. To indicate the name of the TrackBird glossary that should be linked to the DataSetGloss, double-click the Glossary property to display the list of available glossaries, select the appropriate glossary in the list and then click OK.
The DataSetGloss object points to the DataSource called MySource_1. The TrackBird glossary linked to the instance is called NameList. The DataSetGloss object is called MyGloss_User. Now we can define the link between the DataSetGloss object and the TrackBird field in which the information will be stored. In this example, the aim is to set up an object in which we can select values from a glossary. We will then insert three NBGloss objects, one for each of the three features (Last name, First name, Phone number).
To insert an NBGloss object
1
466
Double-click
.
8 TrackBird Designer
2
Set the NBGloss object’s properties as shown below.
The field is enabled, required and modifiable. It is linked to the TrackBird Last Name feature. In the MyGloss_user instance glossary, it points to the Last Name column. It is called LAST_NAME. Note:
Do the same for the First Name and Phone Number NBGloss objects, ensuring you set the pointers to the correct glossary column and TrackBird feature.
467
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To obtain the list of TrackBird fields in order to fill in the Feature property in the Data category, double-click the property to display the window presented below. Find the Last Name feature and click Select. The value opposite the property will become Last Name.
Linking the NBGloss Objects To make the entry procedure even easier, a set of NBGloss objects can be linked. When this function is used and a name is selected in the drop-down list, the interface automatically proposes the first names of everyone with the selected last name. This function is even more useful when the workstation location is indicated, in which case each site will have X number of buildings, which will each have X number of floors, which will each have X number of offices, etc. In this way, each time a hierarchical level is selected, a vast number of possibilities on the lower levels is excluded, thus making it easier to search for the desired result.
To link a set of NBGloss objects 1
To set up a link between FIRST_NAME and LAST_NAME, select the FIRST_NAME object and then, in the LookUp property in the Glossary category, select the LAST_NAME object. This is an upward-looking link.
2
Do similarly for the link between PHONE_NUMBER and FIRST_NAME objects.
Subsequently, if a last name is selected in the list and it corresponds to only one person, the First name and Phone number fields will be automatically filled. However, if several people have the same name, only the corresponding first names will display in the first name list.
Adding an NBButton Validation Button The last point covered here explains how to define an action that will save the entered information and close the interface. If is also possible to close the interface without saving the information. 468
8 TrackBird Designer
To set up a function that validates the entered information and closes the window
1
Double-click
2
Move the object to the desired position, then define its properties as shown below.
on the NBDesigner button bar.
The type of action is btnWrite, which will save the data and close the window. The label on the command button is OK.
469
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
Position a second button (for the Cancel function), then define its properties as shown below.
The type of action is btnClose, which will close the window without saving the data. The label on the command button is Cancel. Note:
It is important not to confuse NBButton objects, which are primarily for performing actions on the interface, and NBDButton objects, which are for acting on the inventory data.
Adding an NBLabel Caption Now that the main interface structure has been set up for data entry, we can make the interface more user-friendly by putting a caption in front of each entry field and introductory text above.
To insert three captions 1
470
Double-click
three times.
8 TrackBird Designer
2
Then define the properties as shown below for the Last Name caption.
The caption text will be Last Name, aligned flush left on a transparent background. The name of the NBLabel object will be Caption_LAST_NAME. 3
Then create a new NBLabel object for the introductory text. The interface may look like this:
471
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Automatic Method An explanation of this second method, using the same example as that in the previous section, will show how much easier it is to use the automatic method to rapidly set up a personalized interface. Using this method, you can simply drag the TrackBird features from the TrackBird Structure window and drop them onto the Form. The system itself then determines the type of DataSet (Instance or Gloss) and the type of control object required, depending on whether it is linked to a glossary or not; it also sets the object parameters to create the link with the source (the glossary) and the target (the TrackBird features).
To automatically set up a personalized interface 1
Select a feature (e.g., Last name) and drag it onto the Form. An instance called DataSetGloss1 is automatically created, as is the field using an NBGloss object and all the properties in the Data, Glossary, and Parameters categories are set.
2
Now drag and drop the First Name and Phone Number features. The only thing left to do (if the user wishes) is set up the LookUp function in the Glossary category and insert the captions.
Saving the Project and Testing the Interface To save the interface project 1
In the File menu, click Save As. Or
Click
.
2
Indicate the project location and name (NDP file).
3
Click OK.
To test the interface 1
In the Tools menu, click Test. Or
Click 472
.
8 TrackBird Designer
2
If you did not specify a directory for the test, the system asks you to specify one. To ensure that the test is executed correctly and ensure that the knowledge bases in the collection directories are indeed those on which the interface is based, ASG recommends carrying out the test in the directory containing the local collector.
3
The interface is run and it is now possible to enter data.
Note:
On opening the first field’s drop list, the list of user names is displayed. While the list is still displayed, type the first letters of the required name. The system will automatically move to the position in the list with the names beginning with the entered letters. 4
Once all data has been entered, save the information by clicking OK. The window closes.
Checking the Entered Data in TrackBird Server When OK is clicked on the interface, the resulting file (with the NBM extension) is sent to the collection point linked to the collector (if you chose to use the collector directory for the interface test).
To check the data 1
Run TrackBird Server.
2
Select the Summary form in the Views menu. Or
Click the Views button and choose Summary form. 3
Click your workstation and go to the item corresponding to the information requested by the interface. 473
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The information just entered via the interface should be displayed.
Transferring the Interface to the Client Workstations Once the interface has been validated and the project has been saved, the interface can be transferred to the client workstations for completion by the users. If IP is used to collect inventory data from TrackBird client workstations under Windows, the interface file path must be specified via the TrackBird IP Administration interface. If IP is used to collect inventory data from Macintosh client workstations. If shared directory mode is used to collect inventory data, there are two steps in the transfer process. •
The interface must be updated in the collection points using TrackBird Designer by, from TrackBird Designer’s Tools menu, selecting Use The Update Collection Points to update the collection points.
•
The resident agent on each workstation picks up the interface in the collection points and transfers it back to the workstation.
Designer Objects This section presents each TrackBird Designer object in detail so that you can use them quickly and efficiently to design and set up your interfaces. As stated in the previous sections, over a dozen different objects may be used with TrackBird Designer. To ensure each object is fully understood, a separate section describes each object.
474
8 TrackBird Designer
Form Object Description The Form is the main object in TrackBird Designer because an interface cannot be created without it. It is the interface window and all other objects are placed on the Form. When a new Designer project is opened, the Form is automatically created with its default properties. To simplify creating the interface, an NBDataSource object is created at the same time. It is therefore unnecessary to set parameters for the DataSource in order to link it to the Form. It is, however, still possible to create another NBDataSource on the same Form if necessary. Finally, you can view the properties of the Form in the Object properties window, which is positioned by default to the left of the screen.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Border style
Type of border: BsDialog: identical to that of a dialog BsNone: no borders BsSingle: single-line, fine border BsSizeable: standard border for a resizable window.
Caption
Name of the window displayed in the title bar. 475
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
Hint
Hint displayed for the window.
Icon
Window icon displayed in the upper left corner.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer displayed during passage over the window.
[+] Behavior Close button
Indicates the button for window closing.
Window state
Window display mode: WsNormal: standard WsMinimize: displayed minimized in the task bar WsMaximize: occupies the entire screen.
[+] Border icons BiHelp
Presence of the Help ? button.
BiMaximize
Presence of the window maximize button.
BiMinimize
Presence of the window minimize button.
BiSystemMenu
Presence of the control-menu button.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the window, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the window, Y position.
Height
Height of the window.
Width
Width of the window.
Position
Position on the screen: PoDefault: use the coordinates input by the user PoDefaultPosOnly: maintain the X and Y positions, whatever the window size PoDefaultSizeOnly: maintain the size of the window, whatever its position PoDesign: position as defined in Designer PoCenterScreen: centered on the screen, not taking into account X and Y, but maintaining the size.
476
8 TrackBird Designer
Property
Description
[+] Data Active
Used only if the object has been configured for a Database connection.
[+] Other Connection type
Designer can implement two types of connections but currently only one is accepted: the Inventory File connection mode.
Display the system Enables or disables displaying of the system glossaries, notably for glossaries linking the NBDataSetGLoss objects (e.g. the software glossary, etc.). [+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
Example of Use
Above is an example of a simple interface using a dialog type of form in which the only way to close the window is by clicking OK. In this example, the user must enter their user code at the end of the inventory procedure for inclusion in the result files.
TrackBird Data Access Objects NBDataSource Description As stated in previous sections, it is not necessary to define this object because it is automatically created, either when a new Designer project is launched or when a field is dragged from the TrackBird structure and dropped on the window of an interface being developed. However, it is nonetheless worthwhile reviewing the properties of this object if it must be defined at a later time.
477
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Any number of NBDataSource objects can be created in a given interface. An NBDataSource is directly linked to the Form and can therefore be used with any other object defined on a lower hierarchical level (NBDataSetGLoss objects, tab sheets, panels, etc.). An NBDataSource is used only in conjunction with other Designer objects. It serves to establish the link with an external data source (e.g., an inventory file), thus enabling the other objects to read the data source. For further information on links between Designer objects, see the section entitled “Available Objects” on page 457.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Data Active
Used only if the object has been configured for a Database connection.
[+] Other Connection type
Designer can implement two types of connections but currently only one is accepted: Inventory File connection mode.
[+] Parameters
478
Display the system glossaries
Enables or disables display of the system glossaries, notably for linking the NBDataSetGLoss objects (e.g. the software glossary, etc.).
Name
Name of the object.
Parameters
Reserved for future use.
8 TrackBird Designer
Example of Use
Example of the properties for the MyDataSource object, linked to the inventory files of the workstations.
NBDataSetInstance Description This type of object is used by the interface to ask the user to manually type data linked to a TrackBird item instance, i.e., without making use of a glossary. With TrackBird, you can create any number of instances for a given item, for example if you wish to track the history of the item. Consider the example of an item used to store the data on technical maintenance on the workstations. An instance should be created each time servicing is carried out. By linking the given item to an NBDataSetInstance object, this function is easy to set up. Whatever the item for which you wish to have users input data, it is necessary to use the NBDataSetInstance object to link the entry field to the data source.
479
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Properties Property
Description
[+] Data Active
Used only if the object has been configured for a Database connection.
Data source
Name of the linked DataSource.
[+] Parameters Item
Indicates the item to which the object is linked.
Name
Name of the object.
Station name
Reserved for future use.
Example of Use
Above is an example of an NBDataSetInstance object linked to the previously created DataSource and pointing to the Location item in the TrackBird structure.
NBDataSetGloss Description A DataSetGloss object has properties similar to a DataSetInstance but can be used to link a DataSource to entry fields for items linked to a glossary. In this case, the entry fields are generally of the drop type (combo box) and offer a list for selection. If a DataSetGloss object is used, it is not necessary to use a DataSetInstance. 480
8 TrackBird Designer
When features linked to a glossary are dragged from the TrackBird structure and dropped directly onto the interface window, an NBDataSetGloss object and a drop list are automatically created.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Data Active
Used only if the object has been configured for a Database connection.
Data source
Name of the linked DataSource.
[+] Parameters Glossary
Name of the linked glossary. The item is also implicitly included in this link.
Name
Name of the object.
Example of Use
481
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Above is an example of a DataSetGloss object linked to a TrackBird glossary called Locations. The glossary was previously linked in TrackBird Server to the Location item in the TrackBird structure and so the link with the item is automatic. It is therefore not necessary to create a DataSetInstance.
NBEditor Description This object enables interface users to manually enter an element of information linked to a TrackBird feature. It interacts exclusively with a DataSetInstance, not with a DataSetGloss. An NBEditor object may also be used to display information from inventory files that is not to be modified by the interface. It may be linked to any feature in the TrackBird structure and may serve, for example, to display the configuration of a station (processor, model, etc.).
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Border style
Type of border: BsNone: no borders BsSingle: single-line, fine border.
Color
Background color of the object.
[+] Font
482
Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
8 TrackBird Designer
Property Size
Description Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hide selection
Masks the entry field.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Auto select
Determines whether the field contents are highlighted when the focus is on the field.
Auto size
Determines whether the size of the object must be adjusted to the size of the contents.
Case
Case of the entered data: EcNormal: the case remains as typed EcLowerCase: all data is set to lower case EcUpperCase: all data is set to upper case.
Enabled
If the field requires an entry, it must be enabled. Once enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse.
Required
Determines whether the field may be left empty or must be filled in.
Visible
Determines whether the field is visible or not.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object. 483
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
[+] Data Feature
Feature linked to the object.
DataSet
DataSet linked to the object, if there are a number of DataSet objects. If only one feature is selected, it is not necessary to indicate the DataSet.
[+] Input Error message
Message displayed if the input data is not correct.
Input mask
Function used to facilitate data entry. Function
Description
A or a
A-Z, a-z and 0-9
L or l
A-Z, a-z
c
Any character
0
0-9
#
0-9 and minus numbers
\
Following character is considered as
All the following characters must be in upper case
!
Remove the spaces
Mask character
Character that must be used when an input mask is imposed on the object.
Max length
Maximum length of the input data.
Read only
Determines whether the field is set to read-only mode or not.
Type of character Type of characters that may be used during input: AllCharacters: all characters may be used Alphabetic: no numbers, no symbols Alphanumeric: numbers and letters Numeric: only numbers. [+] Other ctl3D
484
The object is displayed in 2D or 3D.
8 TrackBird Designer
Property
Description
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
Example of Use
Above is an example of an entry field, limited to numeric characters and with a mask to separate the last four characters.
NBGloss Description Similar to an NBEditor object, an NBGloss object is used to enter data in the interface, but using a data glossary and in the form of a drop-down list (combo box). This type of object linked to a glossary makes it easier to enter data in the TrackBird interface, while ensuring that the input complies with the expected data. It is of course possible to set object properties such that the user may enter data not found in the list, if the desired data is not in the glossary.
485
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Color
Background color of the object.
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Enabled
If the field requires an entry, it must be enabled. Once enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse.
Required
Determines whether the field may be left empty or must be filled in.
Style
Determines the properties of the field contents: Read only: no entry is possible Modifiable: entry is possible Simple list: list opens automatically when the focus is on the object.
Visible
Determines whether the field is visible or not.
[+] Coordinates Left
486
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
8 TrackBird Designer
Property
Description
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Data Feature
Feature linked to the object.
DataSet
DataSet linked to the object, if there are a number of DataSet objects. If only one feature is selected, it is not necessary to indicate the DataSet.
[+] Glossary Contents
List of values in the designated column (not used in this version).
Field
Glossary column linked to the object.
Glossary
Glossary linked to the object.
LookUp
Name of the linked parent object. This function enables upward-looking selection of the columns in a glossary (e.g. site, building, floor, etc.).
Sorted
This function sorts the data in increasing order in the list.
[+] Input Error message
Message displayed if the input data is not correct.
[+] Other Ctl3D
The object is displayed in 2D or 3D.
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
487
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example of Use
Above is an example of an NBGloss object in which the user can rapidly select his or her location in one of the company buildings from the predefined list.
NBDbButton Description An NBDbButton object performs an action on the data in the TrackBird inventory file. For example, it can be used to create or delete an item instance in the inventory file. The potential usefulness of this object is even more apparent if we use the previous example concerning notification of technical servicing on a workstation. It is assumed that a Servicing item was created in TrackBird, containing the Servicing date, Servicing agent, Type of servicing and Comments features. If the user wishes to maintain a servicing history, each event must be noted in a different occurrence of the item. In the personalized interface, these occurrences must be created by a button that launches a new instance of the Servicing item. The example will illustrate how to implement this function.
488
8 TrackBird Designer
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Caption
Text displayed on the button.
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Action
Action that the button must perform on the item instance: DbCancel: cancel the data input DbDelete: delete the instance DbNew: create a new instance of the item DbNext: go to the next instance DbPrev: go back to the previous instance DbValidate: confirm the data input.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
489
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Data DataSet
DataSet linked to the button. Determines the data on which the action will be carried out.
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
Example of Use
Above is an example of an interface displaying the list of software in a workstation’s inventory file, with two buttons, Previous and Next, for list navigation. The OK button is an NBButton. The list was made using an NBGrid.
NBGrid Description Use of a grid in the personalized interface can be very useful in displaying TrackBird items with a number of instances, such as the list of installed software programs or local and network disk partitions that may be accessed by the workstation. This is because a grid lists together all aspects of an item and makes it possible to see each occurrence of the item at a glance. Like the other objects used for data entry, it can be used to input information, for example technical servicing information. However, if the item is linked to a glossary it is preferable to use a drop list (NBGloss). 490
8 TrackBird Designer
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window. AlClient: aligns with the entire window. AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window. AlNone: no alignment with the window. AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window. AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
491
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Data DataSet
DataSet linked to the grid. Determines the data on which the action (list creation) will be carried out.
Fields
In the selected DataSet, the list of the fields that will constitute the columns. Double-click the data field of the property to select them.
[+] Input Read only
Determines whether the list can be used to enter or modify data.
[+] Parameters Name
Example of Use
492
Name of the object.
8 TrackBird Designer
Above is an example of an interface displaying the list of software in a workstation’s inventory file. The DataSetInstance object is linked to the Software item in the TrackBird structure tree and the Software editor, Software and Version columns were selected for the display.
Designer Interface Objects NBButton Description The NBButton object is used to implement action on the interface itself rather than on the inventory data. This simple object, which is displayed as a standard Windows button, can be used for two types of action. The first validates and saves the interface data, then closes the interface (i.e., an OK button). The second cancels any modifications made and closes the interface (i.e., a Cancel button).
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Caption
Caption.
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
493
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior ActionType
Action to be carried out: BtWrite: save data and close the interface BtClose: close the interface without saving.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Other ConfirmDlg
Text, if applicable, for a dialog box requesting confirmation. If no text is provided, no confirmation is requested.
[+] Parameters Name
494
Name of the object.
8 TrackBird Designer
Example of Use
Above is an example of an interface used to modify the list of software in the inventory file. The OK and Cancel buttons are set up in the interface and confirmation is requested.
495
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
NBImage Description To further personalize your TrackBird interfaces, Designer may be used to set up a logo or an image. For example, you can place your company’s logo on the TrackBird interface. Using the NBImage object, you can also define a URL to which the user is sent if they click the image. For example, the URL might be a page on an intranet, explaining what you want the user to do with the interface.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window AlClient: aligns with the entire window AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window AlNone: no alignment with the window AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
Hint 496
Hint displayed for the object.
8 TrackBird Designer
Property Pointer
Description Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Auto size
Determines whether the image automatically has the same dimensions as the source image.
Enabled
Determines whether the object is enabled or not. When enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse (notably for the URL option).
Visible
Determines whether the image is visible or not.
[+] Image Center
Centers the image in the frame set up in the interface, if the frame is larger than the source image.
Image
Name and location of the source file containing the image.
Stretch
Automatically stretches the image so that it fills the frame of the NBImage object. Caution, this may deform the image if the proportions are modified.
[+] Other URL
URL to which the user is sent if the image is clicked.
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
497
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example of Use
Above is an example of an interface asking the user to enter their user code. The company logo occupies the top part of the interface.
NBLabel Description The NBLabel object is the easiest of all Designer objects to use. It is used to create captions for entry fields or to insert introductory text at the head of the interface. Despite this object’s simplicity, it is nonetheless possible to assign a large number of properties.
Properties
Property [+] Appearance
498
Description
8 TrackBird Designer
Property Alignment
Description Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window. AlClient: aligns with the entire window. AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window. AlNone: no alignment with the window. AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window. AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
Caption
Text of the label.
Color
Background color of the object.
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Justification
Text justification in the object frame: TaCenter: centered TaLeftJustify: flush left TaRightJustify: flush right.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
Transparent
Determines whether the background of the object is transparent or has the color specified for the Color property.
[+] Behavior 499
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
Auto size
Determines whether the object automatically adapts to the dimensions of the text.
Enabled
Determines whether the object is enabled or not. When enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse (notably for the URL option).
Object
Designates the object to receive the focus when the user presses the short-cut key indicated in the caption.
Visible
Determines whether the object is visible or not.
WordWrap
Determines whether long text shifts to the next line or the frame expands to accept the text.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Other URL
URL to which the user is sent if the object is activated.
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
Example of Use
The example above shows the result of adding a label containing the text Enter your identification number: above the entry field in which the user code must be typed.
500
8 TrackBird Designer
NBPanel Description The NBPanel object is very useful for creating more complex interfaces, notably those with properties enabling the interface size and shape to be modified. If it is possible to modify the interface and nothing is done to protect the objects making up the interface, some objects may simply disappear (particularly if the interface is reduced in size). To avoid this problem, one or more NBPanel objects that will act as parent objects for the other interface objects (e.g., NBEditor, NBGloss, NBGrid, etc.) must be set up. In this way, if the size of the interface is reduced the system will automatically insert scroll bars for accessing all objects contained in the pane.
The image above shows two adjacent NBPanel objects in a customized window. So that they remain correctly positioned relative to each other, these two panels have different alignment properties. The first is set to AlTop and the second to AlClient. As a result, the first is aligned along the top of the window and the second occupies the remainder of the client window (i.e., from the bottom of the first pane to the bottom of the window).
501
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window AlClient: aligns with the entire window AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window AlNone: no alignment with the window AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
Bevel (inner)
Determines the desired 3D effect: BvLowered: lowered effect BvNone: no effect (2D) BvRaised: raised effect.
Bevel (outer)
Determines the desired 3D effect: BvLowered: lowered effect BvNone: no effect (2D) BvRaised: raised effect.
Bevel width
Width of the object border.
Border style
Type of object border: BsNone: no border BsSingle: single-line, fine border.
Caption
Caption for the object.
Color
Background color of the object.
[+] Font
502
Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
8 TrackBird Designer
Property
Description
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Enabled
Determines whether the pane and all the contained objects are enabled or not. When enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse.
Visible
Determines whether the object is visible or not.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Other Ctl3D
Determines whether the object is displayed in 2D or 3D.
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
503
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example of Use
The example above shows the interface with panels containing data grids whose appearance changes depending on the window size. In this example, there are two adjacent panels that remain correctly positioned relative to each other as indicated in the beginning of this section. The Software item in the TrackBird structure tree was placed in the first pane and the Drive item was placed in the second. To ensure the grid objects change size and shape in step with their respective panels, their Alignment property was set to AlClient. Because the NBPanel objects are the parents for the grids, the panels determine the size and shape of the grids. Change the size of the interface (in Test mode; see “To test the interface” on page 472) and note the appearance of the scroll bars and the dynamic modifications in the shape of the grids.
NBGroupBox Description The NBGroupBox object is very similar to an NBPanel. It reacts the same to changes in interface size and shape but also offers the option of assigning a title to the group of objects to make the interface easier for users to understand.
504
8 TrackBird Designer
In a future version of the software, it will also be possible to use NBGroupBox objects with new objects in TrackBird Designer, such as option buttons and check boxes.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window. AlClient: aligns with the entire window. AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window. AlNone: no alignment with the window. AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window. AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
Caption
Caption for the object.
Color
Background color of the object.
505
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Enabled
Determines whether the group box and all the contained objects are enabled or not. When enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse.
Visible
Determines whether the object is visible or not.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Other Ctl3D
Determines whether the object is displayed in 2D or 3D.
[+] Parameters Name
506
Name of the object.
8 TrackBird Designer
Example of Use
The example above shows two NBGroupBox objects, the first containing a TrackBird list of software while the second containing three entry fields. Note the presentation of the NBGroupBox objects with a title, a more attractive solution than a simple pane. Also, the list adapts to the size of the window with scroll bars.
NBPageControl Description The NBPageControl object is an indispensable tool if you wish to set up interfaces designed to manage large quantities of information. It creates tab sheets to organize the entry fields or the inventory data to be displayed. Similar to the other objects, an NBPageControl object may be included in a pane or a group box. For interfaces requiring detailed presentation of data, it is even possible to set up several series of tab sheets.
507
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Note:
To create successive tab sheets, simply double-click the NBPageControl object.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window. AlClient: aligns with the entire window. AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window. AlNone: no alignment with the window. AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window. AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
508
8 TrackBird Designer
Property
Description
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Orientation
Sets the position of the tab-sheet names relative to the object: OrUp: above the tab sheet OrDown: below the tab sheet.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Active page
Determines which tab sheet is displayed by default when the interface is opened.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
509
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example of Use The example below shows an interface in which the top part, which is placed in a group box, comprises three tab sheets. The Software tab displays the list of software.
The Disk partitions tab displays the list of disk partitions that the workstation can access.
510
8 TrackBird Designer
The Workstation tab displays the workstation brand name and model.
511
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Note:
The bottom part of the interface does not change each time the user goes on to another tab sheet, because it is placed in a second group box.
NBUrl Description The NBUrl object is similar to the URL property of the NBLabel object, but differs because the URL itself is the caption whereas for the NBLabel object, the URL is masked by the caption of the label.
Properties Property
Description
[+] Appearance Alignment
Determines the alignment of the object with the active window or pane, if the size of the window can be modified: AlBottom: aligns with the bottom of the window. AlClient: aligns with the entire window. AlLeft: aligns with the left border of the window. AlNone: no alignment with the window. AlRight: aligns with the right border of the window. AlTop: aligns with the top of the window.
512
Caption
Caption for the object.
Color
Background color of the object.
8 TrackBird Designer
Property
Description
[+] Font Color
Color of the text.
Name
Name of the font.
Size
Size of the font.
[+] Style FsBold
Bold.
FsItalic
Italic.
FsStrikeOut
Crossed out.
FsUnderlined
Underlined.
Hint
Hint displayed for the object.
Pointer
Type of mouse pointer.
[+] Behavior Auto size
Determines whether the object automatically adapts to the dimensions of the text.
Enabled
Determines whether the object is enabled or not. When enabled, it reacts to the keyboard and the mouse.
Visible
Determines whether the object is visible or not.
WordWrap
Determines whether long text shifts to the next line or the frame expands to accept the text.
[+] Coordinates Left
Upper, left corner of the object, X position.
Top
Upper, left corner of the object, Y position.
Height
Height of the object.
Width
Width of the object.
[+] Other URL
Target URL. 513
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Property
Description
[+] Parameters Name
Name of the object.
Example of Use The example below contains a URL link to www.trackbird.com. To access the site, simply click the underlined text; your web browser accesses the web site.
514
Chapter 9:
TrackBird SNMP
9 SNMP at a Glance Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol that simplifies network administration. Each SNMP device has a software Agent (which we shall call the SNMP Agent in the rest of this document) that provides status or configuration information on the device via the SNMP protocol. SNMP devices may, for example, be network printers or print servers, routers, intelligent hubs, Unix systems, etc. The Management Information Base (MIB) file is a text file that uses a specific syntax to describe the units of information that the SNMP Agent will provide. This file is provided by the manufacturer of each SNMP device. The information is contained in a structure tree in which element of the tree is identified by a unique identifier (its OID).
515
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
How TrackBird SNMP is Organized SNMP information is collected by a special program: the TrackBird SNMP Collector. This collector functions completely independently of the TrackBird inventory clients, interrogating the SNMP Agents and storing the collected information in the related inventory client’s collection point.
The TrackBird SNMP Collector can use the same files as the TrackBird inventory client (general.opt and NETBIRD.cfg). It uses an additional file (snmp.ini) to specify the IP address ranges that must be examined to find the SNMP Agents. For each SNMP Agent detected, two files are created (xxxxxxxx.nbc and xxxxxxxx.nbn, where xxxxxxxx is the SNMP Agent’s IP address in hexadecimal). Each element of MIB structure tree information linked to a feature in the TrackBird structure tree is collected in the xxxxxxxx.nbc file. The network administrator, after importing the collected inventory data, can consult these features to find out the corresponding SNMP information. This information is collected in the xxxxxxxx.nbn file. The links between a TrackBird feature and a feature in the MIB structure tree are made in TrackBird Server and are saved in the file Snmp.opt. The device on which the TrackBird SNMP Collector is installed must be a 32-bit device (Windows 9x, Windows NT or later) and be able to detect all the SNMP Agents (i.e., positive Ping). If the SNMP Agents are spread over several independent subnetworks, a TrackBird SNMP Collector must be installed on each subnetwork.
516
9 TrackBird SNMP
Configuring the Collector Client before Inventory Collection Before you can use TrackBird SNMP, you must configure the TrackBird SNMP collectors using the CONFIGSNMP.EXE program. This program generates a file called SNMP.INI that is used by the TrackBird SNMP collector. The configuration program is launched by selecting Windows Start Menu ` Programs ` TrackBird SNMP and then executing SNMP Client configuration. A dialog containing these four configuration settings tabs: •
“Options Tab”
•
“IP Ranges Tab” on page 518
•
“Frequency Tab” on page 520
•
“Log Tab” on page 521
Each of these pages of configuration information is described below. When you have set all configuration parameters, click OK to generate the SNMP.INI file and quit the configuration tool, or click Cancel to quit the configuration tool without modifying the configuration.
Options Tab
The configuration information displayed by clicking the Options tab is used to set the parameters for SNMP data transmission to the collection point.
517
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Note:
The methods used to administer an SNMP collection point are identical to those for a standard collection point. Set-up and updating are also identical. For further information, see “Collection Point Administration” on page 44. The Options tab contains the following elements. Field
Description
Use collection point
Specifies whether TrackBird SNMP is linked to a collection point. If the Use Collection Point option is not checked, the data collected on the SNMP machines is not sent to the collection point and so is not transmitted to the TrackBird server.
Collection point field
If the Use Collection Point option is activated, specifies the collection point. To select the appropriate collection point, click the button to the right of the drop list button to display the Select Collection Point dialog, and select the collection point.
Get the full SNMP agent If the Get The Full SNMP Agent Tree option is not checked, only tree SNMP items linked with a TrackBird item are transmitted to the TrackBird server. If the option is checked, the entire MIB structure tree is collected and transmitted.
If you have set the configuration parameters on all tabs, click OK to generate the SNMP.INI file and quit the configuration tool, or click Cancel to quit the configuration tool without modifying the configuration.
IP Ranges Tab
518
9 TrackBird SNMP
The configuration information displayed by clicking the IP Ranges tab sets the conditions for TrackBird SNMP Collector polling the SNMP agents. Specify each IP address range as described below: •
In the Start box, enter the lowest IP address in the range, typing values between 0 and 255 for each of the four bytes.
•
In the End box, enter the highest IP address in the range, typing values between 0 and 255 for each of the four bytes.
•
Add the selected IP address range to the list by clicking
•
To remove an existing range from the list, select the IP address range in the list and then click
.
.
•
To temporarily deactivate the selected IP address range, click the Enabled check box to deselect the option.
•
To set the following advanced parameters, click Advanced Parameters to display the following information.
519
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
The following additional fields are displayed. Field
Description
Use default parameters
When this option is checked, a default TTL time delay (5000 ms and four attempts maximum) is run. To set other values, deselect this option
TTL (ms)
This time delay sets the maximum wait time for a response from an IP address
Retries
Sets the number of attempts at accessing an IP address before declaring that there is no SNMP agent at the address (or that the agent is not operational)
Community
Name of the Community to be used to access the SNMP agent information
Port
Port number used by the protocol
If you have set the configuration parameters on all tabs, click OK to generate the SNMP.INI file and quit the configuration tool, or click Cancel to quit the configuration tool without modifying the configuration.
Frequency Tab
The configuration information displayed by clicking the Frequency tab defines how often collection is carried out.
520
9 TrackBird SNMP
The Frequency tab contains the following information. Field
Description
Collection frequency
Determines the overall collection frequency, i.e. Manual, Hourly, Daily or Weekly.
Frequency
If the collection frequency is expressed in hours, this parameter sets the interval between two collections.
Every... Hour(s)... Minute(s) At
If the collection frequency is expressed in days or weeks, this parameter sets the collection time. Mon...Tues... Sun
Authorized times
If the collection frequency is expressed in weeks, these check boxes define on which days collection is carried out. This parameter, available only if the collection frequency is expressed in hours, is used to limit the period during which collection is carried out.
If you have set the configuration parameters on all tabs, click OK to generate the SNMP.INI file and quit the configuration tool, or click Cancel to quit the configuration tool without modifying the configuration.
Log Tab
The contents of the log file and buttons used to save or empty the file display when you click the Log tab. The contents of the log file increase with each collection. To save the log as the text file NBSNMP.DAT in C:\TBSNMP, click Save. 521
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To empty the log, click Empty. This should be carried out periodically in order to purge the log to reduce its size. Note:
You should always save the log before emptying it. If you have set the configuration parameters on all tabs, click OK to generate the SNMP.INI file and quit the configuration tool, or click Cancel to quit the configuration tool without modifying the configuration.
Saving the Collection Client Configuration Information •
To save the SNMP client configuration information contained in the TrackBird SNMP Client Configuration application in the current configuration file, from the File menu, select Save.
•
To save the SNMP client configuration information contained in the TrackBird SNMP Client Configuration application as a new configuration file, from the File menu, select Save As to display a dialog. In the dialog, define the location in which you wish to save the configuration file, together with its name (the default name is SNMP.INI). To save the configuration file, click Save; to cancel saving the configuration information, click Cancel.
Opening an Existing Collection Client Configuration File To open an existing configuration file
522
1
If the TrackBird SNMP Client Configuration application is not already running, launch the application by selecting the Windows Start Menu ` Programs ` TrackBird SNMP ` SNMP Client configuration.
2
From the File menu, select Open to display a dialog. In the dialog, select the configuration file you want to open (the default configuration file is SNMP.INI).
3
Click Open.
9 TrackBird SNMP
Configuring the SNMP Base Once installation of the SNMP Collector software is complete and the collection client has been configured, you must configure the required links between the information returned by the SNMP Collector and the TrackBird structure tree fields. A certain number of such links already exist by default. Because of certain MIB features and as MIB can contain over 1,000 elements of information, TrackBird Server’s Administration menu contains a dedicated module called SNMP Administration.
Selecting Links Links between SNMP fields and TrackBird structure tree fields are created using the SNMP Administration command in TrackBird Server’s Administration menu. There are two possibilities that must be carefully evaluated to ensure the consistency of the resulting queries. The table below presents the advantages and the disadvantages of both methods. Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Create a complete SNMP Workstation and network data structure in the TrackBird are not mixed, i.e. there is no structure tree interference between the two
Queries covering both inventory types (e.g., the list of the IP addresses used) cannot be run
Use the existing structure tree for the workstations
It is difficult to distinguish points common to both a workstation and a switch, for example, meaning it is not always easy to decide where to position a MIB field in the TrackBird structure tree, which is essentially intended for PCs
Queries on features appearing in both the workstation inventory and the active network device inventory can be run
Note:
In most cases, users decide to use a mixture of both methods. For example, the IP protocol item is common both to workstations and to active network devices, simplifying IP address range management. Data that does not appear in the standard TrackBird structure tree, on the other hand, is isolated by creating a second structure tree (e.g. a switch routing table containing the port number, IP address, MAC address, and port baud rate).
523
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To add a link 1
Launch the TrackBird Server interface by selecting the Windows Start menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Server.
2
If the SNMP Administration screen is not already displayed, from the Administration menu, select SNMP Administration to display it.
The SNMP Administration screen is divided into these three zones: •
The left zone displays the existing TrackBird structure tree. If you wish to separate workstation fields from MIB fields, you must create a new structure tree using TrackBird Server’s Field administration functions.
•
The middle zone displays the MIB structure, beginning with the generic term ISO.
•
The right zone displays all available information on the selected section of the MIB structure. To obtain maximum information in this zone, you must import the manufacturer MIBs from the network devices.
To link an MIB field with a TrackBird structure tree field
524
1
Expand the MIB structure tree until you find the desired item. In this example, we will use ISO/ORG/DOD/INTERNET/MGMT/MIB-2/SYSTEM/SYSDESCR. This key contains a description of the type of active device (e.g., CISCO ROUTER 1600 SERIES). The description is displayed in the third zone of the screen, which contains the SNMP data.
2
To store this value in the Configuration item’s Model feature within the CPU category, open the TrackBird structure tree so the Model feature is visible.
9 TrackBird SNMP
3
Click the Model characteristic in the TrackBird structure tree and drag it to the SysDescr field in the MIB structure tree.
A confirmation dialog displays.
4
To confirm link creation, click Yes; to cancel link creation, click No.
The link is stored in a reference table that is used by the SNMP Collector when collecting inventory information.
To display the links list or the TrackBird structure tree The two structure trees (TrackBird and MIB) are displayed by default. You can also choose to mask the TrackBird structure and display the list of stored links instead. 1
Launch the TrackBird Server interface by selecting the Windows Start menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Server.
2
If the SNMP Administration screen is not already displayed, from the Administration menu, select SNMP Administration to display the SNMP Administration screen.
525
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
526
3
Click to display the links list. (When the option is activated, the button is boxed in blue.) The list of stored links displays in the left zone, rather than the TrackBird structure tree, as in the following example.
4
To display the TrackBird structure tree, click . (When the option is activated, the button is boxed in blue.) The TrackBird structure tree displays in the left zone, rather than the list of stored links, as in the following example.
9 TrackBird SNMP
Once you have added all the required links, you must generate files to apply the changes for the next collection.
To propagate the changes for the next collection 1
Select Administration ` Collection Point.
2
If not already done, add the collection point which corresponds to that specified in the interface “Configuration of SNMP collection.”
3
Display the properties of this collection point and click OK. The files GENERAL.OPT, PTCOL.OPT, SNMP.OPT are created in this folder.
4
Launch the collection again and upon next import, the selected features will be displayed.
To delete a link 1
If the TrackBird Server interface is not already running, launch the interface by selecting the Windows Start Menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Server.
2
If the SNMP Administration screen is not already displayed, from the Administration menu, select SNMP Administration to display the SNMP Administration screen.
3
To delete a link if the corresponding values are no longer transmitted, select it in the links list and then click
.
Note:
No confirmation is requested. If you delete a link by error, you must recreate it.
To browse the links If required, you can progress sequentially through the stored TrackBird/MIB links, both in the links list and in the TrackBird structure tree. 1
If the TrackBird Server interface is not already running, launch the interface by selecting the Windows Start Menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Server.
2
If the SNMP Administration screen is not already displayed, from the Administration menu, select SNMP Administration to display the SNMP Administration screen.
527
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
To move to the next link, click
.
Or
To move to the previous link, click
.
Importing a Manufacturer MIB Some network devices inventoried by SNMP agents may have a specific SNMP MIB or a MIB that contains items that are not in the standard MIB supplied with TrackBird SNMP. In this case, you must import the MIB supplied by the SNMP MIB manufacturer, using the utility program provided with TrackBird SNMP.
To import a manufacturer MIB
528
1
Launch the utility program by clicking the selecting the Windows Start Menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Server ` MIB file import utility, which is stored in the TrackBird Server directory as SNMPIMPORT.EXE.
2
When the MIB File Import utility displays its welcome screen, click Next.
9 TrackBird SNMP
3
Select the TrackBird database in the drop list and then click Next.
The import module dialog contains these elements (presented here in logical order of use). Field
Description
MIB File Path and name of the MIB file to be imported. Click to display a directory browser dialog. Select the MIB file and then click Open. Lower zone of the dialog
This zone displays the SNMP objects structure described by the MIB. The box displays in the right side of the dialog providing information on the item selected in the structure tree in the left box. You can therefore review the MIB’s information before importing the file.
OID
Number uniquely identifying the item among all possible MIBs.
Description
This section contains the text of the Description in the MIB. It provides information on the SNMP item’s contents or use.
Reference
This section contains the value of the Reference parameter in the MIB.
When you have selected the required MIB file, click Finish to import the information contained in the MIB into the TrackBird database.
529
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Switch Administration To set switches 1
If the TrackBird Server interface is not already running, launch the interface by selecting the Windows Start Menu ` Programs ` TrackBird Suite ` TrackBird Server.
2
From the TrackBird Server interface’s Administration menu, select Switches.
The Switches screen displays all ports of the switch selected in the Switch tree. It shows which ports are free and which are busy together with information on which workstations are linked to them, each identified by its MAC address. 3
To display the physical location of each port, click the Configuration tab. Note:
To collect inventory information on switches you must first set up and execute SNMP collection of inventory data as detailed in “Configuring the Collector Client before Inventory Collection” on page 517.
530
9 TrackBird SNMP
4
For example, we have selected Port N° 8 (highlighted in red on the following diagram). We know the location of this switch so we can fill in the Site, Building, Floor and Office features.
5
To update the information contained in the TrackBird structure tree, click . (By clicking the Station(s) tab you can see that all workstations linked to this port contain the location data just entered.)
531
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
532
TrackBird Gateway
Chapter 10:
10 The TrackBird Gateway tool provides an interface between databases in different formats such as TrackBird, Interbase, Oracle, SQL, and Access. It can be used for many database interfacing tasks, such as updating an asset management database with information from another database, copying data from one database to another when changing to a different asset management system (when upsizing, for example), or simply updating a set of data records in an asset management database. Although TrackBird Gateway has been designed as an add-on module to the TrackBird Asset Management system it can equally be used separately, in conjunction with other database and asset management systems. TrackBird Gateway provides a convenient way of defining then performing a series of processes to manipulate field data. Each series of processes is stored in editable binary form as a Gateway script. You can create and save as many scripts as you want; TrackBird Gateway adds the suffix .GWS to the name of each script you create. Some examples of TrackBird Gateway’s use are illustrated on the following pages. Example 1:
Example 2:
533
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example 3:
Basics TrackBird Gateway provides a convenient way of defining then performing a series of processes to manipulate field data. Each series of processes is stored in editable binary form as a Gateway script. You can create and name as many scripts as you want; TrackBird Gateway adds the suffix .GWS to each script’s name. TrackBird Gateway can use any of these methods to manipulate database fields:
534
•
Mapping their contents directly into destination table fields
•
Transforming their contents using concatenation, VBScript processing or data dictionary based translation before updating destination table fields
10 TrackBird Gateway
•
Updating selected records’ fields simply with constant values [enclosed in double quotes ('' '')].
Several tables can be merged into a single table if required, by using a specific field to define the various source tables.
Gateway Screen TrackBird Gateway displays its functions and information in a simple-to-use way very similar to Microsoft Outlook 2000 and later, and other latest-generation software. The Gateway screen includes these screen elements: •
“Menus” (below)
•
“Toolbars” (below)
•
“Left Pane” (below)
•
“Data Sources/Destinations Structure Tree” on page 536
•
“Information Pane” on page 536
•
“Status Bar” on page 536
•
“Contextual Menus” on page 536
Menus The TrackBird Gateway menu bar contains a series of menus, each containing a selection of related commands. All menu command functions are duplicated by toolbar buttons, left pane buttons, or contextual menu commands (displayed by right-clicking). Each menu is detailed in “Menus” on page 536.
Toolbars Each toolbar contains command buttons. Each toolbar button provides a shortcut to a frequently used task or operation. TrackBird Gateway’s toolbars are detailed in “Global Options” on page 538.
Left Pane TrackBird Gateway’s left pane displays one of two or more button sets used to select different aspects of the Gateway software. 535
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Clicking the rectangular gray block labeled Options displays general parameters relating to the running of Gateway scripts; clicking another block displays that set of general, source and destination information for a specific database connection. (The selected database settings set’s name always appears directly above the left pane.)
Data Sources/Destinations Structure Tree The structure tree is displayed only when Data Sources or Destinations is selected in the left pane, and shows the Data Source or Destination structure for the selected set of database settings.
Information Pane The information pane displays information on the button clicked in the left pane (and in the structure tree, when Data Sources or Destinations is selected in the structure tree). The different items of information displayed in this pane are detailed individually later.
Status Bar The status bar contains a button to display a window showing processing progress.
Contextual Menus Contextual menus containing commands relating directly to the current situation (commands to add destinations, rows and transformations when users are editing destination information, for example) can be displayed in most parts of TrackBird Gateway by right-clicking the screen area for that situation (the vertical pane listing all existing destinations, rows and transformations in this example).
Menus File Menu The File menu contains the following commands:
536
Command
Description
New
Creates a new set of database script settings
10 TrackBird Gateway
Command
Description
Open
Opens an existing set of database script settings
Save
Saves the currently-displayed database script settings
Save as...
Saves and names the currently-displayed set of database script settings
Exit
Exits the TrackBird Gateway program
Edit Menu The Edit menu contains the following commands: Command
Result
Add Database
Adds a new set of database script settings in the left pane
Refresh
Refreshes the currently-selected database script settings to show the latest changes
Delete Database
Deletes the database script settings selected in the left pane
Action Menu The Action menu contains the following commands: Command
Result
Execute
Runs the currently-selected Gateway script
Stop
Halts the currently-running database script
Test
Tests the database script without updating the destination data
Show/Hide Details
Displays or closes a window displaying processing progress details
537
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Options Menu The Options menu contains the following commands: Command
Result
Parameters
Displays global database connection settings in the information pane
Log file
Displays database script log information in the information pane
Help Menu The Help menu contains the following commands: Command
Result
Help
Displays help on using TrackBird Gateway (this information)
About
Displays TrackBird Gateway version information
Global Options Global options define basic settings such as: •
Which TrackBird database contains the data
•
Whether external processes must be run before or after scripts.
Equally, you may want to log database script progress when you are running database scripts. For example, when you are writing and testing a database script you may want to record all errors found when it is run. Later, when you are sure the script is working correctly, you may want to log how many records have been processed instead.
To display the parameters screen `
538
Do one of the following •
Click Options in the left pane; then click the Parameters button in the left pane.
•
Click Toolbar Parameters in the Options toolbar.
•
On the Options menu, click the Parameters command.
10 TrackBird Gateway
To display the log file screen `
Display the Log file information pane using any of these methods. •
Click Options in the left pane; then click the Log File button in the left pane.
•
Click Log File in the Options toolbar.
•
On the Options menu, click the Log File command.
To stop database scripts if errors occur while the script is running 1
If not already displayed, display the Parameters screen.
2
In the General box, activate the Stop On Errors check box.
Note:
Do not select this option unless you want to stop the entire script if an error occurs. Each destination, row and transformation includes an option enabling you to specify that script processing will be halted if an error occurs while that destination, row or transformation is being processed, together with an option to disable that destination, row or transformation, giving you greater control over error handling.
Deleting Temporary Tables after Database Scripts Run Some database scripts use temporary, or interim, tables to process source data before updating the destination tables. Once the script has finished running, the temporary tables may no longer be useful and can be deleted.
To delete temporary tables created while running a database script, once the script has finished running 1
If not already displayed, display the Parameters screen.
2
In the General box, activate the Drop Temporary Tables After Execution check box.
Selecting the TrackBird Database Before you run database scripts, you must specify which TrackBird (or other) database contains their asset information.
To specify which database must be processed by database scripts 1
If not already displayed, display the Parameters screen. (See “To display the parameters screen” on page 538.)
539
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
In the General box, click the Drop Temporary Tables After Execution drop-down list and then select the database.
Note:
The list contains the names of all databases that have already been added in the TrackBird Gateway program and are listed in the left pane. For details of how to add databases, see “Adding a Database Connection” on page 542.
Filtering which TrackBird Database Records are Processed You may not always want to process all workstation records in a TrackBird assets management database. For example, you might want to process only new records; alternatively, you might want to process only new or modified records instead, for example.
To filter which TrackBird database workstation records must be processed by database scripts
540
1
If not already displayed, display the Parameters screen.
2
In the TrackBird Inventory Database Filter box, select one of these options. Option
Result
No Filter
All TrackBird workstation records will be processed
Process Only New Workstations
Only TrackBird workstation records added since workstation data was last collected will be processed
Process Only Modified Or New Workstations
Only TrackBird workstation records that have been added or modified since workstation data was last collected will be processed
Process Known Workstations Only
Only TrackBird workstation records that existed when workstation data was last collected will be processed
Test Only N Workstations
Only the first n workstations in the TrackBird asset management database will be processed (to test new or modified scripts)
10 TrackBird Gateway
Running External Processes Before\After Database Scripts In some cases, you may need to run external processes (shell commands) before or after a database script is processed. For example, if you use Asset Center to manage your asset management information you would use that system’s integrated Import feature to import inventory information after it has been processed by TrackBird Gateway.
To run an external process before or after database scripts 1
If not already displayed, display the Parameters screen.
2
In the Shell Command field, type the command line you want to run (including any runtime parameters) in the Before Execution drop-down list and/or After Execution drop list, or click Folder and select the program or utility, typing any runtime parameters as necessary.
Note:
To run a series of several processes, you can select a batch (.BAT) file in which those processes are listed in processing order.
Setting Log Parameters To set log parameters 1
If not already displayed, display the Log file screen.
2
At the top of the Log file information pane, click the Log Parameters tab.
3
In the Log Levels box, select the check box beside each type of event that you want to log: Option
Result
Log Application Exceptions
Automatically catches all TrackBird Gateway application exceptions and bugs
Log Process Exceptions
Catches and logs all process exceptions occurring while processing each activated destination, row and transformation.
Log Progress
Records a log entry for every 100 records processed
Log Warnings
Logs application-generated warnings or information messages
Log Debug Messages
Logs all debug messages
541
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
In the Log Output box, select the check box beside each log output format you require: Option
Result
NT Event viewer
Each event is recorded in Windows NT's Event log
File
Each event is recorded in the log file whose name and location you specify. If the file does not already exist, the file is created with the .LOG suffix. Log files record event information in text format.
To clear the log file before database scripts are run, in the Log Output box activate the Reset Log Contents Before Each Execution check box. If the box is deactivated, events are appended to the existing logged events list.
Displaying Logged Information To display TrackBird Gateway’s event log 1
2
Display the Log file information pane using any of the following methods. •
Click Options in the left pane; then click the Log File button in the left pane
•
Click Log File in the Options toolbar
•
On the Options menu, click the Log File command.
Click the Log Content tab at the top of the Log File information pane.
Database Connections Adding a Database Connection Use either of the following methods.
542
•
From the Edit menu, select Add Database.
•
Right-click in the left pane. In the contextual menu, select Add Database.
10 TrackBird Gateway
In the Gateway Alias Name field, replace the default name with a meaningful name (the name is displayed on the new database’s gray block in the left pane as you type). In the Database Connection box, specify the database alias, user name and password. Note:
The database connection must already be configured as an alias via TrackBird Server’s Login dialog (see “Alias Management” on page 1).
Selecting a Database Connection Note:
The database connection must already be configured as an alias via TrackBird Server’s Login dialog.
To select a database connection `
In the left pane, click the gray block containing the database connection's alias. TrackBird Gateway displays a database window.
Editing a Database Connection Note:
The database connection must already be configured as an alias via TrackBird Server’s Login dialog.
To edit a database connection 1
Click the gray block containing its alias. TrackBird Gateway displays a database window.
2
Click Formation to display database connection information.
3
If necessary, in the Gateway Alias Name field, replace the existing name (the name is updated in the database connection’s gray block in the left pane as you type).
4
If necessary, in the Database Connection box, change the database alias, user name and/or password.
543
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Deleting a Database Connection To delete a database connection 1
In the left pane, click the gray block containing the database connection’s alias.
2
Right-click in the left pane; TrackBird Gateway displays a contextual menu.
3
In the menu, click Delete Database.
Data Sources The left pane’s Data Sources button is used to define or show which data must be retrieved in TrackBird Gateway scripts. TrackBird or SQL queries define which data will be retrieved from the source database’s tables. Data dictionaries are used to build and store sets of records in which the contents of one field must be found and replaced by the contents of another field, or the contents of one field defines what value must be used in a calculation, based on the contents of another field.
544
10 TrackBird Gateway
Query - Basic Logic Diagram
545
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Data Dictionary - Basic Logic Diagram
546
10 TrackBird Gateway
Adding a Data Source To add a data source 1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click Sources in the left pane to list all existing data sources in the structure tree.
3
Right-click anywhere in the Data Sources structure tree to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
4
Specify which type of data source you want to add, by clicking Add TrackBird Query, Add SQL Query or Add Data Dictionary.
5
If you added a TrackBird or SQL query, type the query name in the Name field. If you added a data dictionary, type its name in the Table Name field.
6
Edit the query or data dictionary definition as described below.
Editing a TrackBird Query To edit a TrackBird query 1
If the database connection containing the query is not already displayed, select it in the left pane.
2
If the database connection’s data sources are not already displayed in the structure tree, click the Sources button in the left pane.
3
If the query you want to edit is not already selected, select it in the Data Sources structure tree.
4
Click Edit Query to display TrackBird Gateway’s Query Editor.
To add a query field 1
In the Query Editor’s structure tree, expand categories containing fields you want to add to your TrackBird query by clicking TrackBird Plus beside the category names.
2
Drag each field you want to include in the query onto the column where you want to place it in the field grid. (Alternatively, double-click the field name to add the field in the query’s next column.)
547
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To edit a query field 1
To change the field order in the query, place the mouse pointer over the gray bar at the top of the field’s column (the mouse pointer changes to a downward-pointing black arrow). Drag the gray bar to the left or right (the field column’s new position is represented by a thick black vertical line) to the field’s required position.
2
To change the field’s label in the query output, type the modified label in the field’s Label text box (TrackBird Gateway converts the name to capital letters and replaces all spaces by underscore characters).
3
To sort by a specific field in the query output: a
Click the field’s Order box (TrackBird Gateway displays a drop-down list button).
b
Click the drop-down list button and then select either Asc or Desc to specify whether you want to sort records in ascending or descending order.
c
To stop sorting by a specific field, select (No order).
TrackBird Gateway sorts fields in sequence from left to right; for example, to sort by Login Name and then by Number of connections in the above screen, position the Login Name column to the left of the Number of connections column before selecting Asc or Desc in the fields Order boxes. 4
To calculate statistics based on the contents of a specific field: a
Click the Op box of the field whose identical field values you want to group together in order to calculate statistics from the contents of one or more other fields (to group together all records where the Application name field contains the same value in order to count the number of records that contain each different value, for example). TrackBird Gateway displays a drop-down list button at the right side of the box.
b
5
548
For each field for which you want to calculate statistics, click the field’s Op box and then click its drop-down list button to select the required statistical function.
To exclude a field from the query output (if you are extracting all records where a field contains a defined search criterion value, for example), deactivate the field’s Show check box.
10 TrackBird Gateway
6
To specify search criteria for the contents of a specific field, click the field’s Criteria text box and then type the search criterion in the box. You can specify multiple criteria by typing them in the field’s Criteria and Or lines; to add more criteria, click the empty box below the field's last criterion and then type the next criterion. a
To find specific text, precede the text by an equals sign (for example, =Microsoft).
b
To find text contained within a string, precede the text by like and type a percent sign (%) sign to represent generic text (for example, the criterion like %Access% finds all records where the field contains the text Access; like Microsoft% finds all records where the field begins with the text Microsoft).
To delete a query field 1
Click in the field’s column.
2
Press Delete, or click
.
To test the query `
Click
; TrackBird Gateway displays the query results in a separate window.
To save the query `
To save the query and leave the Query Editor window open, click
.
Or
`
To save the query and close the Query Editor window, click Validate.
Editing an SQL Query To edit an SQL query 1
If the database connection containing the query is not already displayed, select it in the left pane.
2
If the database connection’s data sources are not already displayed in the structure tree, click the Data Sources button in the left pane.
549
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
If the query you want to edit is not already selected, select it in the Data Sources structure tree.
Click the Edit Query button to display TrackBird Gateway’s Query Editor.
SQL Query Editor Toolbar Buttons TrackBird Gateway’s Query Editor displays a toolbar containing these editing buttons to help you to edit SQL code:
Cut the selected text.
Copy the selected text.
Paste the cut or copied text at the current cursor position.
Find specific text, specify the text you want to find in the Find Text dialog. Find the next instance of the text already specified in the Find text dialog.
Find specific text and replace it with other text, specify the original and replacement text in the Replace Text dialog.
To test an SQL query `
Click
; TrackBird Gateway displays the query results in a separate window.
To save the query `
550
Click Validate. The Query Editor window closes.
10 TrackBird Gateway
Editing a Data Dictionary To edit a data dictionary 1
If the data dictionary’s database connection is not already displayed, select it in the left pane.
2
If the database connection’s data sources are not already displayed in the structure tree, click the Data Sources button in the left pane.
3
If the data dictionary you want to edit is not already selected, select it in the Data Sources structure tree.
To rename a data dictionary `
Click the Table Name field and then type the new name.
To navigate between data dictionary records `
Click dictionary record, respectively.
to move to the first, previous, next or last data
Note:
To filter which records are displayed, click To display all records once more, click
and then define a (Custom...) filter. and then specify (All).
To add a data dictionary field
1
Click inside the then type the field name.
2
Click the Add Field button (the name is added to the top of the data dictionary grid in the lower section of the information pane).
text box and
Note:
Add at least two data dictionary fields.
To add a data dictionary record 1
To add a record to the end of the data dictionary, click the next empty line in the data dictionary grid (if none is displayed, press the down-arrow key instead). 551
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
2
To add a record at a specific position in the data dictionary, click the record before which you wish to insert the new record and then click the plus sign (+) button at the bottom of the data dictionary grid.
3
Type the first field’s data.
4
Press Tab to move to the next field.
5
Type the next field’s data.
6
Repeat step 3 through step 5 for each additional field.
7
To update the data dictionary record, click ; to cancel your changes to the record, click at the bottom of the data dictionary grid.
To edit a data dictionary record 1
Place the mouse pointer over the gray bar at the top of the field’s column (the mouse pointer changes to a downward-pointing black arrow).
2
Drag the gray bar to the left or right (the field column’s new position is represented by a thick black vertical line) to the field’s required position.
To delete a data dictionary record 1
Click in the record.
2
Click the dash (-) button at the bottom of the data dictionary grid.
3
Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the record.
Deleting a Data Source To delete a data source
552
1
If the database connection containing the data source is not already displayed, select it in the left pane.
2
If the database connection’s data sources are not already displayed in the structure tree, click the Data Sources button in the left pane.
3
If the data source you want to delete is not already selected, select it in the Data Sources structure tree.
4
Right-click the data source to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
10 TrackBird Gateway
5
Click Delete Query or Delete Data Dictionary in the contextual menu.
6
To confirm the deletion, click Yes.
Destinations The left pane’s Destinations button is used to define or show how and where the data retrieved in TrackBird or SQL queries must be sent after it is processed.
The Destinations structure tree displays three levels of information: Button Explanation Destination, defining a source query - destination table pair for all of the Gateway script’s processing Row, defining a series of fields that are processed together in a Gateway script (to create a table for further processing in a later row, for example) Transformation, defining how the contents of a row’s field are modified by looking up a value in a data dictionary and then replacing or modifying the field’s contents using the contents of another data dictionary field
553
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Adding a Destination To add a destination 1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click the Destinations button in the left pane to list all existing destinations, rows and transformations in the structure tree.
3
Right-click anywhere in the Destinations structure tree to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
4
In the contextual menu, click Add Destination. TrackBird Gateway displays a screen similar to the following example.
5
In the Name field, type a meaningful name for the destination. (This will be displayed in the Destinations structure tree.)
6
In the Activated check box, specify whether the destination must be activated in order for it to be processed (to deactivate or activate the destination, simply click the Activated check box). (You can also specify whether you want to deactivate or activate individual rows and transformations.) Note:
You can deactivate or activate a destination at any time.
554
10 TrackBird Gateway
7
In the Abort Processing If Errors check box, specify whether you want TrackBird Gateway to stop processing immediately if an error occurs at any time while the destination is being processed. (You can also specify whether you want to stop processing immediately if an error occurs at any time while a specific row or transformation is being processed.)
8
In the Destination Table box, specify whether you want to output the processed data to an existing table by clicking Existing and then selecting the table’s name in the drop-down list (you can preview the selected table’s contents by clicking the button), or by clicking New and then typing the new file’s name.
9
In the Source Query drop-down list, select the TrackBird or SQL query that supplies the destination’s source data.
10
In the Allow Insert check box, specify whether or not you want new lines to be added in the destination table. For example, if you want to only modify an existing table’s existing records without adding new records to the table, you should click the check box to deactivate the Allow Insert option.
11
If Allow Insert is checked and Allow Update is unchecked, in the Drop And Create Table Before Execution check box, specify whether or not you want the existing table to be deleted and then recreated each time the Gateway script is about to be processed.
12
In the Allow Update check box, specify whether or not you want an existing table’s existing lines to be updated. For example, if you want to only add new records to an existing table’s existing records without modifying existing records in any way, you should click the check box to deactivate the Allow Update option.
13
If Allow Update is checked, TrackBird Gateway displays an additional grid, similar to the following example to the right of the destination table details.
555
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
14
In the Field Name column, if the destination table is new, type the name of each destination table field that is linked to a source query field with the same name; if the destination is an existing table, all of the table’s fields are listed in the column. Click the Key? check box beside each destination table field linked to a source query field to specify that the destination field is indeed linked.
15
In the Description box, type a brief description of the destination’s information and processing.
Editing a Destination To edit a destination
556
1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click the Destinations button in the left pane to list all existing destinations in the structure tree.
3
In the Destination structure tree, click the destination you want to edit. TrackBird Gateway displays a screen similar to the following example.
4
To rename the destination, type the new name in the Name field. (This will be displayed in the Destinations structure tree.)
10 TrackBird Gateway
5
In the Activated check box, specify whether the destination must be activated in order for it to be processed (to deactivate or activate the destination, simply click the Activated check box). (You can also specify whether you want to deactivate or activate individual rows and transformations.) Note:
You can deactivate or activate a destination at any time. 6
In the Abort Processing If Errors check box, specify whether you want TrackBird Gateway to stop processing immediately if an error occurs at any time while destination is being processed. (You can also specify whether you want to stop processing immediately if an error occurs at any time while a specific row or transformation is being processed.)
7
In the Destination Table box, specify whether you want to output the processed data to an existing table by clicking Existing and then selecting the table’s name in the drop-down list (you can preview the selected table’s contents by clicking clicking New and then typing the new file’s name.
), or
8
In the Source Query drop list, select the TrackBird or SQL query that supplies the destination’s source data.
9
In the Allow Insert check box, specify whether or not you want new lines to be added in the destination table. For example, if you want to only modify an existing table’s existing records without adding new records to the table, you should click the check box to deactivate the Allow Insert option.
10
If Allow Insert is checked and Allow Update is unchecked, in the Drop and Create Table Before Execution check box, specify whether or not you want the existing table to be deleted and then recreated each time the Gateway script is about to be processed.
11
In the Allow Update check box, specify whether or not you want an existing table’s existing lines to be updated. For example, if you want to only add new records to an existing table’s existing records without modifying existing records in any way, you
557
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
should click the check box to deactivate the Allow Update option. If Allow Update is checked, TrackBird Gateway displays an additional grid similar to the following example to the right of the destination table details.
12
If the destination table is new, type in the Field Name column the name of each destination table field that is linked to a source query field with the same name; if the destination is an existing table, all of the table’s fields are listed in the column. Click the Key? check box beside each destination table field that is linked to a source query field to specify that the destination field is indeed linked.
13
To change the brief description of the destination’s information and processing, modify the text in the Description box.
Adding a Row To add a row
558
1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click in the left pane to list all existing destinations, rows and transformations in the structure tree.
3
Right-click anywhere in the Destinations structure tree to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
10 TrackBird Gateway
4
In the contextual menu, click Add Row. TrackBird Gateway displays a screen similar to the following example.
5
In the Name field, type a meaningful name for the row. (This will be displayed in the Destinations structure tree.)
6
In the Activated check box, specify whether the row must be activated in order for it to be processed (to deactivate the row, simply click the Activated check box). Note:
You can deactivate or activate a row at any time. 7
In the Abort Processing If Errors check box, specify whether you want TrackBird Gateway to stop processing immediately an error occurs while the row is being processed.
8
To map each source-destination field pair: a
Click the Add button.
b
In the Destination Field text box, type the name of the destination table field you want to map to the source query’s field or expression. If the destination table field has been defined as a key field in the Destination screen, a key symbol is immediately displayed in the Key Field column.
c
In the Source Expression drop-down list, select the field or expression that provides the destination field’s source data.
559
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
9
To delete a source-destination field pair: a
Click the pair’s line and then click the Delete button.
b
Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the pair’s mapping.
10
When you have mapped each of the row’s source-destination field pairs:
11
Click the Validate button. (To cancel all modifications since the last time the row information was saved, click the Cancel button.)
12
In the Description box, type a brief description of the row’s information and processing.
Editing a Row To edit a row
560
1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click tree.
3
Click the row you want to edit. TrackBird Gateway displays a screen similar to the following example.
4
If necessary, edit the row name in the Name field. (This will be displayed in the Destinations structure tree.)
in the left pane to list all existing destinations and rows in the structure
10 TrackBird Gateway
5
In the Activated check box, specify whether the row must be activated in order for it to be processed (to deactivate or activate the row, simply click the Activated check box). Note:
You can deactivate or activate a row at any time. 6
In the Abort Processing If Errors check box, specify whether you want TrackBird Gateway to stop processing immediately an error occurs while the row is being processed.
7
To add a source-destination field pair:
8
9
10
a
Click the Add button.
b
In the Destination Field text box, type the name of the destination table field you want to map to the source query’s field or expression. If the destination table field has been defined as a key field in the Destination screen, a key symbol is immediately displayed in the Key Field column.
c
In the Source Expression drop-down list, select the field or expression that provides the destination field’s source data.
To edit a source-destination field pair: a
Click the source-destination field mapping line.
b
If necessary, in the Destination Field text box, change the name of the destination table field you want to map to the source query's field or expression. If the destination table field has been defined as a key field in the Destination screen, a key symbol is immediately displayed in the Key Field column.
c
If necessary, in the Source Expression drop-down list, change the field or expression that provides the destination field’s source data.
To delete a source-destination field pair: a
Click the pair’s line and then click Delete.
b
Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the pair’s mapping.
When you have finished mapping each of the row’s source-destination field pairs, click the Validate button. (To cancel all modifications since the last time the row’s mapping information was saved, click the Cancel button.)
561
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
11
If necessary, in the Description box, edit the brief description of the row’s information and processing.
Adding a Transformation To add a transformation 1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click
in the left pane to list all existing destinations, rows, and
transformations in the structure tree. If necessary, click destination name to display its rows.
562
to the left of the
3
Right-click the row to which you want to add the transformation to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
4
In the contextual menu, click Add Transformation. TrackBird Gateway displays a screen similar to the following example.
5
In the Name field, type a meaningful name for the transformation. (This will be displayed in the Destinations structure tree.)
6
In the Activated check box, specify whether the transformation must be activated in order for it to be processed (to deactivate the transformation, simply click the Activated check box).
10 TrackBird Gateway
Note:
You can deactivate or activate a transformation at any time. 7
In the Abort Processing If Errors check box, specify whether you want TrackBird Gateway to stop processing immediately an error occurs while the transformation is being processed.
8
In the Use Table drop-down list, select the name of the data dictionary that provides the search and replacement values used to transform the source data into the destination data.
9
Transformation cannot be used to structurally modify tables; it modifies only field data.
10
In the Search In Field drop-down list, select the data dictionary field containing the value you will search for when transforming the source data.
11
In the And Get Value In Field drop-down list, select the data dictionary field containing the replacement or calculation value you will use when transforming the source data.
12
In the Source Key Field drop-down list, select the source field forming the link to the data dictionary field specified in the Search In Field drop-down list. (Source key field names displayed in bold text also exist in the destination table.) Note:
If you do not specify a source key field, TrackBird Gateway updates the destination field data by overwriting it. 13
In the Destination Field drop-down list, select the destination field that will receive the transformed data.
14
To perform more complex calculations, you can use VBScript to write programs for more complex, flexible data manipulation. To display a Code Editor window, click the Edit Script button. (Using VBScript and the Code Editor window is described in “Using VBScript in TrackBird Gateway” on page 568.)
15
In the Description box, type a brief description of the transformation’s information and processing.
563
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Data Dictionary - Basic Logic Diagram
564
10 TrackBird Gateway
Editing a Transformation To edit a transformation 1
Display the database connection you want in the left pane, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click
in the left pane to list all existing destinations, rows and transformations
in the structure tree. If necessary, click display its rows.
to the left of the destination name to
3
Right-click the row to which you want to add the transformation to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
4
Click the transformation you want to edit. TrackBird Gateway displays a screen similar to the following example.
5
If necessary, in the Name field, edit the transformation’s name. (This will be displayed in the Destinations structure tree.)
6
In the Activated check box, specify whether the transformation must be activated in order for it to be processed (to deactivate the transformation, simply click the Activated check box). Note:
You can deactivate or activate a transformation at any time.
565
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
7
In the Abort Processing If Errors check box, specify whether you want TrackBird Gateway to stop processing immediately an error occurs while the transformation is being processed.
8
If necessary, in the Use Table drop-down list, change the name of the data dictionary that provides the search and replacement values used to transform the source data into the destination data. Note:
Transformation cannot be used to structurally modify tables; it modifies only field data. 9
If necessary, in the Search In Field drop-down list, change the data dictionary field containing the value you will search for when transforming the source data.
10
If necessary, in the And Get Value In Field drop-down list, change the data dictionary field containing the replacement or calculation value you will use when transforming the source data.
11
If necessary, in the Source Key Field drop-down list, change the source field forming the link to the data dictionary field specified in the Search In Field drop-down list. (Source key field names displayed in bold text also exist in the destination table.) Note:
If you do not specify a source key field, TrackBird Gateway updates the destination field data by overwriting it.
566
12
If necessary, in the Destination Field drop-down list, change the destination field that will receive the transformed data.
13
To perform more complex calculations, you can use VBScript to write programs for more complex, flexible data manipulation. To display a Code Editor window, click Edit Script.
14
If necessary, in the Description box, edit the brief description of the transformation’s information and processing.
10 TrackBird Gateway
Deleting a Destination, Row, or Transformation To delete a destination, row, or transformation 1
If the database connection containing the data destination is not already displayed, select it in the left pane.
2
If the database connection’s destinations are not already displayed in the structure tree, click
in the left pane.
3
If the data destination you want to delete is not already selected, select it in the Destinations structure tree.
4
Right-click the destination to display the structure tree’s contextual menu.
5
Click Delete in the contextual menu.
6
To confirm the deletion, click Yes.
VBScript In situations where more sophisticated or more flexible data manipulation is needed than
can be achieved through field mapping and transformation, the VBScript programming language can used to manipulate the data contained in databases programmatically. Detailed VBScript documentation can be found on the Microsoft Web site, at this address: http://www.msdn.microsoft.com/scripting
567
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Using VBScript in TrackBird Gateway Like any object-oriented programming language, VBScript refers to tables, fields, queries and other data containers as objects. When you use VBScript to manipulate TrackBird Gateway information, your code must retrieve and update the information using the following objects: Object
Description
SourceQuery
Accesses the transformation’s source query (specified in the destination definition)
DestinationValue
(When inserting new records) Accesses the contents of the current record’s field defined in destinationField
updateDestinationValue
(When updating existing records) Accesses the contents of the current record's field defined in destinationField
vbError
Provides an interface for passing an error message, such as a warning (for example, where data stored in different systems such as Qualiparc and TrackBird is linked together)
VBScript Object Properties The following properties can be used when retrieving and/or updating information through VBScript procedures in TrackBird Gateway:
568
Property
Description
AsInteger
Retrieves the data contained in the object, in integer form
AsString
Retrieves or updates the data contained in the object, as a text string
AsFloat
Retrieves the data contained in the object, with a floating decimal point
AsDateTime
Retrieves the data contained in the object, as a date
AsBoolean
Retrieves the data contained in the object, as a Boolean value
10 TrackBird Gateway
SourceQuery Properties The SourceQuery object used to retrieve and/or update information through TrackBird Gateway notably contains the following properties: Property
Description
Fieldcount
Contains the number of fields contained in the query
Fields[n]
Contains the contents of the source query’s nth field (fields are numbered starting from 0) in the current record
FieldByName("Source Query Field Name")
Contains the contents of the source query field specified by Source Query Field Name, in the current record
VBScript Object Handling Example The following expression retrieves the value contained in a source query’s fourth field as an integer value: SourceQuery.Fields[3].AsInteger Note:
Detailed VBScript documentation can be found on the Microsoft web site, at this address: http://www.msdn.microsoft.com/scripting
Code Editor Window TrackBird Gateway’s Code Editor displays a toolbar containing these editing buttons to help you to edit VBScript code:
Cut the selected text.
Copy the selected text.
Paste the cut or copied text at the current cursor position.
Find specific text, specify the text you want to find in the Find Text dialog box.
569
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Find the next instance of the text already specified in the Find text dialog box. Find specific text and replace it with other text, specify the original and replacement text in the Replace Text dialog box. Undo your last edit.
Redo the last edit you undid.
OK
Save your VBScript code and close the Code Editor window.
Cancel
Cancel your changes to the VBScript code and close the Code Editor window.
Gateway Script Examples The following examples illustrate several typical applications of TrackBird Gateway scripts and are intended to provide a useful foundation for developing production scripts, ranging from simple mapping of fields in two tables to using VBScript code or data dictionaries.
Example 1 - Mapping One Table with Another Aim To update TBLTARGET, the destination table, with data in TBLSOURCE, the source table.
570
10 TrackBird Gateway
Tables
Field Mapping TBLTARGET
TBLSOURCE
ID
ID_Source
Name
Source_Name
Source
Gateway
Date
Today's date
Procedure In TrackBird Gateway, create the following simple query, QueryEx1, to extract all IDs and names from the source table: SELECT ID_Source, Source_Name FROM TBLSOURCE
Create a destination with TBLTARGET as the destination table and QueryEx1 as the source query. Create a row that defines the field mapping as shown in the table above (replacing 28/01/2002 with the current date).
571
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example 2 - Merging Tables and Fields Aim To update the DEST_PRODUCT table’s Value field with data contained in three fields in two source tables, SRC_HARD_DISK and SRC_RAM.
Tables
Field Mapping DEST_PRODUCT
SRC_HARD_DISK
ID
ID_HD
Product_Name
Hard disk
Desc_Name
Total capacity or Space available or Speed
Value
Capacity_HD or Space_Available_HD or Speed
Units
SRC_RAM
Mb or Hz
Procedure In TrackBird Gateway, create a first simple query, QueryEx2HD, to extract all HD information from the source table SRC_HARD_DISK: SELECT * FROM SRC_HARD_DISK
In TrackBird Gateway, create a second simple query, QueryEx2RAM, to extract all RAM information from the source table SRC_RAM: SELECT * FROM SRC_RAM 572
10 TrackBird Gateway
Create a first destination that will insert HD information into the destination table’s Value field. In this destination, create three rows that use the mapping shown in the field mapping table above to insert Total capacity, Space available and Speed information, respectively.
Create a second destination that will insert RAM information into the destination table’s Value field. In this destination, create two rows that use the mapping shown in the field mapping table above to insert Size and Speed information, respectively.
573
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example 3 - Concatenating the Contents of Three Fields to Update a Table Aim To concatenate the contents of three fields in the TBLSOURCE table in order to update a single field in DESTADDRESS, the destination table.
Tables
Field Mapping DESTADDRESS
TBLSOURCE
ID
ID_Source
Name
Source_Name
Address
Source_Address
Procedure In TrackBird Gateway, create a first simple query QueryEx3, to extract all name and address information from the source table TBLSOURCE:
574
10 TrackBird Gateway
SELECT ID_Source, Source_Name, Source_Address, Source_City, Source_ZipCode FROM TBLSOURCE;
Create a destination with DESTADDRESS as the destination table and TBLSOURCE as the source query. Create a row that defines the field mapping as shown in the table above.
Create a transformation with Address as the Destination Field, containing the following VBScript: ' Test whether a City and ZipCode exist if (sourceQuery.fieldByName("Source_ZipCode").asString "") and (SourceQuery.FieldByName("Source_City").AsString "") then ' concatenate the City and ZipCode to the address to create a full address destinationValue.asString = destinationValue.AsString + " " + sourceQuery.fieldByName("Source_City").AsString + " " + SourceQuery.fieldByName("Source_ZipCode").asString end if Note:
If ... then and destinationValue.asString ... ("Source_ZipCode").asString should each be typed as a single line.
Example 4 - Using a Data Dictionary Aim To use a data dictionary to convert the HowMany field’s digits (1, 2, etc.) to text (one, two, etc.) in the source table, TBLPRODUCT, and export the source table’s data (including the transformed digits stored in the HowMany field) to the destination table, Transfer, generated by the Gateway script.
575
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Tables
Field Mapping TRANSFER
TBLPRODUCT
Component
Component
HowMany
HowMany
ID
ID_Product
Name
Product_Name
Procedure In TrackBird Gateway, create a data dictionary, GTW_MAP_Digits, containing two fields, NumberDigits, and NumberText, with digits stored in the NumberDigits field and their text equivalents stored in the NumberText field. Create a first simple query, QueryEx4, to extract all information from the TBLPRODUCT table: SELECT * FROM TBLPRODUCT
Create a destination with TBLPRODUCT as the destination table and QueryEx4 as the source query. Activate Allow Update (displaying the Update Key Field list); do not activate Allow Insert. In the destination’s Update Key Field list, specify the following fields:
576
10 TrackBird Gateway
Create a row that defines the field mapping as shown in the table above.
Create a transformation defined as follows:
577
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Example 5 - Using a Temporary Table Aim The source table, SRC_POSITION, contains user and position details. The aim is to use a temporary table, TMPUSERPOSITION, to identify the user and position from their names in the linked destination tables in order to update the user-position relationship in the destination table, DEST_USER_POSITION.
Tables
Field Mapping See the procedure below.
Procedure Create a first destination that creates a temporary table, TMPUSERPOSITION, and runs a simple query, QueryEx5_1, to extract information from the SRCPOSITION table in order to update TMPUSERPOSITION: SELECT POSITION_NAME, USERNAME, DATE_LOG FROM SRC_POSITION
578
10 TrackBird Gateway
In the first destination, create a row that maps the temporary table’s fields as follows (leaving the temporary table’s ID_Position and ID_User fields blank):
Create a second destination with TMPUSERPOSITION as the destination table and QueryEx5_2 as the source query, to extract information from the DEST_USER table in order to update the ID_User field in TMPUSERPOSITION: SELECT ID_User, Username FROM DEST_USER
Do not activate Allow Insert; activate Allow Update, and then specify the following Key Field:
In the second destination, create a row that maps the temporary table’s fields as follows (updating the temporary table’s ID_User field):
Create a third destination with TMPUSERPOSITION as the destination table and QueryEx5_3 as the source query, to extract information from the DEST_MACHINE table in order to update the ID_Position field in TMPUSERPOSITION: SELECT ID_Machine, Machine_Name FROM DEST_MACHINE
Do not activate Allow Insert; activate Allow Update, and then specify the following Key Field:
579
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
In the third destination, create a row that maps the temporary table’s fields as follows (updating the temporary table’s ID_Position field):
Create a fourth, and final, destination with DEST_USER_POSITION as the destination table and QueryEx5_5 as the source query, to extract all information from the TMPUSERPOSITION table in order to update DEST_USER_POSITION: SELECT * FROM TMPUSERPOSITION
Activate Allow Insert; do not activate Allow Update. In the fourth destination, create a row that maps the destination table’s fields as follows, to update it with the temporary table’s user-position pairs:
Row and Transformation Processing – the Sequence When you are building a Gateway script to manipulate data, always consider this simple guideline: first come, first processed. TrackBird Gateway processes rows and transformations in the sequence in which they appear in the script. This is especially important when the logic of your script rows is similar to this:
580
1
Create an interim (temporary) table
2
Process source data to update the interim table
3
If necessary, process the interim table data
4
Output the interim table's data to the destination table
5
Drop (delete) the interim table
10 TrackBird Gateway
Simple logic dictates that you cannot update a table if it does not exist yet and that you should not delete an interim table before trying to update the destination table. You must therefore sometimes change the row or transformation sequence to follow this logic, either by moving a row or transformation to a different position in the sequence or by deactivating or activating rows or transformations.
Moving a Row or Transformation in a Script To move a row or transformation in a script 1
In the left pane, display the database connection whose row or transformation sequence you want to change, by clicking its gray title block. (The selected database connection’s alias always appears directly above the left pane.)
2
Click
in the left pane to list all existing destinations, rows and transformations
in the structure tree. If necessary, click display its rows and/or transformations.
to the left of the destination name to
3
Position the mouse pointer over the name of the row or transformation whose position you want to change in the Gateway script sequence, and then press and hold down the left mouse button.
4
Drag the row or transformation to its new position in the Gateway script sequence (when you drag the row or transformation, the cursor displays as a symbol, with the name of the row or transformation displayed beside it in gray), and then release the left mouse button.
581
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
582
Chapter 11:
TrackBird Web
11 This chapter provides instructions for using TrackBird Web. Note:
IIS must be running on the workstation before installing TrackBird Web.
Prerequisites Using a Web browser, the TrackBird Web module enables you to visualize your data by running queries and reports from any machine on your network. You can do this by typing the URL http://Server Name/tbweb.
583
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Connecting to the TrackBird Database Choose the database then enter a login and a password. Your login and password must be the same identifiers that you use when connecting to the TrackBird server directly. If your login information is incorrect, the invalid username/password combination ! message is displayed in red. You must renter the correct login and password to access TrackBird Web.
Home Page Once you have entered a correct login and password, the Home page displays.
This page displays with direct links to several reports, list, and tree queries. You can customize this window to display the reports and queries that you use regularly. 584
11 TrackBird Web
Customizing the Home Page To customize the Home page, you must have: •
A tool to view the tables of your database (ibconsole for Interbase)
•
A text editor to edit the HTML page TBWEBHOMEFORM.HTML which is found by default in the folder C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG\TRACKBIRD WEB\VIRTUALDIR\CGI-BIN.
Recovery of the Report Identifier or the Query to Add Using the database search tool you can view all the data of the table NBEXPLORERITEM and localize the line corresponding to the query or report to add via the field ITEM_NAME then identify its number in the field ITEM_ID. This number will be useful to create the link in the HTML page.
Add a Report in the HTML Page Edit the page TBWEBHOMEFORM.HTML. In the Reports section add these tags:
| Global Information | This report presents a summary about operating systems and hardware (memory, processor and manufacturer). |
where: class=odd or class=even is the table line color, you must alternate between odd and even. 185 is the report number, you must replace it by that which you identified previously. Global Information is the report title which will appear in the table. This report … is the report description which will appear in the table.
Add a Tree Query in the HTML Page Edit the page TBWEBHOMEFORM.HTML. In the Tree View section add these tags:
| Station list organized by os type | 585
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
This Tree query presents workstations by Operating Systems type |
where : class= even or class= odd is the table line color, you must alternate between odd and even. 28 is the tree number, you must replace it by that which you identified previously. Station list or Station list organized by os type is the title of the request which will appear in the table. This Tree query… is the description of the request which will appear in the table.
Add a List Query in the HTML page Edit the page TBWEBHOMEFORM.HTML. In the section Queries add the tags :
| Software count | This List Query presents the quantity of each software |
where: class= even or class= odd is the table line color, you must alternate between odd and even. 105 is the number of the list query, you must replace it with the one you have previously identified. Software count is the title of the list query which will appear in the table. This List query … is the description of the list query which will appear in the table.
586
11 TrackBird Web
Explorer Page To access the Explorer page, click Explorer in the toolbar.
From this page you can access all the reports and queries that have been created. You browse the different folder in the left pane tree view. Click Folders to hide or show the left tree. Click Up to move up to the parent folder.
587
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Server Page To access the Server page, click Server in the toolbar.
This page allows you to view all the sessions currently running. If you are connected as an administrator you can select a session to end.
588
11 TrackBird Web
Report After having selected a report from the Home page or the Explorer page you can view, browse, and export the information with the navigation bar.
Navigation Bar
The navigation bar provides these buttons: Button
Description Displays the first page of the report. Displays the previous page.
Displays the next page.
589
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button
Description Displays the last page. Refreshes the information on the page. Exports the report in PDF format.
Tree Query You can choose a tree query from the Home page or the Explorer page.
To view all of the machines concerned with the query, browse the different nodes in the left pane’s tree. Click View Grid to view your query as a list query.
590
11 TrackBird Web
To view the details as you do in the TrackBird Server Summary, click the machine name.
591
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
List Query You can choose a list query from both the Home page or from the Explorer page.
Navigation Bar
The navigation bar provides these buttons: Button
Description Displays the first page of the query. Displays the previous page. Displays the previous line.
592
11 TrackBird Web
Button
Description By default the grid displays 20 results. You can customize the display by entering the number of results you require by clicking
.
Displays the next line. Displays the next page. Displays the last page. Refreshes the information on the page. Export to excel
Exports the query in an Excel.
Export to PDF
Exports the query in PDF format.
View as tree
Displays the query in a tree format.
Summary View To view a specific machine, select the result of a tree request. This view is similar to the TrackBird server Summary.
593
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Disconnecting from the TrackBird Database To disconnect from the TrackBird database and close your session, click Logout in the toolbar. You are returned to the Login page.
594
Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA
Chapter 12:
12 The ASG-Unified Management Architecture (herein called UMA) environment coordinates processing events and object information from applications that are connected through adapters. UMA consists of both an Integration Canvas and Item Manager. TrackBird provides an interface to exchange information from UMA.
UMA Service Provider The UMA Service Provider installs at the same time as TrackBird Server. It allows TrackBird and UMA to communicate. For more details regarding UMA, see ASG-UMA Integration Platform Server Installation and Getting Started Guide.
TrackBird Common Information Model (CIM) Mapper The TrackBird CIM Mapper interface enables information to be linked from the TrackBird tree to CIM properties. UMA can easily gather this information and sent it to other applications.
Starting TrackBird CIM Mapper In the Windows Start menu, select the program group containing the TrackBird Suite and select UMA ` TrackBird Common Information Model Project.
595
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird CIM Interface Menu Bar and Toolbar The TrackBird CIM interface provides a standard Windows menu bar and toolbar.
596
12 Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA
Menu Bar The menus offers the same functions as the toolbar. These are the menu bar functions: Menu Bar\Command
Actions
File Menu Save
Saves the configuration information currently displayed in the TrackBird CIM interface. The information is saved to TBCIM.XML. You can locate the XML file at this location: \UMA
Export…
Saves the XML file in another location.
Import…
Loads the XML file from another location.
Edit Menu Show TB items as Tree
Displays the items of the TrackBird tree in tree form.
Show TB items in line
Displays the items of the TrackBird tree in line form.
Configuration menu Show configuration form
Displays the configuration window
Toolbar The TrackBird CIM interface toolbar contains these buttons which perform the same functions as the menu bar commands: Button
Action Saves the configuration information currently displayed in the TrackBird CIM interface. The information is saved to TBCIM.XML. You can locate the XML file at this location: \UMA Saves the XML file in another location.
Loads the XML file from another location.
Displays the items of the TrackBird tree in tree format.
597
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Button
Action Displays the items of the TrackBird tree in line format. Displays the configuration window.
Functions To be able to transfer the data of each workstation from TrackBird to UMA, there are several stages to follow: •
Associating a CIM class to a TrackBird tree item (“To associate a CIM class to an item in the TrackBird tree” on page 598)
•
Associating the CIM class properties with the features in the TrackBird tree (“To associate the properties of the CIM class with the features in the TrackBird tree” on page 602)
•
Adding additional functions to TrackBird tree features (“Addition of an Aggregation” on page 603)
•
Choosing the categories and the Policy rules (“TB Policy Tab” on page 603)
•
Saving the configuration (“Save the Configuration” on page 604)
These stages are explained in the next sections.
To associate a CIM class to an item in the TrackBird tree 1
Choose an item in the TrackBird tree. This example uses CD-ROM drive.
598
12 Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA
2
Then click to choose which CIM property you want to associate with this item. The window gathering all CIM classes is displayed.
599
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
3
You can choose the class directly in the class tree, in which you can execute a search.
To search for a class CIM 1
In order to find CIM classes to link to the TrackBird tree, click Search to display the CIM class window and allow you to select the appropriate class. A Search window appears.
600
12 Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA
In this example, we search for the class which allows us to recover information on CD-ROM. 2
Type CDROM in the Enter full or partial class name field and click Go to start the search.
The search results display. 3
Double-click a class to select it and return to the previous screen.
601
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
4
Click OK to confirm the selection or Cancel to terminate the command. The link between the CD-ROM drive TrackBird item and CIM class is visible in the main window.
To associate the properties of the CIM class with the features in the TrackBird tree 1
Once you have associated the item of the TrackBird tree to a CIM class, it is necessary to associate the features of the properties of the other. You can add all the item features or just one feature in the TrackBird tree: a
To add all features, click the All button
.
Or
To add one feature, click the plus button . A blank line appears where you must choose the TrackBird feature to be added and the CIM property associated with it.
After adding the features you must link them to CIM properties. 602
12 Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA
b
2
Click the drop-down button property.
of the CIM Properties column, to choose the
Once all the links are in place, select the UMA check box if you want to send this information to UMA.
Addition of an Aggregation Choose the function to be carried out on the feature. Most likely to be the function named First. Function
Result
Concat
If there are several values for the TrackBird feature, they will be concatenated (valid only for character strings)
Sum
If there are several values for the TrackBird feature, they will be added (valid only for values of the integer type)
Count
If there are several values for the TrackBird feature, this will count the number of occurrences.
Average
If there are several values for the TrackBird feature, this will get the average of the values (valid only for values of the integer type)
First
This will get the first value of the feature
Max
Among all the values of this feature, one will get the maximum value
Min
Among all the values this will get the minimum value
TB Policy Tab The TB Policy tab allows you to choose which categories and rules will be included when data is sent to UMA. Therefore, if the workstation generates the selected categories or rules, the information is sent to UMA. However, if a category or a rule is selected but is not generated for this workstation, nothing is sent to UMA.
603
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Save the Configuration Click the button Save or from the File menu, choose Save to save the configuration.
Deleting Links Between a TrackBird Tree Feature and a CIM Property To delete a link between a TrackBird tree feature and a CIM property, select the link to be deleted and click the delete button
.
Deleting Links Between a TrackBird Tree Item and a CIM Class To delete a link between a TrackBird tree item and a CIM class, select the link to be deleted and click the delete class button
.
Selecting a TrackBird Tree Item’s UMA Option To check one of the UMA options simply click above. The option read-only of the TrackBird item is greyed
604
when all the features are not checked.
12 Using TrackBird with ASG-UMA
Selecting all the TrackBird Tree Item’s UMA Options To check all of the UMA options simply click the check all button The option read-only of the TrackBird item is blacked out checked.
.
when all the features are
Unselecting all TrackBird Tree Item’s UMA Options To uncheck all of the UMA options click the Uncheck all button The option read-only of the TrackBird item is blank unchecked.
.
when all the features are
Configuration To open the configuration window, choose one of these methods: •
Click the Show Configuration button
.
•
Choose Show Configuration from the Configuration menu.
The Configuration form dialog will display.
605
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Configuration Page Parameters
The Configuration form contains these fields:
606
Command
Action
TrackBird database
Choose the database where you want to extract the data from.
Mapping save file name
Name and location where the XML or the links are saved.
Definition XML file name
Name and place where the XML definition file which simulates the send of UMA definitions (used only for test purposes).
Data XML file name
Name and place where the XML data file which simulates the send of data to UMA.
TrackBird Web Server URL
URL path in TrackBird Web that allows the display of workstation information. For example : http://TrackBirdServerIPAddress/tbweb/cgi-bin/tbweb.dll/TB ViewStation?ID=.
WSDL Location
Web Service location provided by UMA.
Device pack count
Number of machines sent in the XML data file.
Last version
Number of versions created from the date of each save of the configuration file.
A
Appendix A:
Appendix A Filename Extensions and File Details
Filename Extensions TrackBird Server Extension
Meaning
*.NBC
Collection file
*.NBI
File containing unknown software details
*.NBX
Extension file (used if the returning of files is requested along with the collected data)
*.NBM
Inventory modification file, returned by the inventorist interface
*.NBD
(obsolete) File generated by the Delta module (containing differential between two inventories, to reduce bandwidth use)
*.NBF
File containing a log of unknown errors generated by the collector
*.NBK
Temporary file used to make a backup copy of the data during printing, in case of a fault during printing
*.CNB
Compressed package containing .NBC, .NBX type files, used in IP communication
*.NBR
Package (in the same format as CNB files) containing the following files: *.NBC, *.NBX, *.NBI, *.NBM
*.KB
File containing a glossary
*.KBX
Knowledge base file index
*.ODF
Inventorist interface definition file
607
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird Gateway Extension
Meaning
*.GWS
Gateway scenario file
*.SCR
Import script file for Asset Center
*.RGW
File containing Gateway V2 management rules
*.XGW
File describing the relationships between a database’s tables (relational MCD style)
TrackBird Repository Explorer Extension
Meaning
*.DGN
TrackBird form export file
*.QRY
TrackBird query list export file
*.QTY
TrackBird tree query export file
*.RPT
TrackBird reports export file
TrackBird Designer
608
Extension
Meaning
*.NDP
TrackBird Designer project options file
*.ODF
TrackBird Designer interface file
Appendix A - Filename Extensions and File Details
File Details TrackBird Server Filename
Description
NETBIRD.CFG
Client configuration file
NETBIRD.INI or
File containing the license code
TRACKBIRD.INI DBCONNECTIONS.INI
DB Express aliases configuration file (in folder C:\PROGRAM FILES\ASG\TRACKBIRD SERVER\DBCONNECTIONS by default)
DBXDRIVERS.INI
DB Express drivers list and parameters (same folder as above)
PTCOLL.OPT
File used to store the various OS-dependent addresses for collection points in shared directory mode
GENERAL.OPT
Collection options file
REP.KB
Glossaries list (.KB files)
SYSREP.KB
System glossary list (PCI, Monitors, etc.)
HW.KB
System glossaries
BROWSER.KB
Compressed TrackBird structure tree for the clients
LOGS.KB
Software glossaries
LOGS.KBX LOGSLINUX.KB LOGSMAC.KB
609
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird IP \data Folder Filename
Description
tbwmi.dat
Temporary file containing WMI collected data (IP Version 3.0 and later)
nbsmbios.dat
Temporary file containing data collected in the SMBIOS
failure.nbf
File containing details of the detection method used, date, time and a digit. If the digit is not 0, one of the detection methods has failed
scriptip.nbs
TrackBird IP configuration file script, providing the link with the Registry for .ODF files. (IP Version 2.2 and later only)
nbtx.log
Contains details of all users logged onto the computer
interwin.odf
Inventorist interface file
software.tnb
Contains details of all software collected on the computer (cache file used in partial software inventory collection). (IP Version 3.0 and later only)
nbtasks.tsk
Manages TrackBird IP tasks (IP Version 2.2 and later only)
\components Folder Filename
Description
components.cfg and
Configuration files containing the list of packages installed on the workstation
componentsc.cfg
610
Appendix A - Filename Extensions and File Details
TrackBird Gateway Filename
Description
gateway.gtw
File (located in the same folder as the Gateway executable file) containing the tree of VB functions that can be used in the Gateway MMI
611
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
612
Appendix B NBS Scripts
B
Appendix B:
scriptip.nbs (TrackBird IP Installation Script) ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
==================================================== TrackBird IP installation script Date : 21/09/2005 Author : FDY Copyright © 2005 Allen Systems Group, Inc. All rights reserved. :> Historic ====================================================
[VARS] TargetDir=%INVCLIENT% ;The SourceDir variable must never be modified under any circumstances SourceDir=%INSTALLDIR%.. NetbirdPool=%SRVPATH% IncludeInterface=TRUE ; TRUE/FALSE LogfileMode=OFF LogfilePath=C:\ LogfileName=%ComputerName% OutName=%computername% PRCTG=% [INIT] WIN2000(NT)=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK WINNT40=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK WINNT35=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY WINDOWS95=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK WINDOWS98=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK MAC=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG MACX=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG ;,MAC_CREATEALIAS ;WINDOWS31=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG ;DOS=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG ;OS2=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG DEFAULT=
; ; Update netbird.cfg
613
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
; [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=4 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_CFG ENUM2=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_LOCALPATH ;ENUM3=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_OUTPUTNAME ENUM3=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_SERVERPATH ENUM4=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_IDPC [PRINT_UPDATE_CFG] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Update netbird.cfg file [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_OUTPUTNAME] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%OutName% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=OUTPUTNAME FILE=%TargetDir%data\netbird.cfg [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_LOCALPATH] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=clientpath FILE=%TargetDir%data\netbird.cfg [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_SERVERPATH] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%NetbirdPool% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=SERVERPATH FILE=%TargetDir%data\netbird.cfg [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_IDPC] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%GV_IDPC% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=IDPC FILE=%TargetDir%data\netbird.cfg
; Update Windows 9x & NT startup files [W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run VALUE=Netbird
614
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%bin\agent32.exe CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=TRUE ; ; == NT 3.51 == ; [WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=4 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_REG ENUM2=WNT35_SET_OLD_RUN_KEY ENUM3=WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_REPLACE ENUM4=WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_ADD [WNT35_SET_OLD_RUN_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=old_run_reg_key VAL=$READREG(HKEY_CURRENT_USER,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\ Windows,Run) [WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CURRENT_USER SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\WIndows VALUE=Run SCAN=%scan_run_key% REPLACE=%TargetDir%bin\agentnt.exe METHOD=TOKEN SEPARATOR=SPACE CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=FALSE [WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_ADD] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CURRENT_USER SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\WIndows VALUE=Run SCAN=%old_run_reg_key% REPLACE=%old_run_reg_key% %TargetDir%\bin\agentnt.exe METHOD=TOKEN SEPARATOR=SPACE CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=TRUE [WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run VALUE=Netbird SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%bin\agentnt.exe CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=TRUE
[WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=3
615
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
ENUM1=WINDOWS_ADD_DOT_ODF_KEY ENUM2=WINDOWS_ADD_ODFFILE_KEY ENUM3=WINDOWS_ADD_ODFICON_KEY [WINDOWS_ADD_DOT_ODF_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT SUBKEY=.odf VALUE= SCAN= REPLACE=odffile CONDITION= [WINDOWS_ADD_ODFFILE_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT SUBKEY=odffile\shell\open\command VALUE= SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%bin\interwin.exe -ODF=%%1 CONDITION= [WINDOWS_ADD_ODFICON_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT SUBKEY=odffile\DefaultIcon VALUE= SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%bin\interwin.exe CONDITION= ; ; Create mac alias & install client ; [MAC_CREATEALIAS] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=3 ENUM1=PRINT_CREATE_INDIRECT_ALIAS ENUM2=CREATE_INDIRECT_ALIAS_PART1 ENUM3=CREATE_INDIRECT_ALIAS_PART2 [PRINT_CREATE_INDIRECT_ALIAS] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Create indirect alias [CREATE_INDIRECT_ALIAS_PART1] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%bin:agentmac SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=ALIAS_SOURCEFILE FILE=%TargetDir%data\netbird.cfg [CREATE_INDIRECT_ALIAS_PART2] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI
616
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
SCAN= REPLACE=%STARTUPFOLDER%start_agentmac SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=ALIAS_ALIASFILE FILE=%TargetDir%data\netbird.cfg
script.nbs (TrackBird Shared Directory Configuration Script) ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
==================================================== TrackBird installation script Date : 25/05/2005 Author : ZAC Copyright © 2005 Allen Systems Group, Inc. All rights reserved. :> Updates 25/05/1998 : WinNT 4.0 platform support 26/05/1998 : Win9X platform support 10/06/1998 : WinNT 3.5 platform support 10/06/1998 : Win 3.X platform support 10/06/1998 : DOS platform support 17/06/1998 : OS/2 platform support 12/04/2000 : WinNT 5.0 platform support 12/03/2003 : WinNT 6.0 platform support ====================================================
[VARS] TargetDir=C:\TBClient ;The SourceDir variable must never be modified under any circumstances SourceDir=%INSTALLDIR%.. NetbirdPool= IncludeInterface=FALSE ; TRUE/FALSE ;OldDir= LogfileMode=TRACE ; off/TRACE/ERROR OutName= LogfilePath=C:\ LogfileName=%ComputerName%
[INIT] WIN2000(NT)=COMMON_SET,WNT_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WNT 40_ADD_RUNKEY,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK,PRINT_BYEBYE
617
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
WINNT40=COMMON_SET,WNT_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WNT40_A DD_RUNKEY,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK,PRINT_BYEBYE WINNT35=COMMON_SET,WNT_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WNT35_A DD_RUNKEY,PRINT_BYEBYE WINDOWS95=COMMON_SET,W95_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WINDO WS95_UPDATE_START,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK,PRINT_BYEBYE WINDOWS98=COMMON_SET,W95_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WINDO WS95_UPDATE_START,WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK,PRINT_BYEBYE WINDOWS31=COMMON_SET,W31_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,WINDO WS_UPDATE_START,PRINT_BYEBYE DOS=COMMON_SET,DOS_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,DOS_UPDATE_ START,PRINT_BYEBYE OS2=COMMON_SET,OS2_PRELIMINARY_SET,COPY_FILES,UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG,OS2_UPDATE_ START,PRINT_BYEBYE DEFAULT=
; ========================================================================== ; Common Actions ; ======================================================================== ; ; define variables for reinstallation if OldDir is defined ; [COMMON_SET] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=6 ENUM1=SET_OLD_W95_INI ENUM2=SET_OLD_W31_INI ENUM3=SET_OLD_autoexec ENUM4=SET_OLD_winnt_key ENUM5=SET_OLD_WIN_INI_RUN ENUM6=SET_OLD_OS2_START_KEY CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=FALSE [SET_OLD_W95_INI] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=scan_run_win95 VAL=%OldDir%\agent32.exe [SET_OLD_W31_INI] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=scan_run_win31 VAL=%OldDir%\agent31.exe [SET_OLD_AUTOEXEC] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=scan_run_autoexec VAL=%OldDir%\win31col.Exe [SET_OLD_winnt_key] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=scan_run_key VAL=%OldDir%\agentnt.Exe [SET_OLD_WIN_INI_RUN] TYPE=ACTION
618
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
ACTION=SET VAR=old_win_ini_run VAL=$READINI(%windows%\win.ini,windows,run) [SET_OLD_OS2_START_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=old_os2_startup_line VAL=%OldDir%\startag.Exe ; ; copy files ; [COPY_FILES] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=12 ENUM1=PRINT_COPY_FILES_KB ENUM2=COPY_FILES_KBDATA ENUM3=PRINT_COPY_FILES_INTERFACE ENUM4=COPY_FILES_INTERFACE ENUM5=PRINT_COPY_BIN_FILES ENUM6=COPY_BIN_FILES ENUM7=PRINT_Copy_CFG_FILES ENUM8=Copy_CFG_FILES ENUM9=Copy_COMMON_FILES ENUM10=PRINT_COPY_NBM_FILE ENUM11=UPDATE_NBM ENUM12=RENAME_NBM ; kbdata [COPY_FILES_KBDATA] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=COPY SOURCE=%SourceDir%\pool\kbdata\ DESTINATION=%TargetDir%\data\ MODULES=*.* [Copy_COMMON_FILES] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=COPY SOURCE=%SourceDir%\bin\common\ DESTINATION=%TargetDir%\data\ MODULES=*.* [PRINT_COPY_FILES_KB] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Copy knowledge base files ; interface [COPY_FILES_INTERFACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=COPY SOURCE=%Sourcedir%\bin\interf\ DESTINATION=%TargetDir%\bin\ MODULES=*.* CONDITION=%IncludeInterface%=TRUE [PRINT_COPY_FILES_INTERFACE] TYPE=ACTION
619
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Copy inventorist interface files
; executable [Copy_BIN_FILES] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=COPY SOURCE=%sourcedir%\bin\%PlatformDir%\ DESTINATION=%TargetDir%\bin\ MODULES=*.* CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%PlatformDir%)=FALSE [PRINT_COPY_BIN_FILES] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Copy executable files ; netbird.Cfg [Copy_CFG_FILES] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=COPY DESTINATION=%TargetDir%\data\ MODULES=netbird.Cfg SOURCE=%sourcedir%\etc\ [PRINT_COPY_CFG_FILES] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Copy netbird.cfg file ; ; Update netbird.cfg file ; [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=4 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_CFG ENUM2=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_LOCALPATH ENUM3=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_OUTPUTNAME ENUM4=UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_SERVERPATH [PRINT_UPDATE_CFG] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Update netbird.cfg file [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_OUTPUTNAME] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%OutName% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=OUTPUTNAME FILE=%TargetDir%\data\netbird.Cfg [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_LOCALPATH] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI
620
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=clientpath FILE=%TargetDir%\data\netbird.Cfg [UPDATE_NETBIRD_CFG_SERVERPATH] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%NetbirdPool% SECTION=SYSTEM KEY=SERVERPATH FILE=%TargetDir%\data\netbird.Cfg
; ; Final message ; [PRINT_BYEBYE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Installation complete ; Update Windows 3.1X & Win95 startup files
[WINDOWS_UPDATE_START] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=6 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_START ENUM2=SET_OLD_WIN_INI_RUN_1 ENUM3=SET_OLD_WIN_INI_RUN_2 ENUM4=W31_UPDATE_WIN_INI_REPLACE ENUM5=WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_REPLACE ENUM6=WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_ADD [WINDOWS95_UPDATE_START] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=6 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_START ENUM2=PRINT_UPDATE_REG ENUM3=W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE ENUM4=W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE_REPLACE ENUM5=W95_UPDATE_WIN_INI_REPLACE ENUM6=WINDOWS_DELETE_AUTOEXEC_BAT ; recover old "run" line [SET_OLD_WIN_INI_RUN_1] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=old_win_ini VAL=$READINI(%windows%\win.ini,WINDOWS,RUN) ; Add a comma [SET_OLD_WIN_INI_RUN_2] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=old_win_ini_run
621
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
VAL=%old_win_ini%, CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%old_win_ini%)=FALSE [W95_UPDATE_WIN_INI_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI FILE=%WINDOWS%\WIN.ini SECTION=WINDOWS KEY=RUN METHOD=TOKEN SCAN=%scan_run_win95% REPLACE= CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=FALSE CASE=OFF [WINDOWS_DELETE_AUTOEXEC_BAT] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=%scan_run_autoexec% REPLACE= FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=FALSE
; ========================================================================== ; Set 'AGENT32.ExE' in registry base ; ========================================================================== ; ---------; Windows 95 ; ---------[W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run VALUE=Netbird SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\agent32.exe CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=win95,AND,$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=TRUE
[W95_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run VALUE=Netbird SCAN=$READREG(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\R un,Netbird) REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\agent32.exe CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=win95,AND,$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=FALSE
; ========================================================================== ; Updating of AGENT32.EXE key in Registry complete ; ==========================================================================
622
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
[W31_UPDATE_WIN_INI_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI FILE=%WINDOWS%\WIN.ini SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles SECTION=WINDOWS KEY=RUN SCAN=%scan_run_win31% NOTFOUND=W31_UPDATE_WIN_INI_ADD REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\agent31.Exe METHOD=TOKEN CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=win31 [W31_UPDATE_WIN_INI_ADD] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEINI SCAN= REPLACE=%old_win_ini_run%%TargetDir%\bin\agent31.Exe FILE=%WINDOWS%\WIN.ini SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles SECTION=WINDOWS KEY=RUN CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=win31 [WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=%scan_run_autoexec% REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\win31col.Exe FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=FALSE NOTFOUND=WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_ADD_NEW [WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_ADD] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=win31col.exe REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\win31col.exe FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=TRUE NOTFOUND=WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_ADD_NEW [WINDOWS_UPDATE_AUTOEXEC_BAT_ADD_NEW] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\win31col.Exe FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=INSERT CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles [PRINT_UPDATE_START] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Update startup files
623
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
; ========================================================================== ; Specialised actions by platform ; ========================================================================== ; ---------; Windows NT ; ----------
[WNT_PRELIMINARY_SET] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAL=winnt VAR=PlatformDir [PRINT_UPDATE_REG] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Update Registry ; ; == NT 3.51 == ;
[WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=4 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_REG ENUM2=WNT35_SET_OLD_RUN_KEY ENUM3=WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_REPLACE ENUM4=WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_ADD [WNT35_SET_OLD_RUN_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAR=old_run_reg_key VAL=$READREG(HKEY_CURRENT_USER,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\ Windows,Run) [WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CURRENT_USER SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\WIndows VALUE=Run SCAN=%scan_run_key% REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\agentnt.exe METHOD=TOKEN SEPARATOR=SPACE CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=winnt,AND,$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=FALSE [WNT35_ADD_RUNKEY_ADD] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CURRENT_USER SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\WIndows VALUE=Run SCAN=%old_run_reg_key% REPLACE=%old_run_reg_key% %TargetDir%\bin\agentnt.exe
624
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
METHOD=TOKEN SEPARATOR=SPACE CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=winnt,AND,$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=TRUE ; ; == NT 4.0 == ; [WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=3 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_REG ENUM2=WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE ENUM3=WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE_REPLACE [WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run VALUE=Netbird SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\agentnt.exe CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=winnt,AND,$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=TRUE
[WNT40_ADD_RUNKEY_VALUE_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SUBKEY=SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Run VALUE=Netbird SCAN=$READREG(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\R un,Netbird) REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\agentnt.exe CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=winnt,AND,$ISEMPTY(%scan_run_key%)=FALSE
; ---------; Windows 95 ; ----------
[W95_PRELIMINARY_SET] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAL=win95 VAR=PlatformDir
; -----------; Windows 3.1X ; ------------
[W31_PRELIMINARY_SET] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAL=win31 VAR=PlatformDir
625
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
; --; DOS ; --[DOS_PRELIMINARY_SET] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAL=dos VAR=PlatformDir [DOS_UPDATE_START] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=3 ENUM1=PRINT_UPDATE_START ENUM2=DOS_UPDATE_START_REPLACE ENUM3=DOS_UPDATE_START_ADD
[DOS_UPDATE_START_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=%OldDir%\nbcdos.exe REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\nbcdos.Exe FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=dos,AND,$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=FALSE NOTFOUND=DOS_UPDATE_START_ADD_NEW [DOS_UPDATE_START_ADD] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=nbcdos.exe REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\nbcdos.exe FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=dos,AND,$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=TRUE NOTFOUND=DOS_UPDATE_START_ADD_NEW [DOS_UPDATE_START_ADD_NEW] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\nbcdos.Exe FILE=c:\autoexec.bat METHOD=INSERT CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=dos ; ------; OS/2 ; -------
[OS2_PRELIMINARY_SET] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=SET VAL=os2
626
Appendix B - NBS Scripts
VAR=PlatformDir [OS2_UPDATE_START] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=2 ENUM1=OS2_UPDATE_START_REPLACE ENUM2=OS2_UPDATE_START_ADD
[OS2_UPDATE_START_REPLACE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=%OldDir%\startag.exe REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\startag.exe FILE=c:\startup.cmd METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=os2,AND,$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=FALSE NOTFOUND=OS2_UPDATE_START_ADD_NEW [OS2_UPDATE_START_ADD] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN=startag.exe REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\startag.exe FILE=c:\startup.cmd METHOD=TOKEN CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=os2,AND,$ISEMPTY(%OldDir%)=TRUE NOTFOUND=OS2_UPDATE_START_ADD_NEW [OS2_UPDATE_START_ADD_NEW] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATETXT SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\startag.exe FILE=c:\startup.cmd METHOD=INSERT CASE=OFF SAVEDIR=%TargetDir%\sysfiles CONDITION=%PlatformDir%=os2 ; ; DEBUG TOOLS ; [PRINT_DEBUG] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=2 ENUM1=PRINT_COMPUTERNAME ENUM2=PRINT_TARGETDIR
[PRINT_COMPUTERNAME] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE= Computername is %computername% [PRINT_TARGETDIR] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT
627
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
MESSAGE= TargetDir is
%TargetDir%
[PRINT_COPY_NBM_FILE] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=PRINT MESSAGE=Copy MASTER.NBM file [UPDATE_NBM] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=COPY SOURCE=%SourceDir%\pool\ DESTINATION=%TargetDir%\data\ MODULES=master.nbm [RENAME_NBM] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=RENAME SOURCE=%TargetDir%\data\ OLDNAME=MASTER.NBM NEWNAME=%OutName%.NBM
[WINDOWS_ADD_ODF_LINK] TYPE=ENUM NBENUM=3 ENUM1=WINDOWS_ADD_DOT_ODF_KEY ENUM2=WINDOWS_ADD_ODFFILE_KEY ENUM3=WINDOWS_ADD_ODFICON_KEY [WINDOWS_ADD_DOT_ODF_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT SUBKEY=.odf VALUE= SCAN= REPLACE=odffile CONDITION= [WINDOWS_ADD_ODFFILE_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT SUBKEY=odffile\shell\open\command VALUE= SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\interwin.exe -ODF=%%1 CONDITION= [WINDOWS_ADD_ODFICON_KEY] TYPE=ACTION ACTION=UPDATEREG MAINKEY=HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT SUBKEY=odffile\DefaultIcon VALUE= SCAN= REPLACE=%TargetDir%\bin\interwin.exe CONDITION=
628
Appendix C
C
TrackBird Software Distribution Module Error Messages
Appendix C:
List of potential Profile Log error messages resulting from failed package installation: Error N° Error Message
Error Type
Error 1
Invalid HTTP line
Internal Error : Incorrect URL
Error 2
Invalid read/write command
Internal Error : Error in client agent
Error 3
Error occurred during query
Internal Error
Error 4
File not found after download
Internal Error
Error 5
Invalid CRC32 after download
Internal Error
Error 6
START LOAD*: Invalid answer
Internal Error
Error 7
START LOAD*: Invalid answer buffer
Internal Error : request result invalid
Error 8
START LOAD*: Package not ready
Warning : Secondary server or distribution server has not yet received package
Error 9
START LOAD*: Access denied
Warning : the connection pool was full or the attempt to load took place outside the interval defined in the Profile Scheduler tab.
Error 10
START LOAD*: File not found
Internal Error
Error 11
START LOAD*: Invalid answer buffer data
Internal Error
Error 12
File not found on primary server
Internal Error or User Error : the package was not built
629
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
630
Error N° Error Message
Error Type
Error 13
Client workstation is not compatible with the selected OS
User Warning : the target client workstation does not have a compatible operating system
Error 14
Unknown error
Internal Error
Error 15
START LOAD: Invalid HTTP line
Internal Error
Error 16
START INSTALL: Invalid HTTP line
Internal Error
Error 17
START INSTALL**: Access to package denied
Warning : the connection pool was full or the attempt to load took place outside the interval defined in the Profile Scheduler tab.
Error 18
START INSTALL**: Invalid answer buffer data
Internal Error
Error 19
START INSTALL**: Invalid answer buffer
Internal Error
Error 20
START INSTALL**: Invalid answer
TrackBird package : unknown file type
Error 21
TrackBird package : unknown file type
Error 22
TrackBird package : unpacking failed
Error 23
TrackBird package : end of file not found
Error 24
TrackBird package : error while writing to disk
Error 25
TrackBird package : packing failed
Error 26
TrackBird package : end of file found
Error 27
TrackBird package : source file not found
Error 28
TrackBird package : target file not found
Error 29
TrackBird package : invalid archive
Error 30
TrackBird package : file name not found in archive
Error 31
TrackBird package : CRC32 not found in archive
Error 32
TrackBird package : CRC32 check failed
Appendix C - TrackBird Software Distribution Module Error Messages
Error N° Error Message Error 33
TrackBird package : can't allocate memory
Error 34
TrackBird package : package opened
Error 35
TrackBird package : package closed
Error 36
TrackBird package : Unicode isn't supported on this system
Error 37
TrackBird package : invalid file name
Error 38
TrackBird package : null pointer found
Error 39
TrackBird package : invalid operating system
Error 40
TrackBird package : error during file execution
Error 41
TrackBird package : invalid command
Error 42
Can't start install. File not found.
Error 43
Shared folder mode : invalid UNC path
Error 44
Launch process : invalid parameter
Error 45
Launch process : memory error
Error 46
Launch process : Windows NT only
Error 47
Launch process : internal error
Error 48
Launch process : user logon error
Error 49
Launch process : launch error
Error 50
TrackBird server mode : invalid UNC path
Error 51
Empty password
Error 52
Unknown installation mode
Error 53
Session option does not exist
Error 54
Memory allocation error
Error 55
Empty tasks file
Error 56
Read file error
Error Type
631
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Error N° Error Message
632
Error 57
Invalid TLAP line format
Error 58
Can't copy package file
Error 59
Can't copy tasks file
Error 60
Write file error
Error 61
CRC32 error
Error 62
Can't copy 'ptcoll.cgf' file
Error 63
Can't copy 'crcfile.cfg' file
Error 64
No server has been found in configuration
Error 65
Can't copy old package file
Error 66
Can't copy 'components.cfg' file
Error 67
Can't unpack installer file
Error 68
CRC32 error with 'crcfile.cfg' file
Error 69
CRC32 error with 'ptcoll.cfg' file
Error 70
URL error
Error 71
Script data error
Error 72
Download error
Error 73
CRC32 download error
Error 74
Error while copying to old folder
Error 75
Error while parsing 'crcfile.cfg' file
Error 76
Data error in script answer
Error 77
Invalid environment variable
Error 78
Session required but no session opened found
Error Type
Appendix C - TrackBird Software Distribution Module Error Messages
Note:
* START LOAD: The client agent queries TrackBird IP Server as to whether there are new packages to install. ** START INSTALL: The client agent requests TrackBird IP Server if package installation can take place on the client.
633
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
634
Index
Symbols (Gateway) 569 .nbc file (TrackBird SNMP) 516 .nbn file (TrackBird SNMP) 516 A Abort processing if errors check box 554, 556 Action menu 537 Action menu (TrackBird Explorer) 232 Activated check box 554, 556 Activated option (TrackBird Gateway, Destinations screen) 557 Add Alias button adding an InterBase alias 2 adding an Oracle alias 5 adding an SQL Server alias 7 Add Data Dictionary button (TrackBird Gateway) 547 Add Data Dictionary command 536, 547 Add data dictionary record 551 Add data source 547 Add database 542 Add Database command 536, 542 Add database connection 542 Add destination 554 Add Destination command 536, 554 Add Field button 551 Add NetBird Query command 536, 547 Add query field 547 Add Row command 536 Add SQL query 547 Add SQL Query button (TrackBird Gateway) 547 Add SQL Query command 536, 547 Add TrackBird query 547 Add TrackBird Query button (TrackBird Gateway) 547 Add TrackBird query field 547 Add Transformation command 536 Adding button to form (Designer) 468 caption to form (Designer) 470 category or subcategory 62 chart to a report (ReportBuilder) 301 collection point 173 collection point IP range 179
columns to a list query (Repository Explorer) 328 component to a report (ReportBuilder) 298 data dictionary field (TrackBird Gateway) 551 data dictionary record (TrackBird Gateway) 551 data series to a chart (ReportBuilder) 303 data source (TrackBird Gateway) 547 data to a workstation 13 data-based calculation to a report (ReportBuilder) 298 dataset to a chart (ReportBuilder) 306 DataSetGloss object to form (Designer) 465 date or time to a report (ReportBuilder) 299 destination (TrackBird Gateway) 554 destination field row (Gateway) 558 feature to an item 62 file name to a report (ReportBuilder) 300 folder to collection options list (IP Administration) 213 glossary data to form (Designer) 465 glossary drop list to form (Designer) 466 group 170 InterBase alias 2 Add Alias button 2 Database Alias field 2 Database Path box 3 InterBase radio button 2 Local radio button 3 Password field 8 Remote radio button 3 Test Connection button 8 User field 8 workstation name 3 IP range (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 519 item to a category or subcategory 62 link between SNMP and TrackBird features 524
635
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
mapped source-destination field pair (Gateway) 558 NBButton object to form (Designer) 468 NBGloss object to form (Designer) 466 NBLabel object to form (Designer) 470 odf file 209 Oracle alias Add Alias button 5 Oracle radio button 6 Password field 8 SQL*Net Alias box 6 Test Connection button 8 User field 8 Oracle database alias 5 page number to a report (ReportBuilder) 301 query field (TrackBird Gateway) 547 SQL Server alias 7 Add Alias button 7 Database Alias field 7 Database Type box 7 InterBase radio button 7 Password field 8 Test Connection button 8 User field 8 total number of pages to a report (ReportBuilder) 301 transformation (Gateway) 562 Adding a database alias Database Aliases screen 1, 9 Adding:category condition (Policy) 359, 362–363 Adding:condition based on category (Policy) 367 Adding:condition based on feature (Policy) 364 Adding:condition based on glossary (Policy) 365 Adding:folder (Policy) 358 Adding:value to category detail element (Policy) 369 Additional tab, Components bar (Designer) 318 administration machine names 136 Administration, switches 530 Advanced components (ReportBuilder) 295 Advanced Mode command (Designer) 456 Agent parameters (IP Administration Refresh Interval field 210 Agent parameters (IP Administration)
636
Delay Before Collector Start field 210 Time Section field 211 alert 346 alerts 217 Alerts screen 386 alias adding an Oracle database with the client 5 adding to Oracle database without client 3 Alias administration 1 Alias field 542 Alias list editing an SQL Server alias 8 TrackBird Server 1, 262 Alias management 1 Align or Space toolbar ReportBuilder 284 Align To Grid option (Designer) 461 Aligning report components (ReportBuilder) 307 Alignment grid, displaying (Designer) 457 Alignment grid, masking (Designer) 457 Alignment Tools command (Designer) 457 Alignment Tools, displaying (Designer) 457 Alignment Tools, masking (Designer) 457 All workstation data deleting 19 Allow insert check box 554, 556 Allow update check box 554, 556 Appearance property category (Designer) 459 Applying TrackBird Explorer filter 237 architecture overview 595 AsBoolean property (Gateway) 568 AsDateTime property (Gateway) 568 AsFloat property (Gateway) 568 ASG-Unified Management Architecture 595 AsInteger property (Gateway) 568 AsString property (Gateway) 568 At field (Collector SNMP configuration) 521 Audit end date (software use) (IP Administration, Monitoring parameters) 201 end date (software use) (Monitoring) 443 Restrictions field (software use) (Monitoring) 443 start date (software use) (IP Administration, Monitoring parameters) 201
Index
start date (software use) (Monitoring) 443 Audit (software use) End field (Monitoring) 445 Restrictions field (Monitoring) 446 start date (Monitoring) 445 Authorized Times field (Collector SNMP configuration) 521 Automatic Alignment option (Designer) 461 Automatic IP Installation option (TrackBird Explorer) 242 Automatic update mode (Glossaries) 116 Automatically Reopen Last Edited Project option (Designer) 461 AutoSize property (ReportBuilder) 295 Available Database Connections list deleting a database alias 10 editing a database alias 9 Available Items Without Correspondence field 116 B Band height, changing (ReportBuilder) 308 BarCode component (ReportBuilder) 295 Basics 534 Begin Audit field (software use audit) (Monitoring parameters, IP Administration) 201 Begin Audit field (software use audit) (Monitoring) 443 Begin field (software use audit) 50 Begin field (software use audit) (Monitoring) 445 Behavior property category (Designer) 459 Bring To Front property (ReportBuilder) 296 Browsing SNMP and TrackBird feature links 527 By Interval query expression 27, 341 By Value query expression 27, 341 C C column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Calculate statistics in a TrackBird query 547 Categories (Policy):definition 347 Categories command (Policy) 347 Categories Definition tab (Policy) 362 Categories Display tab (Policy) 368 Categories Preview tab (Policy) 370–371 Categories toolbar (Policy) 351 Category adding 62
renaming 67 category 345 Category & local rule tree 348 Category condition:adding (Policy) 359, 362–363 Category icon changing 66, 69 Category properties defining 14 Category Properties screen General tab 66, 68 Platform tab 67 Visible check box 67, 75 Category Properties screen Visible check box 81 Category:deleting (Policy) 356 Category-based condition, adding (Policy) 367 Change a category’s icon 69 Change Icon dialog 66, 69, 78 Change the field label in a TrackBird query 547 Change the field order in a TrackBird query 547 Changes, saving unchanged (Policy) 356 Changing band height (ReportBuilder) 308 component size (ReportBuilder) 310 feature icon 78 report component properties (ReportBuilder) 309 Changing a category’s icon 66 Chart, adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 301 Chart, editing (ReportBuilder) 302 Checking entered data in TrackBird Server (Designer) 473 Clearing TrackBird Explorer filter 238 Client workstation installation options (IP Administration) 173 Code Editor window (Gateway) 567, 569 Collection Frequency field (Collector SNMP configuration) 521 Collection point adding 173 Collection point field (Collector SNMP configuration) 518 Collection point IP range adding 179 deleting 181 modifying 180 Collection Point parameters (IP Administration)
637
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Name field 174 Use Glossary option 176 Collection Point(s) tab Environment Options dialog (Designer) 463 Collection point, definition 163, 172 Collection points updating (Monitoring) 447 Column deleting in a list query 33 deleting in a list query (Repository Explorer) 328 moving in a list query 33 moving in a list query (Repository Explorer) 329 Command Line field (Designer) 463 Comment column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Community field (Collector SNMP configuration) 520 Component properties (ReportBuilder) 295 Component properties, changing (Report Builder) 309 Components deleting (ReportBuilder) 311 moving (ReportBuilder) 311 resizing (ReportBuilder) 310 Components (ReportBuilder) 289 Components bar Additional tab (Designer) 318 Standard tab (Designer) 318 TrackBird tab (Designer) 318 Win32 tab (Designer) 318 Concepts collection points 172 Gateway script 534 groups 169 SNMP 515 TrackBird Designer 453 TrackBird Gateway 533 Concepts:TrackBird Policy 345 Condition based on category, adding (Policy) 367 Condition based on feature, adding (Policy) 364 Condition based on glossary, adding (Policy) 365 Configuration command (IP Administration) 159 Configuration screen (IP Administration), displaying 160 Configuration tab, Switches screen 530 Configuring group 170 primary server 165
638
secondary server 167 secondary servers 165 server 165 Connection options deleting all (TrackBird Explorer) 252 Connection Pool in Profiles (TrackBird Server) 424 in TrackBird IP Server 395 priority field 406 Consequence tab 378 consequences 346 Contextual menus 536 definition 11 displaying 11 Contextual menus (TrackBird Gateway) 536 Control Panels button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 215 conventions page xi Coordinates property category (Designer) 459 Copy button (Repository Explorer) 260 Copy command 536 counters monitoring 217 Creating dialog manually (Designer) 464 folder, query, form or report (Repository Explorer) 263 list query 33 report 43 TrackBird Explorer filter 237 tree query 25, 339 Creating entry fields in the database (Designer) 454 Criteria deleting in a list query 36 deleting in a list query (Repository Explorer) 333 editing in a list query (Repository Explorer) 329 editing manually in a list query 35 editing manually in a list query (Repository Explorer) 331 list query (Repository Explorer) 329 tree queries 26, 340 using a wizard to edit in a list query 33, 329 Customized interface (IP Administration), displaying 209 customizing TrackBird Web Home page 585 Cut command 536
Index
D Data adding to a workstation 13 Data Components toolbar ReportBuilder 275 Data dictionaries 547, 551 Data dictionary adding a field (TrackBird Gateway) 551 adding a record (TrackBird Gateway) 551 deleting a record (TrackBird Gateway) 552 editing (TrackBird Gateway) 551 editing a record (TrackBird Gateway) 552 navigating between records (TrackBird Gateway) 551 renaming (TrackBird Gateway) 551 Data dictionary logic diagram (TrackBird Gateway) 546 Data menu ReportBuilder 273 Data property category (Designer) 459 Data series, adding to a chart (ReportBuilder) 303 Data series, editing in a chart (ReportBuilder) 304 Data source adding (TrackBird Gateway) 547 deleting (TrackBird Gateway) 552 Data sources 542, 547, 551 Data Sources button (TrackBird Gateway) 544 Data Sources/Destinations structure tree (TrackBird Gateway) 536 Data Tree toolbar ReportBuilder 277 Database alias 153 production database 153 database TrackBird Web connecting 584 disconnecting 594 Database alias deleting 9 editing 8 Database Alias field adding an Interbase alias 2 adding an SQL Server alias 7 Database Alias parameters (IP Administration, Import parameters) 172
Database Aliases screen adding a database alias 1, 9 deleting a database alias 1, 9 editing a database alias 1, 8–9 Database connection field 542 Database Connection field (TrackBird Gateway) 543 Database connection, deleting (TrackBird Gateway) 544 Database Path box adding an InterBase alias 3 Database Type box adding an SQL Server alias 7 Data-based calculation, adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 298 DataField property (ReportBuilder) 296 DataPipeline property (ReportBuilder) 296 Dataset, adding to a chart (ReportBuilder) 306 DataSetGloss button (Designer) 458 DataSetGloss object adding to form (Designer) 465 DataSetInstance button (Designer) 458 DataSource defining (Designer) 465 DataSource button (Designer) 458 Date or time, adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 299 Day options (Collector SNMP configuration) 521 DBBarCode component (ReportBuilder) 293 DBCalc component (ReportBuilder) 292 DBChart component (ReportBuilder) 293 DBImage component (ReportBuilder) 292 DBMemo component (ReportBuilder) 290 DBRichText component (ReportBuilder) 291 DBText component (ReportBuilder) 290 Default installation folder Linux client 174 Mac OS 10.x client 174 Mac OS 8.1 - 9X client 174 Windows 9x client 174 Windows NT client 174 Default password TrackBird database 1, 262 Default user name TrackBird database 1, 262 Defining category, subcategory, item or feature properties 14 feature type 79 feature’s units of measurement 79
639
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Defining a DataSource (Designer) 465 Definition tab 362 Definition tab, Categories (Policy) 362 Definitions collection point 163, 172 contextual menus 11 forms 12 list queries 29 menu bar 10 MIB file 515 primary server 164 report bands 313 reports 42 SNMP 515 TrackBird function 10 TrackBird server 164 tree queries 24 Definitions:categories (Policy) 347 Delay Before Collector Start field (IP Administration, Agent parameters) 210 Delete Alias button Deleting a database alias 10 Delete button (Repository Explorer) 260 Delete command 536 Delete command (Repository Explorer) 259 Delete Data Dictionary command 536 Delete data dictionary record 551 Delete Database command 536 Delete Query command 536 Delete query field 547 Delete setup files 423 Delete TrackBird query field 547 Deleting all data relating to a workstation 19 collection point IP range 181 component (ReportBuilder) 311 data dictionary record (TrackBird Gateway) 552 data source (TrackBird Gateway) 552 database connection (TrackBird Gateway) 544 destination (Gateway) 567 group 172 IP range (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 519 link between SNMP and TrackBird features 527 list query column 33 list query column (Repository Explorer) 328 list query criteria 36 list query criteria (Repository Explorer) 333
640
query 42 row (Gateway) 567 temporary tables after database scripts are run (TrackBird Gateway) 539 TrackBird Explorer filter 239 transformation (Gateway) 567 tree query criteria 28, 342 tree query line 26, 340 workstation related data 19 Deleting a database alias 9–10 Database Aliases screen 1, 9 Delete Alias button 10 Deleting:category (Policy) 356 Deleting:folder (Policy) 356 Deleting:rule (Policy) 385 Delimiter field (Glossary Create from File) 123 Deploying clients via IP (TrackBird Explorer) 242 Description 407 Description field 554, 556 Designer screen (Designer) 456 Designing a custom interface (Designer) 455 Destination adding (TrackBird Gateway) 554 deleting (Gateway) 567 editing (TrackBird Gateway) 556 Destination field row adding (Gateway) 558 editing (Gateway) 560 Destination table field 554, 556 Destinations 554 DestinationValue object (Gateway) 568 Dialog, creating manually (Designer) 464 Dialogs Tree query criteria 26, 341 Display Grid command (Designer) 457 Display logged information 542 Display tab 368 Item Properties screen 70 Display tab (TrackBird Explorer) 240 Display tab, Categories (Policy) 368 DisplayFormat property (ReportBuilder) 296 Displaying additional objects for use in interface (Designer) 456 alignment grid (Designer) 457 Alignment Tools (Designer) 457 all records in the software glossary 91 customized interface (IP Administration) 209
Index
explanatory information on a feature 81 feature 79 feature for specific platforms 81 form (Designer) 457 Glossary Management screen 102 item 69 item for specific platforms 74 links between SNMP and TrackBird features 525 Log file screen (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Object Properties window (Designer) 457 Parameters screen (TrackBird Gateway) 538 query results (Repository Explorer) 325 report 43 report (ReportBuilder) 315 report (Repository Explorer) 315 report bands (ReportBuilder) 313 ReportBuilder toolbars 274 software audit results (Monitoring) 448 TrackBird structure tree (SMTP Administration) 525 TrackBird Structure window (Designer) 456 tree query results (Repository Explorer) 326 Displaying a contextual menu 11 Displaying logged information (TrackBird Gateway) 542 Displaying:existing ruleÕs results (Policy) 385 Distribution modes, functioning mode 1 - Send package to client 393 mode 2 - Install from a shared directory 393, 406 mode 3 - Install from a distribution server directory 394 Distribution modes, selection local folder 418, 421 mode 1 - Send package to client 418 mode 2 - Install from a shared directory 419 mode 3 - Install from a distribution server directory 420 setup file’s source path 420–421 temporary folder 419 Domain removing (TrackBird Explorer) 254 Draw toolbar
ReportBuilder 283 Drop and create table before execution check box 554, 556 Drop Temporary Tables After Execution option (TrackBird Gateway) 539 E Edit Alias button editing a database alias 9 Edit data dictionary 551 Edit data dictionary record 551 Edit destination 556 Edit menu ReportBuilder 271 TrackBird Gateway 537 Edit Query button 547 Edit Query button (TrackBird Gateway) 547 Edit Query command 536 Edit query field 547 Edit toolbar ReportBuilder 282 Edit TrackBird query 547 Edit TrackBird query field 547 Editing chart (ReportBuilder) 302 chart data series (ReportBuilder) 304 data dictionary (TrackBird Gateway) 551 data dictionary record (TrackBird Gateway) 552 database alias 8–9 Database Aliases screen 8 Database aliases screen 8 database connection (TrackBird Gateway) 543 destination (TrackBird Gateway) 556 destination field row (Gateway) 560 feature value Select From Glossary button 18 list queries 32 list query criteria (Repository Explorer) 329 list query criteria manually 35 list query criteria manually (Repository Explorer) 331 query field (TrackBird Gateway) 548 report (ReportBuilder) 298 SQL query (TrackBird Gateway) 549 SQL Server alias Alias list 8 TrackBird query (TrackBird Gateway) 547 transformation (Gateway) 565
641
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
tree queries 25, 339 tree query criteria Tree query editing criteria 26, 340 Editing a database alias Database Aliases screen 1, 8–9 Delete Alias button 9 Editing list query criteria using the wizard 33, 329 Editing:value in category detail element (Policy) 369 Enabled check box, IP Ranges tab (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 519 End Audit field (software use audit) (Monitoring parameters, IP Administration) 201 End Audit field (software use audit) (Monitoring) 443 End box, IP Ranges tab (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 519 End field (software use audit) 50 End field (software use audit) (Monitoring) 445 Entry field hierarchy (Designer) 457 Environment Options dialog General tab (Designer) 461, 463 Interpreter tab (Designer) 462 Environment Options option (Designer) 461 Environment parameters, setting (Designer) 460 Error messages 437 package build summary 409 package transfer/installation 412, 436 timeout 424 Every Hours and Minutes field (Collector SNMP configuration) 521 Example scripts (Gateway) 570 Example tree query 28, 342 Exclude a field from a TrackBird query's output 547 Executable field (Designer) 462 Executable file 406 Executable, specifying file and location (Designer) 462 Execute Audit field (software use audit) (Monitoring) 443 Exit command (IP Administration) 159 Exit command (Repository Explorer) 259 Expiry Date field (Account) 125 Expiry Date field (Password) 125 Explanation displaying on a feature 81
642
Explanation tab Feature Properties screen 81 Exporting query results (Repository Explorer) 325 Extensions button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 215 External field link tab 82 External Result Files Group Prefix field (IP Administration, Group parameters) 171 F Fast By Attributes button (IP Administration, Linux Options parameters) 217 Feature adding to an item 62 displaying or hiding for specific platforms 81 displaying or hiding in the structure tree 79 renaming 78 Feature icon changing 78 Feature Not Visible In Tree check box 79 Feature properties defining 14 External field link 82 setting 77 Feature Properties screen 77 Feature Not Visible In Tree check box 79 Icon button 78 Type tab 79 Units field 79 Feature Properties screen Explanation tab 81 Feature Properties screen General tab 77 Feature Properties screen Platform tab 80 Feature Table linked tab external item 76 Feature type defining 79 Feature-based category condition, adding (Policy) 364 Field deleting from a query (TrackBird Gateway) 549 Field mapping (Gateway) 558, 560 FieldByName("Source Query Field Name") property, SourceQuery object (Gateway) 569
Index
Fieldcount property, SourceQuery object (Gateway) 569 File details TrackBird Gateway 611 TrackBird IP 610 TrackBird Server 609 File menu ReportBuilder 270 TrackBird Gateway 536 File menu (IP Administration) 159, 259 File menu (TrackBird Explorer) 232 File name, adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 300 Filename extensions Repository Explorer 608 TrackBird Designer 608 TrackBird Gateway 608 TrackBird Server 607 Filter defining or modifying to restrict files included in software information collection from a folder (IP Administration) 214 Filtering TrackBird Explorer information 237 Filtering software glossary information 90 Filtering which TrackBird database records are processed (TrackBird Gateway) 540 Filters applying in TrackBird Explorer 237 clearing in TrackBird Explorer 238 creating a TrackBird Explorer 237 deleting in TrackBird Explorer 239 HTML syntax (IP Administration) 214 renaming in TrackBird Explorer 238 First Line as Column Name check box (Glossary Create from File) 123 Folder adding to collection options list (IP Administration) 213 creating (Repository Explorer) 263 exporting (Repository Explorer) 263 importing (Repository Explorer) 262 Folder field (IP Administration, Import parameters) 172 Folder Options parameters (IP Administration) removing folder from list 214 Folder:adding (Policy) 358 Folder:deleting (Policy) 356 Fonts button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 216
Form creating (Repository Explorer) 263 definition 12 using to access workstation data 12 Form command (Designer) 457 Form object (Designer) description 475 example of use 477 properties 475 Form, displaying (Designer) 457 Form, masking (Designer) 457 Format toolbar ReportBuilder 280 Frequency tab, TrackBird Collector SNMP configuration 520 Frequency tab, TrackBird SNMP Collector configuration At field 521 Authorized Times field 521 Collection Frequency field 521 Day options 521 Every Hours and Minutes field 521 Function running 10 G Gateway alias name field 542 Gateway Alias Name field (TrackBird Gateway) 543 Gateway screen 535 Gateway script concepts 534 Gateway script examples 570 concatenating fields 574 mapping one table with another 570 merging tables and fields 572 using a data dictionary 575 using a temporary table 578 General tab Category Properties screen 66, 68 Environment Options dialog (Designer) 461 Feature Properties screen 77 Item properties screen 68 Get Full SNMP Agent Tree option (Collector SNMP configuration) 518 Global rule tree 348 global rules 373 global variables 154 Glossaries Update tab 116 Available Items Without Correspondence field 116 Glossary Data field 116 Glossary
643
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
selecting workstation related data from 17 Glossary automatic update mode 116 Glossary Create from File Delimiter field 123 First Line as Column Name check box 123 Name field 124 String Delimiter field 123 Glossary Data field 116 Glossary list pane 103 Glossary Management screen displaying 102 Glossary manual update mode 116 Glossary Missing Data field 116 Glossary parameter and data pane 103 Glossary property category (Designer) 459 Glossary Update Mode buttons 116 Glossary update modes 116 Glossary-based condition, adding (Policy) 365 Group adding 170 configuring 170 deleting 172 Grouping records (ReportBuilder) 312 H Hardware Date column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Help displaying on using TrackBird Explorer 256 displaying on using TrackBird Repository Explorer 264 Help menu 538 Help menu (IP Administration) 159 Help menu (Repository Explorer) 259 Hiding feature 79 feature for specific platforms 81 item 69 item for specific platformsItem displaying or hiding for specific platforms 74 report bands (ReportBuilder) 313 ReportBuilder toolbars 274 History tab Item Properties screen 75 Horizontal Grid Pitch field (Designer) 461 HTML code syntax in filters (IP Administration) 214
644
I Icon changing a category’s 66, 69 changing a feature’s 78 Icon button Feature Properties screen 78 Image component (ReportBuilder) 294 Image property category (Designer) 460 Import (IP Administration structure tree) 171 Import parameters (IP Administration) Database Information parameters 172 Folder field 172 Importing manufacturer MIB (SNMP Administration) 528 result files into TrackBird IP Server 171 Incompatible rule type (Policy) 372 Information pane 536 Information pane (TrackBird Gateway) 536 Input property category (Designer) 460 Inserting objects into the interface (Designer) 464 Installation options (IP Administration) client workstations 173 Installation Path column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 installation prerequisites software distribution module 392 Installation setup prerequisites 392 Installation setup program parameters 407 Installation tab (TrackBird Explorer) 242 Installing clients via shared directory (TrackBird Explorer) 242 Installing the TrackBird suite 1 InterBase alias adding 2 InterBase radio button adding an InterBase alias 2 adding an SQL Server alias 7 Interface selecting the type (Designer) 455 TrackBird Explorer 231 TrackBird IP Administration 157 TrackBird Reporting 258 Interface Date column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Interface File field (Designer) 463 Interpreter tab Environment Options dialog (Designer) 462 interwin.exe (Designer) 462 Interwin.odf file 208
Index
Inventory Analysis command 43 IP Address column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 IP address ranges deactivating or reactivating temporarily (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 519 IP Administration displaying help on 162 displaying information on the installed version of 162 IP Administration toolbar 160 IP Administration, Group parameters External Results Files Group Prefix field 171 Knowledge Base Folder field 171 Max Bandwidth Folder field 171 Name field 171 IP Administration, Server parameters IP Service Refresh Interval field 167 Max Bandwidth field 166 Name field 165 Result Files Server Prefix field 166 Server IP Address field 165 TrackBird IP Alias field 166 TrackBird IP Port field 166 URL Path field 166 IP Collection Point column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 IP Group column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 IP mode installing clients in (TrackBird Explorer) 244 IP range adding a collection point’s 179 deleting a collection point’s 181 modifying a collection point’s 180 IP Ranges tab (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) Enabled check box 519 End box 519 Start box 519 IP Ranges tab, TrackBird Collector SNMP configuration 518 IP Ranges tab, TrackBird SNMP Collector configuration Community field 520 Port field 520 Retries field 520 TTL (ms) field 520 Use Default Parameters option 520
IP Service Refresh Interval field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 167 Item adding to a category or subcategory 62 displaying or hiding in the structure tree 69 renaming 69 Item properties defining 14 TB Item linked tab 76 Item Properties screen General tab 68 Item Properties screen Display tab 70 Item Properties screen History tab 75 Item Properties screen Platform tab 74 K Key features and benefits TrackBird Reporting 257 Knowledge base updating on TrackBird clients 229 Knowledge Base Folder field (IP Administration, Group parameters) 171 L Label component (ReportBuilder) 294 Layout of screen elements, changing (Designer) 456 Left pane (TrackBird Gateway) 535 Line component (ReportBuilder) 295 Linked profiles 400, 402, 411, 417, 436 Linking glossaries (Designer) 454 Linking NBGloss objects (Designer) 468 Linking SNMP fields with TrackBird structure tree fields 523 Links adding between SNMP and TrackBird structure trees 524 browsing SNMP and TrackBird feature links 527 deleting between SNMP and TrackBird structure trees 527 displaying list (SMTP Administration) 525 Linux client default installation folder 174 Linux Options parameters (IP Administration) Fast By Attributes button 217
645
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Precise By Data Identification button 217 Retrieve All Unknown Files button 217 Retrieve RPM Packages Installed button 216 Scan Only root Partition button 217 Use Files Installed By RPM button 217 List pane Glossary 103 List queries definition 29 editing 32 list queries displaying and exporting 325 List query adding columns to (Repository Explorer) 328 creating 33 running 31 List query column deleting 33 deleting (Repository Explorer) 328 moving 33 moving (Repository Explorer) 329 List query criteria deleting 36 deleting (Repository Explorer) 333 editing (Repository Explorer) 329 editing manually 35 editing manually (Repository Explorer) 331 editing using the wizard 33, 329 List query criteria (Repository Explorer) 329 List query editor opening 29 List Query Editor Results exporting 39 List Query Editor toolbar (Repository Explorer) 327 list query lines 31 List query toolbar 30 Local radio button adding an InterBase alias 3 local rules 373 Log clearing (TrackBird Explorer) 255 displaying or hiding (TrackBird Explorer) 255 saving as text file (TrackBird Explorer) 255
646
Log content tab 542 Log file 542 Log file button 538 Log file command 538 Log File command (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Log file screen, displaying (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Log filename 407 Log levels 541 Log Levels options (TrackBird Gateway) 541 Log output 541 Log parameters tab 541 Log tab, TrackBird Collector SNMP configuration 521 Login dialog TrackBird Server 1, 262 Login test 152 M M column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Mac OS 10.x client default installation folder 174 Mac OS 8.1 - 9X client default installation folder 174 machine name add a definition 136 machine name administration 136 Macintosh Options parameters (IP Administration) Control Panels button 215 Extensions button 215 Fonts button 216 Plugins button 215 Scan Disk button 215 Scan Folder button 215 Shutdown Items button 216 Startup Items button 216 Main toolbar 10 MaintainAspectRatio property (ReportBuilder) 296 Manual update mode (Glossaries) 116 Manually modifying workstation related data 16 Manufacturer MIB, importing (SNMP Administration) 528 Mapping fields (Gateway) 558, 560 Masking alignment grid (Designer) 457 Alignment Tools (Designer) 457 form (Designer) 457 Object Properties window (Designer) 457
Index
TrackBird Structure window (Designer) 456 Max Bandwidth field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 166 Max Bandwidth Folder field (IP Administration, Group parameters) 171 Memo component (ReportBuilder) 294 Menu bar definition 10 ReportBuilder 270 Menu bar and toolbar TrackBird IP Administration 158 Menu bar and toolbars TrackBird Repository Explorer 258– 259 Menus File (IP Administration) 159, 259 Help (IP Administration) 159 Help (Repository Explorer) 259 TrackBird Explorer 231 Menus (TrackBird Gateway) 536 MIB file definition 515 MIB File field (MIB File Import utility) 529 MIB File Import utility 528 MIB File field 529 OID field 529 Reference field 529 Modifying collection point IP range 180 list query (Repository Explorer) 327 workstation related data manually 16 Moving component (ReportBuilder) 311 list query column 33 list query column (Repository Explorer) 329 row or transformation in a script (Gateway) 581 tree query line 26, 340 N Fields 569 SourceQuery properties Fields 569 Name field 547, 554, 556 Glossary Create from File 124 Name field (IP Administration, Collection Point parameters) 174 Name field (IP Administration, Group parameters) 171 Name field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 165
Navigate between data dictionary records 551 Navigating between data dictionary records (TrackBird Gateway) 551 NBButton button (Designer) 458 NBButton object adding to form (Designer) 468 NBButton object (Designer) description 493 properties 493, 495 NBDataSetGloss object (Designer) description 480 example of use 481 properties 481 NBDataSetInstance object (Designer) description 479 example of use 480 properties 480 NBDataSource object (Designer) description 477 example of use 479 properties 478 NBDbButton button (Designer) 458 NBDbButton object (Desgner) example of use 490 NBDbButton object (Designer) description 488 properties 489 NBDetail button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 323 NBEdit button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 321 NBEditor button (Designer) 458 NBEditor object (Designer) description 482 example of use 485 properties 482 NBGloss button (Designer) 458 NBGloss object adding to form (Designer) 466 NBGloss object (Designer) description 485 example of use 488 properties 486 NBGloss objects linking (Designer) 468 NBGrid button (Designer) 458 NBGrid button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 323 NBGrid object properties (Designer) 491 NBGrid object (Designer) description 490 example of use 492
647
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
properties 491 NBGroupBox button (Designer) 459 NBGroupBox object properties (Designer) 505 NBGroupBox object (Designer) description 504 example of use 507 NBImage button (Designer) 459 NBImage object example of use (Designer) 498 properties (Designer) 496 NBImage object (Designer) properties 496 NBLabel button (Designer) 459 NBLabel button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 324 NBLabel object adding to form (Designer) 470 NBLabel object (Designer) description 498 properties 500 properties (Designer) 498 NBPageControl button (Designer) 459 NBPageControl object (Designer) description 507 example of use 510 properties 508 NBPanel button (Designer) 459 NBPanel object (Designer) description 501 example of use (Designer) 504 properties 502 NBQuery button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 319 nbsnmp.dat file (TrackBird SNMP) 521 NBSQLQuery button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 319 NBText button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 321 NBTreeView button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 319 NBUrl button (Designer) 459 NBUrl object (Designer) description 512 example of use 514 properties 512 Needed rule type (Policy) 372–373 netbird.cfg configuration file updating (TrackBird Explorer) 250 New button (Repository Explorer) 260 New command (Repository Explorer) 259 New Folder button (Repository Explorer) 261
648
New Form button (Repository Explorer) 261 New Query button (Repository Explorer) 261 New Report button (Repository Explorer) 261 New Tree Query button (Repository Explorer) 261 Not Null query expression 27, 341 Notify user 407, 423 Null Value query expression 27, 341 O O column (TrackBird Explorer) 235 Object drop list property (Designer) 459 Object handling example (Gateway) example (Gateway) 569 Object properties AsBoolean (Gateway) 568 AsDateTime (Gateway) 568 AsFloat (Gateway) 568 AsInteger (Gateway) 568 AsString (Gateway) 568 Object Properties command (Designer) 457 Object Properties window (Designer) 459 Object Properties Window help zone (Designer) 460 Object Properties window, displaying (Designer) 457 Object Properties window, masking (Designer) 457 Object property categories (Designer) 459 Objects (Designer) 474 odf file adding 209 removing 209 OID field (MIB File Import utility) 529 OID, definition (TrackBird SNMP) 515 Only Select Per Domain option (TrackBird Explorer) 240 Open session required 422 Opening List query editor 29 SNMP client configuration (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 522 Tree query editor 24 Operating systems 407 Options menu 538 Options menu (TrackBird Explorer) 232 Options tab (TrackBird Explorer) 242 Options tab, TrackBird Collector SNMP configuration 517
Index
Options tab, TrackBird SNMP Collector configuration Collection point field 518 Get Full SNMP Agent Tree option 518 Use Collection Point option 518 Oracle database alias adding 5 Oracle radio button adding an Oracle alias 6 Organization of TrackBird SNMP 516 OS Version column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Other property category (Designer) 459 Output Name column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 OverFlow property (ReportBuilder) 296 P Packages build failed 410 build successful 410 build summary 409 building a package 408 compressed files 400 contextual menu commands 402 description 407 executable file 406 folder, create new 403 folder, rename 403 installation parameters 405 linked profiles 410 log filename 407 package, build 402 package, create new 403 package, delete 401 package, edit 404 package, rename 404 package, save 408 package, show profile 402, 412 package, undo 402 package, undo all 402 parameters 407 priority 406 reloading all (TrackBird Explorer) 251 source directory 406 toolbar buttons 401 treeview 400, 403 treeview, customize 405 packages TrackBird IP server 164 Packages & Profiles introduction 400
packages management parameters 228 Page number, adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 301 Parameter and data pane Glossary 103 Parameters button 538 Parameters command (TrackBird Gateway) 538 Parameters pane TrackBird IP Administration 158 Parameters property category (Designer) 460 Parameters screen, displaying (TrackBird Gateway) 538 Parent Folder button (Repository Explorer) 260 ParentHeight property (ReportBuilder) 296 ParentWidth property 296 ParentWidth property (ReportBuilder) 296 Password field 542 adding a database alias 8 TrackBird Server 1, 262 Paste button (Repository Explorer) 260 Paste command 536 Platform tab Category Properties screen 67 Feature Properties screen 80 Item Properties screen 74 Platforms 392 Plugins button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 215 Policy concepts 345 Policy manager adding categories 354 adding folders 353 adding rules 355 blocked categories 370 Consequences tab 378 contextual menu 352 copying and pasting categories 354 copying and pasting rules 355 Definition tab 362 Display tab 368 left pane 347 Preview tab 371, 385 removing categories folders 354 removing folders 353 removing rules 356 right pane 349 toolbar 351 user interface 347 Policy window 150 Port field (Collector SNMP configuration) 520
649
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Position property (ReportBuilder) 296 Positioning report bands on the page (ReportBuilder) 314 Precise By Data Identification button (IP Administration, Linux Options parameters) 217 predefined variables 388 prerequisites TrackBird Web 583 Preview tab 371 Preview tab, Categories (Policy) 370–371 Primary Distribution Server 408–409 Primary server configuring 165 Primary server, definition 164 Priority 406 Profile Log 436 clear log 437 error messages 437 external log file 439 internal log file 438 successful & failed installation 437 Profiles 410 active 412, 417 contextual menu commands 414 installation status, color bullets 412, 436 linking to a package 417 max. n° of connections 424 profile log 436 profile overview 411 profile overview window 412 profile properties 414 profile properties tab general 417 scheduler 430 target 424 profile, clone 413 profile, create new 412 profile, delete 413 profile, edited icons 435 profile, editing 413 profile, refresh 414 profile, save 436 profile, undo 413 profile, undo all 413 profile, validation 434 profile, view log 414 target clients 412 timeout 424 toolbar buttons in Overview 413 user account 423 Prohibited rule type (Policy) 372
650
Project saving (Designer) 472 Prompt User description displayed 407 packages available 422 vs silent interface 422 Properties SourceQuery (Gateway) 569 Properties button feature properties 77 property, SourceQuery object (Gateway) 569 Protect Item During Import option 17 Q Queries displaying results (Repository Explorer) 325 displaying tree query results (Repository Explorer) 326 exporting results (Repository Explorer) 325 modifying list (Repository Explorer) 327 Queries (Repository Explorer) 325 Query calculating statistics based on a specific field (TrackBird Gateway) 548 changing the field label in output (TrackBird Gateway) 548 changing the field order (TrackBird Gateway) 548 creating (Repository Explorer) 263 deleting 42 deleting a field (TrackBird Gateway) 549 excluding a field from output (TrackBird Gateway) 548 renaming 42 saving (TrackBird Gateway) 549–550 saving a previously unnamed 41 saving an already named 42 sorting by a specific field (TrackBird Gateway) 548 specifying search criteria (TrackBird Gateway) 549 testing (TrackBird Gateway) 549 Query criteria list (Repository Explorer) 329 Query expressions By Interval 27, 341 By Value 27, 341 Not Null 27, 341
Index
Null Value 27, 341 Query field adding (TrackBird Gateway) 547 editing (TrackBird Gateway) 548 R Records, grouping (ReportBuilder) 312 Reference field (MIB File Import utility) 529 Refresh Interval field (IP Administration, Agent parameters) 210 Refreshing TrackBird data 19 Region component (ReportBuilder) 295 Remote Console 155 File menu 157 Remote file installation 419 Remote radio button adding an InterBase alias 3 Remove from list 422 Removing folder from list (IP Administration, Folder parameters) 214 odf file 209 Rename data dictionary 551 Renaming data dictionary (TrackBird Gateway) 551 feature 78 item 69 query 42 TrackBird Explorer filter 238 Renaming a category 67 Report creating 43 creating (Repository Explorer) 263 displaying 43 Report bands definition 313 displaying or hiding (ReportBuilder) 313 positioning on the page (ReportBuilder) 314 Report component adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 298 Report component properties (ReportBuilder) AutoSize 295 Bring To Front 296 DataField 296 DataPipeline 296 DisplayFormat 296 MaintainAspectRatio 296 OverFlow 296
ParentHeight 296 ParentWidth 296 Position 296 ReprintOnOverFlow 296 Send To Back 297 ShiftRelativeTo 297 ShiftWithParent 297 Stretch 297 StretchWithParent 298 SuppressRepeatedValues 298 Visible 298 Report component properties, changing (ReportBuilder) 309 Report components aligning (ReportBuilder) 307 Report components (ReportBuilder) advanced 295 BarCode 295 DBBarCode 293 DBCalc 292 DBChart 293 DBImage 292 DBMemo 290 DBRichText 291 DBText 290 Image 294 Label 294 Line 295 Memo 294 Region 295 RichText 294 Shape 295 standard 294 static 289 SubReport 295 System Variable 294 Variable 294 Report layout creating using the Report Wizard (ReportBuilder) 287 Report menu ReportBuilder 272 Report Tree ReportBuilder 276 Report Wizard (ReportBuilder) creating a report using 287 ReportBuilder Align or Space toolbar 284 component properties 295 Data Components toolbar 275 Data menu 273 definition 257 displaying toolbars 274 Draw toolbar 283
651
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
Edit menu 271 Edit toolbar 282 editing a report 298 Format toolbar 280 report components 289 Report menu 272 Report Tree 276–277 Size toolbar 285 Standard Components toolbar 274 Standard toolbar 279 toolbars 273 ReportBuilder File menu 270 ReportBuilder menu bar 270 ReportBuilder toolbars hiding 274 Reports definition 42 displaying (ReportBuilder) 315 displaying (Repository Explorer) 315 editing (ReportBuilder) 298 Repository Explorer exiting 264 filename extensions 608 Repository Explorer Copy button 260 Repository Explorer Delete button 260 Repository Explorer New button 260 Repository Explorer New Folder button 261 Repository Explorer New Form button 261 Repository Explorer New Query button 261 Repository Explorer New Report button 261 Repository Explorer New Tree Query button 261 Repository Explorer Parent Folder button 260 Repository Explorer Paste button 260 Repository Explorer toolbars 260 ReprintOnOverFlow property (ReportBuilder) 296 Reset log contents before each execution field 541 Restrictions field (software use audit) (Monitoring parameters, Monitoring) 443 Restrictions field (software use audit) (Monitoring) 446 Result files importing into TrackBird IP Server 171 Result Files Server Prefix field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 166 Retries field (Collector SNMP configuration) 520
652
Retrieve All Unknown Files button (IP Administration, Linux Options parameters) 217 Retrieve RPM Packages Installed button (IP Administration, Linux Options parameters) 216 RichText component (ReportBuilder) 294 Row deleting Gateway) 567 rule 345 Rule results, displaying (Policy) 385 Rule types (Policy) 372–373 Rule types:Incompatible (Policy) 372 Rule types:Needed (Policy) 372–373 Rule types:Prohibited (Policy) 372 Rule:deleting (Policy) 385 Rules command (Policy) 372 Run external processes before or after database scripts 541 Running displayed tree query 25 list query 31 TrackBird function 10 Running external processes before or after database scripts (TrackBird Gateway) 541 S S column (TrackBird Explorer) 235 Save command (IP Administration) 159 Save TrackBird query 547 Saving already named query 42 previously unnamed query 41 project (Designer) 472 SNMP client configuration (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 522 SNMP collection log file 521 Saving a query (TrackBird Gateway) 549– 550 Saving:unsaved changes (Policy) 356 Scan Disk button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 215 Scan Folder button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 215 Scan Only ‘root’ Partition button (IP Administration, Linux Options parameters) 217 Scheduler 430 timeout 434 Script examples (Gateway) 570 concatenating fields 574 mapping one table with another 570
Index
merging tables and fields 572 using a data dictionary 575 using a temporary table 578 Scripts 570 moving a row or transformation (Gateway) 581 stopping on errors (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Secondary server configuring 165, 167 Select All command 536 Select Column To Display option (TrackBird Explorer) 240 Select From Glossary button editing a feature’s value 18 Selecting workstation related data from a glossary 17 Selecting collection points (Designer) 463 Selecting links (TrackBird SNMP) 523 Selecting the TrackBird database (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Selecting the type of interface (Designer) 455 Selection button, TrackBird tab (Designer) 319 Selection cursor button (Designer) 458 Send To Back property (ReportBuilder) 297 Server configuring 165 Server IP Address field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 165 Server Path column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Server SMTP window 153 Servers tab (TrackBird Explorer) 241 Set global parameters 538 Set Production command (IP Administration) 159 Setting environment parameters (Designer) 460 Setting feature properties 77 Properties button 77 Setting log parameters (TrackBird Gateway) 541 Setting up the Designer environment 460 Shape component (ReportBuilder) 295 Shared directory mode installing clients in (TrackBird Explorer) 245 Shell Command field (TrackBird Gateway) 541 ShiftRelativeTo property (ReportBuilder) 297
ShiftWithParent property (ReportBuilder) 297 Shortcut keys using 11 Show Grid option (Designer) 461 Shutdown Items button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 216 Silent interface installation 422 Size toolbar 285 ReportBuilder 285 SNMP concepts 515 definition 515 SNMP Administration screen 524 SNMP Collector, definition 516 snmp.ini file (TrackBird SNMP) 516 snmpimport.exe file 528 Software audit characteristics,defining (Monitoring) 442 Software audit results, displaying (Monitoring) 448 Software Date column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Software Distribution configuration 392 functionalities 396 menu 400 Software Distribution Preferences Primary Distribution Server 152 temporary directory 153 Software distribution tray icon 422 Software glossary displaying all records 91 filtering 90 Software information collection including or excluding a folder during (IP Administration) 213 including or excluding a folder’s subfolders during (IP Administration) 213 Software use audit end date 50 start date 50 Sort by a field in a TrackBird query 547 Sorting TrackBird Explorer information 239 Source directory 406 in distribution mode 2 - Install from a shared directory 406 Source Query field 556 Source Query field (TrackBird Gateway) 554 Source-destination field pair adding (Gateway) 558
653
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
SourceQuery object (Gateway) 568 SourceQuery properties FieldByName("Source Query Field Name") (Gateway) 569 FieldCount (Gateway) 569 SourceQuery properties (Gateway) 569 Specify search criteria in a TrackBird query 547 SQL queries 547 SQL query editing (TrackBird Gateway) 549 SQL Query Editor toolbar 550 SQL Server alias adding 7 SQL*Net Alias box adding an Oracle alias 6 Standard components (ReportBuilder) 294 Standard Components toolbar ReportBuilder 274 Standard tab, Components bar (Designer) 318 Standard toolbar ReportBuilder 279 Start box, IP Ranges tab (TrackBird Collector SNMP administration) 519 Starting TrackBird Server 1 Startup Items button (IP Administration, Macintosh Options parameters) 216 Static components (ReportBuilder) 289 Station(s) tab, Switches screen 531 Status bar 536 Status bar (TrackBird Gateway) 536 Stop database scripts if errors occur 539 Stop On Errors option (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Stopping database scripts on errors (TrackBird Gateway) 539 Stretch property (ReportBuilder) 297 StretchWithParent property (ReportBuilder) 298 String Delimiter field Glossary Create from File 123 Structure tree TrackBird IP Administration 158, 162 Structure trees TrackBird Repository Explorer 258 Subcategory adding 62 Subcategory properties defining 14 SubReport component (ReportBuilder) 295 SuppressRepeatedValues property (ReportBuilder) 298 Switch tree, Switches screen 530
654
Switches screen Configuration tab (TrackBird Server) 530 Station(s) tab (TrackBird Server) 531 Switch tree (TrackBird Server) 530 Switches screen (TrackBird Server) 530 Switches, administration 530 System Variable component (ReportBuilder) 294 T T column (TrackBird Explorer) 235 Table name field 551 Table Name field (TrackBird Gateway) 547 Target client selection apply result to machine list 428 copy from existing query 428 list query 427 machines list 425 Target clients 424 Task pane TrackBird Repository Explorer 259 TB Item linked tab 76 TBDesigner toolbar (Designer) 458 Test Connection button adding a database alias 8 Test directory field (Designer) 462 Test Query command 536 Test TrackBird query 547 Testing a query (TrackBird Gateway) 549 Testing the interface (Designer) 472 The /’group/’ concept 169 The collection point concept 172 Time Section field (IP Administration, Agent parameters) 211 Timeout 424, 434 To activate an IP address range (TrackBird SNMP) 519 To activate or deactivate displaying of the log (TrackBird Explorer) 235 To activate or deactivate TrackBird client (TrackBird Explorer) 249 To activate or deactivate TrackBird NT service (TrackBird Explorer) 246 To clear the log (TrackBird Explorer) 255 To close the TrackBird IP Administration interface 160 To configure TrackBird clients via IP 162 To create a new filter (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To create the report layout using the Report Wizard (ReportBuilder) 287 To deactivate an IP address range (TrackBird SNMP) 519
Index
To define or modify a filter restricting files included in software information collection from a folder (IP Administration) 214 To define software audit characteristics (Monitoring) 442 To delete all connection options (TrackBird Explorer) 252 To delete the selected filter (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To display a specific column (TrackBird Explorer) 240 To display help on using TrackBird Explorer 256 To display help on using TrackBird IP Administration 162 To display help on using TrackBird Repository Explorer 264 To display information on the installed version of TrackBird IP Administration 162 To display or hide the log (TrackBird Explorer) 255 To display the selected domain’s workstations only (TrackBird Explorer) 240 To display the selected filter’s name (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To display workstations in all domain (TrackBird Explorer) 240 To empty the log (TrackBird Explorer) 235 To empty the TrackBird SNMP collection log file 522 To execute data collection on workstations (TrackBird Explorer) 253 To exit the TrackBird Explorer application 234 To exit TrackBird IP Administration 161 To exit TrackBird Repository Explorer 264 To export a folder (Repository Explorer) 263 To import a folder (Repository Explorer) 262 To include or exclude a folder during software information collection (IP Administration) 213 To include or exclude a folder’s subfolders during software information collection (IP Administration) 213 To install TrackBird client and service (TrackBird Explorer) 243 To install TrackBird clients in IP mode (TrackBird Explorer) 244
To install TrackBird clients in shared directory mode (TrackBird Explorer) 245 To install TrackBird NT service (TrackBird Explorer) 246 To list all existing filters (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To refresh data from selected TrackBird workstation(s) (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To refresh network data from workstations (TrackBird Explorer) 253 To refresh the network domain (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To refresh the selected network workstation(s) (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To refresh TrackBird data from workstations (TrackBird Explorer) 252 To reload all packages (TrackBird Explorer) 251 To remove a domain (TrackBird Explorer) 254 To remove a filter limiting files included in software information collection from a folder (IP Administration, Folder Options parameters) 214 To remove workstations from list (TrackBird Explorer) 254 To rename the displayed filter (TrackBird Explorer) 234 To retrieve TrackBird client information (TrackBird Explorer) 255 To return the size of data contained in a folder (IP Administration) 213 To run TrackBird Explorer 231 To run TrackBird IP Administration 155 To save log as text file (TrackBird Explorer) 255 To save the log as a file (TrackBird Explorer) 235 To save the TrackBird IP Administration configuration information 160 To start TrackBird Explorer 231 To uninstall TrackBird clients (TrackBird Explorer) 250 To uninstall TrackBird NT service (TrackBird Explorer) 247 To update the collection points (Monitoring) 447 To update the knowledge base on the TrackBird clients 229 To update the server names (TrackBird Explorer) 243
655
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
To update TrackBird client collector (TrackBird Explorer) 248 To update TrackBird client inventorist interface (TrackBird Explorer) 249 To update TrackBird NT service (TrackBird Explorer) 247 To use a query to return TrackBird Monitoring information (Monitoring) 450 Toolbar:Categories (Policy) 351 Toolbars IP Administration 160 List query 30 List Query Editor (Repository Explorer) 327 Main 10 ReportBuilder 273 Repository Explorer 260 SQL Query Editor (TrackBird Gateway) 550 TrackBird Explorer 232, 234 TrackBird Gateway 538 TrackBird IP Administration 160 TrackBird Repository Explorer 261 TrackBird Repository Explorer Creation 261 tree query 24 tree query (Repository Explorer) 338 Tools menu (Designer) 460 Tools menu (TrackBird Explorer) 233 Total number of pages, adding to a report (ReportBuilder) 301 TrackBird CIM Mapper 595 TrackBird client activating or deactivating (TrackBird Explorer) 249 TrackBird client and service installing (TrackBird Explorer) 243 TrackBird client collector updating (TrackBird Explorer) 248 TrackBird client information retrieving (TrackBird Explorer) 255 TrackBird client inventorist interface updating (TrackBird Explorer) 249 TrackBird clients configuring via IP 162 uninstalling (TrackBird Explorer) 250 updating the knowledge base on 229 TrackBird data refreshing 19 TrackBird Data toolbar (Designer) 457 TrackBird database default password 1, 262 TrackBird database default user name 1, 262 TrackBird Designer
656
Advanced Mode command 456 Alignment Tools command 457 Appearance property category 459 Automatic Alignment option 461 automatically aligning objects on grid 461 automatically opening the last edited project 461 Behavior property category 459 changing screen element layout 456 checking entered data 473 Command Line field 463 Coordinates property category 459 creating a dialog manually 464 creating fields in the database 454 Data property category 459 DataSetGloss button 458 DataSetInstance button 458 DataSource button 458 definition 257 designing a custom interface 455 Display Grid command 457 displaying additional objects for use in interface 456 entry field hierarchy 457 Environment Options dialog Collection Point(s) tab 463 Environment Options dialog General tab 461 Environment Options dialog Interpreter tab 462 Environment Options option 461 filename extensions 608 Form command 457 Form object description 475 Form object example of use 477 Form object properties 475 forms 316 Glossary property category 459 Image property category 460 Input property category 460 inserting objects into the interface 464 Interface File field 463 linking glossaries 454 NBButton button 458 NBButton object description 493 NBButton object properties 493, 495 NBDataSetGloss object description 480 NBDataSetGloss object example of use 481 NBDataSetGloss object properties 481
Index
NBDataSetInstance object description 479 NBDataSetInstance object example of use 480 NBDataSetInstance object properties 480 NBDataSource object description 477 NBDataSource object example of use 479 NBDataSource object properties 478 NBDbButton button 458 NBDbButton object description 488 NBDbButton object example of use 490 NBDbButton object properties 489 NBEditor button 458 NBEditor object description 482 NBEditor object properties 482, 485 NBGloss button 458 NBGloss object description 485 NBGloss object example of use 488 NBGloss object properties 486 NBGrid button 458 NBGrid object description 490 NBGrid object example of use 492 NBGrid object properties 491 NBGroupBox button 459 NBGroupBox object description 504 NBGroupBox object example of use 507 NBGroupBox object properties 505 NBImage button 459 NBImage object example of use 498 NBImage object properties 496 NBLabel button 459 NBLabel object description 498 NBLabel object example of use 500 NBLabel object properties 498 NBPageControl button 459 NBPageControl object description 507 NBPageControl object example of use 510 NBPageControl object properties 508 NBPanel button 459 NBPanel object description 501 NBPanel object example of use 504 NBPanel object properties 502 NBUrl button 459 NBUrl object description 512 NBUrl object example of use 514 NBUrl object properties 512 object drop list property 459 Object Properties command 457
Object Properties window 459 Object Properties Window help zone 460 object property categories 459 objects 474 Other property category 459 Parameters property category 460 saving the project 472 screen 456 selecting collection points 463 selecting the type of interface 455 selection cursor button 458 setting grid pitch 461 setting up the environment 460 showing or masking the grid 461 specifying executable file and location 462 TBDesigner toolbar 458 Test directory field 462 Tools menu 460 TrackBird Data toolbar 457 TrackBird Structure command 456 TrackBird Structure window 460 transferring custom interface to workstations 474 updating collection points 454 View menu 456 trackBird Designer testing the interface 472 TrackBird Explorer Action menu 232 activating or deactivating clients 249 activating or deactivating displaying of the log 235 activating or deactivating NT service 246 Automatic IP Installation option 242 C column 236 clearing the log 255 Comment column 236 creating a new filter 234 deleting all connection options 252 deleting the selected filter 234 deploying clients via IP 242 Display tab 240 displaying a specific column 240 displaying help on using 256 displaying or hiding the log 255 displaying the selected domain’s workstations only 240 displaying the selected filter’s name 234 displaying workstations in all domain 240
657
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
emptying the log 235 executing data collection on workstations 253 exiting the application 234 File menu 232 Hardware Date column 236 Installation Path column 236 Installation tab 242 installing clients in IP mode 244 installing clients in shared directory mode 245 installing clients via shared directory 242 installing TrackBird client and service 243 installing TrackBird NT service 246 interface 231 Interface Date column 236 IP Address column 236 IP Collection Point column 236 IP Group column 236 listing all existing filters 234 M column 236 menus 231 O column 235 Only Select Per Domain option 240 Options menu 232 Options tab 242 OS Version column 236 Output Name column 236 refreshing data from selected TrackBird workstation(s) 234 refreshing data from workstations 252 refreshing network data from workstations 253 refreshing the network domain 234 refreshing the selected workstation(s) 234 reloading all packages 251 removing a domain 254 removing workstations from list 254 renaming the selected filter 234 retrieving TrackBird client information 255 running 231 S column 235 saving log as text file 255 saving the log as a file 235 Select Column To Display option 240 Server Path column 236 Servers tab 241 Software Date column 236 sorting information 239 T column 235
658
toolbars 232, 234 Tools menu 233 uninstalling TrackBird clients 250 uninstalling TrackBird NT service 247 updating netbird.cfg configuration file 250 updating the server names 243 updating TrackBird client collector 248 updating TrackBird client inventorist interface 249 updating TrackBird NT service 247 Version column 236 Workstation Name column 236 trackBird Explorer filtering information 237 TrackBird function definition 10 TrackBird Gateway Activated option (Destinations screen) 557 Add Data Dictionary button 547 Add SQL Query button 547 Add TrackBird Query button 547 adding a data dictionary record 551 adding a data source 547 adding a destination 554 adding a query field 547 adding data dictionary field 551 calculating statistics based on a specific field 548 changing query field label in output 548 changing query field order 548 concepts 533 contextual menus 536 data dictionary logic diagram 546 Data Sources button 544 Data Sources/Destinations structure tree 536 Database Connection field 543 deleting a data dictionary record 552 deleting a data source 552 deleting a database connection 544 deleting a query field 549 deleting temporary tables after database scripts are run 539 displaying Log file screen 539 displaying logged information 542 displaying Parameters screen 538 Drop Temporary Tables After Execution option 539 Edit menu 537
Index
Edit Query button 547 editing a data dictionary 551 editing a data dictionary record 552 editing a database connection 543 editing a destination 556 editing a query field 548 editing a TrackBird query 547 editing an SQL query 549 excluding a field from output 548 file details 611 File menu 536 filename extensions 608 filtering which TrackBird records are processed 540 Gateway Alias Name field 543 Log File command 539 Log Levels options 541 menus 536 navigating between data dictionary records 551 Parameters command 538 processing bar 536 renaming a data dictionary 551 running external processes before or after database scripts 541 saving a query 550 saving the query 549 screen information pane 536 screen left pane 535 selecting the TrackBird database 539 setting log parameters 541 Shell Command field 541 sorting by a specific field 548 Source Query field 554 specifying search criteria 549 Stop On Errors option 539 stopping scripts on errors 539 Table Name field 547 testing a query 549 toolbars 538 TrackBird Inventory Database Filter options 540 TrackBird Inventory Database Filter options (TrackBird Gateway) 540 TrackBird IP file details 610 TrackBird IP Administration Collection options 194 Agent Options 210 Collected Files 202 Folder Options 212 Linux Options 216 Macintosh Options 215 Methods 227
Monitoring 200 Registry Keys 205 Schedule 196 System Monitoring 217 Windows Options 208 Installation Folder tab 175 menu and toolbar 158 Remote Console 155 running 155 TrackBird IP Administration configuration information, saving 160 TrackBird IP Administration Configuration screen, displaying 160 TrackBird IP Administration interface 157 TrackBird IP Administration interface, closing 160 TrackBird IP Administration menu bar and toolbar 158 TrackBird IP Administration parameters pane 158 TrackBird IP Administration structure tree 158, 162 TrackBird IP Administration toolbar 160 TrackBird IP Administration, exiting 161 TrackBird IP Alias field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 166 TrackBird IP Port field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 166 TrackBird IP server packages 164 TrackBird IP Server Configuration 396 bandwidth local network 397 bandwidth remote network 396 max. n° of connections 398 TrackBird Monitoring information, returning using a query (Monitoring) 450 TrackBird NBTreeView button (Designer) 319 TrackBird NT service activating or deactivating (TrackBird Explorer) 246 installing (TrackBird Explorer) 246 uninstalling (TrackBird Explorer) 247 updating (TrackBird Explorer) 247 TrackBird Policy:concepts 345 TrackBird query editing (TrackBird Gateway) 547 TrackBird Reporting interface 258 key features and benefits 257 TrackBird Repository Explorer definition 257
659
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
TrackBird Repository Explorer Creation toolbar 261 TrackBird Repository Explorer menu bar and toolbar 259 TrackBird Repository Explorer menu bar and toolbars 258 TrackBird Repository Explorer structure trees 258 TrackBird Repository Explorer task pane 259 TrackBird Repository Explorer toolbar 261 TrackBird Server file details 609 filename extensions 607 starting 1 TrackBird Server Alias list 1, 262 TrackBird Server Login dialog 1, 262 TrackBird Server Password field 1, 262 TrackBird Server User field 1, 262 TrackBird server, definition 164 TrackBird SNMP .nbc file 516 .nbn file 516 adding an IP range 519 Collector 516 deleting an IP range 519 emptying the collection log file 522 Frequency tab (Collector SNMP configuration) 520 IP Ranges tab (Collector SNMP configuration) 518 Log tab (Collector SNMP configuration) 521 OID 515 opening a client configuration 522 Options tab (Collector SNMP configuration) 517 organization 516 saving the client configuration 522 saving the collection log file 521 TrackBird Software Distribution 391 characteristics 392 TrackBird Structure command (Designer) 456 TrackBird structure tree displaying (SMTP Administration) 525 TrackBird structure tree:updating (Policy) 356 TrackBird Structure window (Designer) 460 TrackBird Structure window, displaying (Designer) 456 TrackBird Structure window, masking (Designer) 456
660
TrackBird tab NBDetail button (Designer) 323 NBEdit button (Designer) 321 NBGrid button (Designer) 323 NBLabel button (Designer) 324 NBQuery button (Designer) 319 NBSQLQuery button (Designer) 319 NBText button (Designer) 321 Selection button (Designer) 319 TrackBird tab, Components bar (Designer) 318 TrackBird Web 583 disconnecting from database 594 Explorer page 587 Home page 584 customizing 585 Server page 588 summary view 593 viewing list queries 592 viewing reports 589 viewing tree queries 590 Transferring custom interface to workstations (Designer) 474 Transformation adding (Gateway) 562 deleting (Gateway) 567 editing (Gateway) 565 Tree queries editing 339 tree queries displaying in TrackBird reporting 326 empty features 142 Tree query creating 25, 339 criteria 26, 340 Criteria dialog 26 definition 24 deleting criteria 28, 342 editing 25 example 342 running 25 Tree query Criteria dialog 341 Tree query editor opening 24 Tree query example 28 Tree query line deleting 26, 340 moving 26, 340 Tree Query toolbar 24 Tree Query toolbar (Repository Explorer) 338 TTL (ms) field (Collector SNMP configuration) 520 Type tab
Index
Feature Properties screen 79 U UMA Service Provider 595 Undo command 536 Units field Feature Properties screen 79 Units of measurement defining a feature’s 79 updateDestinationValue object (Gateway) 568 Updating collection points (Designer) 454 netbird.cfg configuration file (TrackBird Explorer) 250 updating knowledge base hardware glossary 55 software glossary 55 Updating:TrackBird structure tree (Policy) 356 URL TrackBird Web 583 URL Path field (IP Administration, Server parameters) 166 Use Collection Point option (Collector SNMP configuration) 518 Use Default Parameters option (Collector SNMP configuration) 520 Use Files Installed By RPM button (IP Administration, Linux Options parameters) 217 Use Glossary option (IP Administration, Collection Point parameters) 176 User field adding a database alias 8 TrackBird Server 1, 262 User Manager screen Expiry Date field (Account) 125 Expiry Date field (Password) 125
View menu (Designer) 456 Visible check box Category Properties screen 67, 75, 81 Visible property (ReportBuilder) 298 W Warning database alias 153 package build summary 409 Win32 tab, Components bar (Designer) 318 Windows 9x client default installation folder 174 Windows NT client default installation folder 174 WMI 208 Workstation name adding an InterBase alias 3 Workstation Name column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Workstation related data deleting 19 modifying manually 16 selecting from a glossary 17 Workstations executing data collection on (TrackBird Explorer) 253 refreshing network data from (TrackBird Explorer) 253 refreshing TrackBird data from (TrackBird Explorer) 252 removing from list (TrackBird Explorer) 254 Writing VBScript code 569
V Value in category detail element, adding (Policy) 369 Value in category detail element, editing (Policy) 369 Variable component (ReportBuilder) 294 vbError object (Gateway) 568 VBScript (Gateway) 567 VBScript object handling example (Gateway) 569 VBScript, using (Gateway) 568 Version column (TrackBird Explorer) 236 Vertical Grid Pitch field (Designer) 461
661
ASG-TrackBird Reference Guide
662
ASG Worldwide Headquarters Naples Florida USA | asg.com
CD Contents
